• 
 
 ,">■ 
 
 
ORE OK VON FEINAI GLE, 
 
O^^^^r 
 
 THE NEW 
 
 &?t of 0Ltmoty f 
 
 FOUNDED UPON THE PRINCIPLES 
 TAUGHT BY 
 
 M. GREGOR VON FEINAIGLE: 
 
 AND APPLIED TO 
 
 Chronology, History, Geography, Languages, Systematic 
 Tables, Poetry, Prose, and Arithmetic. 
 
 TO WHICH IS ADDED, 
 
 SOME ACCOUNT OF THE PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS 
 
 OF 
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY, 
 
 FROM THE EARLD2ST PERIOD TO THE PRESENT TIME; 
 WITH 
 
 INSTANCES OF THE EXTRAORDINARY POWERS 
 
 OF 
 
 NATURAL MEMORY. 
 
 Illustrated by EngraTiugs. 
 
 €f)ir& station, 
 
 CORRECTED AND ENLARGED. 
 
 Constat memoriam hubere quiddam artificii et nan omnem a 
 natura proficisci. Cic. 
 
 Eontodt; 
 
 Printed by R. Edwards, Crane Court, Fleet Street, 
 
 FOR THE PROPRIETOR; 
 
 AND SOLD BY SHERWOOD, NEELY, AND JONES, 
 
 PATERNOSTER-ROW. 
 
 1813. 
 
fcnteren at ^tattomttf' $>all. 
 
 W. CHTY Cl*' 1 
 LtSf 
 
PREFACE 
 
 FIRST EDITION. 
 
 As the art -which forms the subject of 
 this volume is sufficiently discoursed on, 
 in the introductory matter prefixed to the 
 system contained in the present work, 
 it remains only to give an account of the 
 origin of this publication. 
 
 The system, here presented to the pub- 
 lic, is that taught by M. Von Fein- 
 aigle ; who, by the public exhibitions 
 which he has given of the proficiency of 
 some of his pupils, has excited a very ge- 
 neral interest and curiosity as to the mne- 
 monic art. The following pages contain, 
 amidst various other matter, the sub- 
 stance of fifteen of the Professor's lec- 
 tures, on the application of the art to 
 Chronology, Geography, History, Lan- 
 guage, Systematic Tables, and Poetry and 
 Prose; being the whole of one course, 
 with the exception of one lecture on 
 Arithmetic and Algebra. This was omit- 
 ted because the subject to which it relates, 
 is so complicated in itself, as to render it 
 
IV PREFACE TO 
 
 impossible to give an intelligent account 
 of it within the compass necessarily pre- 
 scribed to this publication; and because 
 the subject was not of such general in* 
 terest or utility, as those which are here 
 treated of. 
 
 The Editor is not aware that any apo- 
 logy is due to the Professor on account of 
 this publication. The principal peculia- 
 rities of his system had found their way 
 into pretty general circulation, by oral 
 communication, before this work was con- 
 templated; and the accounts which were 
 thus circulated, like most traditions, were 
 by no means calculated to give satisfac- 
 tory or creditable notions on the subject. 
 
 The Editor attended one course of 
 lectures, and after the example of several 
 of his friends, took very copious notes. 
 Finding, however, that the materials 
 which he had thus collected, were so 
 confused and disorderly, as to be nearly, 
 if not wholly, useless; and being unwil- 
 ling that the time he had bestowed on the 
 subject should become entirely without 
 profit, he applied himself to draw up 
 these lectures in a more intelligible form, 
 for his own use; supplying, at length, the 
 analogies and other illustrations to which 
 the lecturer had very cursorily and dis- 
 tantly alluded. In this attempt,, parum 
 ~lari& dare lucem, the matter swelled it- 
 
THE FIRST EDITION. V 
 
 self nearly to the contents of the following- 
 passes. 
 
 Several of his friends who had attend- 
 ed the Lectures, were pleased to think 
 that the subject had profited much in 
 his hands ; and that the science, thus il- 
 lustrated and explained, was much more 
 intelligible than it was in its original sta f e 
 of communication. They accordingly 
 urged him to publish this improved ac- 
 count of the system, as well for the be- 
 nefit of those persons who had actually at- 
 tended courses of Lectures, as of those 
 who would be satisfied with such an ac- 
 count of it as is herein contained. With 
 this request he has complied, whether 
 rightly or erroneously, it is not, perhaps, 
 for him to determine. On (his subject 
 he only wishes to add, that, however se- 
 condary and derivative ibis undertaking 
 may, at first sight, appear to those who 
 have not attended the Lectures, — they 
 whohave attended them, will be able, (the 
 Editor is confident,) to give him ample 
 credit for originality. 
 
 No expense has been spared in sup- 
 plying tin's volume with appropriate en- 
 gravings, together with the diagrams ne- 
 cessary to illustrate the work, and which 
 have been chiefly furnished to him by the 
 kindness of his friends, 
 
 A3 
 
Yl PREFACE. 
 
 In order to render this work as com- 
 plete as possible, an account has been 
 inserted of the Principal Systctns of Ar- 
 tificial Memory: and, accordingly, the 
 public and private repositories of curious 
 literature have been diligently searched 
 for scarce books on this subject. 
 
 Some instances of the extraordinary 
 powers of Natural Memory conclude the 
 volume; they have been inserted from 
 a persuasion that they will be new to 
 many persons, and agreeable to all. In 
 short, nothing has been omitted, which 
 was thought capable of illustrating or 
 giving interest to the subject ; and it is 
 hoped, nothing has been inserted, which 
 the curious reader would wish to be sup- 
 pressed. 
 
 Under these circumstances, the Editor 
 takes leave of his readers, in full confi- 
 dence, that whatever may be the success 
 of his publication, he has at least deserv- 
 ed well of them, in his intentions and en- 
 deavours to promote their advancement 
 in useful knowledge. 
 
 London, 
 Jugust, 1812. 
 
ADVERTISEMENT 
 
 SECOND EDITION. 
 
 -If the sale of a book be any criterion of its merit, 
 the present work must stand high in the opinion of 
 the public, as a large impression has been disposed 
 of, in the short space of four months. The gene- 
 ral utility, indeed, of this ' New Art of Memory,' 
 needed only to be known to be properly estimated 
 and successfully practised. 
 
 The appearance of such a system as this, has 
 produced (as might naturally be expected) many 
 imitators. The merit of having improved upon the 
 original plan of M. Feinaigle, does not, how- 
 ever, appear to belong to any of these persons ; 
 for the editor is enabled to state, without fear 
 of refutation, that either an attendance upon M . 
 Feinaigle's lectures, or indeed the former edition of 
 this book, has furnished more than the outlines of 
 those systems which were so recently taught in the 
 metropolis. The diagrams, indeed, distributed to 
 the pupils who attended these lectures were, evident- 
 ly, copied from those of M. Feinaigle. The hie- 
 roglyphics, it is true, were changed, but the prin- 
 ciples and the practice of the art were precisely 
 the same. 
 
 The chief peculiarities which distinguish this 
 edition from that winch preceded it, are the follow- 
 ing :— ■ 
 
Till ADVERTISEMENT TO 
 
 1. The editor has adopted a more convenient 
 and connected disposition of his materials, and has 
 given an introduction to mnemonics partly new, 
 together with several additions and illustrations cal- 
 culated to extend the knowledge of this art, and to 
 accelerate the progress of the student. Among the 
 additions may be named the application of ft the art 
 to Arithmetic, which was not inserted in the former 
 edition, for the reasons there stated. 
 
 2. Some new and interesting notices of books 
 have been inserted in the account of the Principal 
 Systems of Artificial Memory. This sketch con- 
 tains notices of more than seventy* works on the 
 subject, including copious extracts from many 
 books of great curiosity and value. A small por- 
 tion of extraneous matter has also been omitted, 
 and the whole of Lowe's Mnemonics has been in- 
 troduced. This change was made for two reasons; 
 (1.) on account of the extreme scarcity of Lowe's 
 original tract, and (2.) because some persons, per- 
 haps, may be inclined to practise this system, and 
 yet be unwilling to purchase the last edition of 
 Grey for this purpose. 
 
 3. To the account of instances of the extraordi- 
 nary powers of natural memory, is appended an 
 interesting narrative of Zerah Colbum, the young 
 American who is so well known for his wonderful 
 powers in extemporary calculation. This extra- 
 ordinary youth seems, indeed, to rival the far-famed 
 Jedediah Buxton, in his instantaneous, but correct, 
 solution of the most difficult arithmetical questions. 
 
 It is, perhaps worthy of remark, that one of the most cc- 
 xted bibliographers of the present day, Hrunet,— in his 
 
 lebrated bibli 
 
 litarj 
 Instructive 
 
THE SECOND EDITION. IX 
 
 4. There is prefixed to the present edition, a 
 Portrait of M. Von Feinaigle, the accuracy of 
 which may be relied on. 
 
 Having stated the chief advantages of this edition, 
 the editor will proceed to offer some observations 
 upon the importance and general utility of the pre- 
 sent New Art of Memory. And, here, he cannot 
 refrain from strongly recommending it to the es- 
 pecial notice of all Tutors and Instructors of 
 Youth. The revival of the antient mnemonics 
 seems to have formed a new aera in the annals of 
 education: — it must, therefore, deeply interest 
 every one who is concerned in so important an 
 office. Let the system be impartially examined 
 and properly practised, and there will be no need 
 of a herald to proclaim its merits. 
 
 The general utility of the present work, must be 
 obvious to every one; but the peculiar advantages 
 which it offers to the Senator, the Divine, the 
 Barrister, the Merchant, and the Man of Busi- 
 ness, are evident, even from a casual examination 
 of the system. In short, what was said of Schen- 
 ckel's method is equally applicable to the present. 
 Speaking of the importance of his mnemonics to 
 the legal man, he says, ' The Attorney who has 
 many causes to conduct, may, by the assistance of 
 this art, imprint them so strongly upon his memo- 
 ry, that he will have an answer ready for his clients, 
 at any hour, with as much precision, as if he had 
 just perused the whole of the papers relative to 
 each cause. In pleading, the Barrister will not 
 only have the evidence and reasoning of his own 
 party at his fingers' ends, but all the grounds and 
 refutation of his antagonist.' 
 
 Were the editor to enlarge upon the general use- 
 fulness of the ' New Art of Memory,' it would be 
 
X ADVERTISEMENT. 
 
 necessary to name every profession and employ- 
 ment in life ; for he is persuaded that there is not 
 one of these, in which some benefit may not be 
 derived from a carefui and diligent practice of the 
 principles here developed. 
 
 The purposes to which this system is applicable 
 in the every-day occurrences of common life, it 
 would be endless and useless to specify ,* the edi- 
 tor will, therefore, conclude in the words of Gra- 
 taroli, an eminent writer on mnemonics : — 
 
 ' It sufficeth therefore, that we have expressed 
 a methode or compendious waye, the whiche who- 
 soever foloweth shall easelye (so tfjat ertrcise be not 
 tezkyngz) get and attayne the certeine and sure re- 
 mennbraunce, of manye and sundry things, as due 
 occasion shall require : but as for tfce sluggish anB^Ble, 
 let tl)zm sluggc ana sleepe still?, to fc&cmt all njinges act 
 Di^leasing*' 
 
 London, 
 January, 1813. 
 
ADVERTISEMENT 
 
 THIRD EDITION. 
 
 In presenting this third and improved edition of 
 the ' New Art of Memory' to the public, it will 
 be sufficient to observe, that the whole work has 
 been carefully revised ; and that several useful 
 tables have been added, in order to facilitate the 
 progress of the mnemonic student. 
 
 The system of M. Feinaigle has been sanctioned 
 by some of the most eminent names in society, 
 and is well characterized by the Rev. Peter Baines, 
 a Professor in the College of Ampleforth in York- 
 shire.* " I think (says Mr. Baines) Mr. Feinaigle's 
 system excellent, and in most cases, incapable of 
 improvement. Many things, which, before could 
 scarcely at all, and not without the greatest difficul- 
 ty be acquired, he has rendered by his discoveries 
 perfectly easy and accessible to the lowest capaci- 
 ties ; and, in every branch of study, whether easy or 
 difficult, he has considerably abridged the time of 
 learning them, while at the same time, the labour 
 of the student is rendered more pleasant, and his 
 acquirements both more perfect and lasting. The 
 
 * At this school, M. Feinaigle's Mnemonics have been re- 
 gularly taught, and with great success. 
 
Xll ADVERTISEMENT TO 
 
 system is not only adapted to the higher studies, 
 but is applicable to the very first elements of learn- 
 ing, and is of no less use to the child than to the 
 scholar. Sufficient of it has been experienced here 
 to convince all the profession, that it is infinitely 
 superior to any former mode of instruction, and 
 that its advantages are very great indeed." 
 
 The truth of these observations seems now pretty 
 generally acknowledged ; and the time is not far 
 distant when ample justice will be done to the 
 merits of this useful system of memory. It is highly 
 gratifying to hear that a Society of Gentlemen, in 
 Dublin, have formed an establishment for the 
 education of youth on the system of M. Feinaigle. 
 They have taken two contiguous houses near Mount- 
 joy-square, and they announce in their prospectus 
 " that the emoluments arising from the Institution 
 (save one half to the Professor for his life) are to 
 form a fund for the promotion and extension of 
 the object of education upon this plan ; that with 
 them there can be no consideration of profit, inas- 
 much as by the Deed of Trust, they can merely 
 enjoy legal interest for the money advanced, and, 
 that in founding a seminary under such circum- 
 stances, they have been solely influenced by a con- 
 viction, derived from personal observation, and the 
 experience alreadv had in the College of Ample- 
 forth." 
 
 The Committee announced, that they would, on 
 the first Monday in September, under the auspices 
 of Professor Von Feinaigle, and well qualified As- 
 sistants, instructed by him, commence the education 
 of youth, on a plan, of which the following is an 
 outline : 
 
 Supposing the youth capable of reading and writ- 
 ing, and of an age not under nhae years, the Pro 
 
THE THIRD EDITION. X1U 
 
 fessor undertakes, and the Committee do not hesi- 
 tate in joining in the pledge, that in four \e;irs they 
 shall acquire a competent and radical knowledge of 
 the following subjects :— 
 
 1st. Of the English, Latin, Greek, French, Ita- 
 lian, and Spanish languages, so as to speak several, 
 and write in all, correctly. 
 
 2ndly. Of History and Chronology, so perfect 
 a knowledge as to connect with every important 
 fact, antient and modern, its specific date and re- 
 lation to corresponding and contemporaneous 
 events. 
 
 3dly. Of the Mathematics, comprising Arith- 
 metic and Algebra, and certain departments of 
 Natural Philosophy. 
 
 4thly. Of Geography, embracing general views 
 of the system of the world, and minute information 
 respecting every country on the habitable globe. 
 
 ithly. Of Natural History, an acquaintance 
 with the arrangement of plants, animals, and mine- 
 rals, and their general application to the wants of 
 civilized society. 
 
 Besides the above, there are other objects of in- 
 struction necessary to render the plan of school 
 education complete, too numerous here to detail ; 
 suffice it to say, that youth so educated, v\ill be 
 qualified, if designed for the University, to pass 
 through it with eclat : or if a degree be not required 
 for his professional pursuits, to appear in society 
 with the information of a gentleman. 
 
 For information thus extensive, and acquired 
 within a period of time so limited, the Proprietors 
 have fixed on the lowest terms possible, consistent 
 with the prosperity of the Institution. 
 
 As the mode of instruction is by Lecture, the 
 same teacher can instruct 500 boys with as much 
 ease and certainty as five. 
 b 
 
XIV ADVERTISEMENT. 
 
 A public examination will be held at the semi- 
 nary before Christmas next, to manifest to the pub- 
 lic the progress made by the pupils, after which, 
 such examination will be held quarterly. 
 
 The Managing Committee will breakfast once a 
 week at the Institution, and one of its Members 
 daily visit it. 
 
 London, 
 September, 3 813. 
 
GONTENTS. 
 
 I. NEW ART OP MEMORY. 
 
 introduction . . ... Page 1 
 
 CHAP. I. Principles 31 
 
 II. Chronology 55 
 
 III. Geography 68 
 
 Sect. 1. Principles 68 
 
 t. General Geography 73 
 
 3. Particular Geography 81 
 
 4. Statistics 86 
 
 IV. History 93 
 
 V. L.v n g i age 104 
 
 Se ct. 1. On learning Languages 104 
 
 2. Sketch of the origin cf Language.. 107 
 
 3. Account of some attempts towards 
 
 a universal character or alphabet 114 
 
 4. Proposed philosophical arrange- 
 
 ment of the alphabet as applied to 
 languages in general 127 
 
 5. The derivation of French from La- 
 
 tin, shown to consist, principally, 
 in the change of certain letters 
 according to established rules. . . 138 
 
 6. Mode of learning the conjugations 
 
 and declensions of a language, ex- 
 emplified in the Latin 151 
 
 7. Particular directions for the ac- 
 
 quisition of a language , 15* 
 
2V1 CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAP. VI. Systematic Tables Page 155 
 
 VII. Poetry and Prose 171 
 
 VIII. Arithmetic 18i 
 
 II. PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF ARTIFICIAL MEMORY* 
 
 CHRONOLOGICALLY ARRANGED. 
 
 Thomas Bradwardin 1J)1 
 
 Matheolus Perusinus 192 
 
 Jacobus Publicius ib. 
 
 John Priis 19S 
 
 Baldwin of Savoy 1 96 
 
 Peter of Ravenna ib. 
 
 Jacobus Colinceus 197 
 
 Nicholas Chappusius . ib. 
 
 John'RorriUefch' 19$ 
 
 Lodovico Dolei 199 
 
 William Grutaroli 200 
 
 William Fuhvod ib. 
 
 Stephen Cope 217 
 
 John Spangenherg 219 
 
 Cosmos Rosselius ib. 
 
 Jordano Bruno 219, 222 
 
 Thomas Watson 222 
 
 JoIki Michael Albeit ib. 
 
 Philip Gesvaldi ib. 
 
 John Baptist, Porta 223 
 
 F. U. Mararioti 224 
 
 Lambert Scbenckel 225 
 
 Anon. ib. 
 
 Joh.Paep. Galbaieus ib. 
 
 Arnold Backhusy 226" 
 
 Martin Sonuner 227 
 
 Sempronius Lancioni 233 
 
 John Henry Alsted ib. 
 
CONTENTS. XV11 
 
 AdamBrux Page 238 
 
 Fr. Mart. Ravellin 245 
 
 Robert Fkidd 247 
 
 Apsines (Grsec. Rhet.) 248 
 
 Adam Naulius ib. 
 
 John Willis 249 
 
 Anon 292 
 
 Joann. Velasquez ib. 
 
 Hugo Carbonuell 293 
 
 Raymund Lully 293,294 
 
 Andrew Valieri 293 
 
 Adrian le Cuirot ib. 
 
 Job. Conrade Dannhawer 294 
 
 Meyssonerus - ib. 
 
 Henry Herdson • • 297 
 
 JohuBtlot 318 
 
 Anon. • ib. 
 
 Athanasius Kircher ib. 
 
 Johannes Austriacus 319 
 
 John Shaw 3C0 
 
 Simon Wastell ib. 
 
 Anon, ' 339 
 
 Jo. Brancaccio 340 
 
 Marius D'Assigny 341 
 
 Thomas Erhardt 349 
 
 Claude dc Buflier ib. 
 
 Richard Grey 351 
 
 Solomon Lowe 3/4 
 
 Dan. Geo. Morhof 415 
 
 Fr. B. J. Feyjoo 4l6 
 
 Anacardina, Aguilera, Epiphanius de Moirans, 
 
 Conti, Megiserus A. Ferreya dc Vera 417 
 
XY1U CONTENTS. 
 
 III. INSTANCES OF THE EXTRAORDINARY 
 POWERS OF NATURAL MEMORY. 
 
 Hortensius Page 418 
 
 Seneca 419 
 
 Avicenna ib. 
 
 Joseph Sealiger , 420 
 
 Bishop Jewell ib. 
 
 Lipsius 42 1 
 
 Muret 422 
 
 Famianus Strada . 423 
 
 Thomas Fuller 424 
 
 Humphry Burton 425 
 
 Dr. Wallis 426 
 
 Antonio Magliabechi 427 
 
 William Lyon 430 
 
 Jedediah Buxton 431 
 
 Richard Porson 45S 
 
 Dr. Leyden- - ■ 452 
 
 Zerah Colburn 453 
 
 Directions respecting the Plates. 
 
 Portrait to face the Title. 
 
 Plate I , p. 33 
 
 II 53 
 
 III 54 
 
 IV 74 
 
 V 75 
 
 %* Before the reader uses Plates II. III. IV. and V. it will bt 
 advisable to take th m out ef the volume and paste them en stiff 
 paper. If the white paper bad away, it trill fold up, so as accu- 
 ratdijto represent the floor, four walls, and cieVng of a room. 
 
* IN this work, we conceive, there is a jnst development 
 of the principles of M. Feinaigle; and the author has, with 
 great industry of research, detailed the principal systems 
 of artificial memory, both before and after that of Mr. 
 Grey was announced to the public* Rees' Cyclopedia, vol. 
 xxiii. part 2, art. Mntmonica. 
 
 " Tins system is adapted to the meanest capacity. Be- 
 sides being infinitely serviceable in the more important 
 subjects, to which other systems have been usually confin- 
 ed, it can with equal facility be used, in the common 
 transactions of ordinary life; and its application is rather 
 a source of amusement than labour. It possesses all the 
 advantages of the preceding methods, and as a whole is 
 superior to any that have yet appeared." Monthly Revievt 
 for May, 1813. 
 
 u The principles of the art may be considered as fairly 
 developed in this work ; the book is in itself very curious 
 and interestiug, and well worth purchasing." British Critic 
 for August, 1813. 
 
Something herein I once redrest, 
 
 And now again for thy behoof, 
 
 Of zeal I doe and at request, 
 
 Hot he mende and adde, Jit for all proof. 
 
 Of mem'ry's use, the endless might, 
 
 No wit nor language can expresse : 
 
 Apply and try both day and night, 
 
 And then this truth thou wilt confess*. J. Drk. 
 
THE NEW 
 
 &rt of ffiltmovp. 
 
 3fntrolmctton* 
 
 J^emory, in the sense in which it is to be 
 understood in the present work, (for it is not 
 employed always in the same precise sense) can- 
 not, perhaps, be better defined than in the words 
 of Mr. Dugald Stewart, "It is that fa- 
 culty which enables us to treasure up, and pre- 
 serve for future use, the knowledge we acquire ; 
 a faculty (he adds) which is obviously the great 
 foundation of all intellectual improvement, and 
 without which, no advantage could be derived 
 from the most enlarged experience." 
 
 With the various metaphysical theories con- 
 cerning Memory which have been advanced by 
 different philosophers, we shall not pretend to 
 meddle; as such an investigation would not 
 much assist our present purposes. Whatever 
 may be the relation in which Memory stands 
 to the otheF principles of our constitution, it is 
 
 B 
 
f NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 beyond all controversy, a most necessary and ex- 
 cellent faculty : so much so, that, as Dr. Watts 
 observes, " all other abilities of the mind bor- 
 row from hence their beauty and perfection ; 
 for other capacities of the soul are almost 
 useless without this. To what purpose (as the 
 same eminent author inquires) are all our la- 
 bours in knowledge and wisdom, if we want 
 Memory to preserve and use what we have ac- 
 quired? What signify all other intellectual or 
 spiritual improvements, if they are lost as soon 
 as they are obtained ? It is Memory alone that 
 enriches the mind, by preserving what our labour 
 and industry daily collect. In a word, there can 
 be neither knowledge, nor arts, nor sciences, 
 without memory ; nor can there be any improve- 
 ment of mankind in virtue or morals, or the 
 practice of religion, without the assistance and 
 influence of this power. Without memory, the 
 soul of man would be but a poor, destitute, 
 naked being, with an everlasting blank spread 
 over it, except the fleeting ideas of the present 
 moment." 
 
 This faculty exists, however, in very different 
 degrees, in different men. Some persons possess 
 astonishing vigour of memory,* while others are 
 
 * For many remarkable instances of the extraordinary 
 powers of natural memory, the reader is referred to the 
 conclusion of this volume. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 3 
 
 deplorably deficient in this faculty ; or, as Mr. 
 Locke has beautifully expressed the same idea, 
 " in some persons, the mind retains the charac- 
 ters drawn on it like marble, in others like free- 
 stone, and in others, little better than sand."* 
 Themistocles, the Athenian, indeed, is said+ to 
 have been oppressed by the strength and tenacity 
 of his memory, and to have wished for the pos- 
 session of the faculty of oblivion, rather than an 
 increase of the powers of remembrance; but it is 
 
 * Mr. Locke, speaking of the continual decay of our 
 ideas, says, " The ideas, as well as children, of our youth, 
 often die before us : and our minds represent those tombs, 
 to which we are approaching; where though the brass, 
 and marble remain, yet the inscriptions are effaced by 
 time, and the imagery moulders away. The pictures 
 drawn in our minds are laid in fading colours, and if 
 not sometimes refreshed, vanish and disappear. How 
 much the constitution of our bodies, and the make of our 
 anima} spirits are concerned in this, and whether the tem- 
 per of the brain makes this difference, that in some it re- 
 tains the characters drawn on it like marble, in others like free- 
 stone, and in others, little better than sand ; I shall not here 
 inquire : though it may seem probable, that the constitu- 
 tion of the body does sometimes influence Uie memory ; 
 since we oftentimes find a disease quite strip the mind of 
 all its ideas, and the flames of a fever in a few days calcine 
 all those images to dust and confusion, which seemed to 
 be as lasting as if graved in marble." Works, vol. i. p. 76. 
 ed. 4.to. 1777. 
 
 t Plutarch Apopbth. 
 
4 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 more than probable that, in this respect, if the 
 anecdote be true, he stands an exception from 
 all the rest of mankind. Plenui rimarum sum, 
 may be truly, and without reproach, said by al- . 
 most every man, with regard to his memory : 
 and that not only concerning matters difficult to 
 be retained, but even concerning the most ordi- 
 nary occurrences of life. 
 
 To remedy this inconvenience, and provide as 
 effectually as possible against the mischiefs of 
 forgetful ness, various artifices have, at different 
 times, been resorted to. Of these, the topical 
 memory of the ancients stands first, both in point 
 of date and of celebrity ; and as its principles 
 are very analogous to those of the present system, 
 we shall give some account of tfie origin and 
 general plan of that invention. And, as Pro- 
 fessor Barron, has already trodden this 
 path, no apology will be offered to the reader 
 for presenting to him, that author's very excel- 
 lent account of the subject, prefaced by some of 
 the ingenious remarks with which he has intro- 
 duced it. 
 
 " The recollection* which ordinary memo- 
 ries possess, appears to be resolvable into two 
 principal sources, the vivacity of the impression 
 and association.***** 
 
 * Barron's Lect. on Belles Lettres and Logic, v. 1. p. 609* 
 
INTRODUCTION. i 
 
 " But the principal expedient for assisting the 
 memory is derived from association. For in- 
 stance, when I see a house, I naturally recollect 
 the inhabitants, their manner of life, and the in- 
 tercourse 1 have had with them. The sight of 
 a book prompts the memory of its contents, and 
 the pleasure, or profit, I have received from the 
 perusal of it. A view of the sea may suggest 
 the idea of a storm, and the painful recollection 
 of the loss of property, or of the life of a friend, 
 by shipwreck. The act, then, of aiding recol- 
 lection by association, is to connect thoughts re- 
 mote, or abstract, with others more obvious and 
 familiar, that the recurrence of the latter may 
 bring along with it the memory of die former. 
 Thus the sight of my ring, which I cannot miss 
 to observe, reminds me of the action, to suggest 
 the remembrance of which I moved it from one 
 finger to another. The ringing of the bell, or 
 the sounding of the clock, prompts the recollec- 
 tion of the business I had resolved to perform 
 at these times. A glimpse at the first words of 
 a paragraph, or a page, introduces the recollec- 
 tion of the whole. In a word, we must connect 
 the things we wish to remember with die imme- 
 diate objects of our senses, that offer themselves 
 daily to our attention, but particularly with the 
 objects of our sight, the most vigorous and lively 
 of all our senses, and of which the objects are, 
 B 3 
 
6 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 perhaps, more numerous than those of all our 
 other senses put together. 
 
 " This theory is the foundation of all contri- 
 vances which have been, or, perhaps, can be, 
 employed to help recollection. It is the ground- 
 work of the famous artificial memoiy of Simo- 
 IfiDES, a lyric poet, of the island of Ceos, one 
 of the Cyclades, who flourished in the sixty-first 
 olympiad, about five hundied and thirty-five 
 years before the birth of Christ, and [who] is ce- 
 lebrated by Ci c e r o and Quinctilian. Both 
 these authors relate the following mythological 
 incident, on the occasion which suggested the 
 invention. Simonides was employed by Scopas, 
 a rich Thessalian, to compose a panegyric on 
 him for a certain sum of money; was invited to 
 a festival given by Scopas to his friends, in 
 order to rehearse it, but was sordidly refused 
 more than half the stipulated compensation, — be- 
 cause puzzled, perhaps, with the sterility of the 
 principal subject, he had introduced a long epi- 
 so ! e, amounting to half the poem, in praise of 
 Castor and Poilux. Simonides soon found an 
 avenger of the insult. He was immediately sum- 
 moned from the company by two young men on 
 horseback, supposed to be Castor and Pollux in 
 disguise, who appeared to protect their favourite 
 poet ; and who, as soon as they had saved Simo- 
 nides, made the roof fall on Scopas and his 
 
INTRODUCTION". 7 
 
 company, bruising them so to death that not a 
 lineament of them could be known. Simonides, 
 by recollecting the manner in which they sat at 
 table, was enabled to distinguish them, and to 
 deliver them to their friends for burial. The aid 
 which the recollection of the poet received, on 
 this occasion, is said to have suggested the idea 
 of an artificial memory. 
 
 " The principle of the scheme of Simonides, 
 is to transfer a train of ideas, ihe archetypes of 
 which are not the objects of tense, and are, 
 therefore of difficult recollection, to another 
 train which we cannot miss to recollect, because 
 the archetypes are not only objects of sense, but 
 objects of sight, viith which archetypes we are 
 perfectly familiar; or which may be placed ac- 
 tually before our eyes. Suppose then Simo- 
 nides were to commit to memory a discourse, 
 consisting of speculations concerning govern- 
 ment, finances, naval affairs, or wisdom, none 
 of the archetypes of which could be made ob- 
 jects of sense, at least, at the time of delivery; and 
 to assist his recollection, he were to connect the 
 series of ideas in that discourse, with a series of 
 objects, which he could either place in sight, or 
 with which he was so familiar, that he could not 
 fail to recollect them ; he would proceed in the 
 following manner. He would take a house, for 
 instance, either the one in which he might deli- 
 ver the discourse, or auother ; with every part of 
 
8 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 which he was perfectly acquaiuted. He would 
 begin at some fixed poiut of that house, suppose 
 the right side of the d_>or, and he would proceed 
 round it in a circular line, till he arrived at the 
 poiut from which he set out. He would divide 
 the circumference of the house into as many 
 parts as there were different topics, or para- 
 graphs, in the discourse. He would distinguish 
 each paragraph by some symbol of the subject it 
 contained; that on government, by the symbol 
 of the crown, or a sceptre ; that on finances, by 
 the symbol of some current coin ; that on naval 
 affairs, by the figure of a ship ; that on wisdom, 
 by the figure of the goddess who presided over 
 it. He would either actually transfer, or sup- 
 pose transferred, these symbols to ihe different 
 compartments of the house, and then all he had 
 to do, in oi dtr to rerollect the subject of any 
 paragraph, was, either to cast his eye on the 
 symbol curing delivery, or to remember upon 
 what division the symbol was placed. The 
 memory, by this contrivance, easily recalled the 
 discourse. The orator either saw, or could not 
 fail to remember the compartments, because he 
 was perfectly familiar with them. Neither could 
 he forget the symbols of each paragraph, because 
 they were no more thau hieroglyphical paiutings 
 of the sense. 
 
 " In the place of a house, we may assume, 
 according to Quinctilian, a public building, the 
 
INTRODUCTION. 9 
 
 walls of a city, a well known road, or a picture, 
 to divisions of which we may refer our symbols. 
 Metrodorus assumed the circle of the zodiac, 
 which he divided into 360 compartments, equal 
 to the number of degrees of which it consists, 
 making a compartment of each degree. 
 
 u Some people carried this art so far as to 
 comprehend the words of a discourse, by con- 
 structing symbols for each of them, and refer- 
 ring in like manner, these symbols to compart- 
 ments. This seems to have constituted nearly 
 what we call short-hand writing, except that our 
 short-hand writers oblige themselves to commit 
 to memory the meaning of their symbols, and 
 pretend not to refer these to any more familiar 
 objects. Quinctilian accordingly observes, that 
 this pretended improvement terminated in con- 
 fusion, and embarrassed, much more than it as- 
 sisted recollection. However much, therefore, he 
 might prize the scheme of Simonides, he reject- 
 ed this supplement as nugatory, or detrimental." 
 
 This system of Mnemonics was a favourite 
 pursuit with the Greeks; — and was cultivated 
 with success by the Romans, among whom Cras- 
 sus, Julius Caesar, and Seneca, are said to have 
 particularly excelled in this art. 
 
 Such were the origin and principles of the ce- 
 lebrated topical memory of the ancients : from 
 which source are derived all the various modern 
 systems of local and symbolical memory, that 
 
10 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 have been promulgated from the thirteenth to the 
 eighteenth century. We shall here briefly reca- 
 pitulate the names of the principal tatters on the 
 subject, referring our readers to another part 
 of this volume for an account of the different 
 systems. 
 
 That luminary of science, Raymond Lidly, 
 born in 12136, seems to have been the first mo- 
 dern who brought the art of memory into notice, 
 after it had lain dormant for so many ages. This 
 art was termed transcendental, and distinguish- 
 ed by his name. 
 
 In the fifteenth century mnemonics seem to 
 have occupied the attention of Publicius, Priis, 
 Peter of Cologne, and Peter of Ravenna, who 
 successively published systems of local and sym- 
 bolical memory. 
 
 In the year 1533, Romberch published his 
 Congestorium Artificiosa Memorial, which con- 
 tains a very complete view of his predecessors' 
 labours, with many important additions. Gra- 
 taroli, an Italian physician, was the next writer 
 on" this subject, who in 1555, put forth a trea- 
 tise, ' de memoria reparanda, etc.' This was 
 translated into English by William Fulwod, 
 under the title of * the Castel of Memorie;' and 
 afterwards rendered into French by Stephen Cope. 
 The treatise of Grataroli contains much curious 
 matter. 
 
 The works of Spangenberg, Rosselius, Bruno. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 11 
 
 Albert, Porta, Marqfioti, and others, appear- 
 ed about the close of the sixteenth century, but 
 they contained nothing very materially new on 
 the mnemonic art. 
 
 The seventeenth century was remarkable for 
 the number and variety of mnemonistic works 
 which issued from the presses of the continent. 
 England also had her share in this honour, and 
 produced one or two books worthy of examina- 
 tion. The system of Schenckel occupied the 
 greatest share of attention in France and Germa- 
 ny. Schenckel was followed by listed, Brux, 
 Ravellin, and Naulius. Brux also wrote an 
 essay upon the ' art of forgetfulness,' and gave 
 numerous rules for acquiring perfection in this 
 useful science. 
 
 The principal work published in England, on 
 the subject of the local memory, appeared in 
 16 18, under the title of Mnemonica ; size ars 
 Reminiscendi, etc. by John Willis ; and was trans- 
 lated in 1661, by one Sowersby, a bookseller. 
 This curious and rare volume is replete with in- 
 formation respecting mnemonics, and discourses 
 at large concerning every particular which re- 
 quires the attention of the student. 
 
 In the year 1651, Henri/ Herdson, who styles 
 himself a Professor by Public Authority in the 
 University of Cambridge, published his Ars 
 Mnemonica, she Herdsonus Bruxiatus, etc. in 
 
12 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 Latin and English. It is merely a republication 
 of part of Brux's Simonides Redivivus. 
 
 The mnemonical essays published on the con- 
 tinent from 1620 to 1702, were principally by 
 Azevedo, Carbonel, Cuirot, Dannhazcer, Belot, 
 and Brancaccio : — several anonymous systems 
 were put forth also during this period. Er- 
 hardtfs Ars Memoriee appeared in 1715, and 
 Morhof and Father Feyjoo, have, both, disserta- 
 tions expressly upon the subject ; the one in his 
 Polyhistor, and the other in his Cartas Eruditas 
 y Curiosas. 
 
 From the time of Feyjoo (1731) to 1806, 
 (if we except a German translation of Schenckel 
 by Kltiber) the local and symbolical memory 
 seems to have lain completely dormant. In the 
 Philosophical Magazine for December, 1806, 
 there is the following notice : — 
 
 " A new branch of science is begun to be stu- 
 died in Germany. It is the science called by the 
 antients mnemonica, or the art of memory. We 
 find in Herodotus, that it was carefully taught 
 and practised in Egypt, whence it was trans- 
 planted into Greece. This historian attributes 
 the invention of it to Simonides; but this opi- 
 nion is refuted in a dissertation published by M. 
 Mongenstem, of Dorpat, upon mnemonica. He 
 there asserts, that this science is more intimately 
 connected with the Egyptian hieroglyphics than 
 
INTRODUCTION. IS 
 
 is generally thought, and that this connection 
 may help to explain them. However the case 
 may be, this singular art, so long neglected, has 
 reappeared in Germany with some eclat. M. 
 Aretin, who may be accounted the restorer of it, 
 has recently had M. Kasstner, a clergyman, as 
 his pupil, whom he has permitted to teach his 
 new doctrine at Leipzic ; at the same time exact- 
 ing a promise from him not to suffer his pupils 
 to write down his lectures. M. Kaestner travels 
 about like Dr. Gall. 
 
 " According to a book written, it is said, by 
 a child of twelve years of age, and mentioned in 
 the Leipzic catalogue for the last September 
 fair, mnemonica is a true science, and may be 
 taught by means of seventeen different rules, and 
 which will give a memory to individuals of every 
 age." 
 
 In March 1807, M. Gregor Von Fein- 
 Aigle, a native of Baden, visited Paris, and 
 delivered Lectures on his ' New System of 
 Mnemonics and Methodics.' In the Philoso- 
 phical Magazine for June, 1807,* there is the 
 following extract from a letter written by M. 
 Fichtel, at Paris, to a friend iu London, 
 giving some account of M. Von Feinaigle's 
 exhibitions there. 
 
 * Vol. xxviii. p. 92. 
 
 c 
 
14 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 " Paris, 2d March, 1807. 
 
 " During my residence in this metropolis, I 
 heard a great deal of a new method of mjiemo- 
 nique, or of a method to assist and fix our me- 
 mory, invented by Gregor de Feinaigle. Not- 
 withstanding the simplicity with which he an- 
 nounced his lectures in the papers, I could not 
 determine myself to become a pupil of his, as I 
 thought to find a quack or mountebank, and to 
 be laughed at by my friends for having thrown 
 away my cash in such a foolish maimer. Per- 
 haps I should hesitate to this moment about the 
 utility of this new invented method to assist our 
 natural memory, had I not had the pleasure of 
 dining at his excellency's the Count of Metter- 
 nicb, the Austrian ambassador, who followed, 
 with all his secretaries, the whole course of lec- 
 tures : they all spoke very advantageously of it, 
 likewise several other persons of the first rank I 
 met there : in consequence of this I was inserted 
 into the list of pupils, and I follow, at this mo- 
 ment, the lectures. All I can tell you about 
 this method is : it is a very simple one, and easy 
 to be learned, adapted to all ages and sexes: all 
 difficulties in such sciences as require an extraor- 
 dinary good memory, for instance, the names 
 and epochs in history are at once overcome and 
 obviated. There is not one branch of science to 
 which this method cannot be applied. It is easy 
 
INTRODUCTION. 15 
 
 to be perceived that such an invention cannot 
 pass without some critique, and even sarcasms, 
 in the public prints : some of them were very 
 injurious, and plausible enough to mislead the 
 public, who, knowing nothing of the method, 
 are always more ready to condemn than to assist. 
 Mr. Feinaigle, to answer all these critics at 
 once, adopted a method not less public for Paris 
 than the public papers, but less public for the 
 rest of Europe : he gave, the 22d of last month, 
 a public exhibition to about 2000 spectators, in 
 which he did not appear at all, only about 12 
 or 15 of his pupils; each of them made such an 
 application of the method as his situation in life 
 required. The principal parts were the follow- 
 ing : history about names and years; geography, 
 with respect to longitude, latitude, number of 
 inhabitants, square miles, 8cc. &c. ; grammar 
 in various languages, about different editions of 
 the same work ; pandects, their division, and 
 title of each book, title, &c. ; different systems 
 of botany, poetry, arithmetic, &,c. &c. At last 
 one desired the company to give him one thou- 
 sand words, without any connection whatsoever, 
 and without numeric order; for instance, the 
 word astronomer, for No. 62 ; wood, for No. 
 188; lovely, for No. 370; dynasty, for No. 
 23 ; David, for No. 90, &c. &c. till all the 
 
16 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 numbers were filled ; and he repeated the whole 
 (notwithstanding he heard these words, without 
 order, and but once,) in the numerical order ; 
 or he told you what word was given against any 
 one number, or what number any one word 
 bore. It is still more striking, but certainly, 
 likewise, more difficult, to retain as many num- 
 bers however great they may be. For words 
 and numbers I could venture myself, with the 
 greatest safety, as far as one hundred of each ; 
 and I am sure, after having fixed them once, 
 which is done in less than ten minutes, I could 
 repeat them to you at any period, without ever 
 thinking any more of them. 
 
 " M. Feinaigle is about to visit England." 
 
 To the testimony of M. Fichtel may be added 
 that of the celebrated French astronomer, M. 
 Lalande, who says, " I have witnessed the 
 extraordinary effects produced on the memory, 
 by the method of M. de Feinaigle : one of his 
 pupils is able to repeat, in any order, without 
 the least mistake, a table cf fifty cities in all 
 parts of the world, with the degrees of longitude 
 and latitude in which they are situated ; the same 
 is the case with chronology: in the Annuaire, I 
 have inserted 240 dates from antient and modern 
 history, and M. de Feinaigle's Scholars repeat 
 
INTRODUCTION. 17 
 
 them all — an astonishing aid in the study of geo- 
 graphy and history !" 
 
 In the Monthly Magazine for September, 
 1807,* there is a letter under the signature of 
 Common Sense, which, though somewhat illi- 
 beral :n its remarks, displays considerable know- 
 ledge of the principles of the ' local and symbo- 
 lical Memory.' 
 
 " Any person (says this writer) who wishes to 
 try an experiment on the power of association, need 
 only make use of the succession of rooms, closets, 
 stair-cases, landing-places, and other rtmaikable 
 spots or divisions, of his own house, with all the 
 parts of which he may be supposed to be very fa- 
 miliar. Let him apply any w oid or any idea to the 
 several parts of the house, in any determined order 
 of their succession, and he will find it almost 
 impossible, in recalling the same order of the 
 parts of the house, not to associate the id a or 
 word which he had previously annexed to each 
 part. Thus, for example, a person may ltarn 
 the succession of the Kings of England in ten 
 minutes, by annexing the names of each suc- 
 ceeding monarch to the successive rooms, clo- 
 sets, and principal parts of his own house, 
 beginning at the upper story, and regularly de- 
 
 * Vol. xxiv. p. 105. 
 
18 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 scending ; or, at the lower story, and regularly 
 ascending. 
 
 " Any other permanent and familiarclass of ob- 
 jects will, in general, answer the purpose better 
 than the rooms of ft house. I was myself edu- 
 cated in the vicmi:y of Oxford-street, and the 
 streets running out of that street south and north 
 (beginning at Charles-street, Soho-square, and 
 so on to Paik lane, and down on the other side 
 to Rathbone-place and Hanway yard) are the 
 permanent and fanniiar set of objects, which I 
 make use of for my own purpose of successive 
 association. The counties in England, the king- 
 doms and the countries throughout the world, 
 the villages, and other objects on a great road, 
 or the streets of a city, are all well suited to this 
 business of association ; and either of them may 
 be taken indifferently by various persons, accord- 
 ing to their ai quaintance with them. The greater 
 the variety of ideas connected with this set of 
 objects, whith may be called the associating 
 Ticy., the more easy, and the more certain is the 
 powei of recollection. 
 
 " If I cio not hazard a charge of egotism; I 
 shall mention, as illustrative facts, that by this 
 new art I once committed to mem-jry, in a sin- 
 gle morning, the whole of the propositions con- 
 tained in the three first books of Euclid, and 
 
INTRODUCTION. 19 
 
 with such perfection, that I could for years after- 
 wards specify the number of the book on hearing 
 the proposition named, and could recite the 
 proposition on hearing the number and the book ; 
 and I have frequently, in mixed companies, re- 
 peated backwards and forwards from fifty to an 
 hundred unconnected words, which have been 
 but once called over to me. I may also add, to 
 prove the simplicity of the plan, that I taught 
 two of my own children to repeat fifty uncon- 
 nected words in a first lesson, of not more than 
 half an hour's continuance." 
 
 M. Von Feinaigle visited England some 
 time in the early part of 181 1. In order to exhi- 
 bit a detail of his progresses in this country, we 
 have made some extracts from the Periodical 
 Works and Pub ic Papers which gave an account 
 of his various experiments. 
 
 " On the 22d of June, 181 1,M Von Feinaigle* 
 gave at the Royal Institution, a public experi- 
 ment of the efficacy of his Method of facili- 
 tating, and assisting Memory. The Managers 
 of the Institution, in consequence of the appli- 
 cation of the Committee of Literature and Sci- 
 ence, granted permission for this public display 
 of the art, without, however, making themsehes 
 in any way responsible as to its character. The 
 
 * Gent. Mag, vol. Ixxxi. partl v p. 281. 
 
20 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 exhibition took place before an assembly of se- 
 veral hundred Ladies and Gentlemen, who were 
 astonished and delighted with the result of the 
 experiment. Four children, two boys and two 
 girls, all under 14 years of age, had been put 
 under Mr. Feinaigle's care but two. or three 
 days before : he had one of the girls but au hour 
 and a half; and the longest tuition that any of 
 them had received was but four hours and a 
 half. — One of them repeated Goldsmith's Her- 
 mit backward and forward, and stated the stanza, 
 the line, and the ordtr of any remarkable word 
 required of him. — One little girl answered to 
 questions in the chronology of the Roman Em- 
 perors ; and another multiplied, without slate or 
 paper, izvo sums of eight figures by eight, and 
 declared that she had not previously been taught 
 arithmetic — A boy determined the geographical 
 situation by degrees and minutes, of 50 different 
 cities ; and on a planisphere chalked out on a 
 board, marked down the true situation of places 
 named to him. — Mr. Fincher, of the Institution, 
 also recited the Mineralogical Tables of Hauy, 
 the second part of which he had taught himself 
 on Mr. Feinaigle's system, together with the first 
 part of Brisson's Oruithologic System ; and he 
 declared, from his own experience, that the 
 principles of Mr. Feinaigle's art were equally 
 calculated to give facility in the acquisition, and 
 
INTRODUCTION. 21 
 
 certainty in the retention, of the tables of any 
 other science— a fact which was confirmed by 
 several Gentlemen present, who have attended 
 the private courses of the Professor. — The exa- 
 minations were carried on by Mr. Disney, Chair- 
 man of the Literary and Scientific Committee ; 
 and for a great part of the time, Mr. Feinaigle 
 retired from the Lecture-room. Nothing could 
 be more satisfactory than the result of the ex- 
 periments ; and the company returned Mr. Fein- 
 aigle their thanks. — The Professor, Aug. 26, 
 repeated the experiment at Liverpool, where the 
 Rev. Jonathan Brookes, at the request of the 
 Mayor, selected from the different charity- 
 schools of the town, children upon whom the 
 experiment might be made. The exhibition took 
 place before a very numerous assembly. Four 
 children had been put under Mr. Feinaigle's tui- 
 tion but three days before, two boys and two 
 girls, and none of them had received more than 
 two hours' instruction ; neither of the girls could 
 make or read a figure when first presented to 
 him. The examinations (which were carried on 
 by the Rev. Jonathan Brookes) were precisely 
 of the same nature as those at the Royal Insti- 
 tution ; and the results were equally satisfac- 
 tory." 
 
 " On the 6th of April, 1812, the effects of M. 
 Von Feinaigle's system were exemplified at 
 
1 c l NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 the Surry Institution, before a numerous as- 
 sembly of Proprietors and Subscribers, by the 
 examination of five young persons, who had 
 previously been committed to the care of M. 
 Von Feinaigle.* 
 
 " 1. Master H. S. (13 years of age) deter- 
 mined the geographical situation of fifty princi- 
 pal towns in different parts of the globe, assign- 
 ing to each its longitude and latitude in degrees 
 and minutes, and named the country in which it 
 is found. He also marked on a blank plani- 
 sphere the true situation of the towns named to 
 him. 
 
 " 2. Miss P. K. (11 years of age) repeated 
 fifty stanzas of four lines each, from the second 
 part of Mrs. More's ' Sir Eldred of the Bower.' 
 These she repeated consecutively, and in any 
 order desired. On any remarkable word being 
 mentioned, she determined the stanza, the line, 
 and the place of the line, in which it was to be 
 found ; and also how many times the same word 
 occurred iti the Poem. 
 
 " 3. Miss M. A. K. (15 years of age) an- 
 swered to ail the declensions, as well of sub- 
 stantives as of adjectives, of the Latin language; 
 and gave a full account of all the conjugations, 
 
 * The whole of this report is taken from the Morning 
 Post of Apni 18th, 1B12. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 23 
 
 both active and passive, without any previous 
 knowledge of that language. 
 
 " 4. Miss S. S. (of the same age with the 
 preceding pupil) answered to the declensions and 
 conjugations of the Greek Language, and de- 
 clined and conjugated several regular nouns and 
 verbs proposed to her. This pupil had never 
 seen a Greek character till put under the care of 
 the Professor. 
 
 " The whole instruction received by the 
 above pupils consisted of Jive lessons only, of 
 one hour each. 
 
 " Master S. H. explained the physical, ma- 
 thematical, and chemical characters of minerals, 
 after Hauy's system, assigning the systematical 
 order of any character whatever proposed to him, 
 and showing in what manner any mineral ought 
 to be examined and tried, to ascertain its nature. 
 This pupil received only two hours' instruction 
 from M. Feinaigle. 
 
 " Master S. H. afterwards requested the audi- 
 ence to give twenty words, or names, without 
 any order or connection whatever. These words 
 were written on a board, and numbered from one 
 to twenty as follows: — 
 
 1. Tower. 
 
 5. Chapel. 
 
 2. Gate. 
 
 6", Institution, 
 
 3. Steeple. 
 
 7. Crotch. 
 
 4. Church. 
 
 8. Grey. 
 
24 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 9. Regent. 15. Hill. 
 
 10. Feinaigle. 16. Nelson. 
 
 11. Syracuse. 17. Archimedes. 
 
 12. Wellington. 18. Palestine. 
 
 13. Graham. 19. Button. 
 
 14. Ten. 20. Reform. 
 
 " After inspecting the number and words for 
 a space of time, not exceeding three minutes, 
 the pupil named every word in the series, both 
 forward and backwards : to any number that was 
 proposed to him, he assigned the proper word, 
 and vice versa. 
 
 " A series of twenty-eight figures, named pro- 
 miscuously by the audience, was then written 
 down, as, 8. 6. 1. 0. 5. 0. 2. 9. 6. &c. &c. &c. 
 These the pupil surveyed attentively, for about 
 five minutes, and then repeated them forwards 
 and backwards. He afterwards declared how 
 many 8 's. 2's. 9's. &c. occurred in the series, and 
 the relative situation of each figure. 
 
 " In consequence of the disappointment of 
 many of the Proprietors and Subscribers, who 
 could not obtain admittance into the Lecture 
 Room on the 6th instant, the above experiments 
 were repeated on Wednesday evening last to a 
 crowded auditory. On this evening the follow- 
 ing additional evidences of the utility and uni- 
 versality of M. Feinaigle's System were ad- 
 duced. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 25 
 
 w 1. Master J. C. answered to two sums in 
 multiplication of 8 numbers, by 8 numbers each. 
 Each sum containing 8 separate products, be- 
 sides the total product ; he repeated any pro- 
 duct required of him. The separate operations 
 being represented on a board, by cyphers — on 
 any one cypher, or line of cyphers, on either 
 sum being effaced, he replaced them by the ap- 
 propriate figures. This pupil was employed for 
 ten minutes only, in committing the figures to 
 memory. 
 
 " 2. Miss S. T. answered to the Chronology 
 of the Kings of England, from William the Con- 
 queror, down to his present Majesty, in any 
 order that was desired. She also named the 
 predecessor and successor of any King pointed 
 out to her. This pupil received four lessons of 
 one hour each. 
 
 " Master S. H. after one hours application, 
 repeated a Greek word from Aristophanes, con- 
 sisting of seventy-six syllables and 160 letters, 
 both forwards and backwards; he also named 
 any syllable in any order desired, determining its 
 numerical situation."* 
 
 At these public experiments, M. Von Fei- 
 
 * Similar experiments have been given at the Russell 
 Institution, Freemasons' Hall, the London Tavern, 
 etc. etc. etc. 
 
 D 
 
26 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 naigle distributed a syllabus, in which the 
 nature of the pupil's examination was stated ; 
 and the six following notes, or explanations, of 
 the objects of his ' New System of Mnemonics 
 and Methodics,' were subjoined. 
 
 " 1. Systematic Tables. A method that is 
 at once speedy and effectual for acquiring the 
 perfect knowledge of systematical tables, is an 
 object of higher value and greater importance 
 than at first it might appear. How often are we 
 attending courses of lectures upon particular 
 sciences, without being able to form a clear idea 
 of the whole, or to give ourselves an account of 
 what we are learning ! When, by the means here 
 recommended, we are enabled to know previously 
 the great divisions and subdivisions of a system, 
 it is not difficult to refer to those fixed points all 
 our ideas, and at once to secure our knowledge 
 already attained, and to accelerate our progress 
 in the science. A system acquired by this me- 
 thod is not a dry and sterile series of words ; it 
 is a well-arranged classification of real know- 
 ledge. We learn in like manner all the systems 
 of any science, whatever ; however complicated 
 they may appear. 
 
 " 2. Languages. The learning and teaching 
 of languages are not only facilitated by the sys- 
 tem of Mnemonics, but acquire more light and 
 more solidity than ever they were thought sus- 
 
INTRODUCTION. 27 
 
 ceptible of. It is a fact well known to all my 
 " pupils, that, almost in any language whatever, 
 the declensions may be learnt in a single hour, 
 and all the conjugations in another. It can 
 easily be conceived, that all the rest may be ac- 
 quired with the same facility : but this is not 
 all the advantage of my system : anomalies, irre- 
 gularities of verbs, and similar difficulties which 
 have been hitherto the torment of the scholars, 
 become, by this system, the most pleasing and 
 most instructive part of the language. My pu- 
 pils are convinced, by the most satisfactory ex- 
 perience, that grammar is to be learned in the 
 language, not the language in the grammar ; and 
 when the true way is once known, it becomes 
 delightful to them to go on with ease and promp- 
 titude, by themselves, from one language to 
 another. 
 
 " 3. Prose and Poetry. When we knowpieces 
 of prose or of poetry in such perfection that we 
 are able to answer at pleasure to any single word, 
 it is not to be imagined that in learning them we 
 have to fix one word after another ; but what- 
 ever we commit to our memory is there in such 
 an order that we are sure to find it again when- 
 ever we may wish for it. The matter and the 
 diction are necessarily distinguished, and every 
 thing treated after its own nature, and we are 
 therefore sure neither to omit any thing that is 
 
28 NEW AUT OF MEMORY. 
 
 to be said, nor any word by which it is to be ex- 
 pressed. Persons who could never before get by 
 heart either prose or poetry, have, by a short 
 practice of this method, acquired the greatest 
 readiness and facility. 
 
 " 4. Geography. This part of geography* 
 has only been learned by my common manner of 
 fixing in the memory proper names in general, 
 and that of noting the arithmetical figures wher- 
 ever we meet them. The true system of geo- 
 graphy is the object of more than one of my 
 lectures; and by this new system, the study ac- 
 quires a degree of facility, and the science itself 
 a degree of perfection, of which it was never 
 thought susceptible, and yet without which it 
 can never be essentially what it ought to be. 
 Those who would think it needless, or of no use, 
 to know the situation of every remarkable point 
 of the globe by degrees of longitude and latitude, 
 have to consider, if without these degrees, geo- 
 graphy itself, or any geographical chart, could 
 ever exist ; and, if not, they surely cannot main- 
 tain that what is essential to geography itself may 
 be neglected in the study of geography. This 
 perfection is not only given to the science by my 
 system, but is also attained with greater facility 
 
 * This refers to the longitude and latitude of the fifty 
 •♦ities repeated by the pupil. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 20 
 
 and certainty than even the former imperfect 
 knowledge conlcl be acquired by any other method 
 whatever. The same principles are applicable 
 with equal efficacy to ail the subsidiary parts of 
 a perfect geographical knowledge, and it is 
 shown how to fix in the memory, for instance, 
 the government, the extent, the population, and 
 the military power, the products, the commerce, 
 the manufactures, the arts and sciences, &c. of 
 every state. Those who are acquainted with the 
 principles of the present arrangement, cannot but 
 feel how much easier it must be to compare, 
 according to this plan, one kingdom with another 
 by simple memory, than after any other plan, 
 with all the assistance of books and systematic 
 tables. 
 
 " 5. Chronology. What is done with regard 
 to the kings of England may be done with any 
 chronological series of sovereigns ; and though 
 such a series presented nothing mure than what 
 may be considered as great epo! hs of history, 
 even of those the present system offers a greater 
 number than any other system of chronology, 
 and fixes them more easily than it has ever been 
 possible to do by all those ingenious historical 
 tables which have been invented to assist the 
 memory in this interesting study. But the high- 
 est perfection of historical knowledge is certainly 
 •to know the whole history, not only bj great 
 *3 
 
SO -J*EW AfcT OE MEMORY. 
 
 epochs, but year by year, and fact by fact ; and 
 this perfection no other system has ever been 
 able to afford. 
 
 " 6. Multiplication. To make a multiplica- 
 tion, consisting of a greater number of figures in 
 the multiplier as well as in the multiplicand, 
 only by memory, without writing any thing, may 
 ■certaiuly in many cases be desirable, or of great 
 utility, and is at least a certain proof that the 
 principles of the present method reach every 
 where, and that to its meaus nothing is too dif- 
 ficult or too complicated. It is undoubtedly of 
 the highest importance to be able to fix in our 
 minds the numbers in general. Statistic geo- 
 graphy, history, mathematics, in short, almost 
 every science is full of numerical figures. Mul- 
 tiplication tables, square and cube numbers, loga- 
 rithms, algebraic formulae, and all the mathema- 
 tics can be submitted to those rules." 
 
 Since the period of M. Von Feinaigle's 
 arrival in this country, he has been delivering a 
 variety of courses of fifteen or sixteen lectures 
 each, for which the charge of five guineas has 
 been made ; but the pupil is at liberty to attend 
 any particular lecture, a second time, should he 
 not sufficiently comprehend it at the first hearing. 
 M. Von Feinaigle has not confined his visits to 
 the metropolis : Edinburgh, Glasgow, Liver- 
 pool, etc. etc. have, in the summer season, been, 
 -successively, the theatre of his exertions. 
 
CHAP. I. 
 
 principles* 
 
 i he memory may be compared to a ware- 
 house* stored with merchandise. A methodical 
 arrangement of the contents of such a repository, 
 enables its owner to find any article that he may 
 require, with the utmost readiness. With a 
 general know ledge of the contents of a libraiy, and 
 of the manner in which the books are distributed, 
 a person may, even when absent from the spot, 
 determine, with certainty, the situation of any 
 particular book.f " Medallists," says Mr. 
 
 * Memory is, as it were, the storehouse of our ideas; 
 for the narrow mind of man not being capable of having 
 many ideas under view and contemplation at once, it was 
 necessary to have a repository to lay up those ideas, which 
 at another time it might make use of. Lock on the Human 
 Understanding, vol. i. p. 111. 
 
 t The well known anecdote of Magliabechx, librarian 
 to the Grand Duke of Tuscany, Cosmo III. will suffici- 
 
52 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 Addison,* " upon the first naming of an em- 
 peror-, will immediately tell you his age, family, 
 and life. To remember where he enters in the 
 succession, they only consider in what part of the 
 cabinet he lies; and by running over in their 
 thoughts such a particular drawer, will give yon 
 an account of all the remarkable parts of his 
 reign." If our ideas were arranged with equal 
 method and order, the mind would turn to them, 
 with the like facility. 
 
 Sensible objects have a powerful effect in re- 
 calling to the mind the ideas with which it was 
 occupied when those ideas were presented. Thus 
 the sight of any remarkable scenes in the course 
 ef a second journey, will frequently remind a per- 
 son of the subject of which he was thinking or 
 talking when he last travelled that road ; or, to 
 adopt the elegant language of Air. Foster.-^ 
 " Places and things which have an association 
 
 ently illustrate and confirm this fact. The Grand Duke 
 having asked Magliabechi whether lie could procure a 
 book that was particularly scarce, he replied, ' uo, sir, it is 
 impossible, tor there is but one in the world, that is in the 
 Grand Sigmoids library at Constantinople, and is the se- 
 venth book on the second shelf, on the right hand side as 
 yon go in.' 
 
 * Dialogue upon the usefulness of ancient Medals, pp. 
 21, 22, 12mo. 1726. 
 
 t Essays, p. J2. For a very pretty illustration of this 
 snbrff *, s«*c also Spectator, No. 417. 
 
PRINCIPLES. 33 
 
 with any of the events or feelings of past life, 
 will greatly assist the recollection of them. A 
 man of strong associations finds memoirs of 
 himself already written on the places where he 
 had conversed with happiness or misery. If 
 an old man wished to animate, for a moment, 
 the languid and faded ideas which he retains of 
 his youth, he might walk with his crutch across 
 the green where he once played with companions 
 who are now probably laid to repose in another 
 spot not far off. An aged saint may meet again 
 some of the effects of his early piety in the place 
 where he first thought it happy to pray. A walk 
 in a meadow, the sight of a bank of flowers, per- 
 haps even of some one flower, a landscape with 
 the tints of autumn, the descent into a valley, the 
 brow of a mountain, the house where a friend 
 has been met, or has resided, or has died, have 
 often'produced a much more lively recollection of 
 our past feelings, and of the objects and events 
 which caused them, than the most perfect de- 
 scription could have done." 
 
 Indeed, it will be found upon investigation, 
 that locality is the most efficacious medium of 
 reminiscence; and that system of memory will 
 be the most serviceable, which brings this prin- 
 ciple into the most extensive operation. For 
 this reason, locality (or, the connection of our 
 ideas with places) is made the foundation of the 
 
54 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 present system. In this respect, it is analogous 
 to the scheme of Mnemonics practised by the 
 antients, but it is here applied much more exten- 
 sively and advantageously than it was by them. 
 
 A room having generally four walls, the most 
 obvious division of it is, into four sides, and each 
 wall or side may be subdivided into pannels or 
 compartments. Accordingly, the antient system 
 divided a wall into five spaces. Thus, suppose 
 the letter M to be represented on a wall as 
 under : 
 
 Five spaces are thus gained in the places 
 marked by the figures 1, 2, etc. Every wall of 
 the room was, in imagination, divided in this 
 manner ; and this plan Avas applied to as many 
 rooms as were found necessary to the extent of 
 each particular scheme — every room being simi- 
 larly divided into four sides, — and every side 
 being subdivided into five compartments. Thus, 
 any idea which, according to this method, had 
 been associated in the mind with the forty-eighth 
 compartment, would be placed in the third com- 
 partment of the second wall, in the third room. 
 
PRINCIPLES. 
 
 35 
 
 But as few compartments could be obtained on 
 each wall by these means, the calculation of high 
 numbers would be exceedingly difficult. To 
 remedy this defect, eacli wall might be divided 
 into nine or ten compartments, thus : 
 
 If a wall be divided into nine parts, there will 
 be 36 compartments in every room. In order to 
 ascertain the situation of any particular number, 
 it is to be considered in relation to the total num- 
 ber of the subdivisions. For example, if the 
 situation of number 48 be required ; according 
 to the last mentioned division of the rooms, it is 
 to be found by considering the proportion which 
 that number bears to 36, the total number of the 
 compartments in this arrangement. If the num- 
 ber in question be less than this total, the place 
 inquired after will be obvious ; thus 12 being 
 within the number 36, must, of necessity, be in 
 the first room : being above Q, it is equally clear 
 that it cannot be on the first wall j and being less 
 than 18, it must, necessarily, be on some part of 
 the second wall : and as it exceeds the number of 
 the first wall by 3, it follows, of course, that ita 
 
56 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 place must be in the third compartment of the- 
 second wall. If the number in question be higher 
 than the number of the compartments in one 
 room, its place will be readily found by dividing 
 it by that number. Thus, suppose 48 to be the 
 number whose place is required : 
 
 ' 36)43(1. 2- 
 9)12(1. 2 
 3 
 
 As 48 exceeds 3(3, we know that it cannot be 
 in the first room, the 1 is therefore changed into 
 2 ; and the fraction remaining, shows it to be in 
 the twelfth compartment. There being nine 
 compartments on every wall, this remainder, or 
 number of the compartment, is divided by 9, for 
 the purpose of ascertaining the wall. Now, as 
 the divisor is contained more than once, but not 
 twice, in the dividend, it follows that the com- 
 partment sought must be on the second wall ; the 
 remainder gives the specific compartment. This 
 operation, then, shows that 48 is in the third 
 compartment, on the second wall, in the second 
 room. This was the plan adopted by the antients 
 when they divided their rooms into parts ; but 
 being both complicated and difficult, it has been 
 rejected in the present system, and another scheme 
 has been introduced in its place, which is more 
 simple in its construction — less difficult in its appli- 
 cation — and much more extensive in its powers. 
 
rRINCI*LES. 37 
 
 We shall now proceed to explain the mode of 
 dividing a room according to the Nezo System of 
 Memory, and to develop the principles of the 
 art. It is, however, necessary to premise, that 
 the pupil must not attempt too much at first, but 
 should proceed gradually in the acquisition of 
 this system ; for his ultimate success in it will 
 greatly depend upon a perfect knowledge of the 
 first principles.* As in mathematics no problem 
 can be demonstrated without understanding all 
 the preceding demonstrations, — so every advance 
 in this art, must be grounded on the full posses- 
 sion of all the antecedent doctrines. 
 
 We shall divide a wall in the following manner : 
 
 1|2|S. 
 
 4 ! 5 | 6 
 
 7 | 8 | 9 
 
 The figures are arranged from left to right, 
 in the usual manner of writing; and for the more 
 easily remembering their situation, it will be 
 found that if two lines be drawn diagonally, from 
 the four corners of the figure, they will intersect 
 
 * Assumendus usus paulatim, ut pauca primum complec- 
 tamur auimo, quae reddi fideliter possint : mox per incve- 
 nienta tam modica, ut oueraii se labor ille non sentiat, 
 augenda usu, et exercitatione multa continenda est, qu* 
 quidem maxima ex parte memoria constat. — Qirinct. Inst. 
 Orat. lib. X. Opera, tom. II. p. 253. Ed. Bipont. 1784. 
 £ 
 
18 
 
 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 all the odd numbers. (See Plate I. fig. 1.) There 
 is now a single wall divided into nine squares or 
 compartments; these we shall name places, and 
 say, the first place, second place, third place, 
 etc. etc. 
 
 The same mode must be pursued with the 
 three remaining walls in this room ; by these 
 means, for walls are obtained — each being 
 divided into nine places. In order to find the 
 number 36 in this room, we should naturally say 
 four times nine will be 36, and should, of course, 
 conclude that 36 would be in the last place of 
 the last side or fourth wall of the room : but this 
 calculation is erroneous; 6 must ever be in the 
 same situation, which will be that occupied by 
 the point in the following figure : 
 
 The place occupied by the number 6, in all the 
 four walls, would be thus designated : 
 
 26 
 
 
 lti 
 
 36 
 

 
 / 
 
 4 
 
 
 6 
 
 : 
 
 3 
 
 \ 
 
 , 
 
 I 
 
 , 1 , 
 
 
 » 
 
 r 
 
 e 
 
 » 
 
 
 t 
 
 " 
 
 '" 
 
 ' 
 
 L 
 
 ( ,■ 
 
 
 6 
 
 1, 
 
 /' 
 f 
 
 '■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 '"'"• 
 
 brrhhr 
 
 
 
 i ii m iv 
 
 fm W 
 
 xv\ ix 
 
 ./,„•,/ J/.-, 
 
 1 
 
 ' 
 
 .; 
 
 , 
 
 ■• 
 
 
 < 
 
 « 
 
 ,i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 ■ 
 
 , 
 
 .-. 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 l 
 
 7 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 7 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 "-■ 
 
 
 
 » 
 
 « 
 
 u 
 
 » 
 
 •■-• 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 ■■■ 
 
 iG 
 
 ;.( 
 
 o 
 
 ,6 
 
 " 
 
 /A 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ : 
 
 id 
 
 « 
 
 <7 
 
 j» 
 
 '.'/ 
 
 i; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 >* 
 
 « 
 
 
 a 
 
 -'J 
 
 
 
 'J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -•; 
 
 MS 
 
 . 
 
 ■:• 
 
 .-I'' 
 
 ■•■■ 
 
 
 !i; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ..'■' 
 
 -" 
 
 -7 
 
 it 
 
 ■■' 
 
 < 
 
 .'.« 
 
 " 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 
 
 Nl 
 
 
 
 \H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 • 
 
'/<■[. 
 
 Tig.l. 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 4 
 
 Nc 
 
 6 
 
 / 
 
 / 
 
 8 
 
 \ 
 
 K/ 
 
 '/ 
 
 
 X^TN 
 
 IN 
 
 26 
 
 * 36 
 
PRINCIPLES. 39 
 
 It must now be determined how we are to 
 reckon these walls: if we stand in a room with 
 our back to the windows, the first wall is on our 
 left, the second before us, the third on our right, 
 and the fourth behind us. We shall, however, 
 commence with the floor, and divide it into nine 
 parts in the same manner as the wails. Where 
 are 10, 20, 30, 40, etc. to be placed? Every 
 decade begins a new series, and the decimal is 
 placed on the cieling of the room over its proper 
 wall; thus, the first decimal, or 10, will be over 
 the first wall ; the second decimal, or 20, will be 
 over the second wall ; the third decimal, or 30, 
 will be over the third wall ; the fourth decimal, 
 or 40, will be over the fourth wall; the fifth de- 
 cimal, or 50, as its tenth part exceeds the num- 
 ber of walls, will be assigned to the cieling of 
 the room, and will consequently be the highest 
 number in the first room, forming the connecting 
 link between this room and the second. 
 
40 
 
 NEW ART OF MEMORY, 
 
 FIRST ROOM. 
 
 Second Hall. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 <0 
 
 C; 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 «« 
 
 £» 
 
 h 1 
 
 
 o 
 
 T-i 
 
 <M 
 
 ■>n 
 
 CO 
 
 4 
 
 Floor 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 00 
 
 Ox 
 
 ts 
 
 o 
 
 
 - 
 
 •<$ 
 
 t» 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 •■£ 
 
 Oi 
 
 oo 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 6 
 9 
 
 8 
 
 Z 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 & 
 
 T 
 
 
 
 
 o?> 
 
 
 
 50 Cieling | 
 
 As one room will not supply us with suffi- 
 cient numbers, a second room must be provided. 
 The floor of the second room is denominated the 
 fifth watt, the wall on the left, the sixth ; the wall 
 before us, the seventh ; that on our right, the 
 eighth ; and the one behind us, the ninth ; and as 
 the numbfer 50 was upon the cieling of the first, 
 so tbe number iOO will be upon the cieling of 
 the second room% 
 
PRINCIPLES. 
 
 41 
 
 SECOND ROOM. 
 
 Seventh Walt. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 70 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 •~o 
 
 Ol 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 -* 
 
 it* 
 
 - 
 
 
 o 
 
 * 
 
 - 
 
 05 
 
 4 
 
 5* 
 
 6 
 
 CO 
 
 Ot 
 
 fS 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 
 - 
 
 •* 
 
 o. 
 
 r 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 VO 
 
 0> 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 8 
 
 Z 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 9 
 
 f- 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 5 
 
 T 
 
 
 
 
 06 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 Ninth IPall. 
 | 100 Cieling. | 
 
 Numbers, probably, originated from holding 
 lip the ringers of the hand thus: { , | | , [ } | , 
 | ; five was made by holding up the 
 thumb and little finger, with the other fingers 
 down, thus tllu "» b V finger forming the numeral V; 
 six was made by erecting another finger and con- 
 tinuing the former position; thus VI and VII, 
 
 * Floor or fifth wall. 
 E 3 
 
42 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 VIII and Villi, in the same way, by adding a 
 
 finger each time : ten was formed from two fives, 
 
 y 
 thus, making X. 
 
 The learner should now exercise himself in 
 finding the situation of the different numbers in 
 the two rooms. Where, for example, are 29, 
 47, 35, 21, 62, 82, 99, etc. The room must be 
 first ascertained ; as to this there can be no diffi- 
 culty, for as 50 is the lesser number in the first 
 room, all the number* exceeding 50, and as far 
 as 100, will be found in the second room. 
 
 Having found the room, the kft hand figure 
 will denote the wall, and the right hand figure 
 will show the place; thus, &9 is in the first 
 room, second wall, and ninth place ; 47, fourth 
 wall, seventh place ; by cutting off the left hand 
 figure, the numerical order of the wall is given, 
 and the remaining figure acquaints us with the 
 place. 
 
 In order to remember a series of words, they 
 are put in the several squares, or places, and 
 the recollection of them is assisted by asso- 
 ciating some idea of relation between the objects 
 and their situation ; and, as we find by expe- 
 rience, that whatever is ludicrous, is calculated 
 to make a strong impression upon the mind, 
 the more ridiculous the association the better. 
 Being provided with two rooms, we will take 
 the floor of the first room, and place some- 
 
PRINCIPLES. 
 
 43 
 
 thing in each of the nine squares. In illustra- 
 tion of this experiment, sensible objects will be 
 given, as the association of ideas between them 
 and the places is most striking. 
 
 1 
 Apple 
 
 2 
 Monkey 
 
 5 
 Pipe 
 
 3 
 Man 
 
 4 
 Ship 
 
 6 
 Cap 
 
 7 
 Taukard 
 
 8 
 Boat 
 
 9 
 Tree 
 
 The ideas of these images must be connected 
 together, and it will then be almost impossible 
 to forget the order in which they are arranged. 
 The first is an apple, the second a monkey; 
 this monkey takes the apple, eats, and offers it 
 to the man who is in the third place ; the man 
 is just going to embark on a long voyage, and 
 for this purpose a ship will be in the fourth place ; 
 bat he will smoke his pipe before he leaves his 
 native country; — pipe is in the fifth place; — and 
 when he has finished smoking, he calls for his 
 night-cap, which will be found in the tixth 
 place ; before he retires to rest, he wishes for 
 another tankard of ale ; tankard occupies the 
 seventh place. In the morning when this man 
 awakes, a boat is ready to convey him to the 
 ship ; this boat is in the eighth place ; a tree 
 is found in the ninth place — it shall be a 
 
44 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 willow-lree, and must grow by the water-side, 
 on the very identical bank from which the man 
 embarks in the boat. Any different objects 
 may be taken promiscuously, and the connec- 
 tion made between them, at the moment, as 
 chance or fancy bids. The chief use of this 
 example is to induce a habit of fixing certain ob- 
 jects in a regular order, that we may always 
 know where to find them. For this purpose the 
 pupil should exercise himself in the numerical 
 situation of the different objects, and be enabled 
 , to deteimine it quickly. 
 
 The floor and the walls are localities on 
 which the figures and words must be arranged, 
 in the several places or squares, in the order 
 above described. Were a series of twenty-six 
 figures to be taken, for instance, the following : 
 
 7920792631452 
 87965 7 8964314 
 
 Or a series of consonants thus: 
 
 f I Imngmfprstrsrn 
 
 (Full many a gem of purest ray serene.) 
 
 or any other series of figures, or consonants, it 
 would be found very difficult to remember them. 
 The figures, and the letters, are merely signs of 
 
PRINCIPLES. 45 
 
 signs, and cannot easily be fixed in the memory ; 
 the understanding having no exercise. The ele- 
 ments of words must, therefore, be sought for. 
 Dr. Grey changed figures into letters, and 
 thus made words ; but these words could not be 
 fixed in the memory without constant repeti- 
 tion, and strenuous application ; the different 
 words required to be remembered in his Memo- 
 ria Technica, being almost equally burthensome 
 with the facts and dates which they were intend- 
 ed to imprint upon the memory. The mode 
 of changing figures into letters was known long 
 before the time of Dr. Grey. The substitution 
 of letters for figures was practised by most anti- 
 ent nations ; in the Hebrew and Greek languages, 
 there are no arithmetical signs, but the letters of 
 the alphabet are used in their place. Shop- 
 keepers and others, from an early period, had 
 been in the habit of marking the articles which 
 they had to sell, with certain letters, as arbitrary 
 symbols, for the prices in pounds, shillings, and 
 pence. 
 
 We now take the consonants, and attach one 
 or more to the series of figures, 1, 2, 3, 4, 
 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 ? ; each figure having its appro- 
 priate consonant. (See Plate I. fig. t. The 
 consonants only are resorted to, for they com- 
 pose, like the skeleton of the human body, the 
 
46 
 
 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 principal parts; the vowels are but the liga- 
 ments. 
 
 The letters appropriated to the figures are not 
 merely arbitrary, but are adapted as nearly as 
 possible to the form of the figures.* 
 
 t t like the figure 1, is a perpendicular, or 
 down stroke, and differs only from it, in the ad- 
 dition of the small horizontal line drawn across 
 the upper part of it; t is more like the figure 1, 
 than auy other consonant, if perhaps, we except 
 the letter /. An additional reason for assign- 
 ing the letter t to 1 is, that it occurs in the word 
 wmt. 
 
 n, is the appropriate letter to represent 2, 
 there are two down strokes in it. 
 
 m, furnishes us with three down strokes, it 
 will then give the idea of 3 : if we place a 3 
 thus CO , it will form a tolerable outline of the 
 letter m. 
 
 r, is to represent 4 : r when written, (See 
 
 * Dr. Grey who assigned both vowels and consonants 
 to figures, in a manner perfectly arbitrary, has the fol* 
 lowing effect: 
 
 a 
 
 e 
 
 i 
 
 \ ° 
 
 it 
 
 au 
 
 oi 
 
 ei 
 
 ou 
 
 V 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 ! 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 b 
 
 d 
 
 t 
 
 / 
 
 I 
 
 * 
 
 P 
 
 k 
 
 n 
 
 2 
 
 Here a and b stand for l, e and d for 2, i and t for 3, etc. 
 
PRINCIPLES. 47 
 
 Plate I. fig. 2.) resembles somewhat a 4. The 
 letter r occurs also in our ward four ; in the 
 German fohr; in the Dutch vier; in the Latin 
 quatuor; in the French quatre; in the Spanish 
 and Portuguese, quatro ; in the Italian quattro ; 
 in the Greek rsiro-agts; in the Russ, cliety'ire ; 
 and in a variety of other languages. 
 
 The English L was borrowed from the Ro- 
 mans ; they had it from the Greeks, and they again 
 from the Hebrews, whose lamed is much like 
 our L, excepting that the angle is somewhat 
 more acute. L was used as a numerical letter 
 for fifty, and may, therefore, be assigned to the 
 figure 5. d, in writing is the reversed form of 
 this figure. .(See Plate I. fig. 2.) 
 
 c, k,g,q. The figure 7, with a slight curvature, 
 may be made to resemble a crooked stick, and as 
 we shall remember this stick the better, if some- 
 thing be hung upon it, a cage shall be suspended 
 there. In the word cage we obtain the conso- 
 nants c and of; k also is added to the number 
 for c is more frequently pronounced hard (ka) 
 than it is soft (se) ; q being a gutteral and a 
 crooked letter, shall go along with the cage and 
 the stick. For the figure 7 there are then c, k, 
 g, and q. 
 
 b, h, v, w. In the figure 8 there are two 
 noughts, or two round things : these may be 
 
48 
 
 MEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 converted into beehives, and if one be placed 
 upon the other, there will be a tolerably accu- 
 rate idea of the figure 8. In the word beehive, 
 are obtained b, h, v ; and w may be added, for 
 it is compounded of vv. 
 
 p,f. The figure 9 is not unlike a pipe, and 
 as a pipe is seldom used without a jaw^ of smoke 
 issuing from it, we have the p and f in these two 
 words ; they are inseparably connected, and can- 
 not easily be forgotten. 
 
 s, x, z. The o being a round body, it may 
 be compared to a wheel or grinder in a mill; this 
 wheel, when in swift rotation, gives out a hissing 
 sound, and the hissing consonants s, x, z, are at- 
 tached to the cipher, x is formed from two half 
 circles ; and z is the first letter of the word zero. 
 
 These letters, and the figures which they are 
 intended to represent, should be impressed strong- 
 ly upon the memory, as the letters must be con- 
 verted into words, by the introduction of vowels 
 
 8 1 
 b t 
 
 3 
 
 m s 
 
 7 9 
 c p 
 
 2 6 
 n d 
 
 3 1 
 
 m t 
 
 4 5 
 r I 
 
 1 8 
 t b 
 
 9 
 
 s p 
 
 6 S 
 d I 
 
 7 8 
 < b 
 
 9 6 
 p d 
 
 4 3 
 r m 
 
PRINCIPLES. 
 
 49 
 
 The two consonants representing two figures 
 must be converted into a word, to which should 
 be affixed some striking idea; and the images 
 represented, connected together. The objects 
 when selected, each being a word, must be 
 arranged in the different places, beginning with 
 the floor, and proceeding to the first, se- 
 cond, and third walls, etc. In making these 
 words, it is necessary that the two consonants re- 
 quired should be the two first in the word ; if 
 there be more than two it is of no importance, 
 as the two first only will be needful. It will not 
 be difficult to make a perfect figure from the 
 skeleton we have just seen. 
 
 Floor of the First Room. 
 
 BaT 
 
 MouSe 
 
 ■ ' 
 CaP 
 
 NeeDle 
 
 MuTton 
 
 RoLl 
 
 TuB 
 
 SoaP 
 
 DoLl 
 
 First Wall of the First Boom. 
 
 J CaBbage 
 
 PnDding 
 
 ■ ' 
 
 RuM 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
50 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 A bat is seen flying after a mouse, which shel- 
 ters itself under a cap, stuck full of needles. 
 There is some mutton for dinner, and a roll to 
 eat with it. The tub and soap shew that it is 
 washing-day ; the servants playing with the chil- 
 dren and their doll, have forgotten to boil the 
 cabbage and the pudding. As a compensation 
 for this loss, a large bottle of rum is produc- 
 ed. By this method, it will be easy to commit 
 to memory a long series of figures, to repeat 
 them backwards or forwards, to name the first, 
 fourth, fifth, eighth, etc. or to say how many 
 fours, fives, noughts, etc. are contained in the 
 series. 
 
 The converting of figures into letters, and 
 making sense by the introduction of vowels, will 
 be found applicable to many of the purposes of 
 common life. If we purchase any articles, and 
 would remember the measure or weight of them, 
 and thus prevent fraud in the shop-keeper, it is 
 only necessary to change the figures into a word 
 or words, and connect them with some strange or 
 ludicrous idea. Should we buy 32 yards of cloth, 
 muslin, etc. it is easy to say, that a man brought 
 home the cloth, and the measure is given to us : 
 if 30lbs of cheese, a mouse that had been gnaw- 
 ing the cheese, would fix the weight imme- 
 diately. The number of a hackney-coach, or of 
 
PRINCIPLES. 51 
 
 > 
 
 a house may be preserved in the same manner. 
 The purposes in domestic life to which this sys- 
 tem is applicable, are almost infinite, and need 
 no further specification. 
 
 We have already learned to divide a room into 
 parts, as the floor and walls, — to subdivide these 
 into places, — to change figures into letters, — and 
 to form words ; and, by these means, to remember 
 series of figures, or of things. It would be a 
 material advantage to us, to have some fixed or 
 certain rooms : we may take, for instance, thosje 
 with which we are best acquainted, and fix the 
 different pla ces upon the various articles of fur- 
 witure, as a chair, a chest of drawers, etc. What 
 we have learned, hitherto, is not sufficient : as 
 yet, an intellectual order only has been obtained ; 
 numbers have been localised, but there is still a 
 deficiency, — the realities are wanting. 
 
 If the reader has practised our instructions im 
 a room in which he is accustomed to spend the 
 greater part of his time, and this room should 
 have been hung with pictures, engravings, or 
 plans, or ornamented with basts, etc. he will 
 have been very materially assisted in the remem- 
 brance of his places, or localities. We can, after 
 a little practice, ascertain the order of different 
 things placed in a room which we have long fre- 
 quented. The transition is slight, but the im- 
 
52 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 pression will be permanent. Let us fill the 
 squares or places with some pictures of our own 
 drawing : the two rooms will be then furnished, 
 and it will be as easy to remember the symbols, 
 or hieroglyphics, as to remember the situation or 
 place of any picture, or article of furniture in a 
 room. Instead of having a carpet on the floor, 
 we can suppose that the floor is inlaid or con- 
 structed of mosaic. This will allow us to put 
 symbols there. 
 
 The outlines of the symbols are intended to 
 represent, as accurately as possible, the various 
 figures in the two rooms, so that they may 
 be permanently fixed in the memory. (See 
 Plates It, and III.) And here we dismiss the 
 pupil for a season, giving a general hint, that 
 it will be advisable to make himself perfect- 
 ly familiar with the situations of the different 
 symbols, before he thinks of looking into the 
 next chapter. Until a knowledge of these 
 symbols be obtained, no further progress can 
 be made in the system. It is, at least, indis- 
 pensably necessary, that the pupil should answer 
 with facility to any questions put to him respect- 
 ing ihe Jirst room, containing fifty symbols ; the 
 second room may be acquired at leisure. 
 
l'l„r 
 
PRINCIPLES. 
 
 53 
 
 The following are the names attached to the 
 different symbols : 
 
 fiz$t ftoom* 
 
 1 Tower of BabeL 
 
 2 Swan. 
 
 3 Mountain, or Parnassus. 
 
 4 Looking-glass. 
 
 5 Throne. 
 
 6 Horn of Plenty. 
 
 7 Glass-blower. 
 
 8 Midas. 
 
 9 Flower, or Narcissus. 
 
 10 Goliath, or Mars. 
 
 11 Pillars of Hercules. 
 
 12 David with the Lion. 
 
 13 Castle, or Nelson's Mo- 
 
 nument. 
 
 14 Diogenes, or Watchman. 
 
 15 .ZEseulapius, or Serpent. 
 
 16 Ceres, or Gleaner. 
 
 17 Archimedes, or Carpen- 
 
 ter. 
 
 18 Apollo. 
 
 19 Robinson Crusoe. 
 26 Peacock. 
 
 21 Vaulter, or Rider. 
 
 22 Cockfighting. 
 
 23 Pegasus. 
 -24 Elepha;it. 
 
 25 Sancho Panza. 
 
 26 Charioteer. 
 
 27 Don Quixote. 
 
 28 Pack-horse. 
 
 29 Standard-bearer- 
 
 30 Sysiphus. 
 
 31 Cupid. 
 
 32 Diana-. 
 
 33 Clouds, or Sky. 
 
 34 Noah's Ark. 
 
 35 Cartius. 
 
 36 Hermitage. 
 
 37 Miner. 
 
 38 Moses. 
 
 39 Vesuvius. 
 
 40 Pleasure Garden. 
 
 41 Monument. 
 
 42 Golden Calf. 
 
 43 State Bed. 
 
 44 Piano-Forte. 
 
 45 Bajazet. 
 
 46 Fountain, or Square. 
 
 47 Vulcan, 
 
 48 Apis. 
 
 49 Orange-Tree. 
 fiO Bacchus. 
 
 * s 
 
54 
 
 NEW ART OF MBMbftft 
 
 ^CCOllfc $00m» 
 
 51 Pigmalion. 
 
 52 Jupiter.' 
 
 53 Neptune. 
 
 54 Toilette, or Penelope. 
 
 55 Fleet. 
 
 56 Guitar Player. 
 
 57 Conjurer. 
 
 58 Orpheus. 
 
 59 Samson. 
 
 60 Still. 
 
 61 Bagpipes. 
 
 62 Phoenix. 
 
 63 Temple of Glory. 
 
 64 Fame. 
 
 65 Schoolmaster. 
 
 66 Tents. 
 
 67 Mutius Scoevola. 
 -68 Mercury. 
 
 69 Mausoleum. 
 
 70 Lottery, or Fortune. 
 
 71 Saturn. 
 
 72 Centaur. 
 
 73 Pedlar. 
 
 74 Thresher. 
 
 65 Garden Engine, 
 
 76 Gardener. 
 
 77 Mowers. 
 
 78 Pagan Priest. 
 
 79 Direction-Post. 
 
 80 Apothecary. 
 
 81 Cymbal-Player. 
 
 82 Trojan Horse. 
 
 83 Actaeon. 
 
 84 Cabriolet. 
 
 85 Europa. 
 
 86 Brewer. 
 
 87 Hunter. 
 
 88 Bullfighting. 
 
 89 Hercules. 
 
 90 Burning-Glass. 
 
 91 Tantalus. 
 
 92 Hawker, or, Sportsman. 
 
 93 Golden Fleece. 
 
 94 Lime-Tree. 
 
 95 Shepherd. 
 
 96 Cap of Liberty. 
 
 97 Solomon. 
 93 Trophy. 
 99 Avenue. 
 
 100 Justice. 
 
/ 
 
 
 
CHAP. II. 
 
 Chronology* 
 
 J. he pupil is, by this time, supposed to have 
 fixed all the symbols in the first room, and to be 
 enabled to tell readily the first, seventh, thir- 
 tieth, forty-ninth, etc. and also to say what place 
 is occupied by Midas, Sisyphus, etc. In making 
 the application to chronology, we shall confine 
 ourselves to the succession of the kings of Eng- 
 land since the conquest. 
 
 1. William the Conqueror. A word 
 must be now made from William ; the first half 
 wil is taken, and to this is added low, by which 
 willow is obtained ; this enables us to remember 
 William. The willow is fixed upon the Tower 
 of Babel, our first symbol ; we have then Wil- 
 liam I. but another circumstance remains ; he 
 was the conquerar : — we hang some laurel, the 
 reward of valour, and the crown of conquest, 
 ypon the willow tree. The date is yet wanting : 
 
56 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 we say the laurel is dead ; in the word dead, 
 are d, d for 66; the 1000 being understood 
 through the whole scries.* 
 
 2. William Rufus, or William II. 
 There must be two willows, one on each side of 
 the swan; the swan is put into a red (bag): by 
 making the bag red, we preserve the meaning of 
 the Latin word Rufus. 
 
 3. Henry I. There is one hen upon the 
 mountain tossing up the ground ; (toss.) 
 
 4. Stephen. The looking-glass is very 
 much stiffened; there is a watch placed before 
 the glass ; this is (timely). The word stiffened 
 will recal to the mind the name of Stephen. 
 
 5. Henry II. -A (taylor) sitting upon the 
 throne, with two hens, one under each arm. 
 
 6. Richard I. This was the Jirst rich 
 man, — the horn oi plenty is before him. The 
 first rich man, probably, pilfered from other peo- 
 ple ; he must have been a (thief). 
 
 7. John. The glass-blowers name was 
 John (Taffy). 
 
 * As the reader will find at p. 60. a tabular view of 
 this application, we shall merely explain the manner of 
 connecting the different images, inclosing the word which 
 lives the date in a parenthesis. 
 
CHRONOLOGY. 57 
 
 8. Henry III. Midas, or the man with 
 the long ears, hast just received a present of three 
 hens; he puts one in each ear, and one in his 
 mouth, the hens are so near to each other, they 
 are almost (united). 
 
 9. Edward I. To fix the name of Edward, 
 we convert the verb to ward, that is, to watch, 
 into a substantive, and say here is one ward, 
 guard, or soldier, watering Narcissus, or the 
 flower, with an (engine). 
 
 10. Edward II. There are two wards, or 
 guards, behind Goliath, each in a (mask). 
 
 11. Edward III. Three soldiers as guards 
 between the Pillars of Hercules, playing with a 
 (monkey). 
 
 12. Richard II. This is the second rich 
 man, who meets David putting his hand into 
 the lion's mouth ; David is mocking at the lion's 
 strength, (mock). 
 
 13. Henry IV. We take a (muff), put 
 four hens in it, and place it on the pyramid. 
 
 14. Henry V. Diogenes has five hens in 
 his lantern ; they are very noisy and trouble- 
 some, — (rout* em). 
 
 15. Henry VI. Msculapius, or the doc- 
 tor, is very much annoyed by six hens, which are 
 (running) round the serpent. 
 
 16. Edward IV. Here are four soldiers 
 
58 . NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 taking away poor Ceres, and putting her in a 
 (redoubt).* 
 
 17. Edward V. Archimedes, or the carpenter. 
 
 18. Richard f II. Apollo. 
 
 As these two kings are of the same date, one 
 word will be sufficient to fix it. Here are Jive 
 guards preparing to rob the third rich man ; 
 Apollo is looking on, and amusing them with a 
 tune on his lyre; in the meanwhile, Archimedes, 
 or the carpenter, vociferates (rob'em). 
 
 19- Henry VIF. Robinson Crusoe is seen 
 to shoot seven hens, in a (rebellion.) 
 
 20. Henry VIII. There is a Peacock, 
 with eight hens in her nest ; they are young and 
 cannot speak, — they are (lisping.) 
 
 2 1 . Edward VI. We have here the vaulter, 
 or rider ; one man is a sufficient weight for a 
 horse ; but our horse must carry seven. There 
 are six guards, or wards, upon this horse, besides 
 the vaulter, who are all scrambling for a piece of 
 a (lark). 
 
 22. Mary. There must be some rejoicings 
 where there is a cock-fight ; it is very possible 
 that the town may be (illuminated). 
 
 23 Elizabeth. This queen had so flour- 
 ishing a reign, that she is (allowed) to ride upon N 
 Pegasus. 
 
 • As the b is not sounded in pronunciation, the r, d, t, 
 are the letteis which srive the date. ' 
 
CHRONOLOGY, 59 
 
 24. James I. The word chai?is sounds 
 somewhat like James ; we will, therefore, put 
 the Elephant in chains : what (dismal) chains. 
 
 25. Charles I. Poor Saucho Panza upon 
 his ass ! Poor fellow, he met with many 
 (denials). 
 
 26. Charles II. The charioteer is running 
 a race ; the (odds) are against him. 
 
 27. James II. Don Quixote must be put 
 in chains ; he muit have two sets of chains j he 
 shall have (double) chains. 
 
 28. William III. The patient packhorse 
 travelling along the accustomed road, arrives at 
 that part where three itillozcs have been planted : 
 how melancholy it is to see so many willows ! 
 (do zceep.) 
 
 29. Anne. The Standard Bearer is just 
 arrived on a visit to (cousin) Anne. 
 
 SO. George I. Sisyphus is rolling up the 
 hill " his huge round stone," — but he stops and 
 listens to some one who is playing on the 
 (guitar).* 
 
 George II. This sovereign is a (king) 
 between two kings of the same name. 
 
 George Hi. has had some important con- 
 cerns with (Cadiz.) 
 
 * No. 30, as it completes a wall, may include Geerge I, 
 II, III. 
 
GO 
 
 NEW ART OF MEMOR*. 
 
 <£ co 
 
 H S 
 
 (J 
 
 fa 
 
 o 
 
 
 >> 
 
 fa 
 fa 
 
 s 
 
 >> 
 
 IB 
 
 
 H 
 
 h 
 
 H 
 
 /-*-» 3! 
 
 ^ 
 
 H 
 
 S3 S3 jj 
 
 c3 J* H 
 
 P3 3 
 
 3 O •- 
 
 O 
 
 |fi5 .2 fa 
 
 5* 
 
 5 — <*- 
 
 w-> 
 
 * U 
 
 24 
 
 1 c 
 
 £ 
 
 HH 
 
 
 
 ►4 
 
 HH 
 
 
 t-4 
 
 1-4 
 
 t-J 
 
 i— 
 
 M 
 
 1—4 
 
 1-4 
 
 B 
 
 R 
 
 s 
 
 m' 
 
 z 
 
 1— 1 
 
 
 
 
 h- 1 
 
 Q 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 fe 
 
 <! 
 
 «« 
 
 J* 
 
 w 
 
 l> 
 
 X 
 
 
 > 
 
 a 
 
 « 
 
 « 
 
 
 h3 
 
 l-l 
 
 55 
 
 x 
 
 ft 
 
 u 
 
 
 X 
 o 
 
 2 
 
 >< 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 £ 
 
 Ul 
 
 B 
 
 w 
 
 fa 
 
 W 
 
 B 
 
 Q 
 
 a 
 fa 
 
 a 
 fa 
 
 ~ '- 
 
 •t-4 
 
 e* 
 
 «0 
 
 "* 
 
 »o 
 
 <0 
 
 K 
 
 CO 
 
 cr> 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -H 
 
 -4 
 
 s ^ 
 
 1° 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHRONOLOGY. 
 
 61 
 
 .. a 
 
 s s 
 
 5 « # 
 
 ^ £ 
 
 o O 
 
 s = 
 
 •* a 
 
 v s 
 
 fc Q 
 
 < -2 £ 
 
 o 
 
 & > > 
 
 
 >. »-t J- 5 > 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 # a a a h a ps a 
 
 Q 
 
 a « 
 
NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 03 
 
 oo 
 
 ift 
 
 o 
 
 tf> 
 
 o> 
 
 o» 
 
 ■* 
 
 *~ 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 in 
 
 o 
 
 CM 
 
 to 
 
 CO 
 
 03 
 
 c 
 
 
 CN 
 
 to 
 
 A 
 
 >o 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 <o 
 
 to 
 
 t^ 
 
 i> 
 
 K 
 
 N 
 
 
 ■H 
 
 jH 
 
 TH 
 
 
 1-1 
 
 T-l 
 
 •H 
 
 T"t 
 
 TH 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■a 
 
 V 
 
 to 
 
 d 
 
 '> 
 
 ■cT 
 
 qj 
 
 o 
 
 73 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 pa 
 
 CJ 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 '3 
 O 
 
 CD 
 
 tsf 
 P 
 
 el 
 
 O 
 
 'So 
 •a 
 
 
 P 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 p 
 
 p 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fe 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <s 
 
 
 qT 
 
 K 
 
 01 
 
 
 
 
 
 oT 
 
 ^j- 
 
 3 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 cS 
 
 
 „~ 
 
 
 "3 
 
 .a 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 e 
 
 c« 
 
 -™ 
 
 eg 
 
 © 
 
 o 
 
 '3 
 Of 
 
 © 
 
 CJ 
 
 3 
 
 
 3 
 
 s 
 
 .2* 
 >> 
 
 CO 
 
 
 CO 
 
 Pn 
 
 s 
 
 u 
 
 3 
 ec 
 
 6 
 
 a 
 o 
 
 P 
 
 cS 
 
 T3 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 ti 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 0) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <w 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ►H 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 H-l 
 
 
 1— < 
 
 
 
 
 
 v 
 
 a 
 
 
 H- 1 
 
 l"H 
 
 
 t— 1 
 
 
 
 HH 
 
 h- 1 
 
 £ 
 
 H 
 
 • 
 
 CA 
 
 (A 
 
 i-5 
 
 s 
 
 <! 
 
 
 h! 
 
 H 
 
 1— 1 
 
 ni 
 
 K 
 
 
 H 
 
 Hi 
 
 - 
 
 i— i 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 CS 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 « 
 
 K 
 
 a 
 
 ■3 
 
 W 
 
 a 
 
 K 
 
 ptj 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 «! 
 
 «« 
 
 g 
 
 j 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 
 ►J 
 
 B 
 
 a 
 
 < 
 
 f 
 
 S5 
 
 W 
 
 u 
 
 a 
 
 
 ta 
 
 »-5 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 •-S 
 
 <! 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 O 
 
 13 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o .• 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 ■* 
 
 5ft 
 
 <o 
 
 i> 
 
 00 
 
 C7l 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 3 b 
 
 c« 
 
 »i 
 
 e* 
 
 0-) 
 
 «< 
 
 e< 
 
 *» 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 lo 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 z, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
CHRONOLOGY. 63 
 
 In order to enable the pupil to make a fur- 
 ther application of the mnemonical principles to 
 chronology, we subjoin the following table : — he 
 can, at his leisure, resort to more copious sources 
 of information. 
 
 €ahit of tfje $ rinripal i^igtoricai €tent£ 
 
 From the Creation to the Birth of Christ. 
 
 Before 
 Christ. 
 
 4004 The creation of the world, and of Adam and Eve. 
 
 4003 The birth of Cain. 
 
 3017 Enoch for his piety, translated to heaven. 
 
 2348 The old world destroyed by a deluge. 
 
 2247 The tower of Babel built about this time, by Noah's 
 posterity, upon which God causes the confusion of 
 tongues. 
 
 2234 Celestial observations first made. 
 
 2181 The kingdom of Egypt founded. 
 
 2059 The kingdom of Assyria founded by Ninus. "j 
 
 1921 The covenant of God with Abram. 
 
 1897 Sodom and Gomorra destroyed for their wickedness. 
 
 1856 The kingdom of Argos and Greece begins under 
 Inachus. 
 
 1822 Memnon, the Egyptian, invents letters. 
 
 1635 Joseph dies in Egypt; which concludes the book of 
 Genesis. 
 
 1574 Aaron born in Egypt. 
 
 1571 Moses, brother to Aaron, born in Egypt, and adopt- 
 ed byTharaoh's daughter, who educates him in all 
 the learning of the Egyptians. 
 
 1*56 Cecrops begins the kingdom of Athens, in Greec«. 
 
64 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 Before 
 Christ. 
 
 1546 The kingdom of Troy begun by Scamander. 
 
 1493 Cadmus carried the Phenician letters into Greece, 
 
 built the citadel of Thebes, and is the first king. 
 1491 The Israelites delivered from Egypt after 430 yean 
 
 of sojourning. 
 1485 The first ship appeared in Greece. 
 1453 The Olympic games first celebrated at Olympia, in 
 
 Greece. 
 1452 The Pentateuch, or first five books of Moses, writ- 
 ten in the land of Moab ; — the death of Moses. 
 1451 The Israelites led, under Joshua, into the land of 
 
 Canaan. 
 1356 Eleusinian mysteries introduced at Athens. 
 1326 The Isthmian games introduced at Corinth. 
 1267 The Argonautic expedition undertaken. 
 1198 The rape of Helen by Paris ; which, in 1193, gave 
 rise to the Trojan war, and the ten years siege of 
 Troy, by the Greeks, who took and burnt that city. 
 1182 JEueas lands in Italy. 
 1048 David is sole king of Israel. 
 1004 The temple dedicated by Solomon. 
 894 Money first made of gold and silver. 
 884 Lycnrgus reforms the constitution of Lacedemon. 
 869 Carthage founded, in Africa, by Dido. 
 814 The kingdom of Macedon begins. 
 776 The first olympiad begins in this year. 
 753 .32i a of the building of Rome, by Romulus, first king 
 
 of the Romans. 
 720 Samaria taken, after three years' siege; and the 
 kingdom of Israel annihilated by Salmana/ar, 
 king of Assyria, who carries the ten tribes iuto 
 captivity. The first lunar eclipse on record. 
 600 Thalts, of Miletus, travelled into Egypt ; where he 
 acquired the knowledge of geometry, astronomy, 
 and philosophy ; returned iuto Greece, and estab- 
 lished his philosophy. 
 
CHRONOLOGY. 65 
 
 Before 
 Christ. 
 
 600 Maps, globes, and the signs of the Zodiac invented 
 by Anaximander, the disciple of Thales. 
 
 597 Jehoiakim, king of Jndah, carried captive, by Nebu- 
 chadnezzar, to Babylon. 
 
 587 Jerusalem taken, after eighteen months' siege. 
 
 559 Cyrus, the great king of Persia. 
 
 538 The kingdom of Babylon finished, that city being 
 taken by Cyrus ; who, in 536, issued an edict for 
 the return of the Jews. 
 
 534 The first tragedy performed at Athens, on a waggon, 
 by Thespis. 
 
 526 Learning encouraged at Athens, and the first public 
 library founded. 
 
 515 The second temple at Jerusalem finished under Darius. 
 
 509 Tarquin, the seventh, and last king of the Romans, 
 expelled, and Rome became a republic. 
 
 504 Sardis taken and burnt by the Athenians; which 
 caused the Persians to invade Greece. 
 
 490 The battle of Marathon, in which Miltiadcs defeated 
 the Persians. 
 
 486 JEschylus, the Greek poet, first gains the prize of 
 Tragedy. 
 
 481 Xerxes begun his expedition against Greece. 
 
 480 The Spartans, under Leonidas, cut to pieces at Ther- 
 mopylae. 
 
 Great naval victory gained by the Greeks over 
 the Persians, at Salamis. 
 
 458 Ezra sent from Babylon to Jerusalem with the cap- 
 tive Jews, and the vessels of gold and silver, &e. 
 
 454 The Romans send to Athens for the laws of Solon. 
 
 451 The Decemvirs created at Rome ; the laws of the 
 twelve tables compiled and ratified. 
 
 431 The Peloponnesian war begins, which lasted twenty- 
 seven years. 
 
 430 The history of the Old Testament finishes about thii 
 time. Malachi, the last of the prophets. 
 G 3 
 
66' NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 Before 
 Christ. 
 
 400 Socrates, the founder of moral philosophy among the 
 
 Greeks, flourished. 
 371 The battle or Leuctra, the Lacedemonians defeated 
 
 by the The bans, under Epaminondas. 
 363 Epamico*das killed at tlie battle of Mantinea. 
 357 The Phocian or Sacred war begins in Greece. 
 343 Syracuse taken by Timoleon ; and Dionysius the ty- 
 rant, banished. 
 331 Alexander the Great conquers Darius, king of Persia. 
 285 Dionysius, of Alexandria, begins his astronomical 
 a;ra, on Monday, June 26, being the first who found 
 the exact solar years to consist of 365 days, 5 hours, 
 and 49 minutes. 
 284 The Septuagint version made by order of Ptolemy 
 
 Philadelphus, king of Egppt. 
 264 The first Punic war begins ; which continued twenty - 
 
 three years. 
 i60 The Romans defeated the Carthaginians at sea. 
 237 Hannibal, at nine years old, swears eternal enmity to 
 
 the Romans. 
 218 The second Punic war begins ; which continued 
 
 seventeen years. 
 1 90 The first Roman army enters Asia, and from the spoils 
 of Antiochus, brings the Asiatic luxury first to 
 Rome. 
 170 Antiochus Epiphanes plunders Jerusalem. 
 168 Perseus, King of Macedon, defeated by the Romans. 
 167 The first library erected at Rome, of books brought 
 
 from Macedonia. 
 163 The government of Judea, under the Maccabees, be- 
 gins; which continued 126 years. 
 149 The third Punic war. 
 
 146 Carthage, the rival of Rome, razed to the ground. 
 135 The history of the Apocrypha ends. 
 72 Mithridates defeated, and Pontus reduced toa Romas 
 province* 
 
CHRONOLOGY. 67 
 
 Before 
 
 Clirist. 
 
 52 Julius Caesar's first expedition into Britain. 
 47 Pompcy defeated at the battle of Pharsalia, and after- 
 wards slain in Egypt- 
 
 — The Alexandrian library burnt. 
 
 — The solar year introduced by Caesar. 
 
 44 Caesar killed in the senate-house by conspirators. 
 
 4? The battle of Puilippi, in which Brutus and Cassius 
 are defeated. 
 
 31 The battle of Aetium; in which Mark Antony and 
 Cleopatra were totally defeated by Octavius, 
 nephew to Julius Caesar. 
 
 30 Alexandria taken by OctaYins : Antony and Cleopa- 
 tra put ti.enisehes to death, and Egypt reduced to 
 a Roman province. 
 
 27 Octavius obtains from the senate the title of Augustus- 
 Caesar, and is made the first Roman emperor. 
 8 The temple of Janus shut by Augustus, as an emblem 
 of universal peace. 
 
 John the Baptist and JESUS CHRIST born, four years 
 fceforc the commencement of the vulgar JEra. 
 
CHAP. III. 
 
 0tOQX%pi)t>. 
 
 In the application of the Art of Memory to 
 Geography, this science will be considered under 
 the following heads; (1.) Principles. (2.) Ge- 
 neral Geography. (3.) Particular Geography. 
 (4.) Statistics. 
 
 Sect. 1. — Principles. 
 
 Geographical charts represent the situation of 
 cities, towns, seas, continents, etc. on the globe ; 
 but we will suppose that nothing of this kind has 
 ever been fabricated ; that there are no charts ; 
 if we wish to ascertain the relative situation of 
 any places, the means must be invented to ac- 
 complish what is required, beginning with the 
 first principles. Whenever the memory is to be 
 treated with, we should employ the powers of 
 reason. The charts must be drawn in our intel- 
 lect, and we should proceed step by step; what 
 is wanting in the memory, will be supplied by 
 reason. 
 
GEOGRAPHY. 6Q 
 
 The earth being a round body,* it is repre- 
 sented by a globe ; but as both sides of this globe 
 cannot be seen at the same time, it must be di- 
 vided into hemispheres or halves : there will then 
 be an eastern and a western, or, a northern and a 
 southern hemisphere. 
 
 Suppose a circle to be described, and a point 
 placed within it; the situation of this point must 
 be determined with relation to some other part 
 of the circle. If a horizontal line be drawn 
 across the circle and divide it equally, the line 
 appears to us straight ; but cannot, in reality, be 
 so, because it is half the circumference of a globe. 
 A perpendicular line is then drawn, and the 
 hemisphere is divided into four equal quarters : 
 each quarter containing 90° or one-fourth of S60°; 
 every circle containg 360°. (See Plate I. fig. 3.) 
 The horizontal line must be taken for the equator. 
 The quarter then in which the dot or point ap- 
 pears, should be divided by 90 lines, but as this 
 would completely conceal the surface of the 
 diagram, and obliterate the little point itself, we 
 will divide it into 9 parts. (See Plate I. fig. 4.) 
 
 The point is now evidently within the first 
 stripe or line, and if these lines be named /adders, 
 
 * The earth is, as every oue knows, an oblate spheroid, 
 but it would be needless t* descend to particular*, in a 
 general illustration. 
 
70 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 we shall say it is on the first ladder ; but its situa- 
 tion is now only half determined. These ladders 
 are divided into steps ; and each has nine steps. 
 This will be effected by drawing 8 horizontal 
 lines across those already made. (See Plate I. 
 fig. 5.) The point is still on the first ladder, 
 but on what step? It is on the sixth step. 
 
 Two rooms should be provided, with four walls 
 in each ; in the upper room is to be placed the 
 northern hemisphere, and the southern is to be 
 supposed under the northern, in the lower room. 
 We will begin with the northern hemisphere, di- 
 viding it into four equal parts or quarters; trans- 
 ferring one quarter to the first wall. (See Plat* 
 I. fig. 6. 
 
 The former division of a wall was thus : 
 
 1 1 2|3 
 
 4 j 5 | 6 
 
 7 I 8 I 9 
 
 It will not, however, be more difficult to re- 
 member nine figures in one line, than in three. 
 The floor of the upper room in which we stand 
 is the equator ; upon this we reckon the longi- 
 tude. From the pole to the equator there are 
 90°, but we only place 60° on the wall, the re- 
 maining 30° being fixed in the ceiling. In each 
 of these squares, there are 10° of longitude, and 
 10° of latitude. 
 
GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 71 
 
 The horizontal lines are parallels of latitude, 
 and the perpendicular lines are meridians or cir- 
 cles of longitude. 
 
 The series of walls in the first room will be as 
 follows : 
 
 I. 
 
 1 
 
 2 1 3 
 
 4 
 
 .5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 II. 
 
 10 1 11 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 15 
 
 16 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 III. 
 
 19 
 
 20 
 
 21 
 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 24 
 
 25 
 
 26 
 
 9.7 
 
 IV. 
 
 28 
 
 29 
 
 30 
 
 31 
 
 32 
 
 33 
 
 34 
 
 35 
 
 36 
 
 Upon referring to the globe, it will be found 
 that the whole hemisphere, north of the equator, 
 has been transferred into the first or upper room ; 
 the southern hemisphere being reserved for the 
 room beneath. 
 
 Before we proceed further, the meridian must 
 be fixed. This, in English charts, is taken from 
 London, or more correctly from Greenwich, 
 counting the longitude east and west from that 
 place. The French place their meridian in 
 Paris, but they mark also in their maps the lon- 
 gitude from Ferro, from which island, all the 
 other European nations commence theirs; by 
 these means, the longitude which is laid down on 
 a foreign map is comprehensible by them, and 
 the Parisian mode is easily understood by any 
 
Tt NEW ART OF MEMOKY. 
 
 other continental geographer, but our maps are 
 not intelligible any where but in England. 
 
 In making our calculation we shall adopt the 
 meridian of Ferro, because it divides the globe 
 into those two equal parts or hemispheres, which 
 are usually represented on maps. Suppose a 
 place to be in 254° of longitude, and 43° of 
 latitude ; on what ladder, on what step, and on 
 what wall will it occur ? We must take £54, 
 (and as it will be remembered our hemisphere is 
 divided only into tens of degrees) we must cut 
 off the unit figure, thus 25,4, and we have 25 left, 
 but as the 25th ladder would include only those 
 degrees under 250, and 254 being above that 
 number, it is on the 26th ladder. To ascertain 
 on what wall this 26th ladder is, and its nume- 
 rical situation there, the figures 2 and 6 must be 
 added together; the product gives the number of 
 the ladder. By counting the difference between 
 6 and 8, thus 6, 7, 8, three, the number of the 
 wall is given. In the latitude 43, the 3 is re- 
 jected, and 43 being past 40 it is on the fifth 
 step. A place then in longitude 254 and lati- 
 tude 43, will be found on the 26th ladder, fifth 
 step ; or on the third wall, eighth ladder, and 
 fifth step. 
 
 If we read that an engagement had taken place 
 between two ships in 324° longitude, 36° S. lati- 
 tude, how shall we find on which wall this spot 
 
GEOGRAPHY. 7S 
 
 is situated ? We know that south latitude must be 
 in the lower room, and that 36 being more than 
 30, must be on the 4th ladder step. For the 
 longitude, as in the foregoing example, we cut 
 off the unit 32,4 — 324 is more than 320, there- 
 fore it must be on the 33rd ladder ; these two 
 figures are now added together ; the product 6 
 gives the situation on the wall, and by counting 
 from 3 to 6 — 3, 4, 5, 6, we get 4, which is the 
 number of the wall. This event, therefore, took 
 place near the mouth of the Rio de la Plata ; on 
 the 4th wall, 6th ladder, and 4th step, of the 
 southern room. 
 
 Sect. 2. — General Geography. 
 
 We are now provided with a geographical net, 
 with which all the different places may be taken, 
 from the smallest to the largest. What we have 
 learned in the common way on globes is soon 
 forgotten, there being no connecting* media to 
 bring the different countries to our recollection. 
 Supposing we are looking at a globe, and we fix 
 our eyes upon England, we cannot see its anti- 
 podes ; places can be seen only in one direction. 
 The Chinese, when shown a map of the world, 
 said, why put us up in a corner ? we are in the 
 centre. In fact, every where is the centre, and 
 
 H 
 
74 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 the centre is every where. The whole circum- 
 ference is equally distant from us wherever we 
 may be. The four quarters of the northern 
 hemisphere being arranged on the four walls, 
 when we are in the room, we can, in an instant, 
 see every part of the hemisphere. (See Plate 
 IV.) 
 
 On the Jirst wall will be a part of the Atlantic 
 Ocean, the whole of Europe and a great part of 
 Africa and Asia. 
 
 On the second wall will be found the remain- 
 der of Asia, and a large proportion of the North 
 Pacific Ocean. 
 
 On the third wall there is a continuance of the 
 Northern Pacific Ocean, and a part of North 
 America. 
 
 On the fourth wall there is the remainder of 
 North America, part of South America, the 
 American Islands or West Indies, and a great 
 part of the Atlantic or great Western Ocean. 
 This completes the northern hemisphere, and 
 occupies the first or upper room. 
 
 In the second or lower room, (see Plate V.) 
 on the first wall, we have a part of the Southern 
 Atlantic Ocean, part of Africa, and the Indian 
 Ocean. 
 
 The second wall is occupied by the remainder 
 of the Indian Ocean, the Indian Archipelago, 
 and by New Holland. 
 
c 
 
 ' 
 
!*uNhhnt >y .<inrxr,w,t . y.vix ..i„.t . 7.;u j P.rr.ii"'Jtfr7t.n,\_-f,t,w*tli , J,S'f?. 
 
 • 
 
GEOGRAPHY. 75 
 
 The third wall contains the Southern Pacific 
 Ocean, and the South Sea Islands. 
 
 The fourth wall has nearly the whole of South 
 America. 
 
 Thus there are in the northern Room the 
 whole Continent of Europe and Asia, the greater 
 part of Africa, the whole of North, and part of 
 South America ; the lower, or Southern Room 
 containing the remainder of Africa and South 
 America, the Asiatic Islands, Polynesia and 
 Australasia. 
 
 Supposing the windows of our room to be on 
 one side, if we stand with our back to them, the 
 first wall is on the left ; litis wall is divided into 
 nine ladders, which show the longitude, and each 
 ladder into nine steps, giving the latitude. 
 
 On \he first ladder, Just step, there is almost 
 entirely sea, being a part of the Atlantic Ocean ,• 
 a small portion of Africa, however, is discover- 
 ed. On this part Sierra Leone is situated. The 
 square on which this falls is known by the num- 
 ber 11, (1st. ladder, 1st. step,) — here the symbol 
 for 1 1 is, the Pillars of Hercules. These pil- 
 lars are placed in the square ; one pillar is fixed 
 in the sea, the other on land. Leone will recal 
 to mind the name of a Lion ; a lion must be 
 placed between the pillars, and the situation of 
 this place will then be fixed in the memory. 
 On the second step there is a part of the At- 
 
76 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 lantic Ocean and of Africa ; upon this part of 
 Africa are Senegal, Cape Verde, and Goree ; and 
 the symbol for the 1,2th place (1st ladder, 2d 
 step,) is David with the (ion; if it be said that 
 David in tearing the sinews of the lion, is gored 
 by the animal ; and that he has a green cap 
 in his hand, these three places will be fixed 
 in this square. It is quite sufficient if the vvords 
 given recal the names of the places to our me- 
 mory. 
 
 On the third step are the Canary Islands ; 
 these are somewhat like a cluster of birds (Ca- 
 nary Birds) that must fly round the Pyramid, 
 the symbol for 1, 3, (1st ladder, 3d step.) 
 
 On the fourth step, there is part of Portugal, 
 and the island of Madeira. The symbol for 14 
 is Diogenes with the lantern. This man is the 
 proprietor of the island, and has come to Ma- 
 deira from Lisbon, on purpose to drink a bottle 
 of his favourite beverage. 
 
 On the fifth step is Cape Finisterre. The 
 symbol for \5 is JEsculapius with his serpent; 
 a serpent then shall be placed at the extremity of 
 the land, (Finis terra.) 
 
 On the sixth step there is a small part of Ire- 
 land. The symbol for l6is Ceres, or the glean- 
 er ; she shall have a garland upon her head ; 
 gar-land and Ire-land are too much alike in 
 sound to be easily forgotten. 
 
GEOGRAPHY. 77 
 
 On the seventh step is Iceland. The sym- 
 bol f >r 17 is Archimedes, or the Carpenter; 
 he is breaking up the ice, and that we may re- 
 member the name of the celebrated uiotintain, 
 Hecla, we will say, that he acquits himself with 
 very great eclat. 
 
 These illustrations seem amply sufficient to di- 
 rect the pupil in the application of this art to 
 geography, so far as it relates to the use of the 
 symboN, and the connecting ideas to be asso- 
 ciated with them. 
 
 While we count our meridians ail east from 
 Ferro, it must be remembered, that in English 
 maps, London, or rather Greenwich, is taken 
 for the first meridian, from which the degrees 
 are counted ISO 1 East, and I 80° West. If a place 
 be described in longitude 121° west of London ; 
 to reduce it to the meridian from Ferro, 121° must 
 be subtracted from 180°, (the whole number of 
 degrees west,) the remainder is 59, which add^-d 
 to 180, and the 18° difference between the cal- 
 culation from London and Ferro, will give the 
 product 27o°. A place then which is 121° west 
 of Loudon, may be said to be 257° east of 
 Ferro. The meridian of Paris is 20° east bom 
 Ferro, and 2 from the meridian of London. 
 This process is at once simple and correct, and 
 will allow us to use a general meridian which 
 H 3 
 
78 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 will be intelligible on all maps, and to all per- 
 sons. 
 
 The best mode of learning the geography is 
 to take a chart of Mercator's projection of the 
 earth, in which "the degrees of latitude and longi- 
 tude are marked by tens, that it may coincide 
 with the divisions on the walls, each of the 
 squares there containing 100°; 10° both ways. 
 All the squares in the map must be covered 
 with a sheet of paper, except one, that is 
 the first step on the first ladder ; the space 
 taken up by the land in this square should be 
 noticed, and the outline of the land described in 
 the map, and traced upon a drawing, or diagram, 
 of the first wall, divided into ladders, and ladder- 
 steps, as seen before. These squares should be * 
 sufficiently large to show some of the principal 
 projections of the land, that the most remark- 
 able places may be inserted ; thus constructing a 
 small chart. 
 
 Jn the lower room, which contains the south- 
 ern hemisphere, we must count downward, 
 I, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, etc. still beginning with the 
 equator. 
 
 Every one of the small squares may be divided 
 into degrees. 
 
GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 79 
 
 1234 5 67890 
 
 ' i ! — t. 
 
 h 
 
 Suppose the point in this square to represent 
 Madeira. This point is about one-fifth of the 
 whole, therefore, it is in 2° of longitude, and a 
 little less than one-fifth of the whole 10° of lati- 
 tude, we see then 32°^ of latitude, and 2° of lon- 
 gitude; there is not an eiror of | of a degree. 
 
3t) NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 To ascertain the relative situation of town*, 
 some association must be formed between the 
 towns and cities found in any one square. 
 If a sort of narrative be invented, the me- 
 moi y will be materially assisted. We will take 
 25 for an example : in this are many towns, 
 as Madrid, Barcelona, Bourdeaux, Rochelle, 
 Brest, Rouen, and Paris. The symbol for 25 
 is Sancho Panza. Sancho then must set out on 
 his travels; he departs from Madrid, and ar- 
 rives at Barcelona, where he has to call for 
 some parcels (Barcelona) ; he then goes to 
 Bourdeaux, and is very fond of drinking a 
 bumper of good Bourdeaux wine; thence lie 
 travels to Roclielle, where he rests on a rock : 
 being pressed for time at Bred, he departs for 
 Rouen ; and by rowing down the Seine, arrives 
 at last at Paris. To remove the apparent diffi- 
 culty of fixing the names of so many squares, it 
 must be observed that, the greater proportion 
 of them is occupied by sea, where, of course, 
 there is nothing to fix. It may also be sup- 
 posed, that as there are no less than eight elevens, 
 there will be much confusion in remembering 
 the name of any particular place. An associa- 
 tion has already been formed for the eleven in 
 the first wall. In the eleven in the second wall 
 is Ceu'on : it i^not likely that w r e shall ever com- 
 mit so great an error- as to place Ceylon on our 
 
GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 SI 
 
 first wall, or Sierra Leone, or Goree, on the 
 second. The locality of each is so permanently 
 fixed as to defy any thing like confusion. 
 
 Sect. 3. — Particular Geography. 
 
 In particular charts the divisions are different 
 from those in general charts ; being divided into 
 much smaller parts. 
 
 61 
 60 
 
 :>9 
 "iS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 55 
 .V! 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 26 
 
 37 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 
 
 The above is a chart with a series of figures. 
 The figures which run along the bottom of this 
 chart are the degrees of longitude ; those which 
 run up the sides are the degrees of latitude. The 
 Latitude must be counted North or South of the 
 Equator, and the Longitude, East or West of the 
 first meridian. There is here a series of ladders 
 
82 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 and steps, but very differently numbered from 
 those which have been seen before. The square 
 in longitude €9°, and latitude 65°, if brought to- 
 gether will make 2955 ; the tens must be re- 
 jected, and the units only left. We know that 
 the squares in longitude, from 20 to SO, are on 
 the third ladder, and from 30 to 40 on the fourth ; 
 and that the latitude begins on the sixth ladder 
 step. To remember this, some word must be 
 formed from the two figures. Having: cut off the 
 lens, we find 2955 becomes 9 longitude, and 5 
 latitude. The minutes are next to be determined. 
 The distance from line to line is 60 minutes, one 
 half will of course be 30 minutes; ^ — 15 ;f — 46 ; 
 £ — 12; 7 2 — 5. When the geography of Eng- 
 land is to be learned, we should commence from 
 the bottom or South of the map, as England is 
 above the equator : when any country is beneath 
 the equator, we must - of course count down- 
 wards. Although the floor is not used in geo- 
 graphy, it will be convenient to suppose this 
 chart of England placed upon the floor, that the 
 different counties may be arranged in order ; or 
 it may be supposed to be on a table, &c. or on 
 any other object. 
 
 England is generally divided into Circuits, 
 each of which contains a certain number of 
 counties. 
 
GEOGRAPHY. 83 
 
 Circuits in England and Wales. 
 I II III IV V VI VII VIII 
 
 r 
 
 a 4 
 (J 
 
 The usual division of the Counties is into 
 Home Circuits, etc. etc. but this will not be 
 adopted here. The following is our arrange- 
 ment of them. 
 
 I. South East. Sussex, Hertfordshire, Kent, 
 Middlesex, Essex, Surrey. 
 
 II. South West. Hampshire, Wiltshire, Dor- 
 setshire, Somersetshire, Devonshire, Cornwall. 
 
 HI. East. Suffolk, Norfolk, Cambridge- 
 shire, Bedfordshire, Huntingdonshire, Bucking- 
 hamshire. 
 
 IV. West. Berkshire, Oxfordshire, Glouces- 
 tershire, Worcestershire, Monmouthshire, Here- 
 fordshire, Shropshire. 
 
 V, Midland. Northamptonshire, Rutland- 
 
84 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 shire, Lincolnshire, Leicestershire, Nottingham- 
 shire, Warwickshire, Derbyshire, Staffordshire, 
 Cheshire. 
 
 VI. North. Yorkshire, Durham, Northum- 
 berland, Lancashire, Westmoreland, Cumber- 
 land. 
 
 VII. North Wales. Montgomeryshire, Den- 
 bighshire, Flintshire, Merionethshire, Caernar- 
 vonshire, Anglesea. 
 
 VIII. South Wales. Glamorganshire, Breck- 
 nockshire, Radnorshire, Caermarthenshire, Car- 
 diganshire, Pembrokeshire. 
 
 All these Circuits are numbered in a series as 
 ladders, and the counties are the steps ; there- 
 fore 4,4 will be 4th circuit, 4th county, and so 
 of the rest. The symbol of 44 is a piano- 
 forte ; if it be said that the keys of the instrument 
 are bound with worsted, Worcestershire will be 
 immediately brought to our recollection. In the 
 same manner we must proceed with the others, 
 fixing each on a symbol, and connecting some 
 strange and ludicrous idea with this symbol. 
 
 The student should be prepared with a small 
 map of England which is not coloured ; and 
 colour the circuits, each with a separate colour, 
 The first, for instance, blue ; the second, yel- 
 low ; the third, green ; the fourth, red ; the 
 fifth, lilac ; and when he comes to the sixth, 
 begin again. When this is done, it must be 
 
GEOGRAPHY. 85 
 
 remembered that the numerical order of the Cir- 
 cuits is represented by the different colours. The 
 first colour will be blue, the second yellow. 
 
 When the counties are numbered, the pupil 
 must count upwards, commencing with the 
 lowest. The more effectually to distinguish 
 their numerical order, we use the colours. 
 The first county in the first circuit, must be 
 bordered with blue; the second county with 
 yellow ; the third with green, etc. and the like 
 with the other remaining counties in the circuit. 
 The numerical order of the counties will thus be 
 firmly impressed on the memory. 
 
 France contains one hundred and ten depart- 
 ments. These are to be divided into eleven Re- 
 gions, containing ten departments in each. The 
 regions should be arranged in geographical order, 
 commencing from the equator, and counting 
 upwards. The meridian is taken from Paris. 
 West of this meridian we commence with O, the 
 region of the Pyrenees. On the East is I the 
 Region of the Mediterranean, II of Piedmont, 
 III of Charente, IV of Lake Leman, V Central 
 Region, VI Finisterre, VII Region of Jurat, 
 Vlil of the Seine, IX of the Rhone, X northern 
 Region. 
 
 If we wish to know the thirty-fifth depart- 
 ment, it will be found in the third region, fifth 
 department. To distinguish the region there are 
 I 
 
86 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 five colours ; one colour serves for I and VI, a 
 second for II and VII, a third for III and VIII. 
 In the same manner one department is distin- 
 guished from another. 
 
 Sect. 4. — Statistics. 
 
 It has been shewn that by the aid of the first 
 principles of this science, it will not be difficult 
 to find the situation of kingdoms, provinces, 
 etc. and their respective longitude and latitude. 
 There are, however, many other particulars 
 which it is important to remember, as the num- 
 ber of inhabitants, the natural products, the 
 military power, the extent in square miles, the 
 form of government, the state of commerce, of 
 the arts, etc. etc. These may be all fixed in 
 the memory with equal facility. Suppose that 
 there is before us, a table, and that all the 
 kingdoms of Europe, are placed upon it, and 
 arranged according to their relative importance. 
 This is shewn in the following statistical table. 
 
GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 87 
 
 ' 'JO 
 
 5" 
 s 
 r> 
 
 > 
 
 P 
 
 s 
 
 a 
 c 
 B 
 
 p 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 © 
 
 o 
 
 < 
 
 re 
 
 1 
 rt 
 a 
 
 W 
 
 M 
 
 re 
 
 3 
 B" 
 
 ■f 
 5* 
 
 P 
 
 © 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 TS 
 
 o" 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 da 
 
 
 a. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 
 05 
 
 2. I-H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 | 
 
 
 »— 1 
 
 a 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 * — 
 
 a ^ 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 «! 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 HI 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <j 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 t— 1 
 1— 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 CO 
 
 PS. 
 
 C. 
 
 
 
88 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 The first symbol being the Tower of Babel, 
 it must be connected, in some manner, with the 
 kingdom, which is placed first. This is Eng- 
 land. The Tower of Babel was the cause of 
 the confusion of languages : in England are 
 heard many different languages. Spain shall be 
 II. The symbol for 2 is a Swan ; a swan then 
 is placed in the sea, between Spain and Eng- 
 land, and it will swim to England to convey 
 intelligence. Ill is France, and is represented 
 by the mountain, or Parnassus ; — the Muses 
 are banished from France. IV is Sweden, 
 -represented by a Looking-glass, which may be 
 emblematic of the smooth surface of the Baltic 
 Sea, when calm, and at rest. By such compa- 
 risons as these it will be easy to fix any thing that 
 may be required. It now remains to mention 
 the objects in the particular squares or places. 
 
 1. Population. The symbol for this square 
 is the Tower of Babel. From the top of a 
 tower, some idea may be formed of the popula- 
 tion of a city, by the number of people walking 
 in the streets. 
 
 2. Natural products. This square is repre- 
 sented by the swan. A swan is an animal. 
 Animals may be reckoned among the natural 
 products of a country. 
 
 3. Military power. A fortification may be 
 supposed to be on % mountain ; and, as (his is 
 
GEOGUAPHY. 80 
 
 the symbol for 3, the military power will imme- 
 diate 1 )' occur to us. 
 
 4. Extent in square miles The looking- glass, 
 which represents 4, will by its four-square figure, 
 call to mind the square miles. 
 
 5. Government, ft will not be difficult to 
 connect the idea of a throne, with that of govern- 
 ment, whether it be monarchial, republican, or 
 
 'any other form of government. A throne is the 
 symbol for fj. 
 
 6. State of commerce Commerce, the source 
 of plenty, may well be represented by the Horn 
 of Plenty, the symbol for 6. 
 
 7. Arts and Manufactures. To remember 
 these it will be only necessary to think of the 
 "Glass-blower, the symbol for 7. 
 
 8. The Sciences. The symbol for 8, Midas, 
 or the man with long ears, is capacitated for the 
 reception of all branches of science. 
 
 There is here again a series of ladders and 
 ladder-steps, which must be denominated by 
 their respective numbers. In the number 2,4 
 there is Q for Spam, and 4 for the extent in 
 square miles, or the second ladder, fourth step: 
 4,6 is the Commerce of Sweden; fourth ladder, 
 sixth step. 
 
 -In the statistical table may be placed every 
 ^particular that it is necessary to know respecting 
 i 3 
 
'90 NEW ART OF MEMORV. 
 
 a nation. The manner of application for each 
 square is now considered. 
 
 1. Population. This is changing every year ; 
 the thousands and hundreds must therefore be 
 omitted, and the millions only preserved. The 
 population for England will be the number 1, 1, 
 first ladder, first step : this is represented by the 
 pillars of Hercules England contains 16 mil- 
 lions of Inhabitants.* This number will be fixed 
 in the memory by changing the figures into a 
 word ; t d will be the consonants giving the num- 
 ber; — it may be said then, that there is a Toad 
 crawling up the pillars of Hercules. 
 
 2. Natural Products. If a country be re- 
 markable for the excellence of its horses, a rude 
 outline of this animal may be drawn in the 
 square belonging to the natural products. If it 
 contains extensive salt mines, a barrel or basket 
 of salt may be placed by the horse; if good 
 wine, two bottles of wine should be added ; iron 
 may be represented by bars, and sheep by an 
 outline, as with the horse. To connect these 
 
 'circumstances together, some narrative should 
 
 'be invented, the more improbable and ludicrous 
 
 the better. The horse being pressed by hunger, 
 
 'eats the salt, but becoming thirsty, in conse- 
 
 . "* According to the last-Population- Retdras, 16/552*444 
 
GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 91 
 
 quence, drinks the wine ; the wine has an effect 
 upon him, he becomes frantic, breaks the bars 
 of iron, and endangers the safety of the sheep. 
 The symbol for 12 is David with the Lion; 
 David must hold the horse, and take especial 
 care that the Lion does not devour the sheep. 
 
 In the course of our reading, if it be required 
 to commit to memory any remarkable circum- 
 stance respecting a country, we should take a 
 sheet of paper and divide it as our table is di- 
 vided, placing in the appropriate squares a re- 
 semblance, or rude outline, of the object or 
 circumstance to be remembered. This mode 
 will assist the memory very materially, and ex- 
 cite a greater degree of attention than the mere 
 idea which is presented to the mind by reading. 
 
 3. Military Power. The state of the mili- 
 tary force, in time of peace as well as of war, 
 must be considered, with the divisions into artil- 
 lery, cavalry, and infantry; or, any other ar- 
 rangement may be made which the nature of the 
 military force, in any particular country, may 
 ^demand. The square may be thus divided 't 
 
 
 Navy 
 
 Artillery 
 
 Cavalry 
 
 Infantry 
 
 £ 
 
9S NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 4. Extent in Square Miles. Here we should 
 divide the square into several parts, significant 
 ©f the face of the country ; whether it be culti- 
 vated or uncultivated, wood- land, meadow, or 
 pasture, arable, etc. and what may be the extent 
 of water in the country. 
 
 5. Government. If the government be mo- 
 narchal, a king may be supposed sitting upon the 
 throne, attended by princes ; or, if of the mixed 
 kind, he is supported by Lords and Commons. 
 
 6. Commerce. In this are arranged the prin- 
 cipal exports and imports, and whatever relates 
 to trade in general. 
 
 7. ArU and Manufactures. Those of Eng- 
 land might be represented in many ways. It 
 will be sufficient, perhaps, to place there the 
 steam-engine and the cotton-mill, and there will 
 be a visible remembrance of the arts and manu- 
 factures of our own country. 
 
 8. The Sciences. To this square belong the 
 principal universities or foundations for, the pro- 
 pagation and increase of knowledge, with the 
 various literary and scientific Institutions, as also 
 the philosophers, poets, etc. etc. 
 
 This general system of statistics is applicable, 
 of course, to any particular country, and to its 
 •various subdivisions. In England, for instance, 
 it might be applied to every county, in the same 
 'maimer, as it is used for the -whole -kiiigdom. 
 
CHAP. IV. 
 
 ^tetorp* 
 
 J. he pupil having acquired some knowledge of 
 the details of geography, including statistical ta- 
 bles, and also of the mode of fixing in his me- 
 mory the chronological succession of sovereigns, 
 will proceed to the study of history with peculiar 
 advantages. 
 
 The following arrangement of some dates will 
 introduce us to the application of the mnemoni- 
 cal principles to history. 
 
 Room 
 
 Stripe 
 
 Place 
 
 17 
 
 8 
 
 6 
 
 15 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 14 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 12 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 9 
 
 7 
 
 4 
 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 
 9 
 
 There are here units of years, tens of years, or 
 decenuials ; and hundreds or centuries. As the 
 division into rooms already noticed, will be here 
 resorted to, we cut oflf the first series of units, 
 and call them places ; the next which are rejected 
 
f)4, NEW AttT OF MEMORY. 
 
 are named stripes ; and the remaining figures, 
 rooms. For example, 1786, would be seven- 
 teenth room, eighth stripe, and sixth place ; 
 1524, fifteenth room, second stripe, and fourth 
 place, and so of the rest. 87 is in O room, or 
 the room of units and tens,* eighth stripe, and 
 seventh place. When we view a choice collec- 
 tion of pictures, some impressions of the excel- 
 lence of a particular picture, and of its situation 
 in the room or gallery, are generally fixed in the 
 mind. The remembrance of one picture will 
 suggest the situation of another, and in this 
 manner it will not be difficult to fix the places 
 of the more conspicuous paintings : and if there 
 are many rooms, the particular room may be 
 distinguished. Instead of a room being filled 
 with pictures, it is easy to imagine that it is oc- 
 cupied by the events of a whole century : in this 
 room are all the years, reduced to localities. 
 
 A room is now taken with three walls, (see 
 Plate I. fig. 7-) each of which is divided into 
 three stripes; and each stripe into nine compart- 
 ments or squares, as we have, in some instances, 
 done on our walls. 
 
 Each of these stripes is now a ten ; and before 
 the first ten, there is O stripe, which is placed 
 
 * Tbe second is the room of centuries. 
 
HISTORY. U5 
 
 on the floor: on this are put 1, 2., 3, etc. to 9. 
 The number 100 must be placed on the cieling 
 of the second room, which should be divided in 
 the same way. This number will also serve as 
 an inscription to designate the room. 
 
 As it will be needful to appropriate a room to 
 each century, there will be occasion for a series 
 of rooms. This series will be thus arranged. 
 
 1 1 | 2 | 3 
 
 4 | .5 | 6 
 
 7 | 8 | 9 _ 
 
 Here are the hundreds; and those before 100 
 are placed in the preceding or O room. There 
 is now a necessity for a tenth room. To obviate 
 this inconvenience it will be easy to suppose that 
 the house is a double home. Thus we shall be 
 furnished with rooms for 2000 years. 
 
 But whence, it will be asked, are so many 
 rooms to be procured i 1 Every one is familiar 
 with the apartments in his own house. All 
 these rooms must be employed, and named, 
 first, seventh, fourth, etc. and it will be better 
 to choose rooms which are supplied with pic- 
 tures, furniture, or some other remarkable ob- 
 jects, upon which numbers may be fixed. Each 
 room will be distinguished by one of the sym- 
 bols. File Jirst room will have the tower of 
 Babel painted upon it; and to fix this more 
 
96 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 strongly upon the memory, it may be observed 
 that the proprietor of the room is a great linguist, 
 and the idea of the confusion of languages can- 
 not fail to suggest to us the Tozcer of Babel, the 
 distinguishing symbol of this room. 
 
 The second room will be designated by the 
 Swan ; the occupant of this room may be much 
 attached to the study of ornithology ; he may 
 be fond of birds, and possess an extensive 
 
 aviary. 
 
 The third room will have Parnassus or the 
 Mountain; this room may be the habitation of a 
 poet, or of one who has a taste for poetry. If there 
 be not a sufficient number of rooms in our own 
 house, some of those belonging to our friends 
 may be engaged, whether they be at London, 
 Edinburgh, or Vienna. Haviug placed them 
 ideally in order, we are now ready to fix what- 
 ever is required to be remembered. 
 
 For example, in the history of England it will 
 be found that William the Conqueror began to 
 reign in 1066. This date must be placed in 
 the tenth room, sixth stripe, and sixth place. 
 The tenth room will belong to Goliath, and we 
 shall have associated this idea with the room, by 
 comparing the possessor to Goliath in size and 
 shape, or in character for courage, bravery, or 
 
HISTORY. 97 
 
 any other similar quality. The second king is 
 William Rufus, who ascended the throne in the 
 year 1087 ; he will, of course, be placed in the 
 same room, on the eighth stripe, and seventh 
 place, and the whole of the stripes and places 
 between this and the former, may be devoted to 
 William the Conqueror. 
 
 Charlemagne, who was crowned Emperor in 
 the year 800, is, naturally, placed on the cieling 
 of the eighth room, — the room belonging to 
 Midas. With Charlemagne may be arranged 
 Egbert, or any king of another country whose 
 reign was coeval with that of Charlemagne. 
 
 When the present historical arrangement has 
 become familiar, it will be proper to take a 
 sheet of paper for every century, forming a room 
 and making the proper divisions of three walls 
 and a floor, as above described. A particular 
 fact may be then put upon paper, by sketching a 
 rude outline of the circumstances, by figures 
 of animate or inanimate beings ; this, though it 
 may appear to some unnecessary, will imprint the 
 different facts upon the memory more forcibly 
 than the usual mode of committing them to 
 writing. This will be sufficiently exemplified by 
 the following hieroglyphic : 
 
98 
 
 NEW ART OF MEMORT. 
 
 It is thus explained. A convention was en- 
 tered into in Egypt, between General Kleber, 
 on the part of the French, and the Grand Vizier y 
 on the part of the Sublime Porte, which was 
 approved by the Cabinet of London. The 
 straight line with the crescent on its top denotes 
 the Grand Vizier, by its superior height to the 
 perpendicular line which is to represent General 
 Kleber ; the line drawn through the centre of 
 this line forming 2 acute angles, is intended for 
 the General's sword. To denote the convention 
 two lines are drawn, which meet together in the 
 centre, and represent the shaking of hands, or a 
 meeting. The convention was formed in Egypt, 
 which is signified by a pyramid. The Cabinet 
 of London is typified by the outline of a cabinet 
 on the right of the diagram ; the head of a ship 
 placed in the squaie denotes London, as it is 
 frequented more than any other port by ships. 
 
HISTORY. 99 
 
 It is not to be supposed that each division will 
 become more difficult in proportion as it is filled 
 with events. The reverse indeed will be the 
 case. It is a much greater labor to retain a few 
 facts scattered throughout the different squares, 
 than it is to remember a multiplicity of them, 
 each being arranged in order. If we take a few 
 insulated facts, there can be but little connexion 
 between them ; but when there is a multiplicity 
 of events disposed in order, by associating them 
 together, the one assists the remembrance of the 
 other, -and a strong connecting chain is formed, 
 the links of which can scarcely be broken. The 
 facility of committing these facts to memory is 
 increased by their number. In selecting the 
 facts we should be careful to take the simple 
 facts ; and not to mistake their connecting cir- 
 cumstances, or consequences, for the facts them- 
 selves. 
 
 It may be asked, perhaps, is there not occa- 
 sion for a different room for every country ? Cer- 
 tainly not. The history of one country must 
 never be separated from the history of another 
 country. We can scarcely speak of an event of 
 very great political importance which has hap- 
 pened in England, without involving the history 
 of most of the European States, of the East 
 Indies, etc. etc. The political interests of one 
 country are almost always united with those of 
 
100 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 another country. Sometimes, the events of one 
 nation are of high importance ; sometimes those 
 of another nation. The gradual progress of a 
 nation to power, and the gradual decline and 
 extinction of that power must be familiar to 
 every one who is, in the slightest degree, ac- 
 quainted with history. The wheel of power, 
 like the fabled wheel of fortune, is continually 
 revolving; and, as one nation, in one century, 
 takes the lead in importance and influence; the 
 next views it sunk into insignificance, and conse- 
 quently very unproductive ©f peculiar or striking 
 events. 
 
 Some, however, may object, that we shall 
 not be able to distinguish any particular event, so 
 as to assign this event to its proper country. 
 There can be, however, no fear of this. Some 
 particular circumstances connected with, and 
 inseparable from, the fact itself, cannot fail to 
 distinguish, the country in which this event hap- 
 pened, whether in England, France, Spain, Ger- 
 many, or any other part of the world. 
 
 Hitherto thai period of time only has been 
 considered which is posterior to the Birth of 
 Christ. Antecedently to this period, however, 
 there is a space of four thousand and four years. 
 This time, though embracing a large number of 
 y ars, is by no means so pregnant with events as 
 that after the Birth of Christ. 
 
HISTORY. 10 i 
 
 Plate I. fig. 8. represents die series of centu- 
 ries, and on the reft of this series are placed the 
 events that happened fro in the creation to the 
 Birth of Christ. 
 
 -It would be easy to assign to each year its 
 proper place ; but the first 3000 years are so 
 barren of events, that it would be useless to do- 
 so ; and the difficulty of remembrance would be 
 enhanced by the paucity of Hates worthy of bring 
 committed to memorv. We oujrht not to take 
 rooms where there is nothing to fix It is only 
 necessary to know the true series of facts, the 
 years must be put into words. There are but 
 four years before the four thousandth year. In 
 these the Creation, and the birth of Cain and 
 Abel, are the principal events. From 4000 to 
 1000 there are not more than thirty principal 
 facts. If there were 300, not more than three 
 rooms would be required. The period which 
 includes the histories of Greece and Rome, will 
 produce a greater number of facts; and there 
 will be more certainty as to the dates. From 
 the building of Rome then to the Birth of Christ, 
 there will be occasion for seven rooms. (See 
 Plate I. fig. 9.) 
 
 These remarks will suffice for the antient and 
 modern history, — for the antediluvian and post- 
 diluvian periods. We may, however, wish to 
 
 remember not only the principal facts in general 
 •K 3 
 
102 NEW ART O* MEMORY. 
 
 history, but to enchain and fix the fleeting 
 visions of the moment, — those passing incidents 
 which interest, amuse, or instruct us. " The 
 sacred treasure of the past," is not the only 
 P. substantial shadow," which will be registered 
 in our ideal repository. We shall be enabled to 
 arrange future events, and thus have an orderly 
 disposition of every circumstance of business or 
 pleasure, in which we may be engaged. In this 
 repository may be placed passing events, those 
 already entombed in the grave of time, and those 
 which are yet to seek the same sepulchre. Our 
 ideal almanack will enable us not only to regis- 
 ter appointments- — but to enrol the payment of 
 bills and other mercantile concerns. To the 
 diarist it will be a neverfailing source of profit- 
 able instruction and amusement. 
 
 To fix the events of a whole year more places 
 are required. Our year is divided into months, 
 weeks, and days; and into four seasons. Every 
 room has four sides. Every season contains 
 three months, and each wall contains three 
 stripes. (See Plate I. fig. 10.) The months are 
 named first, second, third, fourth, and so on; 
 on each stripe are the days of the month, and 
 consequently a sufficient number of squares or 
 places, in which the facts and events may be 
 arranged. To remember the first, second, and 
 ^hird months, the figures may be changed into 
 
HISTORY. TOS 
 
 letters, and the letters into words, if necessary. 
 If it be required to commit to memory some 
 remarkable circumstance which happened on the 
 25th of June, we should take the figures 6,25 
 (sixth month, 25th day,) and change them into 
 letters ; these would be d n I ; of this we might 
 make Daniel, or any other word that would 
 associate better with the nature of the event. If 
 it be 6,8 (June 8th) we might say d v. (clove) 
 and connect it with the leading feature of the 
 event. 
 
 The advantage of resorting to symbols for 
 the representation of sensible objects, has, al- 
 ready been insisted upon : it must, however, 
 be repeated, that the rude outline of any one 
 object, if drawn upon the paper, will contri- 
 bute more essentially to imprint the circum- 
 stance upon the memory, than whole pages of 
 laboured description and minute detail. The 
 Egyptian hieroglyphics were formed in this 
 way, and the key to their interpretation (the 
 combination of the different images) was a sacred 
 trust reposited with the priests. The symbols 
 which may be formed will serve the purpose of 
 secret writing : for we may be well assured that 
 they will be as unintelligible to every one but 
 ourselves, as the priest- writing was, to the 
 profanum vulgus of Egypt. 
 
CEIAP. V. 
 
 language* 
 
 'Seel. 1. — On learning Languages. 
 
 A'HE learning of Languages is, in rfhese tlays, 
 an object of such general pursuit, and at the 
 same time of such real importance, that every 
 plan of instruction which has for its object to 
 abridge the labour of this study, or to give per- 
 manence (o its acquisitions, comes to our con- 
 sideration with the strongest claims on our 
 attention. The first approach to the study of 
 Languages .presents to view a long and dreary 
 passage, but which must be travelled through 
 with care and diligence, by those who wish to 
 make any useful progress. Now it would cer- 
 tainly be a great advantage to turn and shorten 
 this toilsome road, and be enabled to pursue 
 our journey through the regions of science by 
 more direct and less fatiguing advances. 
 
 That any course of learning should be devised 
 by which the acquisition of Languages shal Lb? 
 
LANGUAGE. 105 
 
 tendered an expeditious and unlaborious task, it 
 would be presumptuous to expect. But it may 
 be reasonably hoped, that, in the progressive im- 
 provement of human experience, new methods 
 of instruction may be introduced, in this as well 
 as ia other sciences, which may afford additional 
 facilities to learning, and clear away many obsta- 
 cles to improvement which former ages were 
 unable to remove. 
 
 It is quite obvious that the difficulty in ac- 
 quiring a foreign language consists in the consti- 
 tutional difference of our native tongue, and that 
 which we propose to learn. If the grammatical 
 properties of the two languages were similar, the 
 mere obtaining of a copia verborum would be 
 an undertaking of no great difficulty. But how 
 considerable a labour it is to obtain a perfect 
 knowledge even of tlie genders and declensions 
 of nouns, the conjugation of verbs, and other 
 matters which are the veiy initials of language, 
 any one who has had the least experience of the 
 drudgery of teaching can well testify. 
 
 It would seem, then, that one of the most 
 extensive facilities which can be afforded in this 
 matter, is to point out the affinities of different 
 languages — to systematise, as far as can be, their 
 similarities ; and, where it is practicable, to trace 
 and notify their variances. In other words, 
 
106 NEW ART OF MfiMORY. 
 
 if the expression may be allowed, to exhibit the 
 universalities of language. 
 
 Something of this nature will be attempted in 
 the present chapter. It is inserted, because it 
 constitutes a part of M. Von Feinaigle's in- 
 structions ; and because the Editor hopes that, 
 it will be found to conta n some useful matter. 
 But he does not mean to delude the reader into 
 an expectation that he will be here provided with 
 a sort of talismanic key, which shall enable him, 
 without labour and without loss of time, to un- 
 lock the janua linguarum. Indeed that (what- 
 ever some interested enthusiasts may pretend) is 
 what no intelligent reader would expect, nor 
 any honest man venture to promise. All that 
 will be here attempted will be, to exhibit some 
 of the most important similarities of different 
 languages — to show that, notwithstanding indivi- 
 dual peculiarities, they still retain strong marks 
 of affinity in many essential particulars. 
 
 Facies non omnibus una, 
 -Nee tamendi versa; qualem decet es«e sororum. 
 
 Oc. Met. I. 2. v. 13. 
 
 And, to bring the matter more home to practice, 
 to offer .some rules, by the assistance of which 
 •one language may be usefully applied to the ac- 
 quisition of anotlrer. 
 
 As v*e are about to consider some of the uni- 
 
LANGUAGE. 1Q7 
 
 versal properties of language, it may not, per- 
 haps, be thought improper to enter on the 
 subject with a slight sketch of the origin of lan- 
 guage. 
 
 Sect. 2. — Sketch of the Origin of Language. 
 
 " We are informed by Scripture, that when 
 the building of Babel was begun, about eighteen 
 hundred years after the fall, the whole earth was 
 of one speech. And had no miraculous inter- 
 position taken place, it is probable, that some 
 traces of it would have remained in every lan- 
 guage to this day. For, though, in so long a 
 time, many words must have been changed, 
 many introduced, and many forgotten, in every 
 country, yet men being all of the same family, 
 and all deriving their speech from the only one 
 primitive tongue, it may be presumed that some 
 of the original words would still have been in 
 use throughout the whole eanh : even as in ull 
 the modern languages of Europe, some Greek, 
 and some Hebrew, and a great deal of Latin, is 
 still discernible. But Providence thought fit to 
 prevent this ; and by confounding the language 
 of the builders of Babel, to establish in the 
 world a variety of primitive tongues. 
 # # # # 
 
 " Languages are either Primitive or Derived, 
 
108 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 That those -which are formed out of the same 
 parent tongue should all resemble it and one ano- 
 ther, and yet should all be different, is not more 
 wonderful, than that children and their parents 
 should be marked with a general family likeness, 
 and each distinguished by peculiar features. 
 Spanish, Italian, Portuguese, French, and a 
 great deal of the English Tongue, are derived 
 from the Latin ; with the addition of many new 
 words, and new modes of termination and syntax 
 which were introduced by the northern nations. 
 And, therefore, all these languages resemble the 
 Latin and one another ; and yet each is different 
 from it, and from all the rest. But, if we could 
 compare two original or primitive tongues toge- 
 ther, the Hebrew for instance, with the Gothick 
 or the Celtick, or the language ot China, with 
 that of the Hurons in North America, we should 
 not discern, perhaps, the least similitude : which, 
 considering that all mankind are of the same fa- 
 mily, could not be fully accounted for without 
 supposing, that some preternatural events like 
 that at the confusion of Babel, had some time 
 or other taken place. But this history solves all 
 difficulties."* 
 
 * Beattie on Language, in his Dissertations, pp. 304 — 
 206, 4°. 
 
LANGUAGE. 109 
 
 This is the general opinion respecting the ori- 
 gin of the diversity of Languages ; but it is not 
 an uncontro verted doctrine. Dr. Priestley* 
 has argued upon this point in the following man- 
 ner : — 
 
 " The present diversity of language is gene- 
 rally believed to have taken its rise from the 
 building of Babel, and to have been brought 
 about by the interposition of the Divine Being ; 
 but it is no impiety to suppose, that this (agree- 
 able to most other operations of the Deity) 
 might have been brought about by natural means. 
 The possibility of this natural deviation seems 
 to be deduced from the following considera- 
 tions. 
 
 " First. The primitive language, or that 
 which was spoken by the first family of the 
 human race, must have been very scanty, and 
 insufficient for the purposes of their descendants, 
 in their growing acquaintance with the world. 
 
 " Secondly. Not being fixed by the practice 
 of writing, it would be very liable to variation. 
 
 (i Thirdly. Supposing the primitive language 
 to have had few inflections, (because few would 
 have been sufficient,) it would easily admit any 
 inflections, which chance or design might sug- 
 
 * Lecture en the Theory of Language, p. 287, and seq. 
 L 
 
110 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 gest to the founders of different families, or u 
 their successors. These different inflections 
 would consequently introduce different construc- 
 tions of words, and different rules of syntax : 
 and thus what are called the very stamina of 
 languages, would be formed independently of 
 one another, and admit of all possible varieties. 
 
 " Fourthly. Considering into what different 
 climates mankind were dispersed, furnished with 
 the bare rudiments of the art of speech, into 
 what different ways of living they fell, and how 
 long they continued without the art of writing, 
 (without which no language can be fixed,) it 
 seems to be no wonder that languages should be 
 so different as they are ; both with respect to the 
 rules of inflection, with the fundamentals of 
 grammar which depend upon them, and the 
 words of which they consist. 
 
 " The difficulty which some allege there is, 
 in conceiving how languages should arise in the 
 world so very different, not only in the words, 
 but in the manner of using them, seems to arise 
 wholly from the supposition, that the primitive 
 language was copious, regular, and perfect in all 
 its parts : the difficulty of changing such a lan- 
 guage is allowed ; but the fact, is apprehended, 
 is much easier accounted for upon the present 
 hypothesis. 
 
 u To these arguments it may be added, that 
 
LANGUAGE. Ill 
 
 to a person thoroughly acquainted with the pre- 
 sent state of mankind, the prodigious diversity of 
 human manners and customs may probably ap- 
 pear almost as difficult to be accounted for, as 
 the diversity of languages only." 
 
 The late Dr. G. Gregory has observed 
 on this subject, that it is impossible to say what 
 was the nature of the confusion of language at 
 Babel ; whether it consisted in the invention of 
 new terms, or in the improper use of the old. 
 The miracle at Babel, he adds, might be only 
 a temporary confusion,* sufficient to set aside 
 that useless and absurd undertaking : and it is 
 more natural to suppose, that the consequent 
 dispersion of mankind was the effect of dissen- 
 tions occasioned by having misunderstood each 
 other, than that they could not live together, be- 
 cause they did not all continue to speak the same 
 language. 
 
 II. The origin of alphabetical writing is in- 
 volved in as much doubt as that of the diversity 
 
 * This conjecture, as Dr. Gregory states in a note, 
 is confirmed by a criticism of Mr. Bryant, who remarks, 
 in his analysis of Ancient Mythology, that nS{# really 
 signifies lip, and that consequently the miracle was not 
 any alteration in the language, but a failure or incapacity 
 in labial utterance, which, soon after their separation, 
 they recovered. 
 
ll<Z NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 of language ; and the controversies which have 
 arisen on both subjects have been similarly con- 
 ducted — one side pretending to found their argu- 
 ments on the authority of the Scriptures, and 
 the other side denying that those records furnish 
 any such inference. 
 
 They who have recourse to supernatural inter- 
 position to account for the origin of writing, 
 allege that the first alphabetical writings were the 
 two tables of stone, which, as we are informed 
 by Moses, were written by the finger of God 
 himself. And it must be acknowledged (in the 
 words of Dr. Priestley) that the oldest account 
 we have concerning the use of letters in Asia 
 and Greece is so circumstanced, as by no means 
 to clash with this hypothesis. It seems likewise 
 very probable from Robertson's comparison of 
 Alphabets, that all the known ones might origi- 
 nally have been derived from the Hebrew, or 
 Samaritan. 
 
 But in opposition to these arguments, it has 
 been asked — If the Deity had taught or revealed 
 such an art to mankind, why is it not explicitly 
 noted in that complete history of revelation, 
 which inspiration has handed down to us ? The 
 writing on the tables at Mount Sinai is not 
 spoken of as a new invention ; and if it had been 
 such, and particularly if it had been the imme- 
 diate act of the Deity, is there the least proba- 
 
LANGUAGE. 113 
 
 bility that so important a fact would have been 
 omitted by the sacred historian ? There are va- 
 rious other arguments in this matter, but these 
 form the hinge of the dispute ; and we shall close 
 this subject with a very satisfactory observation 
 of Dr. Priestley, who remarks, that, the imper- 
 fections of all alphabets, the Hebrew by no 
 means excepted, seems to argue them not to 
 have been the product of divine skill, but the 
 result of such a concurrence of accident and 
 gradual improvement as all human arts, and 
 what we call inventions, owe their birth to. For 
 certainly, the alphabets in use bear no marks of 
 the regularity and perfection of the works of na- 
 ture : the more we consider the latter, the more 
 reason we see to admire their beauty, just pro- 
 portions, and consequent fitness to answer their 
 respective ends ; whereas, the more we examine 
 the former, the more defects, superfluities, and 
 imperfections of all kinds we discover in them. 
 Besides, had there ever been a divine alphabet, 
 it would certainly have established itself in the 
 world by its manifest excellence, particularly as, 
 upon this supposition, mankind were incapable of 
 devising one themselves. 
 
 III. But whatever may be the origin of al- 
 phabetical writing, it is certain that all alpha- 
 bets are, more or less, defective. In the or- 
 thography of modern languages, in particular, it 
 l 3 
 
114 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 is a great inconvenience, as has been truly ob- 
 served,* that the pronunciation does not cor- 
 respond with the writing; but that the same let- 
 ters have different sounds, and the same sounds 
 are often represented by different letters ; some 
 letters also, according to the pronunciation, are 
 superfluous in some words, in others letters are 
 wanting. This is chiefly a mark of their deriva- 
 tion from other languages : since, in many of 
 those differences, the spelling leans to the an- 
 tients, when the pronunciation is modern. Thus 
 the (p) in the word receipt is not pronounced ; 
 but it shows the derivation of the word from 
 recipio in Latin. Some words of the same 
 sound are spelled differently, to preserve a dis- 
 tinction in writing, as air heir : hair heir, etc. 
 Other words, on the contrary, which are spelled 
 in the same manner, are pronounced differently, 
 to preserve a distinction in speaking; as I read, 
 and I have read. 
 
 Sect. 3. — Account of some attempts towards 
 forming a universal Character or Alphabet. 
 
 All the alphabets extant are charged by 
 Bishop Wilkins with great irregularities, 
 
 Priestley's lectures on Language, p. 43. 
 
LANGUAGE. 115 
 
 with respect both to order, number, power, 
 figure, &c. 
 
 As to the order it appears, says he, inartificial, 
 precarious, and confused, as the vowels and con- 
 sonants are not reduced into classes, with such 
 order of precedence and subsequence as their 
 natures will bear. Of this imperfection the 
 Greek alphabet, which is one of the least defec- 
 tive, is far from being free: for instance, the 
 Greeks should have separated the consonants 
 from the vowels ; after the vowels they should 
 have placed the diphthongs, and then the con- 
 sonants ; whereas, in fact, the order is so per- 
 verted, that we find the o the fifteenth letter in 
 the order of the alphabet, and the a, or long o, 
 the twenty fourth and last: the e the fifth, and 
 the y\ the seventh letter. 
 
 With respect to number, they are both redun- 
 dant and deficient; redundant by allotting the 
 same sound to several letters, as in the Latin c 
 and k, J 'and ph; or by reckoning double letters 
 among the simple elements of speech, as in the 
 Greek | and 4^ the Latin q or cu, x or ex, and 
 the j consonant. They are deficient in many 
 respects, particularly with regard to vowels, of 
 which seven or eight kinds are commonly used, 
 though the Latin alphabet takes notice only of 
 five. Add to this, that the difference amon$ 
 
1 1(3 NEW ART OP MEMORY. 
 
 them with regard to long and short, is not suffi- 
 ciently provided against. 
 
 The powers again are not more exempt from 
 confusion; the vowels, for instance, are generally 
 acknowledged to have each of them several 
 different sounds ; and among the consonants we 
 need only bring as evidence of their different pro- 
 nunciation the letter c in the word circa, and g 
 in the word negligence. Hence it happens, that 
 some words are differently written, though pro- 
 nounced in the same manner, as cessio and sessio ; 
 and others are different in pronunciation, which 
 are the same in writing, as give, dare, and give, 
 vinculum. 
 
 Finally, he adds, the figures are but ill con- 
 certed, there is nothing in the characters of the 
 vowels answerable to the different manner of 
 pronunciation ; nor in the consonants analogous 
 to their agreements, or disagreements. 
 
 As we are on this subject, the reader may not 
 be displeased, perhaps, to have the various 
 schemes which have been proposed for the 
 emendation and correction of the English Alpha- 
 bet brought together in one concise view. 
 
 " There have been many schemes offered for 
 the emendation and settlement of our ortho- 
 graphy; which, like that of other nations, being 
 formed by chance, or according to the fancy of 
 
LANGUAGE. 117 
 
 the earliest writers in rude ages, was at first very 
 various and uncertain, and is yet sufficiently irre- 
 gular : of these reformers some have endeavoured 
 to accommodate orthography better to the pro- 
 nunciation, without considering that this is to 
 measure by a shadow ; to take that for a model 
 or standard, which is changing while they apply 
 it. Others, less absurdly indeed, but with equal 
 unlikelihood of success have endeavoured to pro- 
 portion the number of letters to that of sounds, 
 that every sound may have its own character, 
 and every character a single sound. Such 
 Mould be the orthography of a new language to 
 be formed by a synod of grammarians upon prin- 
 ciples of science. But who can hope to prevail 
 on nations to change their practice, and make all 
 the old books useless ? or what advantage would 
 a new orthography procure equivalent to the con- 
 fusion and perplexity of such an alteration. 
 
 " One of the first who proposed a scheme of 
 regular orthography, was Sir Thomas Smith, 
 Secretary of State to Queen Elizabeth, a man of 
 real learning, and much practised in grammatical 
 disquisitions* After him another mode of 
 
 * In the preface to Dr. Jobusou's English Dictionary 
 (from which this account is extracted) a specimen may be 
 seen of his reformed orthography. The want of proper 
 types, however, renders it impossible to exhibit this and 
 other specimens here. 
 
IIS NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 writing was offered by Dr. Gill, the cele- 
 brated Master of St. Paul's School in London. 
 Dr. Gill was followed by Charles Butler, 
 a man who did not want an understanding, which 
 might have qualified him for better employment. 
 He seems to have been more sanguine than his 
 predecessors, for he printed his book according 
 to his own scheme. 
 
 "In the time of Charles I. there was a 
 rery prevalent inclination to change the ortho- 
 graphy; as appears, among other books, in 
 such editions of the works of Milton as were 
 published by himself. Of these reformers every 
 man had his own scheme; but they agreed in 
 one general design of accommodating the letters 
 to fhe pronunciation, by ejecting such as they 
 thought superfluous. Same of them would hav« 
 written these lines thus : 
 
 All the erth 
 Shall then be paradis, far happier place 
 Than this of Eden, and far happier dais. 
 
 H Bishop Wilkins afterwards, in his great 
 work of the philosophical language, proposed, 
 without expecting to be followed, a regular or- 
 thography ; by which the Lord's prayer is to be 
 written thus : 
 
 Y*r Fadher hsitsh art in heven, holloed bi 
 dhyi nom, dhi cingdym cym, dhy sill bi dyn in 
 erth as it is in heven, etc." 
 
.LANGUAGE. 1 I J 
 
 " Here Dr. Johnson has closed his account, 
 which we shall endeavo'ir to complete by no- 
 ticing some other philosophical speculations of 
 a similar nature that have been submitted to the 
 public. But we shall first present the reader 
 with a more detailed account of Bishop \S ilkins' 
 plan of a universal and philosophical language. 
 This account we shall give in an extract from 
 Dr. Priestley's Lectures on the Theory of 
 Language, because it contains the most clear 
 and concise exposition of it, that can possibly be 
 given. 
 
 u . Having in the first place, with prodigious 
 labour and exactness, distributed all things 
 to which names are given into classes ; under 
 forty genuses or general heads, (some of which, 
 however, are subordinate to others) he assigns a 
 short and simple character to each of these forty 
 geuuses, — a definite variation of the character, to 
 each difference under the genuses, and a further 
 variation for each species, etc. By this means, 
 the characters, representing all things that have 
 names, have the same analogies with one another 
 that the thugs themselves have. 
 
 " Characters being provided for the names of 
 things, the grammatical distinctions of words, 
 ?iumbers, tenses, persons, voices, etc are denoted 
 by some appendage to the character. 
 
 " In this manner may we be furnished w ith an 
 
120 NEW ART OF MBMOR*. 
 
 universal character, which shall represent ideas 
 directly, without the intervention of any sounds, 
 and which may be equally understood by people 
 using any language whatever.* 
 
 " To make this character effable. the Doctor 
 (Wilkins) appropriates a single souttd to the 
 characters representing each genus and difference, 
 and also to each variation and appendage before 
 mentioned : and they are so contrived, that the 
 simple sounds adapted to all the parts of the 
 most complex character may be pronounced with 
 ease, as one word. 
 
 ** By this means any people, after they had 
 applied this character to represent their ideas, 
 might sooa learn to read it in the same manner 
 
 * The languages of Europe have one instance of this 
 kind of writing. Their arithmetical figures, which were 
 derived from the Arabians, are significant marks precisely 
 of the same nature as the universal characters abave men- 
 tioned. They have no dependance on words ; but each 
 figure represents an object— represents the number for 
 which it stands : and accordingly, on being presented to 
 the eye, is equally understood by all the nations, who have 
 agreed in the use cf those cyphers — by Italians, Spaniards, 
 French, and English, however different the languages of 
 those nations are from one another, and whatever different 
 names they give in their respective languages, to each nu- 
 merical cypher.— Blair on the Belle* Lett. Lett, vii. 
 
LANGUAGE. 121 
 
 as any other people ; whereby, in conversation 
 as well as in writing, they might make themselves 
 perfectly understood by one inotber. 
 
 " The elements of this character and language 
 are so few, and the combination of thetn so 
 easy, that the Doctor (Wilkins) says he has no 
 doubt, that a person of a good capacity* and me- 
 mory may, in one month's space, attain to a 
 good readiness of expressing his mind this way, 
 either in the character or language. 
 
 " As the names of individuals cannot be com- 
 prehended in tables of genuses and their differ- 
 ences, the Doctor (Wilkins) hath contrived an 
 alphabet of all the simple articulations of the 
 human voice ; to which he hath assigned two 
 sets of characters, to be used at pleasure : the 
 one consists of short and plain strokes, the other 
 is a kind of delineation of the position of the 
 organs in forming the articulations." 
 
 This plan Dr. Priestley considers the most 
 rational of all the plans of a universal and phi- 
 losophical language. And he adds, whenever 
 this noble project is resumed, it seems to be im- 
 possible to proceed upon a better plan than 
 this. The principal thing that is wanting to the 
 perfection of it is a more perfect distribution of 
 things into classes than, perhaps, the present 
 state of knowledge can enable us to make. 
 
 M 
 
122 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 Mr. Lodwick, in the Phil sophical Trans- 
 actions,* gives ' an Essay towards an universal 
 Alphabet.' His plan was to contain an enume- 
 ration of all such single sounds, as are used in 
 any language : by means of which people should 
 be able to pronounce truly and readily any lan- 
 guage ; to describe the pronunciation of any 
 language that shall be pronounced in their hear- 
 ing, so as others accustomed to this language, 
 though they had never heard the language pro- 
 nounced, shall at first be able truly to pronounce 
 it : and lastly, this character was to serve to 
 perpetuate the sounds of any language what- 
 ever. 
 
 The construction of " a new alphabet, and a 
 reformed mode of spelling," has also occupied 
 the attention of that celebrated Philosopher, Dr. 
 Franklin. His plan may be seen in his mis- 
 cellaneous works.^ In this alphabet he has 
 attempted to provide that no letter should have 
 two sounds, and every sound should be repre- 
 sented by a distinct letter. " It is to be observed, 
 (he says) that in all the letters, vowels, and con- 
 sonants, wherever they are met with, or in what- 
 ever company, their sound is always the same. 
 
 * Vol. xvi. p. 126. 
 t Vol. ii. p. 357. ed. Lond. 1806. 
 
LANGUAGE. 123 
 
 Tt is also intended, that there be no superfluous 
 letters used in spelling ; i. e. no letter that is not 
 sounded ; and this alphabet, by six new letters, 
 provides that there be no distinct sounds in the 
 language, without letters to express them. As 
 to the difference between short and long vowels, 
 it is naturally expressed by a single vowel, where 
 short ; a double one, where long ; as for mend, 
 write mend; but for remained, write re- 
 meen'd; for did write did, but for deed write 
 diid, etc." 
 
 In this alphabet c is omitted as unnecessary ; 
 k supplying its hard sound, and s the soft; k 
 also supplies well the place of z, and with an s 
 added, the place of x: q and x are therefore 
 omitted. The vowel u, being sounded as oo, 
 makes the w unnecessary. The ij, where used 
 simply, is supplied by i, and where as a diph- 
 thong, by two vowels : that letter is therefore 
 omitted as useless. The jod, j, is also omitted, 
 its sound being supplied by a new letter, which 
 serves other purposes. 
 
 The philosophical construction of the alphabet 
 may be best seen in the following account, writ- 
 ten by himself, and entitled : 
 
124 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 " Remarks on the alphabetical Table." 
 
 It is endeavoured to give the alphabet a more na- 
 tural order ; beginning first with the simple sounds 
 to -^ formed by the breath, with none or very little 
 help of tongue, teeth, and lips, and produced 
 chiefly in the windpipe. 
 
 huh 
 
 ,,.{ 
 
 \ 
 
 Then coming forward to those formed by the roof 
 of the tongue next to the windpipe. 
 
 r. n. S Then to those, formed more forward, by the fore- 
 t. d. £ part of the tongue, against the roof of the mouth. 
 
 ( Then those formed still more forward in the 
 ' ' < mouth, by the tip of the tongue, applied first to 
 v. the roots of the upper teeth. 
 
 f Then to those formed by the tip of the tongue, ap» 
 "\ plied to the ends or edges of the upper teeth. 
 
 C Then to those formed still more forward, by the 
 t I under lip applied to the upper teeth. 
 
 ( Then to those formed yet more forward, by the 
 < upper and under lip opening to let out the sound- 
 (^ ing breath. 
 
 £ And lastly, ending with the shutting up of the 
 m. \ mouth, or closing the lips while any vowel is 
 v. sounding. 
 
 It is impossible for want of proper types to 
 give a specimen here of the Doctor's reformed 
 mode of spelling ; but several examples may be 
 seen in the 3rd vol. of his works, p. 857, in 
 which is inserted a correspondence which was 
 
LANGUAGE. 125 
 
 carried on between the Doctor and Miss Ste- 
 phenson, on this subject, and in winch the 
 former urges the utility of his scheme, and 
 endeavours to answer the objections raised 
 against it.'* 
 
 Mr. Noah Webster, another American 
 author, has proposed a more moderate inno- 
 vation, u to render our orthography sufficiently 
 regular and easy." 
 
 I. The omission of all superfluous or silent 
 letters. Thus bread, head, give, breast, built, 
 meant, realm, friend, would be spelt, bud, 
 hed, giv, brest, bilt, ment, relm,frend. 
 
 l Z. A substitution of a character that has a 
 certain definite sound, for one that is moie vague 
 and indeterminate. Thus, mean, near, speak, 
 grieve, zeal, would become, meen, neer, speek, 
 greeve, zeel. Thus key should, be written kee ; 
 laugh, laf; daughter, dawter ; blood, blud ; 
 character, karacter; chorus, korus, etc 
 
 3. A trifling alteration in a character, or the 
 addition of -a point would distinguish different 
 sounds, without the substitution of a new ( ha- 
 
 * Mr, Wbbstgr states, that the Doctor, amidst all his 
 other employments, public and private, actually com- 
 piled a Dictionary on this scheme of reform, and procured 
 
 -types -to be cast fVr printing it. Bat it'-nevei vsr 
 
 .printed, 
 
 ml 
 
126 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 racter. Thus a very small stroke across ike 
 would distinguish its two sounds. A point over 
 a vowel might answer all the purposes of dif- 
 ferent letters. And for the diphthong ou, let the 
 two letters be united by a small stroke, or both 
 engraven on the same piece of metal, with the 
 left hand line of the to united to the o. 
 
 These, with a few other inconsiderable altera- 
 tions, Mr. Webster thinks, " would answer every 
 purpose, and render the orthography sufficiently 
 correct and regular."* 
 
 The only other scheme of reformation we shall 
 notice is that put forth by Mr. Elphinston. 
 We shall transcribe the first paragraph of his 
 preface.-f- 
 
 " Evvery tung iz independant ov evvery 
 oddher. Hooevver seeks dhe anallogy (or nat- 
 tural rule) ov anny tung, must dherfore find it at 
 home ; nor wil dhe seeker seek in vain, lnglish 
 diccion dhen haz no laws, but her own. Yet, 
 in her picturage, and consequently in much ov 
 her livving practice; "hav anny oddher laws, or 
 any lawlesnes, been prefferably regarded. No 
 more can anny language adopt dhe system ov any 
 oddh r ; dhan anny nacion, dhe hoal pollity ov 
 
 * Dissertations on the English Language, p. 394. 
 ^ Propriety ascertained in her Picture, 4°, 
 
LANGUAGE. 
 
 127 
 
 anoddher nacion : for such adopter wer no more 
 a distinct nacion or language ; wer but a mon- 
 grel, or an eccoe." 
 
 Sect. 4. — Proposed Philosophical Arrange- 
 ment of the Alphabet as applied to Language 
 in general. 
 
 The ordinary arrangement of the alphabet be- 
 ing thus defective and unphilosophical, we shall 
 propose another mode of disposing the letters, 
 which we shall endeavour to justify, by assigning 
 a reason for allutting to each letter the particular 
 place which it occupies. We shall exhibit our 
 alphabet, then, in this form : — 
 
 a 
 e 
 
 b 
 
 c 
 
 ch „ 
 
 d 
 'h 
 
 i j 
 
 M' 
 
 m 
 
 n 
 
 o 
 u 
 
 P 
 
 V 
 
 q r 
 
 X 
 
 s t 
 y z 
 
 According to this scheme, the letters are dis- 
 tributed into Four columns, each column con- 
 taining five letters. This arrangement is not an 
 arbitrary one, but is made upon principles of 
 ;philosophical propriety. 
 
128 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 The first column contains the vowels. Y, is 
 a vowel in English, but it is by no means an 
 essential part of the alphabet. It lakes in general 
 the sound of/, as in rhyme, cyder , system, syntax, 
 etc. For this reason (as Mr. Walker has ob- 
 served) printers, who have been the great cor- 
 rectors of our orthography, have substituted the 
 i in its stead, in many instances. We shall dis- 
 card y, therefore, from our alphabet. 
 
 The vowels are placed first, because they can 
 be pronounced without the assistance of conso- 
 nants, while consonants cannot be pronounced 
 without the aid of vowels. In order to account 
 for the arrangement of the vowels, thus ; a, e, i, 
 o, u ; we must advert to the pronunciation of them. 
 The French pronunciation is the most natural and 
 philosophical ; for in the course of that pronun- 
 ciation of the vowels, there is a regular gradation 
 of sound from the most open to the closest, — 
 from high to low, — aw, a, ee, o, eu. This is 
 the order of nature. The sound of a is produced 
 •by a very wide opening of the lips; which are 
 somewhat more closed in the pronunciation of e; 
 and still more so in the utterance of i. When o 
 is pronounced, the lips approximate still more, 
 and at the sound of U, they are almost closed. 
 
 This subject may be further illustrated by the 
 following extract from Mr. Walker's PriDci- 
 ; ples of English Pronunciation .prefixed 4o hie 
 
LANGUAGE. 129 
 
 "Critical Pronouncing Dictionary. After ex- 
 hibiting a detailed view of the organic formation 
 of the vowels, not differing materially from that 
 before stated, he remarks that, in this view we 
 find, that, a, e, and o, are the only simple or pure 
 vowels : that i is a diphthong, and that u is a 
 semi-consonant. If we were inclined (he adds) 
 to contrive a scale for measuring the breadth or 
 narrowness, or, as others term it, the openness or 
 closeness of the vowel, we might begin with e 
 open, as Mr. Elphinston calls it, and which he 
 announces to be the closest of all the vocal 
 powers. In the pronunciation of this letter, we 
 find the aperture of the mouth extended on each 
 side ; the lips almost closed, and the sound 
 issuing horizontally. The slender a in waste 
 opens the mouth a little wider. The a \n father 
 opens the mouth still more, without contracting 
 the corners. The German a, heard in wall, not 
 only opens the mouth wider than the former a, 
 but contracts the corners of the mouth, so as to 
 make the aperture approach nearer to a circle ; 
 while the o opens the mouth still more, and con- 
 tracts the coiners so as to make it the os rotun- 
 dum, a picture of the letter it sounds. 
 
 Consonants are divided into different classes 
 according to the seat of their intonation, or from 
 those organs of speech which are chiefly em- 
 ployed in forming them . The distinction which we 
 
130 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 shall adopt, is that which divides them into 
 labials, guttcrals, dentals, and palatals; as they 
 are formed by the lips, the throat, the teeth, or 
 the palate : or, in other words, because the 
 breath, in passing from the lungs, is intercepted 
 in those seats or places, or at least is very strongly 
 compressed there. 
 
 In the second column are the consonants, b, 
 
 f* P. v - 
 
 B is a labial : it is formed by intercepting the 
 
 passage of the breath through the mouth, by 
 closing the lips. 
 
 F may be represented by plu Ph occurs 
 chiefly in words derived from the Greek, and 
 written in that language <D. The Italians, 
 in such words, write/; thus, while vie adhering 
 strictly to derivation write philosopher, they write 
 Jilosofo.* 
 
 P is a labial, formed (like b) by closing the 
 lips ; but in a less forcible manner. The Ara- 
 bians (says Mr. Wallis) have not this letter, but 
 substitute for it either Be or Phe. The illiterate 
 Jews in this country usually confound b and p 
 in their pronunciation, using the one fur die other. 
 
 » Eundem olirn (ph) sonum habnisse ac/ imcriptiones 
 veneres rontirma>-t, in quibu> alteram pro altcro promiecne 
 adhiberi i-ernimws : ut pUidtia pro fidelis. — Middleton ds. 
 Lat. Liter. Prou. Disc. 
 
LANGUAGE. • 131 
 
 V is a labial : it is formed by a touch of the 
 upper teeth and the under lip. It is, indeed, the 
 flat f, to which letter it bears the same relation 
 as p does to b. The Arabians and Persians have 
 not this sound ; and Wallis is of opinion that the 
 English Saxons either had it not, or wrote it by 
 f; for they used, he says, no v consonant, and 
 they wrote many words with f, as the English 
 did after them, for some ages, which are now 
 written with v, as well as those which are now 
 written with f: as gif, heofon, etc. which are 
 now written, give, heaven. And Priscian ac- 
 knowledges, that the Latins formerly pronounced 
 f with the same sound, with which afterwards 
 the v consonant was pronounced. 
 
 In the third column, are c, g, q, x. 
 
 C and g are both gutterals ; c has the sound 
 of 5 and k ; g ofj and k. As the sound of k is 
 usually given to c, there is great reason for sup- 
 posing that this \\ as its original sound # In the 
 less frequent sound of c, the guttural becomes a 
 hissing sound. The hard sounds of c and g, (ka, 
 ge) are produced by a stroke in the throat, and 
 are consequently gutturals : g is the only weak 
 sound of tcii, as in church ; ch is a guttural as- 
 pirated. 
 
 * Wallis observes, that the Latin A: was formerly used 
 for c : for the Romans wrote indifferently Calendce and 
 Kalenda. 
 
132 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 Q is the strong sound of c, which, as was be- 
 fore observed, is a weak guttural. 
 
 X is written egs, ecs, and eks ; it is a guttural 
 aspirate, with a hissing termination. Aspirate 
 and hissing are compound sounds. 
 
 The fourth column contains d, h, t, z. 
 
 -D is a dental, or produced by pressing the 
 tongue against the gums of the upper teeth, and 
 then separating them. 
 
 T is also a dental, and is similarly formed. 
 
 -fiT. This letter is no more than an aspiration, 
 or breathing forcibly before the succeeding vowel. 
 
 Z is a hissing dental. It is the flat s, and 
 bears the same relation to that letter, as b does 
 to p, and f to v. It is formed by placing the 
 tongue in the same position as in t and d, but 
 not so close to the gums as to stop the breath : 
 a spate is left between the tongue and the palate 
 for the breath to issue, which forms the hissing 
 or buzzing sound of the letter. 
 
 L, m, n, are placed in the centre because they 
 are of a middle nature between mutes and con- 
 sonants. They are generally termed liquids, 
 btcause, in pronunciation, they easily flow into 
 and combine with the mutes. L is a weak pala- 
 tal, m is a labio-palatal, and n is a strong palatal. 
 
 R i3 not found in all languages. It is formed 
 by the forcible expulsion of the air, which during 
 its passage, causes a tremulous motion of the 
 
LANGUAGE. 
 
 133 
 
 tongue. The Greeks sometimes wrote this let- 
 ter with an aspiration, and we follow their ex- 
 ample in rhetoric, rhythm, etc. 
 
 S is a hissing palatal, and is formed in the 
 same manner as z. 
 
 J and v are placed between the highest vow- 
 els and the weakest consonants. 
 
 We shall subjoin the following tabular view 
 of the powers and qualities of the consonants, 
 according to this system. 
 
 
 Labials. 
 
 Gutturals. 
 
 Dentals. 
 
 A 
 
 B 
 
 C 
 
 D 
 
 
 a labial with 
 a weak touch. 
 
 a guttural with 
 the sound of Ac ; 
 a weak touch. 
 
 a weak den- 
 tal. 
 
 E 
 
 F 
 
 G 
 
 H 
 
 
 a labial with 
 a strong touch 
 aspirated. 
 
 agutturaljweak 
 sound of che. 
 
 a dental aspi- 
 rated. 
 
 I J 
 
 k L 
 
 M 
 
 N 
 
 
 a weak pala- 
 tal. 
 
 a labio-pala- 
 tal. 
 
 a strong pala- 
 tal. 
 
 O 
 
 P 
 
 Q r 
 
 s T 
 
 
 a labial with a 
 strong touch. 
 
 thestrongsound 
 of c. 
 
 a strong den- 
 tal. 
 
 U 
 
 V w 
 
 X 
 
 y z 
 
 
 a labial with a guttural as- 
 a weak touch, pirated,with a 
 but aspirated;|hissing sound. 
 it is the weak 
 sound of ph. \ 
 
 a hissing den- 
 tal. 
 
134 
 
 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 As in the course of this chapter we have no- 
 ticed the schemes of different authors on this 
 subject, it may be as well to insert here the fol- 
 lowing tables of the consonants ; extracted from 
 Dr. Wallis, Mr. Walker, and Mr. Elphinston. 
 
 (1. From Dr. Wallis.*) 
 
 Synopsis of the Letters. 
 
 w 
 
 
 r Mute 
 
 P 
 
 F 
 
 F 
 
 
 Labial or " 
 
 Lip « 
 
 | Half Mute 
 
 IJ 
 
 V 
 
 W 
 
 * 1 
 
 r Half Vowel 
 
 M 
 
 a Lowing 
 
 
 r Mute 
 
 T 
 
 S 
 
 TH 
 
 Palatine or 
 Palate 
 
 | Half Mute 
 
 D 
 
 z 
 
 DH 
 
 L R 
 
 1 
 
 [ Half Vowel 
 
 N 
 
 a sigh 
 
 Guttural or 
 Throat 
 
 " Mute 
 
 C 
 
 N 
 
 CH 
 
 
 I Half Mute 
 
 G 
 
 Y 
 
 G 
 
 
 .Half Vowel 
 
 n 
 
 a sigh 
 
 * Grammatica Anglicana, p. 35. 
 
LANGUAGE. 
 
 135 
 
 e- > "C 
 
 ■: 
 
 ^ -2 
 
 a * 
 
 CI 
 
 ■a 
 
 
 a, 
 
 o 
 
 M 
 
 i£ 
 
 (0 
 
 q 
 
 V 
 
 3 
 
 CS 
 
 d 
 
 4> 
 
 "3 
 
 ■O 
 
 ~ 
 
 St 
 
 "O 
 
 fee 
 
 fcD 
 
 
 .S 
 
 
 c 
 
 C 
 
 cu 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 "3 
 
 
 
 a. 
 
 s 
 
 .— 
 
 s 
 
 .22 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 IS 
 
 s 
 
 3 
 
 ~ CO 
 
 <u .5 .5 s 
 
 O Q 
 
136 
 
 NEW AKT OF MEMORY. 
 
 (3. From Mr. Elphinston.*) 
 TABEL OV AFFINNITY. 
 
 DUE LICQUIDS. 
 
 Ungual, guttural, 
 
 I r 
 
 dental, 
 
 labial. 
 
 I DHE MUTES. 
 direct ; depressive 
 
 k,c,q 
 
 labial. 
 
 dental, 
 
 bbilating 
 
 f pallatal or 
 / guttural. 
 
 j,g[<feA] ) 
 
 y compound. 
 
 We may conclude this part of our subject ill 
 the words of Mr. Walker on a similar occasion. 
 " In this sketch of the formation and distribution 
 
 * ' Propriety ascertained in her Picture/ p. 3. 
 
%,Amsua ! GE. 137 
 
 of the consonants, it is curious to observe on how 
 few radical principles, the almost infinite variety 
 of combination in language depends. It is with 
 some degree of wonder, we perceive that the 
 slightest aspiration, the almost insensible inflexion 
 of nearly similar sounds, often generate the most 
 different and opposite meanings. In this view 
 of nature, as in every other, we find uniformity 
 and variety very conspicuous. Tiie sing I e fiat, 
 at first imprinted on the chaos, seems to operate 
 -on languages; which from the simplicity and 
 paucity of their principles, and the extent and 
 power of their combinations, prove the goodness, 
 wisdom, and omnipotence of their origin. 
 
 " This aualogical association of sounds is not 
 only curious, but useful: it gives us a compre- 
 hensive view of the powers of the letters : ail 
 from the small number that are radicals differ- 
 ent, enables us to see the rules on which their 
 varieties depend: it discovers to as the genim 
 and propensities of several languages and dia- 
 lects : and when authority is silent, enables us t© 
 decide agreeably to analogy. 
 
 W-S 
 
133 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 Sect. 5. The derivation of Trench from Latin, 
 shozoti to consist, principally : , in the change 
 of certain tetters according to established 
 rules. 
 
 When two different nations have an inter- 
 course together, either by means of war or com- 
 merce, an attempt is made on both sides, to ren- 
 der the language of each, mutually understood. 
 For example, France was once conquered by 
 the Romans. The French people were, of 
 course, subject to the laws of their conquerors, 
 and if they had any complaints to prt fer before 
 the courts, were, of necessity compelled to make 
 them in Latin. 
 
 The people in acquiring this language, did 
 not resort to grammars ; they had heard a 
 particular name given to a particular object, 
 another name to another, etc. and had con* 
 stantly seen the objects characterised by these 
 names. The French had heard the Romans 
 mention a bridge, which they called pons ; they 
 heard them speak of the expense of a bridge, 
 (pontis) of going to a bridge (ponti) of destroy- 
 ing this bridge, (pontem) of going far from it, 
 (ponte) of moj-e bridges, (ponies, pontium, pon- 
 tibus, etc) The common people seeing such 
 terminations affixed to each word, and not caring 
 $<? understand or remember them, rejected them 
 
LANGUAGE. 139 
 
 off at once, preserving the body of the word 
 pont, and forming the French ponte. The 
 Spaniards and Italians followed the example. 
 The terminations, which, in Latin, formed the 
 declensions, were omitted ; and as in this last 
 word, so in many other derivatives from Latin 
 appellatives, the last vowel only was changed, 
 and a great part of the original word remained. 
 What is done in adjectives and substantives, also 
 takes place in verbs. 
 
 In Latin, the verbs have their infinitive moods 
 terminated in re ; once preceded by a, once by 
 ^, and once by i, as are=ere=ire. It has been 
 observed, that the consonants are weak, strong, 
 aspirated, and hissing. All nations used the 
 letters of the alphabet, but they changed the 
 pronunciation according to the genius of their 
 respective countries. The language of one peo 
 pie abounds with weak letters, others with strong, 
 hissing, or gutteral letters, etc. 
 
 The Latin word frater when changed hit > 
 French, has the letter a weakened, and it be- 
 comes e — as in frere : the deep Roman a is 
 taken away, and the weaker letter e is substi- 
 tuted, as in mare, mer : chare chere ; pater, 
 pere ; catena, chaine. As it is the genius of tl e 
 French language to shorten their verbs, tl e 
 Latin infinitive are, becomes er; as in arnare, 
 4iimci\ In the third conjugation the final e only 
 
140 NEW AHf OF MEMORY. 
 
 is cut off, and the ir remains, as in finite, Jinir ; 
 venire, venir, etc. etc. In the second conjuga- 
 tion which ends in ere, were the final e to be re- 
 jected, er only would remain, which would be 
 the, same termination as that of the first conjuga- 
 tion. If it be changed into i, the third conjuga- 
 tion will appear; we seem then in danger of 
 losing a whole conjugation. This inconvenience, 
 however, will be soon obviated. The genius of 
 the language requires that the sound should be 
 -shortened; there remains, then, no other mode 
 than to deprive the ere of the first vowel, and 
 the second conjugation in re will be found, as 
 perdere, perdre. By taking away the vowel that 
 precedes the r, this letter would come into con- 
 tact with a preceding consonant, with which, in 
 some cases, it would be impossible for it to 
 stand. The verb valere, would, according to 
 the rule just given, become valre ; but as / and 
 T cannot stand together, one should be taken 
 away. To connect them a sharp vowel must be 
 inserted, and this must be e, but then the conju* 
 gation would be lost. Let us try i, and we shall 
 find it will become oir. 
 
 The Latin tres is changed into trois, for va- 
 lere, there is valoir; this cannot be an irregular 
 conjugation, for all the remaining parts are con- 
 jugated regularly ; as there is only the infinitive 
 valoir, it is then neither regular, nor irregular,. 
 
Ianguaoe. 141 
 
 but regulated. This oir can only stand for the 
 infinitive mood; it is instead of valre : if the 
 infinitive mood be not found regularly, the future 
 cannot be given. As r is indispensable, we must 
 part with the /. The Latin word calx, is made 
 chalk in English, but in pronouncing this word, 
 the / is opened and the pronunciation becomes 
 (chawh) changing the c into ch. In French, 
 calx becomes chaux ; in the Latin word alter, 
 the /is opened and alter is converted into autre; 
 saltare into sautre. 
 
 From the Latin pulvere, the French infinitive 
 would be pulver, but the / is resolved into ou, 
 and v is changed into d; thus, pulvere becomes 
 poudre; cinere cindre. In vaundre, the I must 
 be rejected, and au supplied ; thus valre — vau. 
 In the future, the French do not say, as in Latin 
 or English, / will do, — but I have to do; they 
 take the present of avoir, add it to the infinitive, 
 and thus form the future vaudr-ai, vaudr-as, 
 vaudr~a ; we cannot say voulerai. In the pre- 
 sent tense, in Latin, there is valet ; the e is re- 
 jected, and as the I and t cannot stand together, 
 I is opened as before, and we immediately have 
 vaut. 
 
 It has been shown already, that the infinitive 
 moods of the Latin ending in are, ere, ire, are 
 changed into er, re, ir, in French. The first 
 and last conjugations are both made by rejecting 
 
142 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 the final e. Afterwards we find a fourth conju- 
 gation in oir ; it has been shown how this is 
 formed, and that it is not a new conjugation, for 
 no tense or person is formed from oir. 
 
 If the Latin and French languages are com- 
 pared together, it will be easy to prove how 
 much one is derived from the other, and how 
 very materially the study of the Latin and French 
 will facilitate the acquisition of other languages. 
 Those who are acquainted with the Latin lan- 
 guage know that mus is the termination of the 
 first person plural, so that from are we get 
 rnnus, from ere, emus, from ire, imus. If the 
 first person plural in French be required, the 
 vowel must be omitted, and ms will be given. 
 The French words non, mom, noms, are all pro- 
 nounced in the same manner ; for when m is 
 final, it is pronounced as n, which has a nasal 
 sound : m, then, is no more necessary, for if we 
 write according to the pronunciation it would be 
 nons. 
 
 In the verb darner, for example, the infini- 
 tive termination er, is changed into oris, and we 
 have dansons. The second person in Latin, is 
 known by the termination lis — ads — etis — itis: 
 the same principle that directed the French to 
 shorten the former person, induces them to pur- 
 sue the same method here. The i is taken away 
 and is is left, which has the same sound as, and 
 
LANGUAGE. 143 
 
 may be supplied by, z. The word is written 
 according to its pronunciation, and from danser, 
 is produced dansez. The Latin termination ent 
 is continued in French, but is mute ; they say 
 dansent (danse) as if there were no ent. 
 
 In the next tense the past time occurs ; we 
 danced yesterday : again for the first person 
 plural there is ons, but this would denote the 
 present tense ; to distinguish, therefore, the im- 
 perfect from the present, tense, and to show 
 that it is past, i is placed before ons, as ions; 
 and this is always found in the imperfect in all 
 conjugations. In the second person, present, 
 there is ez ; to denote the imperfect, i must be 
 added as iez. For the third person, ent with 
 the i before it, lent ; but this requires some little 
 addition ; o, therefore, is^ placed before the i, 
 and oient is formed. This tense, then, is dan- 
 sions, dansiez, dansoient. 
 
 The future, we shall dance, will require some- 
 thing more than ons ; the whole infinitive is here 
 taken, and the termination ons is added ; thus 
 we have danser, danserons, danserez, and dan- 
 seront. From ont comes the infinitive danser, 
 to dance. This future also has an imperfect, / 
 would dance ; i the sign for the imperfect being 
 added, danserions, danseriez, danseroint, are 
 obtained. If the word danserions be analysed, 
 thus, danse \ r \ i \ ons, it will be found that 
 
144 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 ons is the sign of the third person plural ; i of 
 the imperfect; and r of the future. 
 
 There are yet two more tenses to be consi- 
 dered. The first is the preterperfect, we have 
 danced, or we danced. In Latin, the termina- 
 tions are mus, stis, runt ; the mus is softened 
 into mes, as in parlames ; the stis was formerly 
 written par tastes, but as the s was not sounded, 
 it was entirely dropped, and the i being softened, 
 formed parlates; and runt was softened into 
 rent, as in parlerent. In the imperfect of the 
 subjunctive mood, the terminations are ssions, 
 ssiez, and the third person would be ssoient ; 
 but that would be a longer terminations than the 
 genius of the French language would allow, it is 
 therefore shortened into ssent. 
 
 If the person, tense, etc. of the word jimriez, 
 be required, it must be remembered that ez is 
 the sign of the second person plural ; that i is 
 the sign of an imperfect tense, and r of the fu- 
 ture: it is therefore the second person plural of 
 tht future imperfect. In rendroit, t is the sign 
 of the third person singular, oi is the sign of the 
 imperfect, and r of the future ; it is then the 
 third person singular of the future imperfect, and 
 belongs to the conjugation euding in re. 
 
 A French verb which is termed irregular, 
 is nevertheless derived regularly from the 
 Latin. For example the verb plaire. This 
 
LANGUAGE. 145 
 
 verb is evidently derived from the Latin placere : 
 to convert this word into French, it must be cur- 
 tailed, and the first step towards this, will be to 
 leave out the e before the r ; there will then be 
 placre, but as c and r cannot combine together, 
 and the r is absolutely necessary, the c must be 
 dispensed with ; the a being changed into the 
 softer sound ai, which forms plaire. To form 
 the different persons and tenses, it remains only 
 to reject the final e, and add the proper termina- 
 tions. 
 
 The French verb connoitre is derived from the 
 Latin cognoscere* We will now consider the 
 various changes which take place during the pro* 
 cess of derivation. In the word connoissance, 
 which is also derived from cognoscere } the sc is 
 changed into ss, and the o is shortened into oi, 
 oiss : we then have cognoistere ; but as there 
 cannot be a double e, the first is taken away, be- 
 cause the latter is wanted for the infinitive ter- 
 mination ; the word becomes then cognoissre : 
 the r being too weak by itself, it must be 
 strengthened by a d or t ; a t is preferred ; the 
 g is changed into «, and the double s is lost — at 
 last connoitre is obtained. 
 
 In the future, the r is retained ; as connoitrai, 
 connoitras, etc. but in other tenses, the r is 
 changed into its original s—je connois, tu con' 
 nois, etc. 
 
14(J NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 Another example may be found in mourir. 
 In the Latin, there is for the infinitive, some- 
 times moriri, but generally mori To form 
 mourir, the final i must be taken from moriri, 
 and the o softened into ou; for the future, the ir 
 is rejected, and we have je mourai — tu mouras, 
 etc. In the present, the infinitive termination 
 is omitted, and an s is added, as je mours, tu 
 mows ; but as the ou is too long, it is changed 
 into eu, as je meurs, etc. In the same manner, 
 when in the Latin word dolor there are two 
 short o's, they are strengthened and converted 
 into ou and eu ; as, dolor, douleur ; color, 
 couleur ; and from dolorosus comes douloureux. 
 
 When the Latin word debere is to be sought in 
 French, the b must be changed into v (devere,) 
 the second e being rejected, it becomes devre, 
 but as the v and r cannot combine together, the 
 termination re is changed "into oir, devoir. This 
 verb then is not regular, but regulated. It is 
 impossible to obtain the future from devoir,, as 
 it is irregular, and must be derived from the re- 
 gular verb devre. In the present, the r is re- 
 jected, and it becomes devs; but, as v and s cannot 
 stand together, and as s is the personal character, 
 it must remain, and the v be omitted ; the word 
 des is then left, but as the e is too weak, it must 
 be strengthened by changing it into oi : we have 
 then dois—je dois, tu dois, il doit. When in 
 
LANGUAGE. 147 
 
 the plural there are two syllables, the e is re- 
 stored, and devons, devez, doivent, are ob- 
 tained. 
 
 It remains only to fix the conjugations. This 
 may be easily done by observing which of the 
 vowels, a, e, i, precedes the personal termina- 
 tions rons, rez, ront. The Latin conjugations 
 may be learned in the same way. In the verb 
 aller, we do not, in the present tense, ssyjalle., 
 but je vais ; the vais is not then derived from 
 aller y but from the German, wenden. It takes 
 part of the present from one verb, and the re- 
 mainder from another. When the Latin verb 
 habere is to be converted into French, the b is 
 changed into v, and havere is formed ; the h 
 not being sounded in French, it is omitted, as- 
 avere; the first e is rejected, and the re being 
 changed into oir, we have avoir. 
 
 In the present, the oir would be s — avs ; but 
 v and s not combining together, the v must be 
 omitted, and the a is softened into ai — making 
 ais'; the s not being pronounced, it is therefore 
 dropped ; we have then ai—fai : the future 
 comes from the infinitive avre ; the v being re- 
 solved into it ; as avrai—aurai — auras — aura. 
 The second person singular always takes s for its 
 character, as in Latin — habes — as=debes — dois. 
 The third person has t from the Latin, but as 
 this letter was not pronounced in some cases, it 
 
148 NEW AKT OF MEMORY. 
 
 has been dropped ; yet is is again brought into 
 use, when the nominative case is put after the 
 verb, when two vowels would come together, as 
 aima-t-il? — moura-t-il? When the nominative 
 precedes the verb, the t is omitted. 
 
 The following observations showing the pro- 
 cess of derivation in some particular languages, 
 and the mode by which one letter is substituted 
 for another, will serve to illustrate the subject 
 upon which we have been treating. They arc 
 taken from Dr. Rees' Cyclopaedia.* 
 
 " The substitution of a labial for an aspirate 
 or a guttural, or a diphthong, forms a general 
 principle which pervades the Latin tongue in its 
 formation from the Greek. Hence vicus, a vil- 
 lage, from oiftog ; vinum, wine from oivog ; ovis, 
 a sheep, from oig ; video, to see, from eidco. With 
 respect to our own language a similar analogy 
 prevails, which has converted a guttural into a 
 labial; thus laugh is pronounced laff; enough, 
 muff', and most of those words which begin or 
 end with y and w, whether derived from He- 
 brew, Greek, or Gothic, began or ended with 
 a guttural. On this general principle year may 
 safely be said to be derived directly, or indirect- 
 ly, from yvfo?, a circle, and means a period, 
 
 A\;t, Etymology* 
 
LANGUAGE. 149 
 
 or revolution of time ; wheel from xu\iu to roll, 
 etc. etc. 
 
 " The prefixing of the letter s to Greek words 
 is a principle that pervades the Latin tongue; as 
 in spemo, to despise, from 7ttz% vyi, the heel ; thus 
 the primary sense of spemo is, to put the heel 
 upon ; on the same principle is salio, insilio, in- 
 sult, taken from axxopai. The French gene- 
 rally drop the gutturals either in the middle or 
 at the end of words ; hence we should be justi- 
 fied by an invariable analogy in saying, that eau, 
 water, is from aqua, and seal from singulus. 
 The Italians generally drop the liquid /,- agree- 
 ably to this custom of the language, ftume is 
 derived from Jlumen, a stream, and piano from 
 planus, a plain. In German, most of those 
 words which have t in English, are used with an 
 s ; as zcaser, wafer ; besser, better ; es, it : and 
 the -corruption of m into for v, is a priuciple 
 that runs through the Welsh tongue; thus, ve, 
 voer, and vayr, are but the Latin words, me, 
 mare, and major." 
 
 We shall conclude this section with some ex- 
 cellent rules given by Mr. Greenwood,* for 
 ascertaining when an English word is derived 
 
 * Essay toward a Practical English Grammar, p. 212. 
 • 3 
 
150 flEVT AitT Of lKE#OR*. 
 
 from Latin, and how it may be made Latin 
 again. 
 
 |. Most English words, ending in nee, or cy, 
 are derived from Latin words in tia; Tempe- 
 rantia, dementia ; Temperance, Clemency. 
 
 £. Words in ion, in English, are made Latin 
 by casting away n ; as, Question, Questio ; Re- 
 ligion, Religio. 
 
 3. Words ending in ty are made Latin by 
 changing ty into tas; as, Liberty, Libert as ; 
 Charity, Ckaritus. 
 
 4. Words ending in ude are derived from the 
 Latin, by changing o into e ; Fortitude, Forti- 
 tudo ; Gratitude, Gratitudo, etc. 
 
 5. Adjectives, which end in d, do for the 
 most part become Latin, by the addition of us; 
 as Rigid, Rigidus ; Putrid, Putridus, etc. 
 
 6. Words ending in t, n, or r, between two 
 vowels become Latin by changing the last vowel 
 into us; as, Mute, Mutus; Obscure, Obscu-* 
 rus ; Obscene, Obsc&nus, etc. 
 
 7. Most words ending in nt are made Latin, 
 by changing nt into ns ; as Latent, Latens ; 
 Vigilant, Vigilans, etc. 
 
 8. Many words ending in al, by the addition 
 of as become Latin ; as Liberal, Liberalis ; 
 Substantial, Substantialis. 
 
LANGUAGE, 151 
 
 Seel 6. — Mode of learning the Conjugations 
 and Declensions of a Language. 
 
 In the Latin infinii Y-» are, ere, ire, are the 
 terminations of the primary conjugations ; there 
 are two more in Pre which are secondary. The 
 first person singular is given by thf termination 
 o, asf eo — deleo from delere; and io — audio from 
 audiere ; but we do not say amao from amare f 
 but amo : a and are two dependant vowels ; 
 the a is merged in the o according to the genius 
 of the language ; for a labial cannot precede a 
 lingual vowel. In eo aud ie there is first a 
 lingual, and then a labial vowel, we conse- 
 quently have : 
 
 amare — delere-^audire— lambere -fugere 
 amo — deleo — audio — lambo fugio 
 
 The preterperfect tense is terminated by vi, as 
 amavi — delevi — audivi, except in the secondary 
 conjugations which only change the o of the pre- 
 sent tense into i ; as lambo — Iambi— fugio — 
 
 fugi- 
 
 The supine is known by the termination turn, 
 as, amatum — deletwn — audit um — lambitum— 
 
 fugitum. The personal characters are in the sin- 
 gular o (amo), m (amabaw,), s (amas — amabav 
 
151 NEVT ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 t (amaf — amabaf^ ; and in the plural, mus, tis, 
 tit, as (amamus, atnatis, amatit). The third per- 
 son plural from ire is not int, but being softened 
 in the pronunciation by the insertion of u, be- 
 comes hint, as audiunt, fugiunt ; and the se- 
 condary ere, as in lambere does not make lam- 
 bent in the third person plural, but lambunt. 
 The different tenses to be considered are the pre- 
 sent, imperfect, preterperfect, preterpluperfect, 
 and future; and there are two moods, the indi- 
 cative and the subjunctive, each of which con- 
 tains all the foregoing tenses. 
 
 In the present tense of the subjunctive mood 
 when the vowel is a in the infinitive, it is changed 
 into e; and when it is e in the infinitive, it be- 
 comes a in the subjunctive; this may be thus 
 
 \e/ 
 remembered o/ e amare — amem ; delere — 
 
 /a\ 
 
 deleam ; legere — legam. The character of the 
 imperfect is ba in the indicative, and re in the 
 subjunctive mood. The word bare will bring 
 this to our recollection — amabam — amarem ' 7 
 delebam — delerem. 
 
 The character of the preterperfect is i in the 
 indicative, except in the secondary verbs, and in 
 the subjunctive is erim ; amavi — amaverim ; 
 dehvi—deleverim ; — Iambi — lamberim. 
 
LANGUAGE. 1SS 
 
 The preterpluperfect of the indicative is 
 known by the termination veram, etc. except 
 when the preterperfect is formed simply with i, 
 in which case it is tram. The same tense in the 
 subjunctive is vissem, or, issem : — amaveram — 
 amavissem ; — deleveram — delevissem ; legeram 
 — legissem. 
 
 The future of the indicative is formed by bo in 
 amo and deleo, and by am in lambo and fugio. 
 In the subjunctive mood, the future termination 
 is formed from the preterperfect indicative by 
 the addition of ero throughout ; as amabo — 
 amavero ; — delebo — delevero ; lambam — lam- 
 bero. 
 
 The following tables of the Latin conjuga- 
 tions and declensions may, be committed to me- 
 mory, by placing them on a wall, a mantle- 
 piece, a door, etc. preserving the situations of 
 the moods, tenses, and declensions as described 
 in the tables. 
 
154 
 
 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 S3 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 <u - • 
 
 — > O :- 
 
 ' o 
 
 £ 13 
 
 
 Sh 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 sg 
 
 and 
 ings 
 ten- 
 
 
 Si *"§ 
 
 
 ts sS 
 ■3 «5 
 
 •5 o o 
 > £ 
 
 .5 3 * 
 oe.2-*. 
 
 c +3 
 •" Si ;A 
 
 
 £. O 
 
LANGUAGB. 
 
 155 
 
 3" 3 
 
 y ; c c : J- 
 
 Cr ft * ft o a" 
 
 ~Pr?g ^ 
 S* 
 
 5-g S'» » 
 
 1 
 
 p B » 8 ■» ^ 
 s g 
 
 r 
 
 » g 5' o » 
 a 
 3 
 
 a 
 
 © a © -• a o 
 3 " S 
 
 5" 
 
 e 
 
 CO 
 
 K ft — a >» 
 
 3" ■» C - p so 
 
 U 
 
 ca 
 3 | 1 
 
 US 
 
 uum 
 
 ibus 
 
 us 
 
 ibus 
 
 OB 
 
 s a s a - « 
 
 g — «• 5 5 
 
 a 
 
 en 
 
 ft ft ft ft ft 
 
 53" ** ST "» "^ 
 
 a £ £"* 
 
 CO w S 
 
 ■ 
 
 ft ft ft ft ft M. 
 
 a — — co n 
 
 s 
 
 ©- 
 
 <$, 
 
 is' 
 
 b 
 
156 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 Sect. 7. — Particular Directions for the acqui- 
 sition of a Language. 
 
 Having fixed the terminations of the declen- 
 sions and conjugations, and observed the signs of 
 the different cases, the student may proceed to 
 the learning of a language. Supposing this to 
 be the Latin language, an easy book must be 
 first taken, for instance, a Latin Bible, and an 
 English one, placed by the side of it. In the 
 latter we read, " In the beginning God created 
 the heaven and the earth" etc. etc. In the 
 Latin it is, In principio creavit Deus caelum et 
 terram, etc. 
 
 The two versions having been compared, the 
 first word is found to be the same in both ; 
 the second in the Latin (principium) does not 
 resemble the English ; its meaning may, how- 
 ever, be ascertained with tolerable accuracy 
 from its situation; and as o is the sign of the 
 ablative singular, there will not be much dif- 
 ficulty in discovering the translation of princi- 
 pium to be ' in the beginning.' The nest word in 
 Latin is creavit, this is found to be a verb by its 
 termination ; cre-a-vi-t is proved to be of the 
 first conjugation by the character a ; v shows it 
 to be the preterperfecH tense, and t gives the 
 third person singular. It is impossible to err in 
 assigning creavit its proper meaning \ the 
 word so nearly resemble* the English created. 
 
LANGUAGE. 157 
 
 Who created ? God created — Deus is the nomi- 
 native. What did he create ? the heaven and the 
 earth: calum et terram will immediately be 
 presented to us ; our calestial and terrestrial 
 cannot fail to give the meaning of these words, 
 and the final m will point out to us that they are 
 in the accusative case. 
 
 In this manner, we should proceed for two or 
 three pages, and then read them for three or four 
 times more, till we can translate with tolerable 
 facility. We do not consult grammars to learn 
 the rules, but merely to solve any difficulty that 
 may occur. In the present mode, the grammar 
 is learned in the language, and not the language 
 in the grammar. Every rule is an abstraction, 
 and cannot be understood .without an example. 
 Instead of long rules we learn examples, and 
 these should be fixed upon the walls of a room in 
 proper order. 
 
 The striking analogy between many modern 
 languages, and the consequent facility of acquiring 
 several languages, at the same time, must be 
 evident to every one. This is particularly the 
 case with the English, German, Latin, French, 
 Italian, Spanish, and Portugueze languages. 
 
CHAP. VI. 
 
 ^stemattc %Mzq> 
 
 1 he knowledge of Systematic Tables is pecu- 
 liarly important to the student in any branch of 
 science, whether it be botany, zoology, chemis- 
 try, mineralogy, etc. and the mode of fixing 
 these tables in the memory, must be deemed of 
 very great use to all who are concerned in such 
 pursuits. The application of this art to such 
 tables will be shown in the following Mineralo- 
 gical table of H.\u y. 
 
 The characters of Minerals are of three kinds, 
 Physical, Geometrical, and Chemical. 
 
 I. $l)p£ical €fjaractcr& 
 
 I. GENERAL. 
 
 1. Specific Gravity, (according to the Hy- 
 drostatic balance of Nicholson.) 
 
 2. Cohesion. 
 
 1 . In Solids is proved : 
 I. By friction with a file. 
 i Yielding. 
 at Not yielding. 
 
SYSTEMATIC TABLES. 
 
 Physical characters, continued. 
 
 II. By rubbing the angular parts of one 
 
 mineral against the angular parts of 
 another mineral. 
 
 III. By Pereussion with a hammer. 
 i Difficult to be broken. 
 
 ii Brittle. 
 
 Hi Crumbling, 
 iv. By a Steel. 
 
 i Giving Fire. 
 
 ii Not giving Fire. 
 v. By flexion or pressure-. 
 
 i Simply Flexible. 
 
 ii Elastic. 
 
 Hi Ductile. 
 
 iv Soft. 
 
 1. In its own nature. 
 
 2. Having imbibed a fluid. 
 VI. By the force of Traction. 
 
 2. Liquids (yielding with the slightest pressure.) 
 i. By moistening I lie hand. 
 II. By not moistening it. 
 II. PARTICULAR. (As found by the senses.) 
 1. Impression upon theTonoue. 
 I. By Taste. 
 i Salt. 
 
 ii Astringent. 
 Hi Sweetish. 
 iv Pungent. 
 v Bitter. 
 m Urinous, 
 
160 NEW ART OF MEMO! Y. 
 
 Physical characters, continued. 
 1 1 . By adhesion. 
 
 2. Feeling. 
 
 I. Unctuous and Greasy. 
 ii. Smooth, but not greasy. 
 in. Harsh, 
 
 3. Smell. 
 
 I. By Breathiug. 
 
 II. By Rubbing. 
 ill. By Heating. 
 
 i Aliaceous, or garlic-like. 
 ii Bituminous. 
 Hi Sulphureous. 
 
 4. Sound. 
 
 I. By Percussion. 
 ii. By Bending,. 
 
 5. Light. 
 
 X. By Reflexion, (producing Colour. 
 i Colours of the mass. 
 
 1. In their species. 
 
 2. In their distribution. 
 i Uniform. 
 
 ii Variegated. 
 
 1. In stripes. 
 
 2. In spots. 
 
 3. In their action. 
 
 1. By change of colour. 
 
 2. By reflex irises. 
 
■SYSTEMATIC TABLES. 1^1 
 
 Physical characters, continued 
 
 ii Colours of the Streak. 
 ' . Similar. 
 2. Dissimilar. 
 in Colours of the Powder, 
 J. Similar. 
 2. Dissimilar. 
 (Producing Lustre) 
 t Brilliant. 
 ii Dull, 
 iii Greasy. 
 -ta Silky. 
 v Pearly. 
 vi Metallic. 
 vii Pseudo-Metallic. 
 21. By Refraction. 
 ^Transparency.) 
 I. Limpid. 
 2. Transparent butcoloured, 
 
 3. Translucid. 
 
 4. Opaque. 
 
 ill. By Phosphorescence. 
 i By heating. 
 ii By rubbing. 
 
 ^6. Electricity. 
 I. Passive. 
 
 4 By communication. 
 v»i By-rubbing. 
 
 1. Vilrenus. 
 
 2. Resinous* 
 
 vP S 
 
18$ NE^ ARt OF MfeMOR*. 
 
 ^Physical characters, continued, 
 tit By heating. 
 
 (Vitreout on one side, and resinous 
 on the other.) 
 II. Active. 
 i Vitreous. 
 ii Resinous. 
 Hi Neither vitreous nor resinous. 
 
 7. Magnetism. 
 
 i. Simple. 
 II. Polar. 
 
 II. Geometrical 4C§m&tt0* 
 
 i. FORM. 
 
 j. Determinable. 
 
 I. Elementary. 
 
 II. Secondary. 
 
 t. Indeterminable. 
 
 i. By rounding off the surfaces and angtes, 
 H. Striated and rough. 
 in. Amorphous bodies, (i. e. bodies of an 
 irregular form.) 
 
 3. Imitative. 
 
 I. Bodies formed by concretion. 
 
 ail. Pseudomorphous bodies, (i. e. such as 
 have assumed the form of another body, 
 lor which they aie substituted.) 
 
SYSTEMATIC TABLES. l6S 
 
 Geometrical characters, continued. 
 
 II. STRUCTURE, 
 
 1. Laminated. 
 
 2. Lamellated. 
 
 3. Stratiform. 
 
 4. Foliated. 
 
 5. Fibrous. 
 
 « With parallel fibres. 
 ii With radiated fibres. 
 
 6. Granulated, 
 
 7. Compact* 
 §. Cellular. 
 
 III. FRACTURE. 
 
 1. Directions, 
 I. Longitudinal, 
 ii. Transverse. 
 ill. Indeterminate. 
 
 2. Varieties. 
 
 I. Conchoidal, 
 
 II. Smooth, 
 in. Rough, 
 iv. Scaly. 
 
 v. Articulated. 
 
 III. Comical €t>atattec& 
 
 I. BY FIRE. 
 1. With Straw. 
 I. Fusibility. 
 ii. The result of Fusion, 
 in. The Reduction of metallic Substances. 
 
l6*4 NTSW ART Ol' MEMORY, 
 
 Chemica! characters, continued. 
 2, With red-hot Coals. 
 
 I. Volatility. 
 
 II. Detonation. 
 
 III. Decrepitation, 
 iv. Ebullition. 
 
 •IT. BY ACIDS, (and in particular by the Nitric 
 Acid.) 
 
 1. Dissolution with effervescence. 
 
 2. Dissolution without efferves- 
 cence. 
 
 3. Reduction into jelly. 
 
 III. BY ALKALIES. 
 
 i. Dissolution of Copper by Ammonia, 
 forming a beautiful blue Colour. 
 
 2o The Vapour of sulphuretted Am- 
 monia, blackening the Carbonate of 
 Lead. 
 
 The characters of minerals, as we have seen, 
 are physical, geometrical, and chemical. The 
 physical characters are general and particular-; 
 and both these are again subdivided. The ge- 
 neral physical characters must be first consi- 
 dered. In order to fix these, we should take a 
 room which is familiar to us, and place the va- 
 rious divisions upon the different objects in that 
 room, which are also well known to us, invent- 
 ing tome connecting circumstance by which w« 
 
SYSTEMATIC TABLES. 1(55 
 
 may be the better enabled to remember the par- 
 ticular division of the table. 
 
 Having a room in which there are four walls, 
 we take the first which is on our left hand, and 
 commence with specific gravity, the first divi- 
 sion of the general characters, and to fix this in 
 our minds a balance is placed on the top of the 
 wall, near the cieling. The next division is 
 cohesion, which is put by the end of the balance; 
 if we ask what preserves the whole wall in its 
 present firm state, the answer will be cohesion. 
 There is now occasion for a sopha, which is 
 placed against the lower part of the wall ; upon 
 which the solids must be put ; cohesion in solids 
 is proved in six different ways. In one corner of 
 the sopha, zjile is placed, which will call to 
 mind the first mode, friction with a file ; in ano- 
 ther corner, some minerals of an angular shape; 
 and thus we must proceed to fix the six different 
 divisions. The sub-divisions will be easily re- 
 membered, if connected, in some way, with the 
 principal outlines, which are thus permanently 
 fixed. 
 
 Having filled one wall with the general phy- 
 sical characters of minerals, the particular cha- 
 racters are next to be considered. The par- 
 ticular physical characters of minerals are known, 
 1. by taste, t. by adhesion. Another wall is now 
 needful, in which there may be a door : on this 
 
166 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 door a tongue is placed as the emblem of taste ; 
 the door being divided into six compartments, in 
 the first is fouud a cube of salt, to convey the 
 idea of saline ; on the second a string for 
 astringent; in the third some sweetmeats for 
 sweetish ; in the fourth, a knife for sharp, which 
 may cut the string in the second compartment ; 
 bitter in the fiith division will come immediately 
 under sweetish ; and cannot fail to be remem- 
 bered by the contrast which it presents ; urinous 
 is in the sixth and last division, aud will need no 
 symbol. In this way must the pupil proceed 
 with the remaining divisions of the table, fixing 
 each upon an object, and connecting some strik- 
 ing circumstance with the object, that will af- 
 ford a permanent idea of the system which he 
 is desirous to acquire. 
 
 The application of mnemonics to zoological 
 tables, is peculiarly easy and agreeable, as they 
 •are entirely formed of sensible objects, and will 
 readily associate with our hieroglyphics. The 
 Linnean class, mammalia, for instance, may soon 
 be fixed in our minds, by taking a single order, 
 and placing the different genera, if not more 
 than five or six, on different parts of a single 
 hieroglyphic; — and forming associations with 
 the symbol, an.i making a little narrative or tale. 
 If the genera should be numerous, two or three 
 hieroglyphics may be employed for that order. 
 
SYSTEMATIC TABLKS. J67 
 
 We shall not give the associations, because they 
 are so plain and obvious; and as the invention of 
 these will afford an agreeable exercise for the 
 student. The following table, we conceive a 
 sufficient specimen, but the application may be 
 made, with equal facility, to the different classes 
 of birds, amphibia, fishes, insects, worms, land 
 zoophytes ; and with great advantage to any sin- 
 gle class which may be preferred from the parti- 
 cular inclination or pursuit of the student. 
 
 CLASS I. MAMMALIA, or animals provided with teats. 
 
 Symbol. 
 Tower of Babel. Order i. Primates, or chiefs of the 
 
 creation. 
 Genus 1. Siniia>,oran-otan,apes, mon- 
 keys, baboons. 
 
 2. Lemur, maccauco. 
 
 3. Vespertilio, bat. 
 Order ii. Bruta. 
 
 Genus 1. Bradypus, sloth. 
 
 2. Dasypus, armadillo. 
 
 3. Manis pangolin. 
 
 4. Myrmecophaga, ant-eater. 
 
 5. Platypus, ornithoriucus, or 
 
 duck-bill. 
 Swan and Mouu- Order hi. Fer.e, or animals of 
 tain. prey. 
 
 Genus 1. Canis, dog, wolf, hy%na,fox, 
 and jackal. 
 
 2. Felis, rat, Hen, tiger leo- 
 
 pard, lynx, panther, &c. 
 
 3. Viverra, weasel, ferret, pole 
 
 cat, civet. 
 
 4. Ursus, bear. 
 
168 
 
 NEW ART OP MEMORY. 
 
 Symbol. Genus 5. Didelphis, opossum. 
 
 6. Macronus, kanguroo. 
 
 7. Talpa, mole. 
 
 8. Sarex, shrew. 
 
 9. Eriuaceus, hedgehog. 
 LookiDg-GIass Order iv. Glires, or sleepers. 
 s and Throne. Genus 1. Hystrix, porcupine. 
 
 2. Castor, beaver. 
 
 3. Mus, mouse and rat. 
 
 4. Cavia, guinea-pig. 
 
 5. Arctomys, marmot. 
 
 6. Lepus, hare. 
 
 7. Sciurus, squirrel. 
 
 8. MyoxHs, dormouse. 
 
 9. Dipus, jerboa. 
 
 10. Hyrax, Cape and Syrian 
 Horn of Plenty rabbit, 
 
 and Glassblovrer. Order v. Pecora. 
 
 Genus 1. Elephas, elephant. 
 
 2. Camelus, camel, dromedary, 
 
 lama, vicuna. 
 
 3. Giraffe, giraffe or camel- 
 
 leopard. 
 
 4. Cervas, elk, deer-kind. 
 
 5. Bos, ox, buffalo. 
 C. Moschus, musk. 
 
 7. Antilope, antelope, cha- 
 
 mois. 
 
 8. Ovis, sheep. 
 
 9. Capra, goat. 
 Midas. Order, vi. Bvlivje. 
 
 Genus 1. Equns, horse, ass, zebra. 
 
 2. Rhinoceros. 
 
 i 
 
 3. Hippopotamus. 
 
 4. Tapir. 
 
SYSTEMATIC TABLES. l6Q 
 
 Symbol. Genus 5. Sus, pig-kind, pecari, babi- 
 
 roussa. 
 
 PINNATED MAMMALIA. 
 
 Genus 1. Phoca, seals. 
 
 2. Tricheeus, morse or walrus, 
 * manati or sea-cow. 
 
 Narcissus. Order vii. Cete or Cetacea, (ceta- 
 
 ceous mammalia, or whale tribe.) 
 Genus 1. Balaeua, proper whales. 
 
 2. Physeter,sperniacetiwhales. 
 
 3. Delphinus, dolphin, por- 
 
 poise, grampus. 
 
 4. Monodon, narwhal, sea-uni- 
 
 corn. 
 
 The following table by Mr. Nicholson, 
 showing the number of ounces Avoirdupois, in a 
 cubic foot of some metals and other bodies, will 
 be a useful exercise ; the technical words to be 
 formed out of the figures, we shall leave to the 
 industry, and the associations, to the ingenuity, 
 of the student. 
 
 Bodies. Ounces. Hieroglyphic. 
 
 1. Pure Gold cast - - 19258 -Tower of Babel 
 
 2. Sea Water - - 1026 - Swan 
 
 3. Standard Gold cast - 17486 -Mountain 
 
 4. Zinc ... 7191 -Looking Glas* 
 
 5. Bismuth - - - 9823 -Throne 
 
 6. Pumice Stone - - 914 -Horn of Plenty 
 f. Heart of Oak - - 1170 -Glass Blower 
 
 8. Rock Crystal, from Madagascar 2653 -Midas 
 
 9. Lime Stones - - 1386-Nareissu* 
 10. Agate - - - 2590 -Goliath 
 
 Q 
 
170 
 
 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 Bodies. 
 
 11. Tallow 
 
 12. Green Glass 
 
 13. Cast Iron 
 
 14. Cork 
 
 15. English Tin hammered 
 
 16. Crude Platina in Grains 
 
 17. Standard Silver in Coin 
 
 18. Ruby 
 
 19. Mercury 
 *Q. Spermaceti 
 
 / 
 
 Ounces. Hieroglyphic 
 
 942 - Hercules 
 2620 -David 
 
 - 7207 -Castle 
 
 240 -Diogenes 
 7299-JEsculapius 
 
 - 15602 -Ceres 
 
 - 10391 -Archimedes 
 
 - ,4283 -Apollo 
 
 - 13568 - Robin. Cruso* 
 
 943 - Peacock 
 
CHAP. VII. 
 
 $otfrj> anlr $rose* 
 
 The first materials of a poetic edifice are to be 
 found in metaphors, allegories, and in various 
 kinds of fiction ; and, it is thus all images, 
 comparisons, allusions, and figures, particularly 
 those which personify moral subjects, concur in 
 adorning such a structure. When these images 
 are reduced into verse, the ear is delighted to a 
 high degree, and the mind insensibly repeats 
 them while the eye reads them. This is parti- 
 cularly the case with rhyme. Cadence, har- 
 mony, and especially rhyme, afford the greatest 
 assistance to the memory that art can invent; 
 and the images, or poetic fictions, that strike 
 our senses, assist in engraving them deeply on 
 our minds. 
 
 When a historal narrative is related in prost, 
 the facts only are stated in a plain, regular order, 
 without any minute description of the different 
 ■objects which occur in the course of the history. 
 
172 NEW AttT OF MEMORY. 
 
 The poet, however, proceeds differently. He 
 describes, minutely, every object which presents 
 itself; if it be a mountain, we have a lively de- 
 scription of its situation, the objects seen from 
 it, and the trees or houses upon it. Should 
 there be a castle on this mountain, its antient 
 and present state is accurately described, toge- 
 ther with the characters of its various possessors 
 and their contests for the occupation of it : these 
 descriptions we read with pleasure, and they are 
 more firmly imprinted upon the memory by the 
 variety and succession of images employed in 
 them. 
 
 In order to commit to memory any particular 
 piece of poetry which may be divided into stan- 
 zas, each consisting of four, six, eight, or ten 
 lines, etc. it is necessary to take one stanza at a 
 time, to read it over, and to select the principal 
 objects or images, and combine them with the 
 Jirst symbol ; attaching the next stanza to the 
 second symbol, and so on with the remaining 
 stanzas. By these means we are not only ena- 
 bled to recite the whole poem in regular order, 
 but to repeat any one or more stanzas in any 
 order, — to determine the numerical situation of 
 any line or word in the poem — and to say how 
 often any particular word may occur. As we 
 are able to repeat any stanza in the poem, it will 
 
POETRY AND PROSE. 173 
 
 only be needful to count the lines or words, if it 
 be required to determine the numerical situation 
 of any line or word. 
 
 It will not be difficult to apply these princi- 
 ples to the repetition of poetry. A single illus- 
 tration, perhaps, will be sufficient ; and, for this 
 purpose we take the first stanza of Goldsmith 'e 
 JEdzcin and Angelina. 
 
 u Torn, gentle permit of the dale, 
 
 " Ami guide my lonely way 
 *' To where yon taper cheers the vale 
 
 " With hospitable ray." 
 
 We must here reflect, and imagine that we see 
 a Hermit standing on the Touer of Babel, and 
 turning round with inconceivable rapidity ; a 
 very large taper is placed upon Ins head. An- 
 gelina is walking by the tower and cailmg out 
 loudly to the hermit ' to guide her I oik iv way;' 
 the taper cannot fail to suggest the remamder of 
 the stanza. 
 
 In a poem that is not divided into stanzas, we 
 must take 4, 6, 8, or 10 l.nes, preserving the 
 -conn. .ction, and fix them t;p>n a s\ mbo!. Se- 
 veral small pieces of poetry maj be read 1 1) ;.u- 
 printed upon the rnearorj by placing them upon 
 the pictures, or furniture, oi die wa ! of a room 
 4Mlh which we may be acquainted. Though 
 the symbols are not here actually resorted 
 2 S 
 
174 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 yet the principle that is pursued, is precisely 
 the same, for what are the symbols, but 
 pictures which line the walls of our imaginary 
 rooms? 
 
 As a further illustration of the mode of com- 
 mitting poetry to memory, we shall give the fol- 
 lowing examples from No/egar, as quoted by 
 Feyjoo, hi his Cartas Eruditas* 
 
 First Example. 
 
 Fert'x Divina 
 De tan bellas alas 
 Hvmilde, y piadosa 
 Al Cieto te enzalzas. 
 
 Divine Phoenix, 
 With such beautiful wings, 
 Humble and Merciful, 
 Thou raisest to Heaven. 
 
 " The Phoenix in the first verse of this stanza, 
 (savs Nolegar) must be placed on the first predi- 
 cament of the sphere,^ on the right hand, and a 
 papal crown, or tiara, or any other thing be- 
 longing to the Church, must be put on its head ; 
 because we cannot apply any other material ob- 
 
 * Tom. i. 
 t This will answer to the first place In the first wall of a 
 noxu. 
 
POETRY AND PROSE. 175 
 
 ject, to represent the word Divine ; we may 
 then make a reflection or two on these images, 
 and say, why has a Phoenix, the Papal Crown 
 on its head . ? It is a Divine Phixnix, a Divine 
 Phoenix. Then the second predicament of the 
 left hand shall betaken for the sec>nd verse, and 
 a drum with a stick to beat it, may be placed 
 there; the stick may explain the word [de] with. 
 * # *. I imagine that the drummer being 
 ready to beat it, sa\s* [r/e] with and the drum 
 \tan~\ such; in the same place, I would put two 
 beautiful women sitting by the drummer, who 
 should have two wings lying at his feet ; and 
 speaking of the second predicament, I would say, 
 De tan hellus alas (with such beautiful wings.) 
 " On the third predicament opposite the first 
 on the right, I would put a woman kneeling and 
 soliciting the pardon of a poor man condemned 
 to banishment, who should be there with a 
 chain, and by this image I would recal to mind 
 the words of the third ven>e, Uumilde y piadosa 
 (humble and merciful.) On the fourth predica- 
 ment, I would place a pieceof carpet, (atfombra) 
 or any thing whose name begins with al [to ] and 
 I would only use this syllable, to which I would 
 sew the tester of a bed, and would say (al cieio) 
 to heaven; and for the word thou raisest 1 would 
 put a Priest, raising die Host, to whom the Cu- 
 rate (ayudonte) should hold some salt, saying 
 
176 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 (ten Sfd uhas) take soine salt, (thou raisest.) In 
 this last image the figure Apenthesis is formed, 
 ami reflecting, I should say (ensulzcis) thou 
 raisest. 
 
 Second Example. 
 
 ^Pongan, Senor, el medio, y el gobierno 
 Los altos atribulos de tu Essencitu 
 
 Sir, let Method and government be established 
 By the high attributes of thy Essence. 
 
 c: In order to commit these verses to memory., 
 {says Nolegar,) on the right hand of the table 
 upon =which I am writing, av.d where my ink- 
 stand is, I would place a slave, or a black wo- 
 man, with a basket and two hens in it ; and close 
 to the slave a Marquis or Duke, who on enter-, 
 ing my room should attempt to frighten the hens, 
 at which the slave must say (Pongan, Senor,) 
 Let them lay, Sir. On the right hand of the 
 slave I would place a Medio Celemin (half a 
 Peck measure,) and on the left hand a Chain, 
 signifying the letter (y) (G) or some (hiel) 
 Gall. For government, I would place one of 
 the many governors of my acquaintance, who is 
 astonished at what is going forward. I would 
 ■reflect, aud think that I heard him say, Pongan, 
 Senor, el medio y el gobierno. To represent 
 4he other verse, I would put for (los alios) tur 
 
POETRY AND PROSE. 177 
 
 ©r three pieces of timber with some tiles, taking 
 these for the whole of a roof of a house, which 
 consists of timber and tiles ; and for (atributos) 
 attributes, I would place two tributary Princes, 
 with an image of the letter (A) on the head of one, 
 who must be going to collect tributes or taxes, 
 and if his name be Andrew, the better; because 
 the (A) might be placed as an image of the name. 
 Then supposing our food to be dependent on the 
 collection of the taxes, it would be easy to re- 
 member, that Andrew was bringing some attri- 
 butes by the letter (A) , now, at the feet of this 
 collector, . I would place an alembic of Quint- 
 essences, or a Distiller, with a glass full of wa- 
 ter, (Quintessence, already drawn,) who should 
 mind not to break it with his feet ; and close to 
 the glass I would place a small stick, or the 
 stick of a drummer made of iron, that we may 
 remember it is not to be broken, because it 
 might be used as we have already said, for an 
 abecedario, meaning (de tu) of thy. In this 
 manner, whenever I write, I shall remember 
 that I have this verse at my righl hand ; Pungan, 
 Senor, el Medio, y Gobierno; and on my 
 left, the other; Los altos atributos, de tu Es- 
 sencia." 
 
 When Prose is to be committed to memory, 
 the particular passage, or chapter, should be 
 read over carefully two or three times, and 
 
176 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 having selected the principal images or objects, 
 it will be necessary to form a narrative by com- 
 bining them with the different symbols. We 
 should take a few lines only at a time, and pro- 
 ceed gradually in fixing the various objects pre- 
 sented to us. 
 
 To remember the principal points in a Sermon 
 which is regularly divided into parts, it is only 
 needful to take the different heads or titles as 
 they are given, and arrange them on the cieling 
 of the church or chapel, placing some on the 
 cornice, and others in various parts, in regular 
 order.* Or, a sort of imaginary tree may be sup- 
 posed springing from the centre of the cieling, 
 and the proofs and illustrations adduced by the 
 preacher, may be suspended on its branches. 
 This method will be rendered more effectual, 
 if a symbol of the idea will be formed, as for 
 
 * A plan somewhat analogous to this, is mentioned by 
 3I;\ Dcgai.d Stewart, who observes, '*. 1 have been 
 told of a young woman, in a very low rank of life, who 
 contrived, a method of committing to memory the sermons 
 •which she was accustomed to hear, by fixing her atten- 
 tion, during the diiicrent heads of the discourse, on dif- 
 ferent com, aitmeats of the roof of the chun h ; in such a 
 manner, as that when she afterwards saw the roof, or re- 
 collected die order in which its compartments were dis- 
 poned of, she recollected the method which the preacher 
 ha i observed in treating his subject. Elements of the 
 Philosophy of the Human Mind, p. 456. 
 
POETRY AND PROSE. 17& 
 
 Justice a pair of scales, etc. etc. This, how- 
 ever is not essential** 
 
 Mr. Stewart, speaking of the assistance ren- 
 dered to an orator, or public speaker, by the topi- 
 cal memory, in recollecting the plan and arrange- 
 ment of his discourse, considers the accounts 
 given of it by the antient rhetoricians, as abun- 
 dantly satisfactory, and makes the following per- 
 tinent observations on the subject, 
 
 " Suppose (says this author) that I were to 
 fix in my memory the different apartments in 
 some very large building, and that I had accus- 
 tomed myself to think of these apartments al- 
 ways in the same invariable order. Suppose 
 farther, that in preparing myself for a public 
 discourse, in which I had occasion to treat of a 
 great variety of particulars, I was anxious to fix 
 in my memory, the order I proposed to observe 
 in the communication of my ideas. It is evi- 
 dent, that by a proper division of my subject 
 into heads, and by connecting each head with a 
 particular apartment, (which I could easily do, 
 by conceiving myself to be sitting in the apart- 
 ment while I was studying the part of my dis- 
 course, I meant to connect with it,) the habitual 
 % . — , — — 
 
 * The chapter and verse of the text may be soon fixed, 
 by changing the number of each into a hieroglyphic, and 
 forming an association between the two. 
 
180 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 order in which these apartments occurred to my 
 thoughts, would present to me, in their proper 
 arrangement, and without any effort on my part, 
 the ideas of which I was to treat. It is also ob- 
 vious, that a very little practice would enable 
 me to avail myself of this contrivance, without 
 any embarrassment or distraction ef my atten- 
 tion."* 
 
 A public speaker may arrange the arguments 
 of his adversary on various parts of his person, 
 and thus be enabled to review and answer a mul- 
 tiplicity of observations made by many different 
 speakers. The first remark might be placed on 
 his head, one in each eye, one in each ear, ano- 
 ther on his nose, mouth, etc. etc. If it be re- 
 quired to remember a high number, we need 
 only resort to the symbols : for instance, 27,819 
 will be fixed by remembering the names of Don 
 Quixote, Midas, and Robinson Crusoe, the 27th, 
 8th, and 19th symbols, or, by changing the 
 figures into letters, according to the scale in fig. 
 1, plate 2, and by inserting vowels, and forming 
 words sufficient to construct a sentence, which 
 cannot easily be forgotten. Any sum in founds, 
 shillings, and pence, may be readily committed 
 to memory, by this last method; taking care to 
 
 * Elements of the Philosophy of the Human Mind, pp. 
 456, 457. 
 
POETRY AND PROSE. 181 
 
 have (if possible) but one word for the pounds, 
 and always separate words for the shillings and 
 pence. 
 
 The advantages of this part of the system 
 to the different professions are very great. The 
 minister — the legal student, and the Member 
 of Parliament, may all practise this method 
 with success. The application of these principles 
 will also render an essential service to the mer- 
 chant and the man of business, in the various 
 concerns of life. 
 
CHAP. VIII. 
 
 Sritfjmettc* 
 
 In this chapter, we have given faithfully the 
 substance of Mr. Feinaigle's Lecture on Arith- 
 metic, without any attempt at illustration; and 
 as this Lecture has been accurately detailed in 
 a recent publication,* it is extracted from that 
 work, but without any of the reporter's commen- 
 taries and observations. 
 
 " We have now to see how our methods will 
 apply to Arithmetic. 
 
 " In this subject we think we have, or may have 
 evidence, for every particular proposition. But 
 let us think a little ; in many cases we have cer- 
 tainty : but is certainty and evidence the same 
 thing? For instance, we know that 6 multiplied 
 by 6 gives S6 : this is certain ; but is it evident ? 
 All we can say is that we have learned so : but 
 
 * Cross's Examination of Feinaigle's Arithmetic. 
 
AI11THMETIC. 183 
 
 where is the evidence that 6x6 gives just 36? 
 When you say that 6 X 6 is 36, you answer that 
 it is three tens and six units ; but see we this ? 
 How are we convinced that it is just 36, and no 
 other number? It is only in our machine; but 
 how it comes we know not. 
 
 We have these products given us in our mul- 
 tiplication tables, which we all know how diffi- 
 cult it is for children to learn; nay, many grown 
 persons cannot learn it, because it is founded 
 only upon the poor natural memory, upon which 
 we can never depend. We make it only an ob- 
 ject of memory instead of presenting it to the 
 intellect, and we have no evidence, because we 
 want the first evidence. To find the first evi- 
 dence we must consider the figures themselves. 
 Let us see then what is in the figures : we have 
 
 123456789 
 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 
 100, etc. 
 1000, etc. 
 
 What comes after 9? Is it 10? No; 10 is a 
 higher unit, and must therefore be placed before 
 the 1 ; now what comes after 10? Is it 11 ? 
 No; it is 20. Thus we find those nations did 
 who employed letters for numbers : after having 
 used the first 9 they went on thus, 10, 20, 30, 
 
IS4 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 &c. and not 10, 11, 12, &c. Thus change these 
 numbers as you please, you will' always find they 
 go from 1 to 9, and by considering the numbers 
 in this way, the child sees at once that the rap- 
 port of 10 to 60 is exactly the same with that of 
 1 to 6 ; and all the relations of these numbers 
 are at once in his mind. The first thing then 
 must surely be to give the evidence of those fi* 
 gures ; after this every thing will be easy. In 
 problems, the greatest difficulty is to understand 
 the question ; when we do that, the problem ij 
 half solved ; the mind then acts like an alge- 
 braical formula. O ! we see — put this here, 
 and that there ; do this, and do that, and it is 
 done. 
 
 " Let us see then how we are to get the true 
 idea of number. 
 Let this be one, -------- 
 
 Let it be one something, an apple, or an 
 orange, or whatever, and let this be 
 another, --------"_ O 
 
 Now what have we here ? Is this two ? I see only 
 two ones ; and we say that these are equal to one 
 two: But how know we this? Have we evi- 
 dence in the thing itself that two ones are the 
 same with one two ? I should see two things in 
 one thus ; _.-------© 
 
 O 
 and the child sees at once that two halves are 
 
ARITHMETIC. 185 
 
 equal to one ; and that two halves and one are 
 equal to one two. In the same manner I have 
 for three, a circle divided into thiee sectors; 
 and the child sees at once that three thirds are 
 equal to one ; and that the half of 3 thirds is one 
 half; and that three thirds and two halves and 
 one are equal to three. And so on for the higher 
 numbers. 
 
 " Thus the child sees at once the proportions 
 between the fractions : those things which are 
 most difficult to be learned by the common way 
 are here the first to be acquired, because they go 
 with the first conception. If I say give me one 
 half of three thirds, or one third of one half, or 
 one half of one third, or one third together with 
 one half of one third, he gives me them at once, 
 because he has a clear conception of their mean- 
 ing. I give not these things to the child, he 
 must give them to me ; and it is wonderful what 
 calculations many children will make when they 
 go on with their reason ; but all this is gone 
 when they begin with the usual methods, be- 
 cause evidence is taken away, and commonly we 
 find that the more instruction they receive, the 
 difficulty is the greater. But in our method they 
 proceed with pleasure, because they continue to 
 have evidence ; and I will engage that any child 
 
 instructed in this method, would in one fortnight 
 as 
 
186 NEW ART OF MEMOKf. 
 
 perform calculations of which you have no ides. 
 So true is this, that if we were to unknow all that 
 we have learned, and begin from the foundation, 
 it would be better. 
 
 " We can go on with the same principles to 
 Mathematics ; in them we have three things, 
 weight, measure, and number ; but all are redu- 
 cible to number. 
 
 " If we now represent our succession of 
 units thus, and divide ten into two halves, 
 as we have seen that this is necessary for 
 representing two in one. If I ask what 
 is 6 to 8, or give me one half of eight, 
 and one fourth of eight, the child finds 
 this at once, which is sometimes the solution 
 of a difficult problem. If we go on to Addi- 
 tion, and ask what is 7 and 8 ? the child sees 
 at once that 7 is equal to 5 and 8, and that 
 8 is equal to 5 and 3 ; so that 7 and 8 are 
 equal to two fives and five, or one ten and five, 
 or fifteen. In the same manner 6 and 6 are one 
 ten and two, 8 and 8 are one ten and six, &c. &c. 
 so that we see addition is certainly demonstrated 
 thus ; and subtraction is as evident. 
 
 " Let us go on then to Multiplication. Say that 
 we ask how much is eight taken six times, the 
 answer must be in tens and units, the child 3ees 
 that 8 is equal to 5 and S, 
 
 and 6 is equal to 5 and I. 
 
ARITHMETIC, 187 
 
 And multiplying these he has- - -25 
 
 Thus every member must be considered by 15 
 what it is in rapport to 10 and 5. 5 
 
 3 
 
 48 
 But let us see if this is not in our dots also, . . 
 
 We have certainly above a and below 6 and c 
 four dots, which arc the tens ; above b we have 
 four, and above c two ; two multiplied by four 
 give eight for the units, so that we have 48. 
 
 " In the sam e manner 7 multiplied by 9, . . 
 we have 6 tens, and one multiplied by 3, . rr c 
 •r 3 units, that is 63. 
 
 b- 
 
188 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 And so 8 multiplied by 9,' we have 7 tens, 
 and one multiplied by two units or 72, 
 and so in every other case; only the rule fr 
 must be changed when we change the 
 •bject of the question. 
 
 So that we see a child has no need of the mul- 
 tiplication table; he burdens not his mind with 
 it ; he sees not only the relation of the different 
 numbers, but he sees all how they affect and 
 combine with each other ; all is in the nature of 
 the thing ; the evidence is before him. 
 
 " Let us now go on to Division. Suppose we 
 have to divide 63 by 7 ; let us see if this is not 
 included in the nature of the thing. We have 
 
 7)63( 
 If we subtract the 7 from 10, wet have 3 ; and 
 
ARITHMETIC. 189 
 
 if we add this to 6, we hav« 9 the quotient. 
 Divide 54 by 9. 
 
 9)54(6 
 Subtracting the 9 from 10, and adding the re- 
 mainder to 5, we have 6 the quotient. 
 
 4 2 
 
 so 6)48(8 8)72(9 and so on. 
 
 And in cases where the dividend does not exactly 
 contain the devisor, as in 
 
 9)76(8 
 we find by multiplication, that 8 multiplied by 9 
 gives 72, we have then 4 over, which is conse- 
 quently 4 ninths. 
 
 " Thus in every case we have always the answer 
 to the nearest whole number. Here also we 
 have no need of the multiplication table, which, 
 as I said before, is so difficult to learn, as the 
 numbers themselves give us the answer ; it is in 
 their nature. You see then how easy it is to ad- 
 vance by our method, and we charge not the 
 memory with what it is so difficult to fix." 
 
PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS 
 
 or 
 
 8rttfictal iWemorp, 
 
 CHRONOLOGICALLY ARRANGED. 
 
 A. s many of the treatises on this subject are 
 extremely rare, we shall give the title of each, 
 and occasionally notice their contents ; but we 
 shall not attempt a particular analysis of the early 
 books, as the same principles will be found am- 
 ply developed in those of a more recent date, 
 from which copious extracts are made. In 
 some few instances, indeed, on account of its 
 rarity, or usefulness, the whole work has been 
 reprinted ; and, a slight sketch of the author's life 
 has, when practicable, been introduced. The 
 articles thus noticed are all numbered ; the books 
 are chronologically arranged, according to the 
 dates of their publication; and the MSS. are re- 
 ferred to that period in which their respective 
 authors probably flourished. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. IQl 
 
 1. Thomce Bradwardini Ars Memora- 
 
 tiva. MS. 
 i 
 
 This curious manuscript is No. 3744- in the 
 
 Shane Collection, preserved in the British Mu- 
 seum. It consists of three pages and a hall" of a 
 small duodecimo size, and treats of places, and of 
 images or symbols to be arranged in the places; 
 and, is evidently an attempt, though a fetble one, 
 to form a system of topical memory, according 
 to the plan of the anttents. 
 
 Thomas Bradw\rdin was called the 
 Profound Doctor, and was born in Sussex, 
 about the beginning of the fourteenth century. 
 He was educated at Merton College, Oxford, of 
 which he was proctor in 1325. Being called to 
 court by Stratford, archbishop of Canterbury, he 
 was made confessor to Edward III. and presented 
 with a canonry of Lincoln, and also with the 
 chancellorship of St. Paul's, Londou. He ac- 
 companied the king in his warlike expeditions; 
 and to his sanctity of life and pious prayers, the 
 superstition of the age attributed much of the 
 success attending the arms of that monarch. His 
 writings were partly theological ; and he appears 
 to have been one of the most enlightened eccle- 
 siastics of his age. He ""gained great credit by 
 his mathematical works. 
 
1955 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 2. Matheoli Perusini traclatus Artis Me- 
 
 memorativa, 8°. 1470. [BL let] 
 
 This work was often reprinted in subsequent 
 years. 
 
 3. Jacobi Publicii An Memorativa in- 
 
 cipil feliciter, 4°. [foL let] 
 
 4. In nova mirabilique ac perfectissima 
 
 Memoriae Jacobi Publicii, prologus 
 feliciter incipit, 4°. [M» let*] 
 
 These two articles are without date, place, or 
 printer's name. Pa nzee* has arranged No. 3 
 among the books printed at Cologne, by John 
 Guldenachaff, but does not assign any date to it. 
 Publicins was the author of Ars conficiendi epis- 
 tolas Culliano more, printed in 1488; and of 
 Artis Oratorio, Epitom. Ars Epistolaris et Ars 
 Memorij, printed in 148&. It is very proba- 
 ble, then, that the article under consideration, was 
 printed before the year 14S2, and afterwards re- 
 printed with the two other tracts of Publicius. 
 The Ars Memorativa seems to have been the 
 fountain from which every successive writer has 
 taken copious draughts. It treats of the arrange- 
 
 * Annates Typogiapoici, ton. I. p. 343. td. Norimb. 1793. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 193 
 
 ment of places and the combination of images. 
 Several wood-cuts are given, of the most rude 
 and grotesque description, representing the alpha- 
 bet by symbols takea from the different objects. 
 Since the above observations were written, we 
 have seen the following notice of this rare and 
 curious work in Mr. Beloe's Anecdotes of 
 Literature and scarce Books :* 
 
 This is a very curious and scarce book, which, 
 as Mr. Douce is of opinion, was the earliest 
 with wooden cuts, that was printed with movea- 
 ble types. 
 
 Denis (I use, with his permission, the words 
 of Mr. Douce) affirms, in his Supplement to 
 Maittaire, that it was printed at Cologne. This 
 opinion seems to be founded on the resemblance 
 of its type to that which was used by Ulric Zell. 
 The capital letters, however, are different from 
 those in a copy of Petrarch's Historia Griselidis 
 in the possession of Mr. Douce, as well as from 
 the engraved specimen in Meerman, Tab. IX. 
 
 In the Catalogue of the Valliere Library, No. 
 1856, it is said to have been printed by J. Gul- 
 denschoff, of Mayence, but who, according to 
 Maittaire, was of Cologue. 
 
 The volume consists of fourteen leaves, each 
 page containing twenty-seven lines. The fol- 
 
 Vol. i. pp. J27— 229. 
 ■ 
 
194 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 lowing is a specimen of the contents. I must, 
 however; remind the reader that the original is 
 in the Gothic character, with so many and com- 
 plicated abbreviations, as to render it by no 
 means easy of perusal. 
 
 Nonnihil etiam ad hac rG opis onomathopeia 
 nobis affett ide agminio ubi e sono vocis ducta. 
 Sic eminet taratantara dixit. Equi hynnitus 
 mugitusbue bou balatuq. grege. Strix nocturna 
 et vesperiilio stridet, bubitus apium grus gruit 
 crastinat corvus tu corvo voce notat barritus a 
 barro ululat ulule pitat accipitres et aha quoe 
 plurima sunt usu et cosuetudine vocis sonitu 
 ymagines pbebunt. 
 
 The engravings on wood are of very rude ex- 
 ecution, representing a book, part of a town, an 
 old man sitting in a chair, horses. 
 
 The book was, beyond doubt, printed between 
 1460 and 1470. The author, Jacobus Publicius, 
 was a Florentine, concerning whom, if the reader 
 wishes for further particulars, he may consult 
 Fusii Bibliotheca Gesneri, p. 382, and Fabricii 
 Biblioth. Mediae. iEtatis, iv. 42. 
 
 Maittaire was not acquainted with this edition; 
 and some authors have attributed it to George 
 Sibut. See the Valliere Catalogue, Preface, p. 
 xvi. 
 
 The Valliere Copy sold for 110 livres. Be- 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 3 9-& 
 
 sides the copy in the Museum, Mr. Douce has 
 one, but I know of no other. 
 
 5. AfS 3Iemorativa per Johannem Priiss, 
 
 fol. Argent. 1488. [M. Jet] 
 
 6. Petrus Colonic?, Ars 3Iemorativa, 4°. 
 
 [W. let.] 
 
 No. 6. consists of eight leaves, with several 
 badly executed woodcuts, evidently the produc- 
 tions of a very early period. It is without date, 
 place, or name of the printer. The arms of 
 Cologne occupy the whole of the last page; 
 from this circumstance, and from the addition 
 of the author, it may be inferred that the work 
 was printed at Cologne. The address to the 
 reader notices the attempt of Publicius, and ex- 
 presses the author's desire to form a compendious 
 view of the Art of Memory for the use of all 
 persons. There is, of course, but little differ- 
 ence between the schemes of Publicius, and Pe- 
 ter of Cologne. The wood-cuts, which are nu- 
 merous, are interspersed with the letter-press, 
 and are intended to represent images of particu- 
 lar objects ; as a carpenter, by a hammer ; a 
 cobler, by a shoe, etc. etc. 
 
19(5 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 7. Incipit Ars Memorice venerabilis Bal- 
 
 douini Sabodiensis Mediccs. Artis 
 Doctoris Eximii, 4°. Paris. [3E>L let J 
 
 This article is without date, place, or name 
 of the printer. It is, in fact, a republication of 
 Publicius, with some introductory rules, which 
 are delivered in Latin hexameters, accompanied 
 by a prosaic comment and exposition. Manget, 
 in his Bibliotheca Scriptorum Medicorum,* 
 has the following meagre information respecting 
 this ' venerable and illustrious medical Doctor/ 
 ' Baldovinus (Sabodiensis), De eo exstat, An 
 memorite carmine cum glossis. Parisiis, in 4°.' 
 
 8. Fcenix Dnni Petri Rauenatis Me- 
 mories magistri, 4°. Veneiiis, 1491. 
 
 9. Memorice Ars quee Phoenix inscribitur, 
 
 8°. Paris, 1544. 
 
 10. Phoenix sen Artificiosa Memoria CI. 
 I. V. JO. et militis D. Petri Raven- 
 natis Juris Canonici olim in Pata- 
 vino Gymnasio Professoris celeber- 
 rimi, 4°. Vicentice, 1600. 
 
 * Tom. I. p. 224. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 197 
 
 In this work, [Nos. 8, 9, 10.] the places and 
 images are noticed at large, with various rules for 
 forming, arranging, and combining them. If we 
 would remember, says Peter, any particular cir- 
 cumstances, we must form some vivid imagination 
 of the event, and associate it with the names of 
 some " pretty girls" of our acquaintance ! ! ! I would 
 wish him that is melancholy, (says IWton) to 
 study Cosmus Rosselius, Peter Ravciinas, and 
 Schenckelius Detectus. 
 
 1 1 . Jacobi Colinm Campani de Mempria 
 Artificiosa coinpendiosum opnsculum. 
 Jmpressit Ascensias, 4°. [Paris]! 5 J 5. 
 Vcnundatur in Aedibus Asc'ensianis. 
 
 [U let ] 
 
 l :>. Nicholai C/tappusii de menle et me- 
 mo ri a UbeUns uriiissimvs, 4°. [Paris] 
 1-515. Venundatur uhi impressvs : 
 est in Aedibus Ascensianis. [M. let] 
 
 The two preceding articles are little more than 
 
 a repetition of the scheme of Peter of Ravenna, 
 
 with some observations on the theorv of natural 
 
 memory. They are both beautiful specimens 
 
 of early typography, and have in the title a large 
 
 colophon [in wood] representing a room of a 
 
 printing office, in which are a compositor at work, 
 s 3 
 
J9S PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 a press, a man laying on the ink, and auother 
 working the press. 
 
 13. Congestorium Artificiosa Memories 
 Joannis Romberch de Kyrpse; — opus 
 omnibits Theologis, predicatoribus ; 
 coiifessoribus, advocatis et notariis ; 
 medicis, philosophis ; Arti liberalium 
 professoribus. Insuper mercatoribus, 
 nuntiiSy et tabellariis pernecessarium, 
 8°. Venetiis, per Melch. Sessa, 1533. 
 
 DM. let] 
 
 This work abounds with the most curious wood- 
 cuts : according to the title, it is intended for di- 
 vines, preachers, confessors, advocates, notaries, 
 physicians, philosophers, and professors of the 
 liberal arts : it is also very necessary for mer- 
 chants, messengers, and amanuenses. The au- 
 thor speaks of natural memory, its seat, etc. and 
 illustrates his observations by the representation 
 of a head, on which the situations of thought, 
 fancy, etc. are laid down with great care. After 
 having treated of the necessity and use of places, 
 and images, of visible places and fictitious places ; 
 the author recommends the fixing of certain places 
 upon the walls of the different rooms of a house, 
 monastery, or other place : and, the better to re- 
 member the situation of the places, puts symbols 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 199 
 
 there. A wood -cut is given with the symbols 
 for figures as high as SO, many of which repre- 
 sent very accurately the outline of the figure. The 
 alphabet is represented in the same way by sym- 
 bols ; and, in one instance, entirely by birds of 
 different species. 
 
 In speaking of languages, in order to fix the 
 numbers and cases of nouns in the mind of 
 the pupil, M. Romberch resorts to the fol- 
 lowing expedient. A naked man is to perso?iate 
 the singular number; the nominative case is to be 
 placed on the head of this man, the genitive in 
 his right hand, the dative in his left, the accusa- 
 tive on his breast, the vocative on his middle, and 
 the ablative on his knees. A man clothed gives the 
 plural number, and the cases are to be disposed in 
 the same mauner, as on the naked man. Two 
 chapters are devoted to the merchants; in the one, 
 they are instructed to remember the weight and 
 measure of their goods; and in the other, the debts 
 owing to them, the bills which they have to pay, 
 etc. etc. Three chapters are dedicated to gam- 
 ing ; one explains the application of the art to 
 dice, another to cards, and the last to chess. 
 
 Another edition of Romberch's Congestorium 
 was published at Franckfort, in J 602, 8°. Lo- 
 dovico Dolci translated this book into Italian, 
 but gave it a dialogue form ; it was printed at 
 Venice, in 8°. 1562. 
 
200 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 14. De Memoria reparanda, augenda, ser- 
 
 vandaquelib. units; et de locali vel ar- 
 tificiosa Memoria lib. alter Guill. 
 Grataroli, 8°. Homes, 1555. 
 
 A prior edition of this treatise was printed at 
 Basle in 1554, with Grataroli's Opuscula, which 
 were all corrected by himself, Many other edi- 
 tions following, and a translation into English was 
 made by William Futwod under the following 
 title. 
 
 15. The Castel of Memoric : wherein is 
 
 contcyned the restoring, augment- 
 ing, and conscruinge of the Memo- 
 lie and Remembrance, with the 
 safest remedies, and best precepts 
 thereunto in any icise apperlcining : 
 made by Guliehnus Gratarolns 13er- 
 gomalis Doctor of Artes and Phy- 
 sike. Englyshed by William Fid- 
 tvod. The Contentcs wherof ap- 
 pear in the Page next following. 
 Imprinted at London in Fleet e- 
 streete by William How, dwelling 
 at Temple barre. \M. let-} 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 201 
 
 Au earlier edition of this extremely rare book 
 is noticed in the Censure Literaria.* After the 
 line in the title of this edition, ' The contentes,' 
 etc. there is a cut of the Printer's sign with the 
 motto post tenebras lux. * Printed at London 
 by Rouland Hall, dwellynge in Gutter-lane, at 
 the signe of the Half Egle and the Keye, 1562, 
 12°.' The address to the reader is dated Nov. 
 20, 1562. The date to the edition from which 
 our extracts have been made, is placed at the end 
 of the ' address/ and is Nov. 20, 1573. 
 
 An Epistle ' dedicatorie' to Lord Dudley, 
 ' Maister of the Queenes Majesties horse,' follows 
 the title. This epistle is in verse, very prolix 
 and dull. After a studied eulogy on his patron, 
 Mr. Fulvvod enlarges upon the importance of 
 memory, particularly to the Judge, Preacher, 
 Captaine, Marchauut, Lawyer, and Husband- 
 man, and shrewdly observes, 
 
 For what helps it good bookes to reaJe, 
 
 or noble stories large : 
 Excepte a perfecte Memorie, 
 
 do take thereof the eharge ? 
 
 What profits it most worthy thing 
 
 to see, or else to heare : 
 If that the same come in at one, 
 
 and out at the other eare ? 
 
 , \ . - 
 
 * Vol. vii. p. 209. 
 
402 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 An address from the translator to the reader, 
 concludes with this sage admonition, lege et per- 
 lege, tie quid tcinere. In the next place we 
 
 have, 
 
 THE BOOKES 
 
 Yerdicle. 
 
 A Castell strong I doe present 
 
 Avell furnished and sure : 
 Munited eke with Armoure bent 
 
 For euer to endure. 
 
 Which hitherto long time hath ben 
 
 In (Limbo patnun) hidde, 
 But now at last may here bee seene, 
 
 From daungers men to ridde : 
 
 Procuring them a perfect state,* 
 
 And safe securitie, 
 Whereby they may fynde out the gat* 
 
 Of vrisedome's lore. For why ? 
 
 Hee that hath lost his Memorie, 
 
 By mee may it renewe : 
 And hee that wyll it amplifie, 
 
 Shall find instructions trewe. 
 
 And hee that will still keepe the same, 
 
 That it shall not decay : 
 By mee must learne the way to fiamej 
 
 And my preceptes obey. 
 
 •Sapi.C, 8. and 18. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 203 
 
 Lo here yee s*»e my full eflecte: 
 
 Anl that I doe entende 
 The secretes therof to detect, 
 
 That thereby wittes may rnende. 
 
 Then Iudge mee, 
 As I am worthie. 
 
 The Castel of Memorie is divided into seven 
 chapters. The first ' declare/ h what memorie 
 is, where it Jiourisheth, how profitable and ne- 
 cessarie it is.' The second ' couleineth the 
 chief'e causes zeherhy the memorie is hurt, with 
 their signes and cures :' and, in treating of moist 
 and cold brains, concerning the ' meates forbid- 
 den the pacient,' there are the following curious 
 directions:' 
 
 " Let them also forbeare Marow (which is in 
 bones) Cranes fleshe, fishe, especially if it be 
 clammy and nourished in diches or holes, coide 
 pot herbes, milke, cheese, especially much, or 
 naughtie : fi uites moist and not ripe or often 
 but sometimes they maye eate sharper or tartar 
 meates, chiefly in the winter, as GarUke, Peni- 
 royall, or Calammt, Capers being watered ; 
 mustard is praised of Pithagoras, they must eate 
 little and speciallye at supper : they must drink 
 no water, except it be sod with honv, or cinna- 
 mon, or some other pleasant spices. They must 
 abstein from ouer mutch sleepe, and not to 
 
204 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 sleepe in the daye time, nor upon the noddle of 
 the head, nor upon to mutch fulnes of meate : 
 let them also take heede of ouer great watch- 
 inges, for it weakeneth the spirite, and resolueth 
 it, and stuffeth the head." 
 
 The third chapter ' sheweth the principall 
 endamages of the memorie in what sorte, so 
 euer they bee.' The fourth ' telleth lykewise 
 the pellicular helpes of the Memorie' The 
 fifth ' comprehendeth certain best approued and 
 chosen medicinable compounded remedies and 
 preset uatiues greatly encreasing the Memory ;' 
 and containeth a receipt to make ' Pilles that are 
 good for a languishing braine, especially in aged 
 and olde folkes,' ( an odoriferous or sweet smell- 
 ing aple for the memorie' — ' a comforting water 
 or lee, for the washing of a colde and moist 
 head, also it helpeth the Memorie, and it must 
 be of the ashes of Twigges, or of an oake.' — 
 Another, and another follow. The sixth chap- 
 ter ' expresseth Philosophicall Judgements, 
 Rules, and Preceptes of Remembrance ;' these 
 are twenty in number ; the nineteenth is as fol- 
 lows : 
 
 *' For the recreation of your mynde and the re- 
 storin of your strengthen, you must not flye to 
 fylthie and dishonest things, but you shall bring it 
 to passe by changing of your stndie : for it is better 
 somewhat to refresh your mynde, then altogether 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 205 
 
 to lose it. Yea, also the plaies, pastimes or en- 
 terludes of Christians ought to be sage and ho- 
 nest. Therefore after earneste and graue studies 
 you muste repaire to lighter and easier, as to 
 Histories or Musicall exercises, for it ltstoreth 
 the strength and norisheih the conuenient reste, 
 and also vertue is of more power after leasure 
 and rest. There be some that had rather play, 
 the which indeede is graunted and permitted, so 
 that the playe bee a play ^nd not an earnest or 
 said thinge, and let it be shorte, honest, without 
 deceite hurt or couetousne?s. The Cht.stes playe 
 (a Treatise whereof I lately translated into Eng- 
 lish*;) doth moue and stiie up the wit, but in 
 the same is often bestowed to much tune and 
 studye, the which ought to be belter applied. 
 The baule or Tenyce play, doth aslo profile the 
 hole bodye (But above all the noble exercise of 
 Shooting in the long Bowe is most commenda- 
 ble) walking abroad is good chn-ffye for the 
 heade ; but it is better to dispute tog* dier walk- 
 ing up and downe and moiling the handes. 
 This recreacion of the miude ought not to be 
 daily nor often, and especially it must not be 
 u^ed at the hours or tyine of studv." 
 
 The seventh chapter ' entieateth in fevve 
 aooides of locall or aitijiciall Memorie.' 
 
 " Artificial! Mennne is a clispusjn or placing 
 of sensible thinges in the mynde by imagination, 
 
 T 
 
206 PRINCIPAL SYSTEM GF 
 
 whereunto the natural I memorie hauing respect, iw 
 by them admonished, that it may be liable to call 
 to mind more easely and distinctly suche thinges 
 as are to bee remernbred : and (as Cicero sayth 
 in hys seconde to Herennius) it consisteth of 
 places, as it were of waxe or tables, and of 
 images, as of figures and letters. For so it 
 commeth to passe that such thinges, as we haue 
 heard or learned, we reherse aga\ne, euen as 
 though we read them. Nor it skilleth not 
 muche whether we begynne at the first, or at the 
 laste. The places themselves must be set in 
 order, for, yf there be a confusion in mem, it 
 foloweth of necessitie, that al the reste must be 
 disordred. And it behoueth also that there be 
 many places, that manye thinges maye be placed 
 by the same exercise and practise. Cicero 
 judged that there should be an hundreth in num- 
 ber. Thomas Aquinas thought it good to have 
 mo. [more.} For these places many have 
 searched by diuers and sundry artes. Metro- 
 dorus found oute three hundred and sixtie places 
 of the xti signes in the whiche, the sunne goeth 
 his course : because the Astrologers do deuyde 
 the Zodiacke into so manye degrees. 
 
 " Cicero inuented a certayne familiar house, se- 
 uered or parted into manye places, and he thought 
 t good that we shoulde deuise after euerye fyfte 
 place, either a golden hande or some other dis- 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. "207 
 
 tinction, wherby the one might be discerned 
 from the other, and also in them to obserue a 
 stedfast and unmouable order, that wee might 
 always enter in and go out at the right syde. 
 Another Author, not unskillful, fayned places 
 by certayne lyuing creatures, and deriued their 
 order out of the Latyne alphabet, in suche sorte 
 that euery one of their names shoulde beginne 
 with some one of euery letter : euen as if these 
 were the names : an Asse, a Beare, a Cat, a 
 Dogge, an Elephant, a Foxe, a<joate, a Horse, 
 *a Jaye, a Kyte, a Lyon, a Mule, a Nyghtingale, 
 an Oule, a Partridge, a Quaile., a Rabbet, a 
 Sheepe, a Throstle, a Unicorne, Xystus the Phi- 
 iosopher (who wrote of these) Hyena, Zacheus. 
 He deuyded all these into fyue places : into the 
 heade, into the fore feete, into the bealye, into 
 the hynder feete and the tayle, fur this order na- 
 ture herself ministreth, neither can the wit be 
 confounded in counting or reckenning them. 
 Hauing thus gotten then an hundredth and fyftene 
 places, he graued in them the Images of thinges 
 worthye of memorie, and also he commaunded 
 that many thinges should bee written by the 
 mynde or wit in the face of him that speakejh, 
 in the heares, in the forehead, in die eyes, and 
 so to descend downewarde to the feete. But me 
 thynketh it a verye easye thinge to deuise and 
 immagine not onlye an hundreth but also infinite 
 
-208 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 places, seeing no man is ignorant of the situation 
 of the citie where he was borne, or in the which 
 he haih long dwelled. 
 
 " Therefore when the mynde entreth in at the 
 gate, whiles it considereth the diuersitie ©f wayes, 
 directing and leading to diners countreyes, and 
 whiles it remembreth frendes houses, publike 
 dwellinge places, palaces, or common places of 
 Judgment, it shall fynde out a maruelous number 
 of places. Hereto also it maye imagine great 
 courtes, or places of larger roume, wherein it 
 may deuiseas great a number of places as it list— 
 eth, so that euery thing may be written therein 
 that he will have. 
 
 " And because the teaching by examples is 
 briefe and effectual!, nowe will I put forth some 
 examples, to the end that thereby the matter 
 may be the better perceiued. I will put forth 
 an example of tenne, and consequently by the 
 proportion thereof shall be deuised the example 
 of a thousand. 
 
 16 And therefore I take or choose a greate and 
 emptie house, to the which you must not go 
 often but seldome, and appointe or sette tke 
 fyrst place which is at the doore, three foot 
 distant from the doore. Let the seconde place 
 be twelve or fyftenne foot distant from that, as 
 for example let there be one corner or angle. 
 Let the thyrd place be distant from the seconde 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 20^ 
 
 even as many or twelve foot, and there may be 
 perchance, another corner, or a mirldest betwene 
 the first and the second corner. The fourth shall 
 be a comer. The fyft shall be a coiner, distant 
 byasmuche. The sy>;te likewyse: and the hall 
 beyng finished, you shall enter into one chamber, 
 and immediately within the doore you shall note 
 or appoynte the seuenthe, and afterwarde, in the 
 fyrst comer of the chamber the eyght, and in the 
 second corner the nynth, and in the thyrd the 
 tenth with his distauuce. And yf you wyll haue 
 any more places, goe out of the chamber, and 
 so marke or note the other clumbers propor- 
 tionally. 
 
 " But yet remember that the dystaunce whych 
 is geuen is njoderate and conuenyent, but yf 
 there. be not found so great dystaunce, but a 
 lesser euen unto eyghte, or. to Iesse. even unto 
 iiue foote, yet should.it be tolerable As con- 
 cernynge the temple, it ought to be such a one 
 as must not be much frequented, especially of 
 yourself to the ende that you be not confounded 
 or troubled with the multitude of the fygures or 
 Images. These places ought to be memorable 
 <and retnoueable with ones hand, for the corners 
 are not places, but fyxed images sette and placed 
 in the corners, uppon the which (euen as^uoon 
 paper) are painted other fygures, which-rnay.be 
 
 .put cut euen as letter upon paper^ .VWiV 
 &3 
 
210 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 example, the firste place is marked or known 
 by * * * in setting * # * in his place. The 
 second by a salue boxe, setting there also a salue 
 boxe. The iii by a morter putting it there. The 
 fourth by a pestle. The fyfte by a" pair of 
 writing Tables. The sixte by a hares foote. 
 The seuenth by a Searcer. The eight by a 
 bagge. The ninth by a lofe of waxe. The 
 tenth by the Canes of Cassia. And these names 
 must be kepte ahvaies in mynd and the places 
 from fiue to fiue,that the quinaries or fyfte places 
 may alwaies by had in memorie. Of the dis- 
 tance there is enough spoken. Yet note that 
 you may pass to fine and thirtie, and not be- 
 yonde, lest there should chaunce a negation in 
 the images. 
 
 " And bee it spoken euen likewise of the 
 quantitie as touching the height, that there be 
 not manye of a height, but from fyue euen unto 
 eleuen foote. Aud let euery fyftie place be 
 marked, as it is sayde of the order. The qualitie 
 also must be noted, that they be not to light, nor 
 to darke, nor to much frequented, Let us come 
 to the Images which are the thinges that must be 
 places: the Images whiche bee known unto 
 us ought to be so set in these places with such 
 mouinges, that by them we may call thinges to 
 remembraunce. For example, I would remem- 
 ber twentye names, I will do thus: In the fyrste 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. €11 
 
 place, I will set the Images of Peter, one whom 
 I well knovve, with an * * *! full of water in hys 
 hande, the whyche he shall power upon James 
 one also well known unto me: and so by this 
 notable act, I shall remember these twoo, and so 
 place in my remembrauuce these twoo names. 
 
 tl In the seconde place I wyll put Henrye 
 who is unto mee verve well knowen (for these 
 fygures must be exactly knowen that they maye 
 quickelye come into ones M.'inorye) who shall 
 put his hande into a Boxe and pull out the salue, 
 and therwithal to besmyer Steuen, one also 
 whom I do very well know. 
 
 " In the thyrde place I will set Wylliam, one 
 whome I knowe also, who shall take out of the 
 morter a playster, and shall put it upon Fraunces 
 face : or inueutinge some other mad jestes and 
 toyes, whereby the memorye may bee confyrmed 
 to beare awaye suche lyke names. 
 
 " And so in lyke manner proceede with the 
 rest.* 
 
 • As the orignial passage lias not, here, been literally 
 translated, we shall present our readers with a specimen of 
 Grataroli's Latin. — " Transeamus ad imagines, quze sunt 
 res collocandae : debent ita imagines nobis uotas in istis 
 locis collocari cum motibus talibus, ut per eas valeamu* 
 memorari. Verbi gratia, volo memorari de viginti nomi- 
 nibus, sic faciam: in primo loco imajjinein Petri mihi 
 notissimi locabo, cum urinali in maim pi; no iiiina quam 
 fundet super Iacobnin mihi notissimum : et ex isto actu 
 
SIS PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 " Lykewise if I would remember any man 
 and also his acte, I will imagin him and the 
 doyng of his acte; as if I would remember one 
 eating of figges, then I will imagine that with a 
 figge, he did some mery or strange thing. 
 
 Grataroli next treats of figures, and gives the 
 five following rules concerning them. 
 
 " Tkefyrste is that the fygure do moue either 
 to laughter, compassion, or admiracion, for one 
 may soone fynde a figure that styre up and moue 
 .the affection of the Sou'e. 
 
 " An example hereof is this, if I should sette 
 or place in the mouthe of a mad Ass, the head 
 of Antonye to be almoste bytten in pieces, the 
 blood to gushe out of him, and that lie askelh 
 helpe, and holdynge up his handes cryeth out: 
 for it cannot bee but that when I would, I 
 shoulde see him with the eyes of my mynde, and 
 
 KOtabili, honvm duorum memorabor: et sic duomm nomi- 
 nam memoriam mihi fecero. In sccundo loco ponam Max- 
 tinum mihi notissimum (nam oportet imagines istas esse 
 notissimas, ut cito i:i memoriam recurrant) qui ponet 
 digitum sunm in pyxide et extrahet unguentum, quo cum 
 digito orificium unget ani Hendci mihi notissimi. In 
 tertio ponam Andream mihi itidem notum, qui cum main? 
 ex mortario extrahet emnlastrum quod ponet super faciem 
 Fiancisci, vel alios ridicules aetus fabricaudo, ex qiiihiu 
 memoTia de taiibus uominibus confirmetur. Et ita pari- 
 formiter procedatur in aliis." — Grutarolus de MemorUl. 
 > Opusc. pp. 66, 67. Basil. I5!)l. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 213 
 
 declare or express Antony to him that should ask 
 or enquire for him. 
 
 " Another is, that we should represent eyther 
 the lyke by the like, or by the contrary, or else 
 by the proprietie therof. An example of the 
 fyrst is, as if I were about to place the name of 
 Gahne, I should write the name of some other 
 excellent phy^ition, whose authoritie (as neerea* 
 may be) is eytlier equall or lyttle inferiour. 
 
 " An example of the seconde is, if I writ the 
 name of an unlerned physition, if I describe 
 Thersites, by Achittes, and the good for the 
 euill ; or the foule by the fayre. 
 
 u An example of the thyrde is, yf I represent 
 Ouidious Naso, by a great nose : Plato, by large 
 shoulders, Crispus by crysped or curled heares ; 
 and Cicero by Gehtsinus. 
 
 " The thyrde is, that wee accustome our- 
 selues to place thinges, euen from our very 
 youth, and that we encrease with dayly exercise: 
 although that the teaching therof may helpe and 
 profit eueii tliem also that be elder. 
 
 " The habite, the perfectnes and dexteritye 
 (I meane to practvse these thynges) is muche the 
 more, if they doe so place all thynges, whiche 
 they shall either saye or do/jind also whatsoeuer 
 they heare in communication or talkinge. And 
 they must lykewise paynt and graue the maners, 
 gestures and tymes. For in so doyuge they shall 
 
214 PRINCIPA'L SYSTEM* OF 
 
 in a shorte space be notably well exercised. It 
 profyteth also to playe one with another, and to 
 goe about to excell hym that shall recyte many 
 thynges, more cleatlye, orderlye, end spedely 
 then other. 
 
 " The fourth is that {in euery quinary or 
 fy ft number of those thynges tliat are to be 
 marked) we repeat agayne from the beginnings 
 all such ihynges as are alreadye noted for the 
 repeticicn of things commonlye bryngeth greate 
 utililie and profyte. 
 
 " The fyfte is, that wee should represent 
 thynges compounde with -the scimilitude of sim- 
 ple^ thynges. As for example. H*e that will re- 
 member this sentence : Cicero contendeth with 
 Hortensius, shall immagine the pease called 
 Cicer whiche complaynelh of the barenes of the 
 garden: for so doth Cicer resemble Cicero and 
 the Garden called Hortus doth represent Hor- 
 tensius, and the complaynte the contention, etc. 
 etc. 
 
 " Agayne you shall not forget that in placyng 
 ■or setting of the images or fyguies in their places 
 the thyuge is alwayes to bee placed with a merye, 
 a mcrueylous or cruel I acte, or some other unac- 
 customed maner : w merye, cruel!, iniurious, 
 meruelous, -excellently fayre, or exceed ifiglye 
 foule thynges do chaunge and moue the sences, 
 and better stvrre uppe the memorye, whea 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. %\S- 
 
 the mynde is muche occupied about suche 
 thinges. 
 
 " Also the images are vaTyed by the transpo- 
 sition and transumption of the letters : as if I 
 woulde remember Nep,* I shall place a pen, 
 and for a tyran, [Tyrant] a rauening wolf. It 
 sufficeth therefore, that we have expressed a me- 
 thode or compendious waye, the whiche whoso- 
 euer foloweth shall easelye (so that exercise be 
 not lackynge) get and attayne the certeine and 
 sure remembrance, of manye and sundrye thinges, 
 as due occasion shall require : but as for the 
 sluggish and ydle, let them, slugge and sleepe 
 still, to whom all thinges are displeasing.*' 
 
 At the conclusion of the seventh chapter ' is 
 put an Epilogue of the foresayde thingess 
 This epilogue contains quotations from Eras- 
 mus, Plato, and Aristotle, and concludes thus : 
 
 " It is verye good also to renewe and rehearse 
 verye often suche thinges as are commytted to 
 the memorye, with an elegant Oration or a sweete 
 songe, as it is heretofore declared, for pleasure 
 is the sauce of thynges, the foode of love, the 
 quickening of the wyt, the nouryshynge of the 
 affection and the strength of the Memorye. 
 " The Soule also mirtt be purged from 
 
 • A Herbe so called. 
 
216 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 euill thinges, that it may be filled with good 
 thinges. 
 
 a And we must humbly desire of God with a 
 faythfull prayer to grant us his spyrtyre of wyse- 
 dome and knowledge, for, our Lord Jesus 
 Chrisles sake, to whome wyth the father and the 
 holy ghost be all honor, laud, and glorye for 
 euer and euer. Amen." 
 
 On the back of the last leaf, Memory taketh 
 leave of her disciples with the following admo- 
 nition. 
 
 Memorie sayeih. 
 
 To him that would me gladly gaine 
 These three precepts shall not be vaine, 
 The first is well to vnderstand 
 The thing that he doth take in hand. 
 The second is the same to place 
 In order good and formed race, 
 Tiie tkirde, is often to repeat 
 The thing that he would not forgeat. 
 Adioning to this castell strong, 
 Great vertue comes er it be long. 
 
 A French translation of Grataroli's Treatise s 
 on the Memory and on Physiognomy, is extant ; 
 the following is the title as given by De Bure, 
 and it is remarkable that this is the only book 
 which he has admitted under the head of Natu- 
 ral and Artificial Memory. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 217 
 
 16. Discours notables des moyens pour 
 conserver et augmenter la memoire, 
 avec un Traiie de la Physionomie 
 ou Jugement de la nature des hom- 
 ines tire des traits da visage, et autres 
 parties du corps ; trad, du Latin de 
 Guill. Gratarol, par Estienne Cope, 
 16°. Lyon, 1586. 
 
 Of this book De Bure says, ' Petit Traite 
 singulier, et assez recherche.' And Cailleau 
 in his Diet. Bibliog. ' Petit Traite singulier 
 et peu comrnun. — ' On prefere cette Traduction 
 a V original Latin.' 
 
 William Grataroli was born at Berga- 
 mo in Italy, in the year 1510. He was educated 
 at Padua, where he took the degree of Doctor of 
 Physic, and afterwards became Professor of 
 the same science, and gained considerable dis- 
 tinction. But, having embraced the Calvinistic 
 doctrines on the persuasion of Peter Vermilli, he 
 fled from Italy through fear of the inquisition, 
 and retired to Marpurg, where he taught medicine 
 for a year. He was, however, compelled to leave 
 that place also, and repaiied to Basle, in the 
 hope of a better fortune, and where, in fact, he 
 taught and practised his profession with success, 
 until May 1562, when he died at the age of 52. 
 He was author of a great number of works, some 
 
2JS PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 of which are honorable to his talents, and 
 evince a large-share of knowledge, but in others 
 he shows an attachment to the absurdities of 
 the alchemist, much. superstition, and opinions 
 which do not imply a sound judgment. His 
 works, besides those which we have had occasion 
 to mention, were, I. A Treatise on the Preser- 
 vation of the Health of Magistrates, Travel- 
 lers, and Students, in Latin, published at Frank- 
 fort, in 1591, in 12°.— II. Be Vini Natura. 
 Cologne, JG7J, in 8°.— III. He was the editor 
 of a collection of various works of Pomponatius : 
 Basle, 1565, in 8°. He had been the pupil of 
 this celebrated man, and adopted some of his 
 notions. — IV. Vera Alchymia Artisque Me- 
 tallic^ Doctrines, etc. fol. Basil, J 551.— V. De 
 pradictione rerum naturarumque hominum 
 etc.- — VI. De Temporum omnimoda mutatione, 
 etc.* 
 
 '' It cannot be denied (says Bayle) that Gra- 
 taroli was a public-spirited man, since he not 
 only sought remedies that he might be useful to 
 magistrates, but also those that are proper for all 
 sorts of travellers. He did not forget studious 
 men; for he endeavoured to enable them to pre- 
 serve their health, and strengthen their memory. 
 A man, who would supply their necessities on 
 
 • Bayle — Diet. Hist. art. Grataroli. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 219 
 
 this account, would deserve divine honors in 
 the republic of letters, in which memory is 
 almost as necessary as life." 
 
 1 7. Artificiosce Memories libellus autore 
 Joann. Spangenberg, Herd. 8°, 
 Witeberg, 1570. 
 
 18. Artis Memories ^seupotius Reminis- 
 
 centies pars secunda, Authore Joh. 
 Sp. Herd. Franco/. 1603. 
 
 This is a very useful manual, and is intended 
 principally for tyros in the art. It unfolds, by 
 question and answer, the principles of former 
 writers on the subject, and is equally remarkable 
 for perspicuity and brevity. This small tract is 
 included in the Gazophi/lacium /litis Memories, 
 published iu 1G10, under the title of Erotemata 
 de Arte Memories sen Reminiscentice, etc. 
 
 19. Cosmi Rosselii Thesaurus Artifi- 
 ciosce Memoriae, 4°. Vend. 1574. 
 
 20. Jordano Bruno de umbris Idearum, 
 
 Paris, 1582. 
 
 21. Artificioscr. Memories Libellus Au- 
 thore Thoma Watsono Oxoniensi, 
 
2£0 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Juris Utriusque studioso. MS. 
 1583. 
 
 This manuscript is No. 3731 in the Sloant 
 Collection, preserved in the British Museum. It 
 is divided into fifteen chapters, the titles of 
 which are, 
 
 1 . dutoris Prologomenon et Methodus. 2. De 
 Memoria et Reminiscentia. 3. De Me- 
 moria Naturali. 4. De Artificiosa Memo-" 
 ria. 5. De Duplici locorum genere. 6. De 
 Legibus locorum. 7. De Imaginibus. 8. 
 De Imagine ret simplici. 9. De Imaging 
 rei composite. 10. Quales esse debeant 
 imagines. 11. De Cathena. 12. De Ver- 
 borum memoria. 13. De praxi artisme- 
 morativa et objectorum varielate. 14. De 
 Utilitate localis memories. 15. De hujus 
 artis acquisitione. 
 
 If I wish to remember five objects, (says Mr. 
 Watson) as a stone, a tree, a fish, a bird, and a 
 horse, I take some spacious wall well known to 
 me, and make five great divisions ; in the first, I 
 see a door ; in the second, a window ; in the 
 third, a chest; in the fourth, an iron hook; in 
 the fifth, a large crack, or fissure. The stoue 
 must be large enough to fill up the whole door- 
 way; the tree has taken root, and almost con- 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 221 
 
 ceals the window by its branches ; the fish is ly- 
 ing hid in the chest ; the bird is seizing the iron- 
 hook with his beak, and is endeavouring to tear it 
 from the wa!l ; the horse has put his tail into the 
 fissure, and is fixed there. By these means, the 
 objects, and their numerical situation are perma- 
 nently remembered : other divisions of a wall 
 are given; one into 32, and the other into 100 
 compartments ; the first is reckoned by eights, 
 and the latter by tens. 
 
 The connection of the different images is con- 
 sidered of great importance, and the following 
 illustration is given. If I wish to remember 
 (continues the author) a man, a horse, a .stone, 
 a fire, a hog, and a tree, I must say, that the 
 man finds a horse and seizes it by the tail ; the 
 horse is biting a large stone, from which fire is 
 elicited by the teeth of the animal ; this fire 
 burns a hog, which had approached too near the 
 horse ; the hog, mad with pain, runs against the 
 tree, and overthrows it 
 
 Anthony Wood, in 1 i# Athena Oxom'en- 
 ser,* affords some information respecting this 
 author. 
 
 " Thomas Watson, a Londoner bom, did 
 spend some time in this University, not in Logic 
 
 * Vol I. col. 262, 263. 
 
 u 3 
 
222 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OP 
 
 and Philosophy, as he ought to have done ; but 
 in the smooth and pleasant studies of poetry and 
 romance, whereby he obtained an honourable 
 name among the students in those faculties. Af- 
 terwards retiring to the metropolis [he] studied 
 the common law at riper years, and for a diver- 
 sion wrote, Ecloga in obiium D. Franci'sci 
 Walsingham Esq. aur. Lond. 1590. Amintaz 
 Gaudia, Lond. 1592, written in Lai. Hexa- 
 meter, and dedicated to the incomparable Mary 
 Countess of Pembroke, who was a patroness of 
 his studies. He hath written other tilings of that 
 nature, or strain, and something pertaining to 
 pastoral, which I have not yet seen, and was 
 highly valued among ingeaious men, in the latter 
 end of Q. Elizabeth." 
 
 22. Jordano Bruno de Imaginum, et 
 Idearum compositione ad omnia in- 
 ventionem, et Memorice genera tres 
 libri, 8°. Franc. J 591. 
 
 23. Joan. Mich. Alberti de omnibus in- 
 geniis augendce memorice liber, 4°. 
 l$onon. 1591. 
 
 *24. F. Philippi Gesvaldi Plutosqfia, 
 Patav. 1600. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORT. 223 
 
 25. Ars Reminiscendi Joan. JBaptistce 
 Porta? Neapolitani, 4°. Neap. 1602. 
 
 Porta, like the authors already noticed, treats 
 of places and images ; he also advises the pupil 
 to commit poetry to memory, by forming ideal 
 representations of the language, and placing them 
 in order. He exchanges figures for symbols, 
 and represents a cipher for a globe ; 1 by a knife ; 
 2 by a sickle ; 3 by a bow ; 4 by a chopper; 5 
 by a serpent; 8 by a pair of spectacles; 9 by a 
 crosier, etc. etc. Letters are also represented 
 by symbols, and two alphabets are given ; in 
 the one, the letters are formed from various ob- 
 jects ; and in the other, from different positions 
 of the human body. 
 
 John Baptist Porta was a Neapolitan 
 gentleman, who acquired celebrity by his appli- 
 cation to polite literature and the sciences, espe- 
 cially those of mathematics, medicine, and natu- 
 ral history. He often held at his 1 ouse meet- 
 ings of literati, when they discussed the chi- 
 merical secrets of magic. The Court of Rome, 
 apprised of the object pursued by this little aca- 
 demy, prohibited him from holding its meetings. 
 Porta then cultivated the Muses, and composed 
 several tragedies and comedies, which were re- 
 ceived with some success. His house was al- 
 ways the retreat of men of letters, and of foreign- 
 
'224. PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 ers, who admired the merit of Porta. He died 
 in 1515, aged 70 years. We are indebted to 
 Porta for the invention of the Camera Obscura. 
 His works are, 1. A Treatise on Natural Magic. 
 2. A Treatise on Physiognomy. 3. De occult is 
 TJjterarum notis ; a treatise on the art of con- 
 cealing our thoughts in writing, or of discover- 
 ing those of others. 4. P hutognomonica, seu 
 Methodus cognosceudi ex inspectione vires abdi- 
 tas cujuscumque rei. 5. De Distillationibus.* 
 
 26. JF. Mleronyml Marafioti Polistinensis 
 Calabri Theologi De Arte Remi- 
 niscentia', per loca, et imagines, de 
 per not as etjiguras in multibus posi- 
 tas, 8°. Franc. 1602. 
 
 Places and images are the basis of Maraiioti's 
 system, but instead of putting the images upon 
 the walls of a house, they are placed in different 
 parts of the hands, both on the back and in the 
 palm of the hand. By this mode a high number 
 of places and images is obtained. This tract 
 was reprinted in 1 6 10, in the Gazaphylacium 
 Ariis Memoriae. 
 
 * Diet. Hist. art. Porta. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 425 
 
 27. Specimina duo Artis Memorize ex- 
 
 hibita Lutetice Parisiorum, 8°. 
 Paris, 1607. 
 
 This tract we have not seen, but suspect that 
 it contains an account of Sclienckel's experiments 
 in Mnemonics at Paris ; of whose system som« 
 account will be found in the next article. 
 
 28. Schenckelii Methodus de JLatina 
 
 Lingua intra 6 menses doceyida, 
 8°. Argent. 1609. 
 
 59. Gazophylacium Artis Memories ; in 
 quo duobus libris omnia et singula 
 ea quce ad absolutam hujus cogni- 
 tionem inserviunt, recondita haben- 
 tur, per Lambertum Schenckelium 
 Dusilcium. His accesserunt de 
 eadem Arte Memoriae ad hue 3 
 opuscula ; quorum 1 . Joannis Aus- 
 triaci. 2. Hieronymi Marafioti. 3. 
 J oh. Sp. Herd. 8°. Argent. 1610. 
 
 30. Schenckeliusdetectus: seu, Memoria 
 Artijicialis hactenus occultata ac 
 a multis quamdiu desiderata : nunc 
 
22(5 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OP 
 
 prbnum in gratiam optimarum ar- 
 timn, ac sapientice studiosorum luce 
 donata, a J. P. G. \Joh. Paep. 
 Galbcricns] S. P. D. Hanc artem 
 principes et alii nobiles, cum Eccle- 
 siastici, turn seculares addidicerunt y 
 eccercuerimt et mirifice probarunt, 
 ut ex sequeniibus notion fiet. 8°. 
 Lugduni, 1617. 
 
 31. JBrevis Delhieatio de utiUtatibus et 
 
 effect'ibus admirabilibus Artis 3Ie- 
 moria, 12°. Venet. [circ. 1610.] 
 
 32. Memoria artificialis Lamberti 
 Schenckely. Omnibus liter arum et 
 sapientice amantibus luci donata, 
 vna cum clauicula Illam legendi, mo- 
 dum aperiente. Arnoldi JBackhusy 
 Lubeeensis, 12°. Colon. — Agrip. 
 1343. 
 
 No 28, Schenckel's method of learning the 
 Latin language in six months, we have not seen. 
 No. 29, contains Schenckel's Art of Memory, 
 and very considerable prolegomena which are 
 not inserted in any subsequent reprint. * No. 30, 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 227 
 
 is Schenckel's system only, without any intro- 
 duction. The two last treatises are perfectly 
 useless to the uninitiated, on account of the arbi- 
 trary signs and marks employed in them.* No. 
 31, is a reprint of No. 30, with the addition of a 
 key which explains the aibitrary signs used in the 
 work. It also contains a dedication to the learned 
 Meibomius, and an address to the reader. This, 
 consequently, is the most useful edition for prac- 
 tical purposes. No. SI,, is a treatise by j 
 tin Sommer, a contemporary and delegate of 
 Schenckel. It is reprinted in No. 29, the 
 Gazophylacium, and forms a part of the intro- 
 duction to that work. 
 
 Lambert, or Lamprecht Schenckel, 
 born at Bois-le-Duc, in 1547, was the son of 
 an apothecary and philologist. He went through 
 his academical course at Lyons and Cologne, 
 and afterwards became a teacher of rhetoric, 
 prosody, and gymnastics, at Paris, Antwerp, 
 Malines, and Rouen : not forgetting, as the 
 custom of the age required, to claim his title to 
 scholarship, by writing Latin verses. From 
 
 * The Gazophyltxium, however, is valuable on account 
 of the prefatory matter, and the three tracts which it con- 
 tains ; more particularly, as the original editions of the 
 tracts are extremely rare. -See Monthly Magazine, for 
 Feb. 18.10, for sooae part of this account. 
 
£28 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 these, however, he acquired no celebrity propor- 
 tionate to that which was reared on his disco- 
 veries in the Mnemonic Art. The more effec- 
 tually to propagate these discoveries, he travelled 
 through the Netherlands, Germany, and France; 
 where his method was inspected by the great, 
 and transmitted from one university to another. 
 Applause followed every where at his heels. 
 Princes and nobles, ecclesiastics and laymen, 
 alike took soundings of his depth ; and Schen- 
 ckel brought himself through every ordeal, to the 
 astonishment and admiration of his judges. The 
 rector of the Sorbonne, at Paris, having previ- 
 ously made trial of his merits, permitted him to 
 teach his science at the university ; and Marillon, 
 Maitre de Requetes, having done the same, gave 
 him an exclusive privilege for practising Mne- 
 monics throughout the French dominions. His 
 auditors were, however, prohibited from com- 
 municating this art to others, under a severe 
 penalty. As his time now became too precious 
 to admit of his making circuits, he delegated this 
 branch of his patent to the licentiate Martin 
 Sommer, and invested him with a regular diplo- 
 ma, as his plenipotentiary for circulating his art, 
 under certain stipulations, through Germany, 
 France, Italy, Spain, and the neighbouring coun- 
 tries. Sommer now first published a Latin -trea- 
 tise on this subject, which he dispersed in ever/ 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 22§ 
 
 place he visited [NTo. 31.] In this he announces 
 himself as commissioned by Schenckel, to in- 
 struct the whole wond, 
 
 " A lawyer, (says he) who has a hundred 
 causes and more to conduct, by the assistance of 
 my Mnemonics, may slump them so scron 
 his memory, that he will know in what wise to 
 answer each client, in any order, aird at any 
 hour, with as much precision, as if he bad but 
 just perused his brief. And in p eaci.iig, he will 
 not only have the evidence and reasonings of his 
 own party, at his finger ' : ds, but all the grounds 
 and refutations of his antagonist alio ! Let a man 
 go into a library, and read one book after ano- 
 ther, yet shall he be able to write down every 
 sentence of what he has read, many days after at 
 home. The proficient in this science can dictate 
 matters of the most opposite nature, to ten, or 
 thirty writers, alternately. After four weeks' 
 exercise he will be able to class twenty-five 
 thousand disarranged portraiis within the saying 
 of a paternoster : — aye, and he will do this ten 
 times a day, without extraordinary exertion, and 
 with more precision than another, who is igno- 
 rant of the art, can do it in a whole year ! He 
 will no longer stand in need of a library for re- 
 ferring to. This course of study may be com- 
 pleted in nine days, — and an hour's practice 
 daily, will be suflkient : but, when the rules are 
 x 
 
230 PKINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 once acquired, they require but half an hour's 
 exercise daily. Every pupil, who has afterwards 
 well-grounded complaints to allege, shall not 
 only have the premium paid in the first instance, 
 returned to him, but an addition will be made to 
 it. The professor of this art, makes but a short 
 stay in every place. When called upon, he will 
 submit proofs, adduce testimonials from the 
 most eminent characters, and surprise the igno- 
 rant, after four or six lessons, with the most in- 
 credible displays." Here follow testimonials from 
 the most celebrated universities. Nine alone are 
 produced from learned men at Leipzic, and pre- 
 cede others from Marpurg, and Frankfort on the 
 Oder. 
 
 On the 29th and 30th of Sept. and on the 1st 
 of Oct. [O. S.] 1602, Schenckel exhibited 
 some specimens of his art at Marpurg in Hesse.* 
 the first experiment took place on the 29th of 
 Sept. at eight o'clock in the morning, before a 
 large assemblage of Divines, Lawyers, Physi- 
 cians, and Philosophers. Schenckel having re- 
 quested some one to dictate 25 Latin sentences, 
 he wrote them down with a pen, and numbered 
 them. He next read them aloud twice, with 
 scarcely any pause, and having sat for a short 
 
 * This account of SchenckeFs experiments is taken from 
 tils Memoria artificialis, edited by Buckhusy. (See No. 32.) 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 231 
 
 time in silence, he repeated the whole, from 
 beginning to end, backwards and forwards, and 
 in any order desired, without the slightest hesita- 
 tion. It happened, however, that once or twice, 
 Schenckel substituted one word for another, as, 
 limit* for ends; but being reminded of this, he 
 immediately gave the word required. After- 
 wards, any particular number being given, he 
 repeated its appropriate sentence ; and, on the 
 first word of a sentence being named, gave the 
 proper number. Schenckel being asked to re- 
 peat 25 doctrinal sentences, replied, that he 
 thought 15 would be sufficient; and, according- 
 ly, that number having been dictated, written 
 down, and read, he united them to the former 25 
 sentences, and answered to the whole 40 in any 
 order desired. 
 
 On the 30th of Sept. another meeting was 
 held at the house of a medicine-vender, when 
 fifty words were given and numbered from I to 
 50. Schenckel having considered for a short 
 time, repeated the whole from beginning to end, 
 in regular order, — from the last to the first, and 
 in any order required. On any number being 
 giveu, he named the appropriate word, — and 
 vice-versa. Having asked the persons present to 
 double the number of words, some of the literati 
 replied, that he had given sufficient proof of his 
 abilities, and that they had no doubt he would 
 
532 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 be able to repeat many more words by the same 
 method. A learned auditor expressed his regret 
 to Schenckel, that he was not allowed to repeat 
 fifty sentences, and a hundred words, being fully 
 persuaded that he was capable of greater things. 
 Schenckel having presented to his auditory 
 two hundred sentences, in which a pupil of his, 
 taken from the last meeting, had been exercised, 
 together with the 40 sentences then given, the 
 pupil, on any number being asked, repeated the 
 appropriate sentence, and vice-versa, to the asto* 
 nishment of all present : — more especially at the 
 unconnected manner in which the numbers were 
 proposed; as 235, 27, 9, 240, 128, 19, 184, 3, 
 225, 2, 176, 36, 7, etc. etc. This same pupil 
 offered to the assembly 250 written words, which 
 he had learned by some tuition from Schenckel, 
 and by his own application. To these 250 word? 
 were added 50 others ; and, in a short time, the 
 pupil answered to the whole 300, in the same 
 manner as had been done before by the professor 
 himself. In repeating the sentences, the pupil, 
 once or twice, did not give the words regularly : 
 — when this was intimated to him, he immediate- 
 ly corrected himself, and repeated the words in 
 their appropriate order. 
 
 On the following day, the lstofOctober,simi!ar 
 experiments were tried, greatly to the satisfaction 
 «f all present ; and, in consequence, Schenckel 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 233 
 
 received (without asking for it) a certificate of ap- 
 probation, under hand and seal, from a learned 
 physician, and some professors. This certificate 
 concludes by observing, ■ that ' the deponents' 
 were present at the different examinations, — that 
 there was not a possibility of fraud or collusion — 
 that they thought it but justice, thus unsolicited, 
 to express their approbation, — and to bear wit- 
 ness to the truth of the facts stated in the docu- 
 ment. 
 
 The student, destitute of oral instruction, can- 
 not expect to reap much benefit from a perusal 
 of SchenckeFs system in the Gazophylacium, or 
 in Schenckelius detectus: he might as well seek 
 for a knowledge of Mnemonics, by gazing at 
 the hieroglyphics of an Egyptian obelisk. It is 
 pretty evident that this Gazophylacium was 
 designedly intended as a labyrinlhal series : the 
 author indeed closes his labors by confessing, 
 that the work was to be entrusted only to his 
 scholars, and referring for further elucidation to 
 oral precepts. The very basis of his art is con- 
 cealed beneath a jumble of signs and abbrevia- 
 tions : thus, sect. 9. d. a sect. 99 ; " videlicet, 
 locus, imago ordo locorum, memoria loci, ima- 
 gines." And further, in setting forth the most 
 important points, he amuses himself by evinc- 
 ing a multitude of jingling, and unintelligible 
 words. 
 
 x 3 
 
534 
 
 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OP 
 
 In proof of this assertion, it vflill be sufficient 
 to give the key from Backhusv's edition of 
 Schenckel : it is a fair specimen of the obstacles 
 which are presented to the student. 
 
 Clauicula sen explicatio libri. 
 FALVCO NIVALCA. 
 
 1. Legendum serom a focis barbaeho. 
 
 2. Alpha & omega sunt lasos vitor. 
 
 3. Idque etiam in diet, osisis ouidi. 
 
 4. Si in dolubacoui q. itaro cruccos 1 reg. amucoli non 
 
 babet, sed oygnus in ilia tantum cabailyso. 
 
 5. Haebaeretila singula? sing. num. denotant. eaedem gemi. 
 
 pi. 
 
 6. Gen. ca. mod. temp. & alia datus obirttas, ex lusnesi 
 
 facile colliguntur ; 
 
 a amulube niacoue 
 
 b osias 
 
 c codrot 
 
 d emuluca sibuco. 
 
 e daitnem etnegi. 
 
 f amuit ecapso. 
 
 g bogamin 
 
 h aseirape: 
 
 i vanosrepo 
 
 k emusrodi 
 
 1 asumodi 
 
 m imnis ftice orexee 
 
 n asulugnas. 
 
 o lairomemi 
 
 p damrofe 
 
 q osedesi 
 
 i asixarp* 
 
 s asucoli 
 
 t bogamin 
 
 u rogamis 
 
 v usucolae 
 
 x farreto. 
 
 y amuitios 
 
 z amulucato epecera 
 
 A efucis itembtiras. 
 
 C emurtsaca 
 
 D enmoite ocnita istdo 
 
 E parti esenefa 
 
 G. & Gr. facitamo emar 
 
 go 
 I asuirano bigamie 
 K emuxi fennoca 
 9 omutnemi badmif* 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 
 
 235 
 
 N. asuremuni * 
 
 P. Oniuite galapo. 
 
 R. boitis otepera. 
 
 T. asurruase hti 
 
 V, amuirato enuloni. 
 
 Adi. eniutae onuidas 
 
 ct. foitatica. , 
 
 dct. roitato scidas 
 
 diu. poisis cuido 
 
 cp. galoti osipes 
 
 L G. afucigoli 
 
 Mpb. asucisyho epatem. 
 
 Or: roitaros 
 
 Ph. esucisyhpo 
 
 ' amenos enerpo 
 vel 
 idos esorpo 
 L asutali 
 Rh. Laciros ethere 
 
 rami 
 Uaic 
 
 Ru. satnemis eduro 
 Sy. esixalo anysi 
 Ve emubreui. 
 r baereeo 
 
 1. < salednaca 
 
 vvaulus 
 
 2. asungyco. 
 
 3. esuluge onairte. 
 
 4. asuluga inardo 
 
 aquas. 
 
 5. esunami. 
 
 6. falletse. 
 
 7. lamtoni vel asiruces*. 
 
 8. exilacu J 
 
 9. dunroca 
 
 rasuluunas 
 0. < exemora 
 Lesuiucrico. 
 
 Reliqua studiosus Lector facile colligel. 
 
 CLAVICVLA. 
 
 1. Legertdum Haebraico more. 
 
 2. Prima ^r vltima litera sunt otiosaj. 
 
 3. Idque etiani in dictionibus diuersis. 
 
 4. Si in vocauulo Q occurat, prima regula locum non ha- 
 
 bet, sed primnm in tautuni ilia syllaba : exemplum sit 
 
 in asuluga inardo aquas : hoc est Quadraugulas, quae 
 
 vox numerum quateruarium significat. 
 :>. Litera; singula? siugularem numerum denotant, easdera 
 
 geminata», pluralem. 
 4. Genu?, casus, modus, tempus & alia attributa ex sensu 
 
 facile colligimtur. 
 
236 
 
 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Literce significant. 
 
 a. Vocabulum 
 
 b. Ars 
 
 c. Ordo 
 
 d. Cubiculum 
 
 e. Sententia 
 
 f. Spacium 
 
 g. Imago 
 h. Partes 
 i. Persona 
 k. Dorsum 
 1. Domus 
 
 m. Exerritium 
 n. Angnlns 
 
 0. Memoria 
 p. Forma 
 q. Sedes 
 
 r. Praxis 
 
 s. Locus 
 
 t. Imago 
 
 n. Imago. 
 
 v. Locus 
 
 x. Terra 
 
 y. Ostium 
 
 z. Receptaculum 
 
 A. Arithmeticus 
 
 C. Castrum 
 
 D. Distinctio 
 
 F. Fenestra 
 
 G. Gr. Grammatica 
 
 1. Imaginarius 
 K. Connexum 
 
 N. Numerus. 
 P. Palatium 
 R. Repetitio 
 3. Fundamentum 
 T. Thesaurus 
 V. Volmitarium 
 Adi. Adiunctum 
 Ci. Citatio 
 Diet. Dictatio 
 Diu. Diuisio 
 Ep. Epistola. 
 LG. Logicus 
 Mph. Metaphysicus 
 Or. Oratio 
 Ph. Physicus 
 Pr. Pronomen 
 Prosodia. 
 La. Latus ' 
 Rh. Rhetorica 
 Rn. Rudimenta 
 Sy. Syntaxis 
 Ve. Verbum. 
 
 1. Cadela, Cerea, Vina 
 
 2. Cygnus 
 
 3. Triangulus 
 
 4. Quadrangulus 
 
 5. Manns 
 
 6. Stella 
 
 7. Norma rel Securis 
 
 8. Calix 
 
 9. Cornu. 
 
 10- Annlns, Remex, Circnlas 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 257 
 
 The work of Schenckel is a singular produc- 
 tion. His development of the art does not con- 
 fine itself to mechanical ideas alone. It sets 
 the technical, symbolical, and logical faculties of 
 the memory, in equal activity ; and requires that 
 its powers should be at once ingenious and per- 
 ceptive. Its acquirement is founded on the asso- 
 ciation of ideas : nor does it fail to call wit and 
 imagination in aid of natural memory. Som- 
 mer's Compendium, consisting of eight sections, 
 was printed for the use of his auditors. After 
 his departure, permission is given to his scholars 
 to communicate their mnemonistic doubts, ob- 
 servations, and discoveries, to each other ; but 
 no one can be present without legalizing himself 
 previously, as one of the initiated, by prescribed 
 signs : and he who fails in this, is excluded as a 
 profaner. 
 
 As Schenckel's work, besides being a literary 
 curiosity, had, of late years, become extremely 
 rare, Dr. Kl'dber, in 1804, published a Ger- 
 man translation of it, entitled, ' Compendium 
 der Mnemonik, etc.' or, ' Compendium of Mne- 
 monics, or the Art of Memory, at the beginning 
 of the seventeenth century, by L. Schenckel, 
 and M. Sommer. Translated from the Latin, 
 with a preface and remarks, by D. Kl'dber, 8°. 
 Erlangen, J 804. 
 
433 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 33. De Memoria, ac Reminiscentia Dis- 
 cerptatio Sempronii Lancioni Ro- 
 mani ad mentem Philosophorum 
 principum Flatonis et Aristotelis 
 concinnata. Verona, 1608. 
 
 In this tract, are exhibited passages of divers 
 authors, respecting the system of local memory as 
 practised among the Greeks. 
 
 34. Joh. Henr. Ahtedii Theatrum Scho- 
 
 lasticum, 8°. Herborn. 1610. 
 
 In this work is contained the Gymnasium 
 Mnemonicum, or, treatise on the .Art of M«» 
 mory. 
 
 35. Joh. Henr. Ahtedii Sy sterna Mne- 
 
 monicum, 8°. Franc. 1610. 
 
 36. Joh. Henr. Ahtedii Triga Cane- 
 
 niece, 8°. Franc. 1611. 
 
 The first of these trigse is Artis Mnemonic* 
 explicatio. 
 
 37. Simonides redivivus ; sive Ars Me* 
 morice et oblivionis (quam hodie 
 complurcs penitus ignorari scripse- 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. iS$ 
 
 runt) tabulis express a, Authore 
 Adamo Bruxio Sprotfusilesio Doct. 
 et Med. cut accessit itomenclator 
 mnemofiicus ejusdem aulkoris, 4°. 
 Lips. 1610. 
 
 A great part of the Simonides Redivhus 
 was reprinted at Leyden, by H. Herdson, in the 
 year l6.il, under the title of Ars Mnemunica, 
 she Herdsonus Biuxiatus; vel Brums Herdso- 
 niatus To this was appended a treatise in Eng- 
 lish by Herdson, on the same subject, the whole 
 of which may be seen at Nos. 52 and .53. 
 
 After the title of No. 37, there is a wood-cut 
 nearly the size of the page, very tolerably exe- 
 cuted. It represents a tree loaded with fruit, — 
 a man mounted on a ladder, plucking the fruit, — 
 a boy in a go (art, — and a venerable figure (we 
 suppose the magister) looking very attentively at 
 the boy. Underneath the cut, are the following 
 verses : 
 
 Scala viro, currus puero, quod scipio Acesta ; 
 Hoc memorativa praslut in arte Locus. 
 
 Brux has treated the subject in a very compre- 
 hensive manner, and has subjoined a complete 
 nomenclutor mnemonicus He also directed his 
 attention to an art on which much less has been 
 written :— the ars oblivionis, or art of forgetful- 
 
24.0 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 ness, for the acquisition of which very full and 
 minute directions are given. Were this art 
 ' eliminated out of the thick fog in which it is 
 enveloped,' many a candidate would be found for 
 the sweet oblivious antidote. In this (says the 
 great moralist) we all resemble one another ; the 
 hero and the sage are, like vulgar mortals, over- 
 burdened by the weight of life ; all shrink from 
 recollection, and all wish for an art offorget- 
 fulness. 
 
 Before we take leave of this interesting art, 
 the following jew (T esprit will be given from oue 
 of the daily paper*,* as it deserves to be rescued 
 from the usual oblivion of such repositories. It 
 was written on the occasion of some lectures 
 delivered on Mnemonics in the city of Dublin. 
 " Syllabus of the Public Experiments on 
 the new system of Anti-mnemonics, to the per- 
 fecticnatiotv of which the Chevalier de sans Sou- 
 venir has devoted the last fifty years of a long life, 
 fully verifying from the toils he has encountered 
 and surmounted in the pursuit, the assertion of 
 Pope, — 
 
 " Of all the lessons taught to mortals yet, 
 'Tis sure the hardest scienve — to fokget." 
 
 Morning Chronicle for Not. 21, 1S1& 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 241 
 
 EXPERIMENT I. 
 
 " The Chevalier will produce before the com- 
 pany one of the Members just returned to Par- 
 liament, and whom he shall have instructed not 
 one quarter of an hour; he will present to him 
 fifty of those Constituents, with whom but a 
 week since he was on the most familiar terms, 
 when to the astonishment of all present it will be 
 found that he does not remember the face of one 
 of them, nor retains the slightest remembrance 
 of the pledges he gave or the promises he uttered, 
 notwithstanding the utmost efforts of the above- 
 mentioned fifty promises to recal them to his re- 
 collection. 
 
 EXPERIMENT II. 
 
 " The Chevalier will present to the company 
 an elderly Widow Lady, of demure aspect, and 
 sedate appearance; she shall have a smelling- 
 bottle in one hand and a white handkerchief iu 
 the other, which she shall respectively apply to 
 her nose and eyes, and exhibit every other accus- 
 tomed symptom of grief, when, by virtue of ten 
 minutes' influence of the anti-mnemonic system 
 she shall furl her flag of sorrow, pocket her bottle 
 of disconsoh tion, dance a favourite Irish jig, box 
 the ears of l;er seven children by herjirst hus- 
 band, and loudly declare the impossibility of 
 
242 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OP 
 
 managing a large family without the aid of a 
 second. 
 
 EXPERIMENT III. 
 
 " A certain Viscount has graciously promised 
 to be present at the first exhibition, and to permit 
 the efficacy of the art to be tried upon his recol- 
 lection. Twelve Members of Parliament have 
 likewise consented to attend, and severally to 
 ask him twelve questions upon various topics of 
 foreign and domestic Policy — Unions — Sicamps 
 — Catamarans — Cat-o 'nine-tails — Beds of roses 
 — Triangles — Italian Music — The Penal Code 
 — The Orders in Council — and, the Emancipa- 
 tion of the Catholics, — by all which interroga- 
 tories, amounting to 144, he shall evidently ap- 
 pear quite unmoved ; nay, during the whole time 
 lie shall smile, and preserve the most inviolable 
 self complacency. 
 
 EXPERIMENT IV. 
 
 " Many elderly persons having, since the Che- 
 valier's arrival, complained to him of the intole- 
 rable tenacity of the memories of their children 
 and dependants, who actually exhibit symptoms 
 of impatience at the fiftieth or sixtieth repetition 
 of the same story, and audaciously either yawn 
 or anticipate the denouement, to the great mor- 
 tification of the narrator. Now the Chevalier 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 243 
 
 invites any one of the said respectable characters 
 to his exhibition accompanied by seven or eight 
 of his most refractory family hearers, and he 
 engages, that after but ten minutes' instruction, 
 they shall listen, not merely composedly, but 
 with something like curiosity, to the most thread- 
 bare tales, laugh in all the proper places, and 
 exhibit every other symptom of being entertained 
 and gratified. 
 
 EXPERIMENT V. 
 
 " A venerable Pluralist shall be brought for- 
 ward for examination, and shall be asked, What 
 promises he made at his ordination ? — or whether 
 he made any ? — which of his three livings he last 
 visited r — from what well-known author he tran- 
 scribed his last sermon ? — with bow many persons 
 amongst his several flocks he was acquainted ? 
 Not one of which interrogatories he shall be able 
 to answer. 
 
 EXPERIMENT VI. 
 
 i: The Chevalier will next present to the pub- 
 lic a Lady of cold affections and morbid vanity, 
 inoculated with the love of the great, possessed 
 of a little smartness, which the superficial might 
 mistake for wit, and deeply versed in what is 
 termed knowledge of the world. She shall in 
 early life have given the most unequivocal pro- 
 
244 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 mise of her affections to an unpractised heart, 
 that trusted her with all the unlimited credulity 
 of confiding love — pledges shall have been annu- 
 alized, and those solemn assurances reciprocated 
 which indissolubly bind the faithful, and can only 
 be violated by the unprincipled, — yet by the in- 
 fluence of this miraculous science, she shall for- 
 get her vows, deny her attachment, and finally 
 marry another person; and when the parties af- 
 terwards meet, no feeling shall arise in her mind 
 but a kind of aukward flutter, nor in his but the 
 most contemptuous indifference. 
 
 EXPERIMENT VII. 
 
 " An eminent Lawyer shall also be produced 
 in testimony of this wonderful art, who will be 
 found to be proof even against a Refresher, and 
 this is supposed, with one illustrious exception, 
 to be the ne phis ultra of anti-mnemonic in- 
 fluence. If circumstances did not imperiously 
 prevent, the Chevalier could produce this Exalted 
 Individual, and triumphantly display him as one 
 of the singular prodigies of the anti-mnemonic 
 system. It is asserted by a celebrated craniosco- 
 pist, Dr. Gall, that early friendships make the 
 deepest impression upon the human brain, and 
 are with the greatest difficulty effaced — that they 
 linger there, the last arid most tenacious inmates, 
 when other recollections have been weakened by 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 245 
 
 years, or absorbed in selfishness. To triumph 
 over a radicated feeling like this was reserved fur 
 that science which can pervade the cottage as 
 well as the palace, and while it sleeps the pea- 
 sant's mind in balmy forgetfulness, can equally 
 relieve the Prince from the pangs of reminis- 
 cence. 
 
 " The Chevalier sans Souvenir having thus 
 far developed his plan, will not for the present 
 enter into further detads. To the Irish Nation, 
 whose characteristic it is to forgive, he begs 
 leave particularly to recommend his system, which 
 will also enable them to forget their manifold 
 wrongs and injuries, and only to remember, that 
 an united, are ever a happy, and a prosperous, 
 people ; that to Religious and Political opinions 
 perfect freedom should be given, if we wish to 
 be happy at home or formidable abroad ; that all 
 irritating retrospects should merge /'// the love of 
 country, and that our endeavours should zealous- 
 ly and exclusively be directed to the Reform of 
 internal abuses, and the extension of public liber- 
 ty, that so the glorious fabric of our Constitution 
 may be enabled to resist the aggression to which 
 it is exposed, and to survive the storm which has 
 made shipwreck of other Governments." 
 
 .38- Fr. Marl. Ravelhni Ars Memoria 
 
 8°, Franc. 1617. 
 
 y3 
 
246 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 The principles of the art according to Ravel- 
 lin are four ; — place, image, order, and practice 
 or use of the images. He takes houses, cham- 
 bers or rooms, and walls, in the following 
 order ; on entering the room, and standing with 
 the back to the door, the first wall is to be on 
 the left, the second before us, the third on the 
 right, the fourth behind us, and the fioor is to be 
 reckoned as the fifth wall. The letter M is to be 
 supposed on each wall, and to be divided thus : 
 
 3 4 
 
 1 
 2 5 
 
 In each of these divisions a hand is to be placed, 
 consequently 25 places will be gained, if we 
 count one for each of the fingers and the thumb. 
 By taking ten hands and disposing them in the 
 same manner, fifty places are obtained, and if 
 each wrist be accounted as one place, 60 com- 
 partments will be found. In these compart- 
 ments the image of what is intended to be re- 
 membered is to be placed. Ravellin afterwards 
 divides a wall by tens, precisely in the same way 
 as Mr Watson has done in the Sloane MS. be- 
 fore noticed. The tract of Ravellin was re- 
 printed in 167 8, with five others, in an octavo 
 volume, entitled, Fa riorum de Arte Memoria 
 Tractatus Sex. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 247 
 
 39. Utriusque Cosmi, majoris scilicet, et 
 minoris Metaphysica, Physica et 
 Tcchnica Historia, auctore Roberto 
 Fludd, 2 tom.fol. Openh. et Franc. 
 
 1617—1621. 
 
 A few pages of this curious and expensive 
 work are devoted to an explanation of the author's 
 system of Mnemonics. This seems to be an 
 attempt to combine the ' Ars Magna' of Lully, 
 with the local memory of the antients, as improv- 
 ed by the modern memorists. Some curious 
 wood-cuts accompany the description ; and there 
 are, on other subjects, many extremely singular 
 prints in this rare work, which are intelligible 
 only to an adept. The portrait aloue of Fludd, 
 prefixed to the first volume, has been valued at 
 four guineas.'!! 
 
 Robert Fludd, or as he styled himself in 
 Latin, defiuctibus, was the second son of Sir 
 Thomas Fludd, Treasurer of War to Queen Eli- 
 zabeth. He was born at Milgate in Kent, in the 
 year 1574, and was educated at St. John's Col- 
 lege, Oxford. He was a very voluminous author 
 in his sect, diving into the farthest profundities, 
 and most mysterious obscurities of the Rosycrucian 
 philosophy ; — and blending in a most extraordi • 
 nary manner, divinity, chemistry, natural philoso- 
 
248 PRINCIPAL'SYSTEMS OF 
 
 phy, and metaphysics. He was made Doctor of 
 Physic in l6"0.5, and died i637. 
 
 40. Apsinis Grceci Rhetoris, de Memo- 
 ria liber singularis laiine nunc pri- 
 mum vertit, Fed. Morell. Paris, 
 1618. 
 
 41. In&stimabilis Art is Memoranda The- 
 
 saurus, ex variis optimisque autJw- 
 ribus depromptus, ab Adatno Nau- 
 lio, Rheto. Sacerd. et S. T/ieoh 
 Doct. 8°. Paris. 1618. 
 
 Naulius has compiled a useful and well- 
 arranged digest of the different authors who have 
 written on this subject, and has devoted a chap- 
 ter, treating of the application of the art, to 
 each of the following persons : — divines, con- 
 fessors, lawyers, linguists, rhetoricians, astrolo- 
 gers, geometricians, kings, princes, and noble 
 travellers. 
 
 4%. 3Inemo?iica ; sive Ars Reminiscen- 
 di : e purls artis naturae que fontibus 
 hausta, et in tres libros digesia, ac 
 non de Memoria naturali foveuda 
 libellus e variis doctissimorum ope- 
 ribus, scdulo collectus : jam primum 
 in lucem edita authore Johan. Wil- 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 249 
 
 lisso, Sacra Theolo. Bacch. 8°. 
 Lond. 1618. 
 
 The treatise de Memoria naturali fovenda, 
 was reprinted at Frankfort, in the year 1678, 
 with five other tracts, in an octavo volume, en- 
 titled Variorum de Arte Memoria Tractatus 
 Sex. The whole work was translated by Leonard 
 Sowenby, a bookseller * at the Turn-stile, near 
 New-market in Lincoln's Inn Fields, and printed 
 in the year l66l, with the following title: 
 
 43. Mnemionca ; or, the Art of Memo- 
 ry, drained out of the pure fountains 
 of art and nature, digested into 
 three books. Also a physical trea- 
 tise of cherishing natural Memory ; 
 diligently collected out of dvers 
 learned metis writings. By John 
 Willis, JB ate he lour in Divinity, 8°. 
 Lond. lrjtil. 
 
 As this book has become rare, and developes 
 many of the principles of the local memory in 
 an apt and intelligible manner, our extracts will 
 be more copious than usual. 
 
 The worthy translator seems to have been a 
 man of very unassuming manners. The dedica- 
 
£50 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Hon, which we recommend all booksellers of the 
 present day to peruse and imitate, has not its 
 parallel for diffidence and humility. 
 
 " TO THE HONORABLE 
 
 " WILLIAM PIERREPOINT, ESQ. 
 
 *' Honored Sir, 
 
 " Tf Lines were capable of Humane affec- 
 tions, these would blush, they are so mean a 
 present to so Illustrious a person ; at least con- 
 scious of their Masters presumptions, they would 
 condole his uuhappiness, that had not greater 
 ability to accommodate some more worthy Fabrick 
 to so fair a Frontispiece. The Original compiled 
 by a learned hand, among some vulgar things 
 and trifles, containeth very excellent aud profit- 
 able matter ; I hope it hath not lost its utility 
 (though Grace) in English. 
 
 " Honored Sir, J fear, good intentions are no 
 sufficient Plea for lemerous Enterprises, espe- 
 cially the Undertaker being privie to his own 
 imperfections ; Therefore like a Criminal ac- 
 knowledging my vanity in ambitiously affecting 
 things above my Sphere, I humbly re-implore 
 your Honors pardon and admittance to be what' 
 I was before, 
 
 Your Honors most 
 humble Servant 
 Leonard bownRSEY." 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 251 
 
 The author, in the preface, having compared 
 his Art of Memory to a new- born infant, be- 
 cause it was then first presented to the world, 
 proceeds to show the advantages attendant upon 
 it. The Jint book treats of remembering com- 
 mon affairs, words, phrases, sentences, and 
 speeches, by means of notes and writing. 
 
 Having despatched these vulgar ways of me- 
 mory, our author proceeds to speak in {he Jirst 
 chapter of the second book, ' of remembring 
 without writing,' and says, " I descend to helps 
 conducing to the same purpose without Hand- 
 writing, which is then most pleasant, when we 
 are destitute of the aid of Paper, Ink, or Table- 
 Books, or when by some obstacle we are debar- 
 red the free use of them. This consisteth of two 
 operations, Reposition and Deposition. 
 
 u Reposition is the manner of charging Me- 
 mory with Note-worthy things; herein it is not 
 to be expected that each particular word of every 
 sentence be retained ; but onely, that the general 
 sence be fastened in mind. At all times when a 
 man is about to commit any thing in custody to 
 his Memory, first let him study to drown all un- 
 necessary thoughts in oblivion, that he may per- 
 fectly intend the things he is to learn. * * * * 
 A ready remembrance most commonly proceed- 
 ed fiom right understanding the thing in hand; 
 therefore a man must prepare himself diligently, 
 
i52 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 and so unite the force of his imagination, that he 
 may as it were engrave and imprint occurrent 
 things in his memory. Lead doth facily receive 
 impression, because it is tenacious, which Quick' 
 silver cannot admit, by reason of its Fluxibiiity : 
 In like manner fleeting inconstant minds continu- 
 ally hurried into new & strange cogitations, is far 
 from gathering fruit by any thing heard. The 
 method of a speech is chiefly to be observed, re- 
 garding seriously what is the general subject 
 thereof; Secondly, the greater parts, and with 
 what Logical Arguments each part is handled ; 
 the pei feet Method of a speech doth much cou- 
 duce to remember the whole ; or if the Contex- 
 ture thereof be inartificial, imperfect, and unsa- 
 tisfactory, comprehending many things forcibly 
 applied, rejecting things of a like kind, yet a 
 strong Memory will retain the same by observa- 
 tion of the absurdities aud rude Artifice of the 
 ■whole. 
 
 " Deposition is when we recollect things com- 
 mitted to memory ; and having transcribed or 
 transacted them, discharge our memories of them, 
 which is alwayes to be practised at the first 
 opportunity : Things charged in Memory by 
 day, are to be deposited at least before sleep, if 
 not sooner; things charged by night, are to be 
 deposited immediately after sleep, that the mind 
 be no louger burthened thau is convenient, and 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 15$ 
 
 that things negligently laid up in mind, be not 
 forgotten, Writing being the faithfullest Guar- 
 dian of Memorandums. If in dis-burthening 
 your Memory, something charged happen to be 
 forgotten, shut your eyes, that no external obiect 
 may divert your mind, and try to recall it by im- 
 portunate scrutiny; which operation may be 
 called Revocation, and is an Art that by help of 
 certain Rules teacheth the investigation of things 
 lapsed out of memory. 
 
 " To conclude, Deposition, or discharging 
 things committed to mind, is n©t unlike expung- 
 ing writing out of Table-Books : If therefore 
 there be any Art of Oblivion (as some affirm) it 
 may be properly referred hither. So much in 
 general ; now to explicate the particular species 
 thereof." 
 
 The second chapter treats of ' remembring by 
 certain verses purposely born in mind/ the third 
 * of remembering by extempore verses,' and the 
 fourth * of exonerating things charged on memo- 
 ry ex tempore.' The manner of remembering 
 by verses already composed, says Mr. Willis, is 
 when a man doth excogitate or retain remarkable 
 things by repetition of verses provided to that 
 purpose. Suppose an attorney, be to wait upon 
 Judges riding the Circuits from one County to 
 another, it may be worth his labour to repeat 
 these vejses at leaving his lodging, lest he forget 
 
254 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 some necessary thing, which we may imagine 
 formerly framed by him to this end. 
 
 Scalpellum, calami, cornugraphiumq ; libelli, 
 Charta, pugillares, vapitulia, cert, sigillum, 
 Sic crepide, gladius, cultellus, pugio, burssa, 
 Muccinium, indusiumq : monilia, penula, pecten 
 Fascia, cruralis, cruralia, ductylothece. 
 
 These useful hexameters are thus done int9 
 English, by the worthy Mr. Sowersby. 
 
 Pen-knife, Quills, Ink-horn, Book, Paper, Table-Books, 
 
 Caps ; Take 
 Wax, Seal and Slippers, Sword, Knife and Dagger, safe 
 
 make ; 
 Purse, handkerchiefs, Shirts, Rings, Coat, and for your 
 
 own sake, 
 Combs, Garters, Stockins, Gloves. 
 
 The following memorial verses for a traveller, 
 from Fitzherbert's Husbandry, will 
 form a suitable companion to those of Mr. 
 Willis. They are hexameters, but were by the 
 Printer jumbled into prose, and have been res- 
 tored by a correspondent in the Gentleman's 
 Magazine for October 1767, vol. xxxvii. 
 p. 487. 
 
 Purse, dirk,* cloak, night-cap, kerchief, shoeing-horn, 
 buget,t and shoes ; 
 
 * Dirk is a word of th« same age. Dagger will not 
 scan quite so well. 
 + Buget, budget. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 255 
 
 Spear, nails, hood, halter, sadle-cloth, spurs, hat, wi thy 
 
 horse comb : 
 Bow, arrow, sword, buckler, horn, brush, gloves, string, 
 
 and thy bracer ; 
 Pen, paper, ink, parchment, red, wax, poms,* books, then 
 
 remember : 
 Pen-knife, comb, thimble, needle, thread, point, lest that 
 
 thy girth break ; 
 Bodkin, knife, lingel,t give thy horse meat.: see he be 
 
 stowed well. 
 Make merry , sing an thou canst, take heed to thy geer, that 
 
 thou lose none. 
 
 Having recommended the carpenter to apply 
 himself to the Muses and register his tools in the 
 day-baok of Parnassus, Mr. Willis introduces 
 the following verses composed by himself. 
 
 An? quisquid? cujus? cui? quo? quibus? auxilijs? cur? 
 Quoinodn? circa quid? quails? quantum? ex, in eta quo? 
 Qua?ndiu? ubi? quando? quotics? quotuplex? quot et unde? 
 
 These quiddities are thus trranslated by Mr. 
 Sowersby for the benefit of the English reader, 
 and more particularly for the ladies, whose natu- 
 ral curiosity might well be excited by so formid- 
 able a list of quaeres. 
 
 * Poms, perfumed wash-balls, pomanders. 
 t Langelf an awl. 
 
'256 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OP 
 
 If? who? what? -whose? to -what ? whether? why? abont 
 
 what? 
 How ? what fashion ? how much ? by, of, in, and from what ? 
 How long? how often? how manifold ? whence came that ? 
 Where, when, how many ? 
 
 "These Verses (craving the Readers pardon 
 
 for the ruggedness) contain twenty two Questions 
 
 of excellent use to invent, retain, as also to recall 
 
 to minde things of great concernment and worthy 
 
 memory in urgent affairs. 
 
 # # # # 
 
 The most curious and interesting part of these 
 u drainings out of the pure fountains of art and 
 nature," is to be found in the third book ; a large 
 proportion of which we have reprinted. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 " Repositories. 
 
 "The Art of Memory, which we now treat 
 crfNConsisteth of Ideas, and places, wherein we 
 will first handle the Reposition of Idea's, aud 
 afterward their Deposition. 
 
 11 Reposition of Idea's is, when things to be 
 remembred, are charged upon Memory by Idea's, 
 disposed in certain places of a Repository ; but 
 before 1 discend to the manner of Reposition, it 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 257 
 
 is necessary for better explanation, to speak of Re- 
 positories, Places, and Ideas in distinct chapters. 
 " A Repository is an imaginary fabrick, fan- 
 cied Artificially, built of hewen stone, in form of 
 a 'I heater, the form whereof followeth ; suppose 
 the Edifice to be twelve yards in length within 
 the walls, in breadth six yards, and in height seven 
 yards, the roof thereof flat, leaded above, and 
 pargetted underneath, lying wholly open to view, 
 without any wall on that side supposed next us : 
 Let there be imagined a Stage of smooth gray 
 Marble, even and variegated with a party colour- 
 ed border, which Stage is to be extended over 
 the whole length and breadth of the building, 
 and raised a yard high above the Level of the 
 ground on which the said Edifice is erected: Let 
 all the walls, that is, the opposite wall, & two 
 ends be waiuscotted with Cypresse boards, so 
 artificially plained and'glewed, that the joynts be 
 indiscernable ; suppose also a Groove or Gutter 
 cut in the middle of the Marble Stase, three 
 inches broad, extended from the opposite wall to 
 the hither side of the Stage, whereby it is exactly 
 divided into two equal parts, and that upon the 
 further end of the said Groove, there is eneared 
 a Column, a foot and half thick, arising up to 
 the Roof of the building, almost touching the 
 opposite wall, and deviding it into two equal 
 
 parts, as the Groove divideth the Stage; so that 
 z S 
 
'£58 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 by the Groove, and the Pillar, the whole Repo- 
 sitory is parted in twain, and consisteth of two 
 Rooms, siding each other, each of them being 
 six yards long, six yards broad, and six yards 
 high. For the better understanding this inven- 
 tion, I have caused a Type of the Repository to 
 be here delineated, the explanation whereof im- 
 mediately folloWeth."* 
 
 * That nothing might be wanting to elucidate this cu- 
 rions description, we have given a fac-simile of the original 
 wood-cut. See next page. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 259 
 
 f^ £ 
 
€00 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 " The letters, a, b, c, d, shew the length of the 
 edifice, a, c, b, d, the height, a, e, b, f, the 
 height of the stage, g, i, k, h, are boundaries of 
 the opposite wall, e, c, i, g, the side wall upon 
 the left hand, h, k, d,f, the side wall of the right 
 hand, c, I, m, d, design the Roof, g, i, n, p, the 
 opposite wall of the first Room, e, g, o, p, the 
 stage of the first Room, r, q, k, h, the opposite 
 wall of the second room, s, r, h, f, the stage of 
 the second room, n, o, the pillar dividing the 
 opposite wall, o, p, the groove wrought into the 
 stage. 
 
 " A Repository according to this fashion, is to 
 be represented before the eyes of our minde, 
 wheresoever we are, as oft as we intend to prac- 
 tise this Art; supposing ourselves to stand about 
 two yards distant, against the midst thereof. 
 
 CHAP. ir. 
 
 " Of Places. 
 
 " A Place (as to our consideration) is an apt 
 space in a Repository, designed for reception of 
 ideas. 
 
 " There are onely two places m every reposi- 
 tory of equal* form and magnitude, that is the 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 2fli 
 
 two rooms of each repository determinated as 
 aforesaid by the pillar and groove. 
 
 " That place is said to be the former, which 
 is on the right hand of the repository, that 
 which is on the left hand, the latter ; that part 
 of the repository is said to be on the right hand, 
 which is opposite to the left hand of a man 
 standing against the middle of the repository, 
 that on the left hand which is opposite to the 
 right. 
 
 u Thus in the scheme exhibited in the former 
 chapter, the letters g, i, n, o, demonstrate the 
 opposite wall of the right hand part, or first 
 place or room of the repository, and the letters, 
 e > S> °> P> me stage thereof; so r, q, k, h, are 
 indices of the opposite wall of the left hand part, 
 or second place or room of the repository, ami 
 h r t h,f, the stage of the same. 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 " Of Idea's in general. 
 
 "An idea is a visible representation of 
 things to be remembred, framed by a strong 
 imagination, by help whereof the minde by re- 
 flexion calleth to memory, together with the idea, 
 the thing represented. Idea's are to be vested 
 
562 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 with their proper circumstances, according as 
 their natures require, for like as writings, the 
 fairer they are, are more facilly read ; so idea's, 
 the more aptly they are conceived, according to 
 the exigency of their nature, are more speedily 
 recalled to minde ; and also consequently the 
 things by them signified. Motion is to be attri- 
 buted to ideas of moveable things ; quiet to 
 ideas of quiet things, and good or evil savours, 
 to ideas representing things so qualified. Exam- 
 ples of moveable idea's, are artificers at work in 
 their shops, women dauncing, trees shaken by 
 the wind, water running from cocks, and such 
 like. Idea's of quiet things, are henns laying in 
 their nests, thieves lurking under bushes, Stc. 
 Idea's to which sound is ascribed, are a lion roar- 
 ing, a bell ringing, whistling, murmure of trees, 
 a quirister singing, a huntsman hollowing, &c. 
 Moreover, if perfume, burning in a chafing-dish, 
 be used for an idea, a sweet and pleasant odour 
 must be attributed thereto, on the contrary to 
 vaults under ground, a filthy, unwholesome stink, 
 is to be assigned ; so idea's of merry men, require 
 cheerfulness of countenance, of sickmen, pale- 
 ness and sadnesse. After this manner idea's of 
 edifices, machines, and all artificial things whatso- 
 ever, ought to be signalised ; proportion of form, 
 and splendour of colours, must be attributed to 
 pictures, grace and livelinesse of letters, to 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 263 
 
 W)'itings, glory and excellency of workmanship, 
 to engravings; finally, every idea must have 
 such illustration as may render it most notable 
 and conspicuous, and seem principally coherent 
 to its nature. 
 
 ** But before I proceed further, it is expedient 
 to take into consideration, the common affection 
 of ideas, their species shall succeed after, in a 
 
 more proper place. 
 The common affections of idea's are three ; 
 
 quantity, position, and colour. 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 " Of the Quantitie of Idea's. 
 
 " An idea in respect of quantity, is either 
 equal, greater, or lesser then the thing repre- 
 sented. 
 
 " An equal idea is, when the thing repre- 
 sented, is bestowed in a place of the repository, 
 in its proper and due magnitude, as being neither 
 too great to be contained therein, nor so small it 
 cannot be discerned by one standing before the 
 repository ; such are chairs, pictures, tables, 
 beds, heaps of stone, piles of wood, two comba- 
 tants in a single duel, and the like. 
 
 " An augmented, or greater idea, is when the 
 thing to be remembered, is increased to a multi- 
 
iQ4 1'lMNCirAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 tude, that it may be better viewed at a distance, 
 which else being small, would not fall under 
 cognizance ; as if the thing to be deposited in 
 the repository, were a penny, a pea) I, a grain of 
 mustard-seed, or a spider, which are so small, 
 that disposed in a room of the repository, they 
 escape ihe sight of a man standing btfore the 
 repository : in such cases, instead of one penny, 
 imagine a heap of pence new coined ; instead of 
 one pearl, a multitude of pearls; instead of one 
 grain of mustard seed, fancy certain bushels 
 scattered about the stage ; and for one spider, 
 suppose a multitude creeping about the opposite 
 wall. 
 
 " A contracted or lesser idea is, when the thing 
 to be remembered is so great, that it cannot be 
 comprehended in its proper natural quantity, 
 within such narrow limits of a room of a reposi- 
 tory, and is therefore imagined to be pourtrayed 
 with elegant lively colours, in a picture fixed to 
 the opposite wall. Thus space of places how 
 far soever distant, and all great things, may be 
 facile'y represented in a picture : as if the thing 
 to be remembered were a battel, a triumphant 
 spectacle, hunting or hawking through woods 
 and groves, a naval conflict, large territories, 
 castles, a mountain, or church, &c. whose idea's 
 cannot be contained in the memorial places, un- 
 less contracted, and aptly and artificially com- 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 205 
 
 prized in a picture, conceited by imagination 
 hanging against the opposite wall, that so it ma/ 
 be fully comprehended. 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 " Of the Position ef Idea's. 
 
 " Let the position of every idea be such as in 
 vulgar use doth most commonly appertain to the 
 thing signified ; let the idea's of things usually 
 hanged against a wall, be so disposed in the re- 
 pository, as musical instruments, arms, looking- 
 glasses, pictures, brushes, written tables, &c. 
 Such things as are customarily fastened to, or in 
 a wall, imagine them accommodated in the re- 
 pository in like manner, as title-pages of books 
 pasted against the pillar, proclamations, or 
 printed pages nailed to the wall, funeral-stream- 
 ers, or pendants, in the higher part of the oppo- 
 site wall, as you see in churches : such things as 
 are commonly set upon shelves, fancy them so 
 placed in the repository ; as vessels of gold, sil- 
 ver, glasses, books, mercery wares, &c. Such 
 things as are usually placed on a table, conceive 
 them so marshalled in the repository, as victuals, 
 sums of money, table-boards, 8tc. such things 
 as lye, or are any ways situate on ground, must 
 
 A A 
 
266 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 be so placed in the repository, as heaps of wheat, 
 a cradle, chest, table, living creatures, whether 
 standing, sitting, or lying, &c. Such things as 
 are frequently under ground, are to be supposed 
 under the marble-stage ; for though they escape 
 the eye of a man standing before the repository, 
 yet they cannot be concealed from the eyes of his 
 mind, which are only exercised in this matter ; 
 of this sort are graves, wells, wine-cellars, met- 
 taline-mines, subterranean passages, through 
 which streams have their course, as blood in the 
 veins, &c. Like method is to be observed in 
 site and position of all other things. 
 
 £HAP. VI. 
 
 " Of the Colours of Repositories and Idea's. 
 
 " Here you are to be admonished, that 
 although every repository is supposed to be uni- 
 form in bu lding ; yet they are distinguished from 
 one another by the pillar in the middle of every 
 repository, which must be imagined of several 
 colours ; as if you use ten, that which you design 
 for the first, must be conceived to have a golden 
 pillar ; the second a pillar of silver ; the third 
 of black stone; the fourth of blew stone; the 
 fifth of red stone ; the sixth of yellow stone ; the 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 267 
 
 seventh of green stone ; the eighth of purple 
 stone, the ninth of white stone, the tenth of ci- 
 namon colour. Now for distinction sake, gold 
 is called the colour of the first repository ; silver 
 the colour of the second repository ; black of 
 the third repository ; and so successively as be- 
 fore. If you use more than ten repositories, you 
 must repeat the same colours over again, as be- 
 fore ; so that the eleventh is imagined to have a 
 golden pillar, the twelfth a silver pillar, the thir- 
 teenth a black pillar, the fourteenth a blew pil- 
 lar, and so the rest in order. After the same 
 manner every idea mast be conceived cloathed, 
 adorned, or some way illustrated with the pro- 
 per colour of the repository, wherein it is ima- 
 gined to be placed. Take an example or two 
 for better explanation : suppose a saylor in a 
 canvase suit be retained for an idea in the first 
 repository, I represent him standing there with 
 a golden chain over his shoulder like a belt; if 
 in the second, imagine he weareth a silver chain 
 about his neck, with a whistle fastened thereto : 
 if in the third, that he hath black boots on his 
 legs : if in the fourth, that he hath a blew skarf 
 on his arm, tyed in a rose-not: if in the fifth, 
 that he wears a Red Monmouth Cap on his 
 head : if in the sixth, that he swaggereth with a 
 yellow feather in his cap : if in the seventh, that 
 he hath a green silk garter on his right leg : if in 
 
'268 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 the eighth, that his cauvase coat is imbellished 
 with a border of purple velvet : if in the ninth, 
 that his neck is beautified with a very white 
 orient pearl ; if in the tenth, that he hath a pair 
 of cinnamon coloured breeches. 
 
 " Howbeit, if the idea of its own nature be any 
 ways related to the colour of its repository, 
 whereby it may be presently understood to have 
 the colour thereof, it will need no other attribu- 
 tion : for example, if a mayor of a city, (who in 
 regard of his office is dignified with a purple 
 gown, and gold chain) be placed as an idea in the 
 first or fift repository, there will be no need of 
 attribution of colour, because the golden chain 
 doth manifestly represent the colour of the first 
 repository, the purple gown of the colour of the 
 fift. In like sort, if a black bull be placed as an 
 idea in either room of the. first repositori/, his 
 horns must be conceived gilded with gold ; if in 
 the second, with silver ; if in the third, black, 
 being the proper colour of that repository, ex- 
 cludeth any other addition : if in the fourth, let 
 him be decked with a chaplet of the blew flowers ; 
 if in the fift, with a garland of red roses, &c. 
 So a picture imagined to be painted on the op- 
 posite wall of the first repository, must be illus- 
 trated with gold in some convenient place; if in 
 the opposite wall of the second repository, with 
 silver; of the third, with black, &c. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 2<J9 
 
 " This attribution of a repositories colour, is of 
 marvellous use, both to keep in mind the ide fs 
 themselves, as also their order ; hereby the mind 
 re- perusing ideas formerly bestowed, hath al- 
 wayes some certainty to guide itself, and recol- 
 lect any idea at present latent ; because it's un- 
 questionable, that the missing idea .is either 
 wholly, or at least in part, illustrated with the 
 proper colour of its repository. 
 
 " Moreover, in attributing a repositories colour 
 to an idea, (of it self not partaking thereof) you 
 must be careful that the colour of the repository 
 be accommodated to the most eminent part of 
 the idea, or as near as may be : if the history of 
 the prophet Jonah thrown into the sea by mari- 
 ners, be used as an idea, it must be represented 
 in a picture according to the third chapter pre- 
 ceding ; in which, though the whale, sea, ship, 
 and iand are to be pourtrayed, yet the effigies of 
 Jonah himself is the most remarkable part of the 
 picture, because Jonah is of the history there 
 painted : if therefore this story be to be deposited 
 in the first repository, let the border of his gown 
 be supposed of gold ; if in the second, of silver ; 
 if in the third, let the gown be fancitd black ; if 
 in the fourth, blew, Sec so the top of a heap of 
 wheat is the most conspicuous part ; therefore 
 if a heap of wheat be placed in the first reposi- 
 tory, imagine a golden streamer two foot long, 
 A a S 
 
270 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 fixed in the top of the heap ; if in the second 
 repository, let the streamer be silver ; if in the 
 third, black ; if in the fourth, blew, &c. 
 
 " Thus much may suffice for common affec- 
 tions of ideas, in quantity, position, and colour ; 
 their species follow. 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 " Of Direct Idea's. 
 
 " An idea is simple or compound : a simple 
 idea is uniform, and is fourfold, direct, relative, 
 fictitious, and written. 
 
 " A direct idea is when a visible thing, or con- 
 ceived under a visible form, is bestowed in the 
 repository, according to the same form, under 
 which it is naturally apprehended : so a goat is 
 the direct idea of a goat; a rhinocerot of a 
 rhinocerot ; a peacock, of a peacock ; a dove of 
 a dove. Thus a majestical man adorned with a 
 scepter, imperial diadem and robe, is the idea 
 of a king : a person arrayed in academical habit, 
 of a schollar; an ancient woman in mourning 
 weeds, weeping and wiping her face with an 
 handkerchief, of a widow : a virgin apparelled 
 like a nun, of a nun : a satyr, ns the poets de- 
 scribe them, of a satyr: so a temple is the direct 
 idea of a temple, a book of a booke, a bed of a 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 271 
 
 bed, a sheath of a sheath, an image of an image, 
 a picture of a picture, an epistle of an epistle, a 
 bond sealed, of a bond : so good angels and spi- 
 rits, though they be incorporeal and invisible, 
 (seeing they are commonly conceived under visi- 
 ble forms) may be reposited as the other. To 
 conclude, the minde of man doth naturally and 
 immediately present direct idea's of ail visible 
 things, or such as are conceived under a visible 
 form, that it is in vain to excogitate any, but ra- 
 ther use those that offer themselves. If a man 
 hears the relation of a naval battel, cloth not he 
 presently seem to behold the sea, ships, smoke 
 of great ordnance, and other things obvious in 
 such matters. If speech be made of mustering 
 an army, doth not the hearer form in his minde 
 the effigies of the field, replenished with soulders 
 marching in military postures. No precept in 
 this kind is delivered, which nature it self hath 
 not dictated ; but onely to imprint these idea's 
 more deeply in memory, we bestow them me- 
 thodically in some place, lest otherwise they be 
 forgotten through light apprehension. To ex- 
 plain this more evidently, I will use an ex- 
 ample. 
 
 " An Example of remembring a History. 
 
 " Diogenes the Cynick entering Pluto's hall, 
 when he saw the table covered with a rich car- 
 
272 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 pet, the shelves glittering with silver, gilt cupg, 
 vessels, and other sumptuous furniture, laid hold 
 of the carpet with all his might, threw it to the 
 ground, and trod thereon with his feet, saying, 
 I tread upon Plato's pride: to whom Plato re- 
 plied, But with greater pride. 
 
 " The idea of this story is not so great, but that 
 it may admit reposition in its equal quantity : 
 therefore I suppose in the place of the repository 
 where it is to be bestowed, that there is a table 
 covered with a rich carpet, which a sordid fellow 
 in beggarly raiment, throws on the ground, a grave 
 man clothed in honest sober apparel looking on. 
 The attribution of the colour of the repository is 
 not to be forgotten : if therefore it be the first 
 repository in which this idea is to be placed, I 
 imagine the carpet to be imbellished with a fringe 
 or border of gold : if in the second, of silver : if 
 in the third, of black : if in the fourth, of blew, 
 and so forth in the rest. 
 
 " An example of a Sentence to be remembred, 
 the subject being visible. 
 
 " An ant is a small insect, the coldest and dryest 
 of all creatures, and therefore the wisest ; for 
 cold and dry do chiefly contribute to wisdom. 
 The idea of this sentence ought to be augment- 
 ed ; for the magnitude of an ant is so inconsi- 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 273 
 
 derable, that being bestowed in a memorial 
 place, it escapeth sight : therefore [ suppose an 
 ant-heap in the middle stage of the memorial- 
 place, seeming almost black with ants, swarm- 
 ing hither and thither ; as for assignation of co- 
 lour if this idea be placed in the third Repository , 
 the colour of the Repository, is sufficiently noted 
 by the blackness of the ants ; if in the seventh, 
 by the greenness of the ant-hill ; so that there 
 needeth no addition of colour, if placed in the 
 third or seventh Repository : But if it be designed 
 to the first Repository, let a triangular golden 
 streamer be supposed fixed in the ant-hill, a foot 
 high ; if in the second, a silver streamer ; if in 
 the fourth, a streamer of blew silk ; if in the 
 fifth, of red ; if in the sixt, of yellow ; if in the 
 eighth, of purple ; if in the ninth, of white ; if 
 in the tenth, of cinnamon colour. 
 
 " All Histories, Actions, Fables, common 
 Affairs ; all visible things, or conceived under a 
 visible form ; finally, All sentences whose subject 
 is visible, may be disposed in Repositories by Di- 
 rect Ideas, in equal, augmented or contracted 
 quantity." 
 
 Chap. viii. and ix treat of relative and ficti- 
 tious ideas. Chap. x. of written Ideas, and chap, 
 xi. of compound Ideas. 
 
 In chap. xii. Mr. Willis gives the following 
 rules for the ' choice of ideas.' 
 
274 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 " Rule 1. All Histories, Actions, Fables, 
 Apologies, common businesses, visible things, or 
 conceived under a visible form, all sentences 
 whose subject or matter is visible, and without 
 any dependent written illustration, ought to be 
 laid up in the Repositories by a Direct Idea, in 
 quantity equal, augmented or contracted. Cap. 1. 
 
 " Rule 2. All Histories, Actions, Fables, 
 Apologies, Morals and Similyes, remarkable for 
 some coherent Verses or Writings, as all Epi- 
 grams, Epitaphs, Anagrams and Impresses are 
 generally to be expressed by a compound Idea, 
 consisting of a Direct and Scriptile. Cap. 2. 
 
 " Rule 3. All Emblems and Sentences illus- 
 trated by some notable Example, or expressed 
 Hyeroglyphically, are to be bestowed in Repo- 
 sitories by a compound Idea, consisting of a 
 Relative and Scriptile, Cap. 2. 
 
 ". Rule 4. All Characters, single Letters, 
 naked Numbers, Calculations of Nativities, Cos- 
 niographical descriptions and citations, are to be 
 always disposed in Repositories by a Scriptile 
 Idea. 
 
 " Rule 5. All single words signifying no vi- 
 sible thing, whose Idea either relative, fictitious, 
 or compound of fictitious and scriptile, doth pre- 
 sently occur, is to be so placed in the Repository, 
 either relatively, fictitiously, or compoundly : If 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 276 
 
 no such Idea occur, then it is to be represented 
 by a Scriptile Idea. 
 
 " Rule 6. All Phrases aud Sentences inex- 
 pressible by a Direct Idea, may be conserved by 
 a Relative Idea, or compounded of a Relative 
 and Scriptile, if any present itself commodious- 
 ly, or if no such offer itself quickly, by a Scrip- 
 tile Idea." 
 
 In chap. xiii. the following rules are given for 
 ' reposing Ideas.' 
 
 " Rule 1 . Every Idea is to be placed in its 
 order, viz. that which first occurreth in the first 
 place ; the second in the second place of the first 
 Repository ; ihe third in the first, the fourth in 
 the second place of the second Repository ; fift 
 in the first, the sixt in the second place of the 
 third Repository ; the like method is to be used 
 in all the Repositories, till all the Idea's be 
 placed. 
 
 " Rule 2. Due quantity, convenient site, co- 
 lour of the Repository, and peculiar attributes, 
 are to be imposed on each Idea, and veiy care- 
 fully minded. 
 
 " Rule 3. After you have rightly disposed the 
 first Idea of any Repository, note it very diligent- 
 ly vvith the eye of your mind, as if it really stood 
 there, observing its kind, subject, quantity, site, 
 attribution of the Repositories colour, and other 
 
276 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OP 
 
 such like peculiar attributes, if it have any. For 
 example, whether the Idea deposited in the first 
 place of any Repository (as to the kind) be di- 
 rect ; as to the subject, concerning a man ; in 
 respect of quantity, equal; in regard of sight, 
 placed on the ground ; and as to peculiar attri- 
 butes, whether moving or yielding a sound ; go 
 over all these things in your mind, saying, The 
 Idea which I have here bestowed, is Direct, of a 
 man, equal, placed on the ground, moving and 
 yeilding a sound : For by such considerations an 
 Idea is more firmly graven in memory. 
 
 " Rule 4. After you have fitly disposed the 
 second Idea of any Repository, you must exco- 
 gitate some apt relation thereof t© the former, in 
 respect of likeness or unlikeness of site, likeness 
 or unlikeness of subject ; or else in regard of the 
 action of the hitter idea referred to the former ; 
 you can pitch upon no Idea which may not be 
 related to the former by one of these five wayes, 
 which shall plainly appear by example: if both 
 Idea's of one Repository, precedent and subse- 
 quent, be fixed to the wall, placed on a table, 
 the ground, or under ground, fyc. they agree in 
 site : 13ut if one be fastened to the Wall, the* 
 other placed on a Table, on the ground or under 
 ground, they are unlike in site: When the sub- 
 ject of both Idea's is Justice, Sin, a Man, War, 
 or Sleep, #c. they agree in subject ; but when 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 277 
 
 the subject of one Idea is Justice, of the other 
 Drunkenness, the one of a man, the other of a 
 stone, or any other opposite thing, they disagree 
 in subject. Take an example of transferring the 
 action of a latter Idea to a former : Suppose that 
 a man in a Gown, sitting at a Table, and over- 
 looking some Books of Accounts, with Counters 
 lying ready to compute the total sum, be an Idea 
 disposed in the first place of a Repository ; and 
 the Idea to be placed in the second room of the 
 Repository, be a Farryer giving a Horse a Drench 
 with a Horn : In this case, that the action of the 
 latter may have some dependance on the former, 
 imagine that the Horse (as soon as the drench is 
 poured into his mouth) leaps back and disturbeth 
 the man in his reckoning, who sits at the Table 
 in the first place of the Repository. This mutual 
 Relation of Idea's placed in the same Repository, 
 is as it were a linking of them together, and doth 
 admirably conduce to the remembrance of buth. 
 " Rule 5. If two or more distinct idea's con- 
 cur, whose relation to one another is found so 
 near, a3 if they were combined together; bestow 
 them in one same Memorial Place : As if the 
 Idea immediately preceding be a Silver Basou 
 full of fragrant Water, set upon a joyned Stool, 
 and the subsequent Idea be an idle man doing 
 nothing ; you may conjoin these two Idea's in 
 one, imagining that this man washeth his hands 
 
 B B 
 
278 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 in that odiferous water ; so if the former Idea 
 be two Virgins talking together, the latter a Skein 
 of Green Silk, to join these two Ideas by a pro- 
 per connexion, you may fancy that one of the 
 Virgins holdeth the Skein upon her wrists, whilest 
 the other windeth it off her hands into a bottom. 
 In like manner if the Antecedent Idea be Scrip- 
 tile, and the Consequent likewise Scriptile, if so 
 be you allow sp;tce enough in the Table, the lat- 
 ter may be subscribed under the former in a 
 convenient distance from one another. Thus 
 three Scriptile Ideas concurring together, if they 
 be not too large for one Table, may be supposed 
 written therein ; the first in the highest place, the 
 second in the middle, the third in the lowest, al- 
 lowing nevertheless a fit distance. But alwayes 
 when you comprize two or three Ideas in one 
 place, you must remember carefully, that so 
 many Ideas were constituted in such a place. 
 
 " Rule 6. When you have laid up any Idea in 
 its Place (whether it be in the first or second 
 Room of the Repository) peruse all the foregoing 
 Idea's in their order, if you have time, that they 
 may reside more deeply in Memory, and make 
 the stronger impression in minde. For as a 
 School- boy by often reading over his lesson, 
 leameth it by heart, so the more frequently you 
 peruse Idea's, the more firmly you will retain 
 them. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 279 
 
 " Rule 7. Lastly, have a care not to load 
 your Memory with a more numerous multitude 
 of Idea's than is fit, for as it is unwholesome to 
 burthen the stomach above its strength, so also to 
 overwhelm the Memory with multiplicity of 
 Idea's, doth lead into great confusion. Tem- 
 perate men admit only so much meat as they 
 think they can well concoct ; so do you only 
 commit such things to Memory, as you trust 
 faithfully to remember ; for it is better firmly to 
 retain a few remarkable things, than many of 
 mean base nature. 
 
 In chap. xiv. which treats " of the practice of 
 the Art of Memory," we have the following 
 
 u Examples of ordinary business. 
 
 " I. Suppose (as taking it for granted) you 
 were to go to some great Market Town, it con- 
 cerns not our purpose whether the place be known, 
 or unknown, and intend in the first place to en- 
 quire the price of Seed Bar lie : imagine then in 
 the first Place of the first Repositorie (that is the 
 part on the right hand) you see a man measuring 
 Barlie out of a Sack into a Bushel, with a com- 
 pany of men standing about him, as is the usual 
 manner in Markets, not forgetting to fancy the 
 Bushell handles to be Gold, that so the Idea in 
 some part may be related to the Repository in 
 colour, as is required in the sixth Chapter : 
 
. *80 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 "II. Moreover, That in the same Town hv- 
 efn a Labourer whom you know, and must en- 
 quire out to work in your Hay-harvest ; fancy 
 him to stand in the second place (on the left hand) 
 of the first Repository, sharpening his Golden 
 Scythe on a whetstone, as it were preparing for 
 such Rustical imployment : I say Golden Scythe, 
 that it may participate of the colour of the Repo- 
 sitory ; this Idea agreeth with the former in sight 
 and subject, for both Idea's of this Repository 
 are of men, and placed on the ground. 
 
 "III. A while after you call to minde some 
 Aromatical Spices you are to buy : To remem- 
 ber which, fancy the second place of the second 
 Repositorie converted into a Grocers Shop, the 
 opposite wall garnished with Nests of Boxes full 
 of several Spices, with Titles writ upon the 
 Boxes, after the usual mode ; two foot on this 
 side the wall, let there stand a Counter, the Wares 
 exposed thereon you are to buy : as if the first 
 thing you nominate to buy be Pepper, let a Sil- 
 ver box full of Pepper stand upon the further 
 end of the Counter ; if the second thing design- 
 ed be Nutmegs, place a loose bagge of Silver 
 gilt Nutmegs in the middle of the Counter ; if 
 the third be Sugar, set a Sugar loafe on the hi- 
 ther end of the Counter, with a Silver string 
 tyed about the top, that it may in some part bear 
 the colour of the Repositorie. In this case you 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. '281 
 
 must remember that three Idea's were bestowed 
 in one Place T whose coherence with the Idea in 
 the other Repository, is taken from their unlike- 
 nesse of site ; for that Idea was heaped on the 
 ground, these three are placed upon a Counter. 
 
 " IV. Your next incident business is to re- 
 member to speak with a Counsellour of the same 
 town (a man of a very great repute and credit for 
 knowledge in the Law) about a friends sute de- 
 pending in Chancer)/ : Imagine that Counsellour 
 in a Lawyers Gown, sitting in a Chair, overlook- 
 ing some writings, in the first Place of the third 
 Repository : seeing his Gown is black, you need 
 no other attribution of colour of the Repositori/. 
 
 " V. If another new occasion present it self 
 to minde, as that you are to buy a piece of 
 Black Velvet of a Mercer in that town ; the se- 
 cond Place of the third Repository must be 
 transformed into a Mercers shop, a piece of 
 Black Velvet neatly laid in folds of equal length, 
 lying on the Counter, which doth i.n like manner 
 as well denote the Repositories colour, as the 
 Gown of the Counsellor sitting in the former 
 Place; whence also is deduced a manifest ref- 
 lation to the precedent Idea, the Lawyers Gown 
 supposed to be lined with Velvet. 
 
 b bS 
 
282 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 CHAP. XV. 
 
 " Of Dictation and Reposition. 
 
 " Moreover, the practical part of this Art 
 is perspicuously seen in the Exercises of Dictat- 
 ing and Repetition. 
 
 " The use of Dictating is, when a person is 
 to dictate to several Scribes or Secretaries, what 
 every one must write, so as to direct and exercise 
 them all at once, which is frequently incumbent 
 upon Princes and Generals of Armies in peril- 
 lous times : In such cases there must be assigned 
 a peculiar Repository to every Scribe, wherein 
 the affairs and sentences by him to be dispatched, 
 must be reposited in order ; that is, the first Re- 
 pository to the first Scribe, the second Repository 
 to the second, the third to the third, the fourth 
 to the fourth, and so forth if there be more : All 
 Idea's of things to be dispatched by the first 
 Secretary, must have some attribution of Gold 
 appertaining to them ; all Idea's of the second 
 Repository, something of silver ; of the third, 
 something of black, of the fourth, blew, SfC. In 
 this case also it is permitted to place two, three, 
 or more Idea's if it be necessary, in one place of 
 a Repository : All businesses and sentences being 
 thus reposited in order, St faithfully digested be- 
 fore in mind, it is no difficult matter by the first 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 283 
 
 Idea of the first Repository, to dictate to the first 
 Scribe what he must write first ; by the first Idea 
 of the second Repository, to teil the second 
 Scribe what he shall write ; by the first Idea of 
 the third Repository, to inform the third ; and in 
 like maimer all the rest in their order. Again, 
 by the second Idea of each Repository, the se- 
 cond sentence is facilely delivered to each Scribe : 
 By the third, every Scribes third business ; by 
 the fourth Idea their fourth, and so forward in 
 the residue. This is the Exercise, which by 
 some is called the Art of Dictating. 
 
 " Repetition is when a man repeateth sen- 
 tences spoken by several persons, so as to return 
 each persons sentence in order as it was deliver- 
 ed ; as if six, seven, or more friends sitting toge- 
 ther (to experience your happy memory) do every 
 one in order speak some sentence, to have them 
 repeated again, after the same or a retrogade 
 manner, which way they please ; dispose the 
 Idea's of your first friends sentences in the first 
 Repository ; of your second friend in the secon.l 
 Repository ; of your third friend in the third, and 
 so forward in the rest. All which being rightly 
 disposed, you may with little trouble restore to 
 every friend his saying, either in the same order 
 as they were spoken, or in a retrogade or invert- 
 ed order. 
 
 " I have not thought expedient to illustrate 
 
231 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 these with Examples, because I think them suffi- 
 ciently explained by what hath been already said; 
 as also, that this Exercise of Dictating and Re- 
 peating have little or no use, but vain ostentation ; 
 though I have inserted them here, it was not 
 done as necessary, but because the knowledge of 
 them did nor seem superfluous for such as are 
 learned of this Art. 
 
 CHAP. XVI. 
 
 " Of irregular Reposition. 
 
 "I have thought good to annex a few words 
 of irregular Reposition, which is onsly one Rule, 
 that is, a real Repository may be sometimes sub- 
 stituted instead of a feigned, which irregularity is 
 admitted upon a double occasion. 
 
 " First, A thing itself being at hand, may be 
 filly used instead of its proper Idea: As if a man 
 sitting in his Study, light on some Book whose 
 sheets are transplaced, which he intendeth when 
 he goes forth of his Study, to send to a Book- 
 binder to be amended : That Book is to be cast 
 at the threshold of the Study, that the sight there- 
 of may admonish him departing, to get it bound : 
 So also if Ink be wanting, an Ink-Glass or Bottle 
 may be set by the Book. 
 
 " Secondly, When a man must exonerate one 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 285 
 
 •r more Idea's, as soon as he hath reposited 
 them ; as when something offers it self to a mans 
 mind, talking to a powerful or rich man, which 
 he judgeth convenient to be communicated to 
 him with the first opportunity, let him speedily 
 reposite the Idea of that thing in the same house, 
 field, plain, or wheresoever he then is, in some 
 certain place conversant before his eyes, that he 
 may be always put in mind to propound the 
 same when occasion serves : As if he think to do 
 «ome friendly office for a person absent, by pre- 
 ferring some business of his to the rich man ; let 
 him imagine that Friend always obvious in some 
 determinate place in sight, not suffering the ob- 
 ject to slip out of view, till he have curteously 
 performed his officious enterprise. Or if there 
 intervene some thought of buying fewel, whereof 
 the rich man hath great plenty, let him suppose 
 a great quantity of Wood piled up in some place 
 not distant out of sight : This is all I have to say 
 of irregular Reposition. 
 
 CHAP. XVI r. 
 
 " Of depositing Ideas. 
 
 " Having spoken copiously of repositing 
 Idea's, now I will conclude with Depositing them. 
 
286 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 " Deposition of Idea's is, when things charged 
 upon Memory by Idea's, are recalled, and the 
 mind exonerated of them, the Memorial Places 
 after such Deposition, being left empty, and 
 prepared to receive new Idea's. Now in this 
 case, if it happen at any time that an Idea negli- 
 gently repositi d, is lost or forgotten, when it 
 should he deposited, the recovery thereof must 
 be endeavoured by these ensuing considerations. 
 
 "First, This is always assuredly known, every 
 lost idea did bear the colour of his Repository, 
 either in whole or part; therefore the first thing 
 to be inquired is, in whit respect the colour of 
 the Repository did agree with the Idea sought; 
 by this sole consideration, forgotten Idea's are oft 
 discovered. 
 
 " The Idea being not discovered thus, make 
 diligent indagation for its relation to the Idea 
 placed in the same Repository, in regard of site, 
 subject or action, Cap. 14. Rule 4. One Idea 
 of a Repository being known, doth easily call the 
 other to mind, by mutual dependance whereby 
 they were connexed together, unless there did 
 precede very negligent Reposition. 
 
 "If still you are disappointed, happily you 
 may find it out by repetition of such things as are 
 especially remarkable in laying up Idea's, of 
 which 1 have spoken in the 13. Chapter. That 
 is by enquiring whether the latent Idea's was 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 
 
 287 
 
 In respect of kind, 
 
 In respect of subject, 
 
 Direct, 
 
 Rrlative, 
 
 Fictitious, 
 
 Script He, 
 Compound, 
 
 .Double, treble, fyc. 
 
 Of God, 
 
 Of Christ, 
 
 Of the Holy Ghost, 
 
 Of Angels, 
 
 Of Mm, 
 
 Of Animals. 
 
 r Equal, 
 In respect of quantity, < Augmented, 
 L Contracted. 
 
 f Under ground, 
 \ Upon ground, 
 In respect of site, -< Upon a Table, 
 I Upon a Shelf, 
 \_Against a ivall. 
 
 / Moving, 
 In respect of altribu- J Quiet, 
 
 tion, ^ Giving a sound. 
 
 v Yielding; a smel. 
 
 " An Idea is oft recovered by discussing these 
 few questions in a mans thoughts. 
 
 " If it be certain the forgot idea was Scriptile, 
 but the inscription is in oblivion, the first inquiry 
 must be, whether it were a single word, pi oof, 
 phrase, or sentence of one or more clauses ; a 
 single word, proof, or principal word of a sen- 
 
2S8 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 tence, may be regained by applying each Letter 
 of the Alphabet in the same manner as is pre- 
 scribed in the second Rule of Poetical Revoca- 
 tion, in the second Book, Cap. 3. till you have 
 obtained the first Letter ; the other Letters may- 
 be found by transcendencies and gilded Vowels ; 
 the chief Word being obtained, the rest come 
 easily to mind. 
 
 " If you cannot yet discover the Idea, have re- 
 course to the third and fourth Rules of Poetical 
 Revocation, 2. Book. 3 Chap, an Idea being 
 revocable in the same manner. 
 
 '* Finally, if it continue irreparable by all 
 these ways, let it pass, and be no longer sollici- 
 tous in search thereof : For as a Book carelesly 
 laid up in a Study, is not many times to be found 
 when it is sought, though you remove several 
 Volumes; yet afterward comes to hand beyond 
 expectation, when another Book is reached that 
 stands by it : So it doth oft happen in this busi- 
 ness, though an Idea negligently reposited, can- 
 not be found when it is sought, yet at another 
 time when a Notion reposited in the cell of Me- 
 mory near it, is excited, that also of its own ac- 
 cord discovereth it self. 
 
 " If a man do prudently follow these Rules of 
 recovering latent Ideas, as with Ariadnes thred, 
 he will doubtless wind himself out of the Laby- 
 rinth of blind Oblivion, and with admirable 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 289 
 
 facility recall to mind forgotten sentences, and 
 vanished Idea's." 
 
 A Treatise ' of cherishing Natural Memory' 
 concludes the volume ; in which are considered, 
 w I. Of such [things] as debilitate Memory, 
 2. Of things corroborating Memory. 3. Of a 
 prescript order of life. 4. Of restoring a debi- 
 litated Memory. 5. How to discern the tem- 
 perament of the Brain. 6. Of Dyet properly 
 convenient to every temperament. 7. Of 
 Diseases of the Brain." 
 
 Among those things which debilitate memory, 
 are enumerated bad air, particular drinks and 
 decoctions, bad water, particular sorts of food, 
 repletion, too much sleep, etc. etc. In the list of 
 corroboratives are, wholesome air, sweet scents, 
 and particular meats, among which are, the 
 b rains of sparrows, hares, conies, etc.; — herbs, 
 bathing the feet in warm decoctions of camomile, 
 etc. and ' exercise in delightful places not sub- 
 ject to wind.' The chapter concludes with this 
 important admonition : u Finally, your apparel 
 close fitted, walk leisurely abroad, ifthewinde 
 breathe a gentle gale, otherwise within doors." 
 
 In treating of the ** prescript order of life," 
 Mr. Willis, after very properly recommending 
 frequent prayer for Divine assistance, in all our 
 undertakings, which he enforces by a reference to 
 
 the Epistle of James, chap. v. ver. 1(5, 17, di- 
 c c 
 
290 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 rects the reader to " comb his head every day, 
 backward, fasting" " to abstain from all evacua- 
 tion by virtue of Physick except upon necessity" 
 " to eat twelve liaisons of the Sunne stoned, 
 every morning without drink, instead of break- 
 fast" " to let his supper be larger than his din- 
 ner"* " to observe accustomed hours of eating" 
 u to refrain from labour after meats" " to shut 
 all the windows at bed-time," " not to sleep under 
 the moon-beams," and " not to lie out all night 
 in the open air." The remaining rules are some- 
 what more rational : they recommend the morn- 
 ing as the best time for study, — the reading of 
 m ^_^ — _ ^ _ - _ fc _ — _ _^ * 
 
 * Mr. Willis seems to have entirely forgotten the antient 
 distich. 
 
 Ex magna ccena stomachofit maxima poena ; 
 Ut sis node levis, si tibi ccena brevis. 
 
 {p A correspondent in the Gentleman's Magazine for 
 the year 1787, in answer to Immemor, who had been com- 
 plaining of the weakness of his memory, advises him to 
 follow this rule ; " Instead of eating suppers, learn by 
 heart some passages of poetry which please you, the last 
 thing before you go to bed, and repeat them the first thing 
 in the morning, at six in the spring and autumn, five in 
 summer, and seven in winter. Study Watts' Logick, 
 and his Improvement of the Mind, Locke, and Euclid. 
 Let me know the effects of this regimen, accompanied with 
 plain food aud constant exercise, and I will then prescribe 
 farther if it should be necessary." Gent. Mag. vol. lvii. 
 part i. p. 22. 
 
ARTIFrCIAL MEMORY. fQl 
 
 select authors, — a devotedness to the studies which 
 we are pursuing, — -a choice of tit companions, — 
 and occasional relaxation. 
 
 The symptoms of cold and hot brains are 
 explained at large for the benefit of all those who 
 are disposed to read such " phantasies." Under 
 the article of " Dyet" we have the following 
 lingular passage. " Strong sweet wine, as 
 Muskadine, Ipocras, drunk temperately, is most 
 restorative for old folks, and cold and sickly per- 
 sons, more efficaciously gold (made red hot in 
 the fire) quenched therein, doth marvellously 
 restore and exhilerate the heart. Concerning 
 this matter, Roger Bacon, a famous philosopher 
 in his Treatise of old age, hath this story ; An 
 ancient husbandman (saith he) weary ed zvith 
 plowing, and thirsty with his hot labour, drank 
 water of a Cytron colour, and after he had 
 greedily swallowed the same, was changed both 
 in compaction and strength tike one of thirty 
 years of age, possessing more excellent discre- 
 tion, memory and understanding, than ever he 
 enjoyed before, from which time he lived eighty 
 years in the King's Court. Bacon, who recit- 
 eth this, thought, that water or liquor received 
 its yellow Tincture from Gold, as he there tes- 
 tified." 
 
 After a long and fruitless search, the only par- 
 ticulars which we have been enabled to glean, 
 
•2i)2, PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS Of 
 
 respecting John Willis are, — that he was 
 author of the l Art of Stenography/ an edition 
 of which was published in 1628, and that he was 
 a Fellow of Magdalen College, Oxford. Of 
 this latter circumstance, a communication in ail 
 early volume of the Gentleman's Magazine, is 
 the only evidence. The writer of this article 
 mentions a system of short-hand, said to be in- 
 vented by a Fellow of Magdalen College ; and 
 this system is the identical one published by 
 Willis. 
 
 44. Ars Memories localis, plenius et lu- 
 culentius expositce, quam ante hac 
 nunquam, una cum applicatione ejus- 
 dem ad singulas disciplinas etfacul- 
 tates, 8°. Lips. 1620. 
 
 This book (says Morhof, in his Polyhistor) is 
 to be preferred to all the treatises on Mnemo- 
 nics, for perspicuity and arrangement. Th« 
 anonymous author, as appears by the preface, 
 was a Professor of Mnemonics in the University 
 of Leipsic. f 
 
 45. D. Joannis Velasquez de Azevedo 
 Fenix de Minerva y Arte de Memo- 
 ria que ensenna sin maestro a prender 
 yretenir, 4°. Madrid, 1620. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 29S 
 
 46. Art is Lulliantf, seu Memorice Ar- 
 tificiaUs Secrelum explicitum, Ora- 
 toribus et Prccdicatoribm utilissi- 
 mum per R. P. F. Hugonem Car- 
 bonellum: 8°. Paris, 1620. 
 
 For an account of ' Lully's Art' see No. 51, 
 
 47. Letter a a Andrea Valieri ove si 
 tratta delta Memoria locale e del 
 
 - modo facile per acquistarla. MS. 
 
 This manuscript is No. Q.25Q in the Shane 
 Collection preserved in the British Museum. It 
 treats of the arrangement of different places on 
 the walls of the rooms in a house or monastery, to 
 the number of 173 ; and gives directions respect- 
 ing the formation and combination of images. It 
 is in folio, and is dated October 30, 1623. 
 
 48. Magazin des Sciences, on vray VArt 
 de 3Iemoire, par Adrian le Cuirot, 
 12°. Paris, 1623. 
 
 In this extremely rare volume, which abounds 
 with curious plates, the system of Lambert 
 Schenckel is given in detail ; but, with many im- 
 portant additions and improvements, 
 c c 3 
 
£94 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 49. Tractatas de Memoria Joh. Conra- 
 di Dannhaweri D. fy Pr. of Publ. 
 8°. Argent. 1635. 
 
 Of this work we have not been able to procure 
 a copy ; the reader, therefore, must be contented 
 with a memoir of the author, John Conrade 
 Dannhawer, a Lutheran divine, was born at 
 Brisgau in 1 603 : and he was raised to the chair 
 of eloquence at Strasburgh, in 1629. He died 
 in this city, aged 57. Before his death he was 
 made preacher at the cathedral church, and Dean 
 of the Chapter ; he was very zealous for the sen- 
 timents he embraced, and entered into a severe 
 controversy with those who contended for the 
 union of the Lutherans and Calvinists. He has 
 left behind him many theological works of con- 
 siderable reputation.* 
 
 50. Meyssonerus in Pentagono Philoso- 
 phico-Medico, sive Arte novae Re- 
 minsicentice, 4°. JLagd. 1639. 
 
 51. Ars Memorativa invent iva et appli- 
 
 cative!, Raimwndi Lullii, 12°. Ca- 
 dom. 1640. 
 
 The system of Artificial Memory of that lu- 
 * Diet. Hist, art, Dannhawer, 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 2Q5 
 
 minary of science, Ravmund Lully, was formed 
 at a very early period ; and he was, perhaps, the 
 first modern who practised this art ; but as the 
 books on this subject have been noticed accord- 
 ing to their dates, and we have not seen an earlier 
 edition of Lully, he is placed among the writers 
 of the seventeenth century. 
 
 " By this system, any one was enabled 
 mechanically to invent arguments and illustra- 
 tions upon any subject, and thus to reach the 
 summit of science, at a small expence of 
 time and labour. This Great Art professes 
 to furnish a general instrument for assisting 
 invention in the study of every kind of science. 
 For this purpose, certain general terms, which 
 are common to all the sciences, but prin- 
 cipally those of logic, metaphysics, ethics and 
 theology, are collected and arranged, not how- 
 ever according to any natural division, but merely 
 according to the caprice of the inventor. An 
 alphabetical table of such terms was provided ; 
 and subjects and predicates taken from these, 
 were respectively inscribed in angular spaces, 
 upon circular papers. The essences, qualities, 
 and relations of things being thus mechanically 
 brought together, the circular papers of subjects 
 were fixed in a frame, and those of predicates 
 were so placed upon them as to move freely, and 
 in their revolutions, to produce various combina- 
 
296 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 tions of subjects and predicates; whence would 
 arise definitions, axioms, and propositions, vary- 
 ing infinitely, according to the different applica- 
 tion of general terms to particular subjects."* 
 This is the general idea of Lully's mechanical 
 logic, which would enable a person to hold a 
 disputation for a whole day upon any subject 
 zchatever, without knowing any thing of the 
 matter. 
 
 Morhqf'm his dissertation de Arte Lulliana,f 
 has preserved an elaborate account of the system, 
 and has given a tremendous list f ordine longo' 
 of commentators on the art. The two principal 
 exposhors are Athanasius Kircher, in his Ars 
 Magna Sciendi, [see No. 56] and Jean Belot, 
 in his JJOeuvre des Oeuvres, [see No. 54.] 
 
 Raymond Lully was born at Majorca, 
 in the year 1236, and on account of his great 
 abilities, obtained the name of the Illuminated 
 Doctor. After excelling as a divine, he applied 
 himself to physic and chemistry, that he might 
 be enabled to cure the cancer of a young woman 
 of whom he was enamoured. He was stoned to 
 death in Mauritania, where he went as a mis- 
 sionary in the year 1315, at the age of 80. His 
 
 * See Enfield's History of Philosophy, vol. II. pp. 
 399—401. 
 
 t Polyhistor, Tom, L Lib. II. cap. 5. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 297 
 
 works which are in general very obscure, are 
 written in a style worthy of the barbarous age in 
 which he lived. They were cellected and pub- 
 lished at Mentz, and treated of theology, history, 
 medicine, law, and philosophy. 
 
 •52. Ars Mnemonica, sive Herdsonus 
 JBruxiatus; vel JBruxus Herdsoni- 
 atus, 8°. Lond. 1651. 
 
 53. Ars Memories: The Art of Memo- 
 ry made plaine by Henry Herdson, 
 late Professor by Publick Autho- 
 rity, in the University of Cam- 
 bridge, 8°. Lond. 1651. 
 
 No. 52 and No. 53 are printed and bound to- 
 gether, consisting in the whole of ninety-two 
 pages. The first is in Latin, and is a republica- 
 tion of a part of Adam Brux's Simonides Redi- 
 vivus, before noticed. [See No. 37] A Latin 
 dedication to * his dearest mother, the University 
 of Cambridge' follows the title, after which we 
 have this singular address to the reader. 
 
 " Covrteovs Reader, If any thing in this 
 BOOK seemeth obscure unto thee, and thou de- 
 sirest Instruction in the same, and clearly to 
 game the full benefit of the Art, thou mayest 
 
SQ8 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 repaire unto me at the. Green Dragon, over 
 against :iaint Antholins Church in London, 
 where I shall bee ready to give thee sxifficient 
 Testimonially and Satisfaction of the Art, that 
 the pi ay nest and meanest Capacity may appre- 
 hend it. And so I rest thy Wel-wisher in 
 Christ Iesus, 
 
 Octob. 21, TT TT 
 
 1631i ' Henry Herdson. 
 
 No. 53, the second article, being in English, in 
 a small compass, and very scarce, we shall reprint 
 the whole of it, verbatim. 
 
 u To my dearest Mother, the Vniversity of 
 " Cambridge, all the good of this life, 
 " and eternall Life. 
 
 " My dearest Mother, let the lovingest, 
 though least deserving of your true sonnes, pre- 
 sent you with one sparkle of living fire, raked 
 up in your ashes, O your own ashes ! The Pha:- 
 nix of Christendome, that never shall be put to 
 death : The Angels of Heaven may sooner be 
 extinct, than this Phoenix : Be not discomfort- 
 ed that the Sunne is beclouded, the Clouds are 
 but for a time. Bee not for ge\ full, norfaith- 
 lesse; but rather accept this my little Booke, the 
 Prospective Glasse, I send you to view the Art 
 of Memory by. If you look on it at the wrong 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. SQ9 
 
 end, unto the ignorant it will appear in a smal- 
 ler volume, then in its poore Octavo : But if you 
 looke on it at the right end with the right eye, it 
 will grow bigger than your Expectation. He 
 that hath but one eye I know will almost love 
 it : Hee that hath but halfe an eye cannot des- 
 pise it : But hee who by wilfulnesse fy malice, 
 ytill put both his eyes out, may stare in his con- 
 ceits; and the next messe of his own crooked 
 Broalh, his ho/low throat sinkes downe: he can 
 as well crum his porrage with his eyes, as con- 
 demne my Art of Memory: And let it bee 
 enough to choak him, that Lumen ex ipso bono 
 est, &. bonitatis Imago. But you who are inge- 
 nuous Academicks : The God of Heaven and 
 Earth send you eyes, Ears, and all your Senses, 
 with all sutable objects, that piously may delight 
 you in them all. 
 
 So prayeth your true Lover & Servant, 
 
 Henry Herdson. 
 
 " CLAVICVLA, SIFE 
 
 Explicaiio Libri : 
 
 The Key or explication of the Booke. 
 
 (C C. Chambers.) 
 
 (H. H. Houses.) 
 
 (D. Door. (W. Wall:) (S. Sided.) 
 
 (R. Repository.) 
 
300 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 (Angule, Corner.) 
 
 (Center, the Middle of the Qvadrangule.) 
 
 (Quadrangule, 4 Corners. 
 
 (Coelum versus, above, towards Heaven.) 
 
 (Juxta terram, below the ground, or earth, 
 
 (Paries, Wall or Side.) 
 
 (P. P. Places. 
 
 « THE ART OF MEMORY. 
 LECTIO PRIMA. 
 
 Partis Theoricct. 
 
 " Hee that desireth this art or any other, must 
 bring along with him two things. 
 
 " 1. Love of the Art. 
 
 " 2. Desire of the Art, without which no man 
 can learn or profit in any Art or Science. 
 
 " And he must also resolve of a third thing, 
 not to undervalue any Art or Science by the ex- 
 iliiy and meanness of the grounds of the Art. For 
 Divinity, Law, Physick, and the seven Liberall 
 Arts, and all other Sciences are preserved in six 
 and twenty Letters, and so transmitted to Poste* 
 rity, from one Generation to another. Now how 
 plain aud mean the six and twenty Letters of the 
 Alphabet be, every one knoweth ; so let us also 
 consider, that most rich stones, and precious 
 Gems are digged out of the earth, and the most 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 301 
 
 stately trees doe grow out of the earth : but if art 
 be not added, wee make no use of these. By 
 Art the stones are separated from the chalk, and 
 fitted by the Artificer for the most sumptuous 
 buildings : the Diamond, Saphire, Rubie, by the 
 hand and skill of the Artificer are inthroned in 
 the purest Gold; also the most harmonious and 
 Ear-pleasing Musick that quickneth up, and en- 
 liveneth the drowsie vitals, consisteth but in three 
 Keyes, and six Notes. We might instance the 
 like exility in the Fundaments and grounds of the 
 other Sciences and rarest Arts : Therefore if it 
 be thus in these, he must needs be malicious and 
 unworthy, that will contemne this Art of Me- 
 mory for the meanness of the Fundaments there- 
 of, which be 
 
 " 1. Repositories. 2. Ideas. 3. Method. 
 
 " 4. The Vse or Exercise of them. 
 
 " 1. The repositories be C. C. in H. H. 
 which be of two sorts: either, 
 
 " 1, Natural!, which we know: or, 
 
 " 2. Artificial, which we imagine and make 
 in our Fancie. And in both of them the Me- 
 thod is according to this Figure. 
 
 n » 
 
301 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 1 2 
 
 1 
 ) 
 
 10 
 
 8 
 
 (; 
 
 " Enter in at D under the Center of the North 
 W. or S, Then move as the Sun moveth, be- 
 ginning on the left hand, which is the East side 
 of this C. and imagine this U or C (call it which 
 you will) in every of the 4 \V VV ; or S S. to he 
 every way 10. yards square from Angule (o An- 
 gule, then make the R. as follow ells, viz. the first 
 W which is East C and ten yards four square 
 from angule to angule) hang'd or clothed with 
 cloth of gold, dividing it into its parts, according 
 to the Method of its figure ; in the first 10. yards 
 square, Paries, which is l-'2-i 4 .5. 2 W also 
 10. yards 4 square, which is South, and adorued 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 303 
 
 with the purest white Linnen or Taffaty, and di- 
 vided i to its live parts also, viz. 6", 7, 8. 9. 10. 
 The third S. or \V. whuli is West, of die same 
 Latitude also, and clothed with i it h Tapestry, 
 and divide into its live parte, which he II, 12, 
 13, 14, 15. The fourth P.tries which is North 
 10 yards, four square, also handed w ith an hang- 
 ing, beset full of Diamonds, Rubies, Sajihires, 
 and all manner of pn cious Gems, and divided 
 also into its five parts, viz. 1 6, 17, 18, 19, 20. 
 
 LECTIO II. 
 
 Partis Theorioa. 
 
 u Wh E n you are perfect in this, place in every 
 Angule of every of these Paries, and in their se- 
 veral Centers so many large 4 square Tables, 
 viz. In the first Paries of this Repository (which 
 is East, and hanged with cloth of Gold) in the 
 first Angule, Juxta terrain, you have a large 
 foure square Table of Gold : In the North-East 
 Angule which is Cailum versus (and the second 
 place) you have a large foure square Table, Jet, 
 or Ebony (for alwayes let the Colour of the one 
 Table contrary the Colour of the other :) In the 
 fourth Angule, Juxta terrain, (which is also East 
 by South) you have a large foure square Table 
 
304 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 of the purest white Alabaster polished: In the 
 Center of this East Paries, you have a large 
 square Table also made of Saphire, Marble, 
 Cristals, Diamonds, or what you will : And thus 
 distinguish the other three Paries, or S. S. of this 
 R. in their severall Tables, three wayes. 
 
 " ] , By the matter they are made of, as Gold, 
 Wood, stone, &c. 
 
 " 2. By the colour without a Carpet, as red, 
 green, yellow, &c. 
 
 " 3. By Carpets and Coverings with their 
 colour, as black Velvet, Scarlet, &c. and so they 
 be distinguished, it mattereth not how they be dis- 
 tinguished, so long as they be all large and four 
 square Tables in every of their Angules and Cen- 
 ters. 
 
 LECTIO III. 
 
 Partis Theorica. 
 
 ** After you have this perfect, divide all 
 these Tables in their several Places (as they stand 
 in order) both in their Angules and Centers, into 
 five parts in the lid or top, &c. into five parts by 
 the four feet, and Center below; the top or lid 
 aloft is like to the Scheam of the first Paries, and 
 so are the four foot and Center below : Now the 
 be3t method, is to leave out use of four feet and 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 305 
 
 Center below, and to spare them onely f >r mat- 
 ter of the same nature, that may be added after- 
 ward, upon further study and serious delibera- 
 tion : As no man can say so much at <>ne lime 
 for his own or others satisfaction, but that lie may 
 say for his own content and others satisfaction, 
 more and better at another time; because every 
 sence of man is regulated according to the sence 
 of tasting. The paliat delighteth hereafter some 
 things both of dry and moist nourishment, above 
 some things it liketh for present : So always in 
 every thing what man can attain unto in all Arts, 
 Sciences, and Languages. It must Lc confessed 
 that in these, aluayes Nos lion sumus nos, what 
 we heretofore approved, upon serious consult, 
 we see (though that then did passe with us and 
 others) yet mow a better way is opened unto us. 
 Exempli gratia, he that is in a tolerable bon- 
 dage, and therewith contented, yet when ln> eves 
 are opened, will rather throw himself n the 
 amies of his own Mo her, than the unkindly nurs- 
 ings of a fawning step Mother. So then having 
 divided all these Tables into ten parts, jou have 
 in the whole Repository twenty Tables, and in 
 every Table ten places (though at first opportu- 
 nity you make use but of five in the leafe of the 
 Table, leaving the lower five parts for use as 
 abovesanl,) so all the divisions of the twenty Fa- 
 bles are one hundred places in the top, and as 
 © B 3 
 
306 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OP 
 
 many in the bottome, and then you must place a 
 Table in the Center of the flore of this Reposi- 
 tory, dividing that as you did the other in which 
 you have ten places more, but in the Center of 
 this Table, tis your cheif care to place the figure 
 of I . and look upon it when you first come into 
 this Repository. Now this figure of 1. is a 
 burning Taper, placed in the Center of the top of 
 this Table, and that you may the better remem- 
 ber it, imagine it as it burnetii casting a sweet 
 perfume all the room over; for the five Sences 
 of Hearing, Seeing, Smelling, Tasting, Touch- 
 ing, are the five excellent Rules for imprinting 
 things in the memory. 
 
 " LECTIO IV. 
 
 *' After you have thus done, in the fourth 
 place, put so many of your acquaintance (I doubt 
 I cannot say friends) in the severall Angules and 
 Centers of every of the tops, or lids, or leaves of 
 the Table (call them what you will) and be sure 
 you know what five friends are at the first Table, 
 what five at the second, what five friends or ac- 
 quaintance at the third, &c. in all four of the Pa- 
 ries twenty Tables, are in this Repository, and 
 five friends or acquaintance at every Table, for 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 30? 
 
 all the bottomes (viz.) four feet and Centeri 
 you leave empty and unused ; so you have 10j 
 friends or acquaintance in this Repository. 
 
 LECTIO V. 
 
 " Then that you may proceed to the practick 
 part of this Art of Memory without loss of time, 
 take the several 1 characters of the figures, and 
 place them in their order, in the right and left 
 hand of every of your friends, as they are placed 
 five by five, at every of the large four square Ta- 
 bles, in every of the Angules and Centers of the 
 abovesaid Paries of the Repository. 
 
 " The Ideas of these you have in this Table 
 of figures (adding according to your own fancy 
 more Ideas of every figure, as your fancy and in- 
 vention pk-ase.) 
 
 " As for the figure of 1. a Candle, a Fish, a 
 Staf, a Dart, &c For 1. a Swan, a Duck, a 
 Goose, a Serpent: For 3. a Triangle, a Trident, 
 or any thing with three legs: For 4. a Quadran- 
 gle, a die, any four square thing: For 5, a foot 
 of a man, an Hand, a Glove, a Sickle, a Peircer, 
 a Shoemakers Kmfe, &c. For 6. a Tobacco 
 pipe: For 7- a Carpenters Iron square, a Rai- 
 zer bent thus 7 : For S. a pair of Spectacles, * 
 
308 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS O* 
 
 Sea Crab, Twin Apples, 8cc. For 9- a burning 
 Glass, a riding Stick made of a Reed, twisted 
 at the upper end thus 9 long Peares, &,c. 10, 20, 
 30, &c. to a thousand, may be formed from these 
 figures, taking any round for the ciphers 000 as 
 an Orenge, a Ball, 8tc. for a Candle run through 
 an Orenge is ten, a Swan with an Orenge in her 
 mouth is twenty : But they may more profitably 
 be made by single Ideas, a.% a Crosse of Gold, 
 Silver, Wood, Sec. for ten: for twenty a Jug, 
 Dagger, or any thing you will fancy ; for thirty 
 a Belclapper,- or what you will fancy, so for ail 
 the rest of the cardinall numbers what your fancy 
 will put, because it will be better to have single 
 Ideas for the cardinall numbers. 
 
 This is the Theoricli, 
 Now for the Pructick Part. 
 
 « LECTIO I. 
 
 The first Lecture of the Pructick Part. 
 
 tf Now before we can come to the Practick 
 Part, or exercise it selfe, 'tis necessary that wo 
 make some little Preface concerning Ideas. 
 
 41 An Idea is the figure of an^ thing represent- 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 509 
 
 «d, now the Ideas of things visible are very facile 
 and ready, but the Ideas of those things that be 
 invisible, are to be found out by rule, whereby 
 the Ideas of all things may be had in a readinesse ; 
 and for this there is need onely of but one gene- 
 rall rule (which in perfecting this Art 1 hare 
 found out) 
 
 " An Idea is twofold : 
 
 M First, Proper. 
 
 " Secondly, Improper. 
 
 " First Proper, which is the Image of that 
 thing it representeth, as if I put the Idea of 
 Christ to represent Christ himselfe. 
 
 " 2. Improper, as if I put the Image of Christ 
 to represent a man ; Logicians expresse this in 
 few words ; when the Image (say they) of the 
 Individual! is put for the Individuall itselfe 'tis 
 proper ; but if it be put for the Species or Ge- 
 nus, 'tis improper. This Division is brought to 
 shew that oftentimes improper Ideas are as use- 
 full to stirre up the Memory as proper. A se- 
 cond Division of Ideas, is 1. Perfect. 2. Im- 
 perfect. 
 
 " 1. Ideas are perfect, and such be of rare 
 and excellent things, as of Daniel in the Lyons 
 Den, of Jonah in the mouth of the Whale, the 
 fact of Iudith, Esther, Ioseph, fyc. 
 
 " 2. Ideas are imperfect, as of obvious and 
 vulgar things, as the rising and setting of the Sun 
 
310 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 no man admireth, because it is daily, it raineth, 
 it raineth not, Sec. T.ie Ideas of these be first 
 imperfect, but they may presently be made such 
 by some notable attribute, that they may become 
 perfect; as for example, the wind bioweth, tiie 
 Idea is imperfect, but the wind blowc-lh with 
 such a force, and so tearingly, that Trees are rent 
 up from the ground, and Houses blowne downe, 
 now the Ideas are perfect, it raineth, so imper- 
 fect ; but it raineth so thick that all the streets 
 and wayes are of a swim : and filled with water: 
 Now the Ideas be perfect; so the Sun ariseth 
 with a huge great body and red colour, so the 
 Idea is perfect. And so wee come now to give 
 the Rules of the Practick part : And first de vo- 
 cabulis intellcctis of words which we under" 
 stand, (for we shall appoint the Lection for 
 Words we understand not afterwards :) Words 
 which we understand are remembered by Ideas, 
 put in the places of the R. with some famous ac* 
 tion attributed, received from Writers sacred, or, 
 prophane, or invented, and feigned by our selves; 
 (for no intellect word can be spoken but of our 
 selves) we may presently be able to fancy the per- 
 fect Idea of it, and apply uuto it some notable 
 action. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMOET. 311 
 
 " LECTIO n. 
 
 Of the Practicke Part of Sentences. 
 
 " Sentences, or continued Texts are com- 
 mitted to Memory, and reta ned : The principall 
 Ideas of their Words being put in the Methodi- 
 cal] p' ices of the R. And dirse being made sure 
 of, they bring the lesse principal! Words of the 
 sentence, or text by the lielpe of the natural! 
 memory into our Remembrance imm diately. 
 Now that we may be able to perform ibis, we 
 must obseive foure things. 
 
 " 1. Take speciall notice of the principall 
 Idea of the whole sentence. And it matters i.ot 
 whether it b^ tlie principall or n >, so we take it 
 for the principall. 2. flk&crkevfcfiligently the first 
 Word of every sentence ; for if returning to the 
 P. P. by the ey ; of our fancy, we see '.he first 
 Won! and principal Idea in every sentence, the 
 rtaturall Memory will su.'ge^t the rest very safely : 
 for as in Schools, Children, that have got a taske 
 of Verses by heart, if they miss the. repealing of 
 the in, and the leafe being doubted, ma\ be but 
 permitted to see th fiist Letters tli.u even V\rse 
 beginueih withall, they wilj !>e able to repeat 
 every one of the Verses both forward and back- 
 ward, casting their eye upou the letter that every 
 
Sit PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Verse beginneth withall, the same is done here by 
 the eye of Fancy. 3. We must have a great care 
 lest we take one Synonyma for another, as to say 
 tnulier for f amino,, or silver for money, or a 
 Sword for a Rapier. 4. We must have a care 
 that every Word be repeated in the same order it 
 is read, or spoken ; now this is done by the strong 
 application of the mind unto every Word, and its 
 Collocation : as also by often exercise, by which 
 alone all this is so exactly obtained, that in a 
 short time exercising our selves herein, we can- 
 not but admire our progresse and successe. 
 
 " LECTIO III. 
 
 " Of unknown Words. 
 
 " Unknown Words are remembred four 
 wayes. 
 
 " 1 . By the Harmouie of Words, which va- 
 rious Languages have one with another, as the 
 English word Riche, brings into my mind the 
 Hebrew word Riach, fyc. 
 
 " 2. From the sound or eccho, as England, 
 Jsleland, Presbyterie, Presbyter, &c. 
 
 " 3. From the beginning of the words, as for 
 Back, Backwards. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 315 
 
 " 4. By way of Division, as for Parrat, a pare, 
 and a Rat. 
 
 " LECTIO IIII. 
 
 De rebus Communibus, of businesses, and 
 ordinary imployments. 
 
 " As in the sun-shine the shaddowes follow 
 their bodies, so common businesses, and ordinary 
 imployments are easily figured out by their pro- 
 per Ideas, soone placed and certainly retained ; 
 as if a Shop-keeper would bare in mind how many 
 yards of this or that stuffe silke, Velvet, &c. he 
 hath, it is but fancying in the R. one of his ac- 
 quaintance clothed with a suite or cloake of the 
 same, and to hold the number of the yards in his 
 right hand, the figure of 40. for 40. yards and if 
 the price of it be 16. per yard, the figure of 16. 
 in bis left hand. 
 
 E S 
 
314 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 «< LECTIO V. 
 
 De Memoria Concionwn, To remember Ser~ 
 mom heard. 
 
 C( When wee heare a Sermon, foure Rules 
 are to be observed. I. Diligent attention. 2. 
 Carefull observing tlie Division of the Parts. 
 3. Melhodicall Collocation of the Parts in the 
 Places of the R 4. serious Meditation on the 
 Ideas. If there be but two parts of the Text, 
 place the first in the Center of the South, and 
 the second in the Center of the North ; if three 
 parts, place theni in the three Center Tables of 
 the Eastyi South, and North; if 4 in the fourth 
 Center Tables of the fourth Paries. If five 
 Parts, pltce the rift Part of the Text in the Cen- 
 ter of the Fioie; if yours be six Parts, Place the 
 sixth Part in the Center Table of the East W. 
 of the second R. if seven Parts, place the se- 
 venth in the Center T. of the South Paries, in 
 the second R. and so on : after this manner, if 
 there should bte more Parts, having the matter 
 of every part to be expressed, first with its part, 
 so far as the places will reach in tin Center 
 Table, which being filled, proceed unto the f ur 
 Tables of the four Angules, according to their 
 place and number. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 3\5 
 
 " LECTIO VI. 
 
 De memoria Historiarum; to remember His- 
 tories. 
 
 44 Histories be very easie to be remem- 
 bered : three rules are to be observed. 
 
 " First, Propound unto your self the History, 
 and Authour of the History, and read some of 
 it in the morning, some of it in the afternoon, 
 and leisurely, and seriously imprint into your 
 mind, the .substance and chief passages of the 
 History by Ideas put in some apt Repository, 
 and you shall have it in readinesse by once or 
 twice thinking of it. 
 
 " Secondly, When you are to remember di- 
 vers Histories, they are all to be expressed by 
 their singular and proper Ideas, in places by 
 themselves; After this manner you may remem- 
 ber Scripture Histories in six, seven, eight con- 
 claves ; for example, you may divide the book of 
 Genesis, into the History of Adam, Noah, 
 Abraham, Isaac, Jacob, Joseph. 
 
 " Thirdly, If you desire leisurely, and with 
 exactness to learn a History, divide it into prin- 
 cipall parts, which you may represent by certain 
 persons, giving of them convenient motion ; for 
 example, you may remember the History of 
 
316 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Joseph if you place the known men of the His- 
 tory, as Joseph, Jacob, Josephs Brethren, and 
 Pharaoh. 
 
 " LECTIO VII. 
 
 De memoria Citationum ; to remember Scrip- 
 ture-Quotations. 
 
 " Take for every book of the Bible some 
 friend or acquaintance of the name, near the 
 name, or for the name, as one John for the 
 Gospel of Saint John ; one Gennt for Genesis ; 
 some patient pious man for the book of Job, if 
 you place not one Job you know, &c. Then 
 alwayes take the right hand for the Chapter, and 
 Jeft hand for the Verse. 
 
 " LECTIO VIII. 
 
 For sure imprinting the Ideas of all things in 
 the memory. 
 
 w There be two sure directions : 
 " The first is called Paradise, which is the ap- 
 plying the most delightfull things and objects 
 to every of the five Sences, viz. what most affect 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. Sd7 
 
 eih Hearing, Seeing, Smelling, Touching, Tasi- 
 
 nis. 
 
 " The other is termed by the name of Hell, 
 which is the applying of the most odious and 
 Joathfuil objects to every of the five Senees. 
 
 " LECTIO IX. 
 
 Of Shorthand-writing. 
 
 u There is a kind of a Short hand writing 
 m this Art, by the Ideas of letters objected to 
 the eye of the fancy, as the Alphabet is objected 
 to the sight of the bodily eye. Now for bievity 
 sake, asing colours instead of vowels, the e^e of 
 a nimble fancy will read any thing by ideas thus 
 figured, as readily as if it were written in * book, 
 and will retain what thus is written. Now the 
 Ideas of this Alphabet be these, and such like as 
 your fancy best pleaseth to make choice of; A. 
 a pair af -Compasses so made, b. a Lute, B, a 
 Bow bent with an arrow in it, C. an Horn, &c. 
 and so in like manner, take Instruments or any 
 kind of Ideas for die rest-ofthe letters, wh.ih be 
 like the letters; and instead of vowels _use these 
 colours, A. for white, 'for E. bl«*\, i#r ^reec, 
 if or. /.redo, for O black, for U i'eiioWc"' 
 
318 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 54. L'Oeuvre des Oeuvret, ou le plus 
 
 pa rj diet des Sciences Steganogra- 
 
 phiques, PuuUnes, Armfdelles, et 
 
 JLullistes, par Jean Helot, 8°. JLug- 
 
 duni, 1654. 
 
 This worrlc is an enlargement of Lully's Art 
 of Memory, and is much superior to the original 
 system.* 
 
 55. Fax Nova Arti Memories localis 
 
 accensa y Q°. Lips. 1654. 
 
 This new torch does not shed a 'flood of light* 
 upon the subject of local memory, but its rays if 
 collected and concentrated, will serve to direct 
 the steps of the mnemonic student. 
 
 56. Alhanasii Kircheri, Ars Magna 
 
 Sciendi in xii Libros digesta, qua 
 nova el universali methodp \JLul- 
 liand] per artificiosum Combina- 
 tionum contextum de omni re pro- 
 posit a plurimis et prope infinitis 
 rationibus disputari, omniumque 
 .. ■ .I-... ■ ■ ■» 
 
 * Morhof, in PoJybist, 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMOKT. 319 
 
 summaria qu&dam cognilio compa- 
 rari potest, fol. Amstelod. 1669. 
 
 This curious work contains nearly five hun- 
 dred closely-printed pages, and exhibits a com- 
 plete exposition of Lully's Art, as applied* to the 
 various branches of human learning. [See No. 
 61.] 
 
 Athanasius Kircher, was born at Ful- 
 da, in the year 1601, and was much celebrated 
 as a mathematician and philosopher. He com- 
 menced his noviciate in the Society of the Je- 
 suits, in his seventeenth year, among whom he 
 distinguished himself by a surprising proficiency 
 in literature and science. His works amount to 
 twenty-two volumes, folio, eleven in quarto, 
 and three in octavo ! ! ! He died in the year 
 1680. 
 
 57. Variorum de Arte Memories Trac- 
 tatus Sex, 8°. Franc, et Lips. 1678. 
 
 The authors of these six tracts are, 1. Lam- 
 bert Schenckel. 2. Johannes Austriacus. i3. 
 Hierouymus Marafiotus. 4. J. Spangenberg 
 Herd. 5. Fr. Mart. Ravel lin. 6. De Merao- 
 ria naturali fovenda a Johan. Willisso. The 
 whole of which have been already noticed, ex- 
 cept the tract of Johannes Austriacus, and ia. 
 
"32 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS Ol? 
 
 this there is nothing of a novel description, or 
 worthy of a particular remark. 
 
 58. The Divine Art of Memory : or, 
 The Sum of the Holy Scriptures, 
 Delivered in Acrostic Verses, so 
 that the Contents of the whole Hi- 
 ble, may readily be remembered ; and 
 in ivhat Chapter, each particular 
 passage is recorded. Written ori- 
 ginally in Latine, by the Reverend 
 and Learned John Shaw, and made 
 English by Simon Wastel, 12*. 
 Lond. 168a. 
 
 This rare and curious little volume, containing 
 move than 200 pages, is a translation from Shaw's 
 "* Bibiorutn Summulu sen argumenta singulo- 
 ■rum capitum Scriptura Canonica utnusque 
 Testamen-i, alphabetice dictichis comprehensa, 
 8°. Load. 1621-23.' a work which we have not 
 been able to meet with. The present ' Divine 
 Art' seems to have been fi r st published in the 
 year 1623, under the title of 'The true Chris- 
 tian's da ly delight ; being a sum of every Chap- 
 ter ef the Old and New Testament set down 
 alphabetically in English Verse, that the Scrip- 
 tures we read, may more happily be remembred, 
 <-etc 12°. tLond. fl623.' This work -was eg&'w 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 321 
 
 published under the Title of * Microbiblion; or 
 the Bible's Epitome, etc. 12°. Lond. 16^9-' 
 
 The Prolegomena to this metrical version and 
 abridgment of the Old and New Testament, are 
 two Epistles Dedicatory ; one from T. B. and the 
 other from S. W. [Simon Wastell], and the 
 Translators^ Preface to the reader from the same 
 person. All these are curious, and worthy pre- 
 servation, as they explain the plan and objects of 
 the work. 
 
 1. Epistle Dedicatory from T. B. 
 
 "To the Honoured 
 PAUL WENTWORTH, Esq. 
 
 Worthy Sir, 
 
 THIS laborious and useful Enchiridion was 
 Jirst taught to speak English in theFree School 
 of Northampton, being translated bu the painful 
 hand of Mr. Wastel, quondam School-master 
 there, (whose Memory, like a Box of precious 
 Oyntment, still retains a sweet fragancy in those 
 Parts;) And was there by him humbly i ecom- 
 mended to the Patronage of a Noble Lord, 
 Baron Spencer of Wormleighton, especially 
 upon the account of his indulgent Favours to- 
 wards that eminent Seed Plot an i Nursery of 
 Learn' ng ; being now therefore again to salute 
 the Light in a new Edition, to whom more pro- 
 
322 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OT 
 
 perly ihvuld it address it self than to your 
 iionour'd Name, who have been a liberal Bene- 
 factor to the same School wherein it wassj hap- 
 pily edu-cated, as to be rendred serviceable to 
 our Country-men in general ; whereas before, 
 like some rare Jewel, whose value is ktiown to 
 none but the skilful Lapidary, it was justly ad- 
 mired, and made use of only by the Masters of 
 the Latin Tongue. 
 
 'Tis one of the greatest Uses, and most lauda- 
 ble Designs of Epistles Dedicatory, to pat) the 
 Tribute of a Publick acknowledgment to gener» 
 ous P erlue.and the nobl-e Encouragers of Learn- 
 ing. But since *tis well known you as little 
 desire Commendations as you do greatly study 
 •to merit them, and delight rather to be Good, 
 than to!d so ; All I shall say, is, That by en~ 
 dowing the Muses, you have made Learning 
 your Debtor, which never fails to be a grateful 
 Pay-master ; and that your example will confute 
 our Roman Upbraiders, and let them know, 
 That 'tis no Discouragement to Good Works, 
 to believe, they are not Meritorious, and that 
 Charity is not grown Cold, since she It ft of to 
 be BfitiH; 
 
 " The Piece that here presents it self to our 
 view is indeed small, but n ay prove great in 
 use ; an ;t will help both to understand and re- 
 member what is contained in Sacred Scripture^ 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 325 
 
 and make persons better acquainted with that 
 Blessed Book which alone can bring us ac- 
 quainted with the Almighty. 
 
 " That it may conduce to these ends ; and par- 
 ticularly, that your worthy Sulfe may, by a 
 Belief, Adherence, and Practise of those Divine 
 Dictates, enjoy an everlasting Memorial in the 
 Book of Life, is the Prayer of 
 
 " Your Servaut 
 
 "J. BJ* 
 
 % Epistle Dedicatory from Simon WastelL 
 
 "to the 
 
 " Right Honourable 
 
 " His singular Good Lord, 
 
 " SIR ROBERT SPENCER, Knt. 
 
 Baron Spencer of Wormleighton : 
 
 " S* W. wisheth all Happiness Temporal and 
 Eternal. 
 
 " Right Honourable, 
 
 "THE manifold Favours received from your 
 Lordship ever since my first placing in the Free- 
 School of Northampton, as also Your Honour's 
 late promised Assistance to help the said School 
 to that Ri«ht wheieof it liaili been these many 
 Ytars unconscionably defrauded, hath caused me 
 
.524 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OP 
 
 many times to which that some good occasion 
 might be offered unto me, whereby I might wit- 
 ness not only unto your Honour, but also to 
 Posterity, how much I confess my self obliged 
 unto you for the same. And therefore, having 
 taken some Pains to turn the Contents of the 
 Bible briefly into English Meeter, for the help 
 of weak Memories, (being incouraged thereunto 
 by the Perswasion of divers of my godly learned 
 Friends, when they saw some Entrance made 
 thereinto.) Your Honour being in the very 
 Frontispiece of my dearest and worthily most 
 honoured Friends, I determined to dedicate the 
 same, together with my humble and best Ser- 
 vice, unto your Honour ; beseeching you, that 
 both my self and it, as also our poor wronged 
 School, may still be patronized and shrowded 
 under the shadow of your Honourable Protec- 
 tion : so will I not fear what my back Friends 
 can say to my Book, nor what they can devise or 
 do against my self; so also shall your Honour 
 (in respect of the School) have the praise of -the 
 Prophet, to be called, A Builder of that waste 
 place, and a Raiser up of the Foundation 
 thereof; a Repairer of that Breach, and a 
 Restorer of those Paths to dwell in : And so be 
 honoured and esteemed of me and all my Succes- 
 sors as the second Founder thereof, and be pa- 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 325 
 
 rallel'd and equalized with Thomas Chipsey, 
 who was the first : For, 
 
 " No?i minor est virtus quam quarere parta 
 tueri. 
 
 'Tis no less pious, things lost to regain, 
 Than for first Founders to give to maintain. 
 
 w Vouchsafe T beseech you (my most honoured 
 Lord) as cheerfully to accept of this my poor 
 Present and Widows Mite (being a Pawn and 
 Pledge of my ever dutiful and thankful Mind, as 
 Artaxerxes is said to have received an handful 
 of Water from the poor Country-man, whose 
 Ability would afford no better a Gift. So will 
 I ever pour forth my Prayers unto the Almighty 
 Preserver of Mankind, the Giver of every good 
 Gift, that he would be pleased to vouchsafe unto 
 your Honour, and to all your Honourable Pro- 
 geny, health of Body, length of Days, with In- 
 crease of Grace and Honour in this Life, and 
 the Fruition of eternal Blessedness in the World 
 to come. 
 
 " Your Honours 
 " ever to command, 
 
 " SIMON WASTELL." 
 
 FF 
 
>26 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OP 
 
 The Translator's Preface to the Reader. 
 
 " TH£ 
 
 " Translator's Preface 
 
 " TO THE 
 
 "READER. 
 
 "NOT long ago (Christian Reader) there was 
 published a little Book in Latin Verse, called 
 Bibliorum Summula, set forth by Mr. John 
 Shaw, (a man whom both for his Learning and 
 Gravity, as also for our old and antient ac- 
 quaintance (being School-fellows in Westmer- 
 \em\ffty years ago, and both of Queens Col- 
 ledge in Oxford) / did, and do much esteem and 
 respect.) This Book 1 perceived to be much 
 applauded of the godly learned Ministers, and 
 oj many other Scholars that had seen and read 
 the same. And therefore, after ht had sent me 
 one, as a token of his love, I began to study 
 how I might teach it to speak English, being as 
 desirous to benefit the unlearned, as he was the 
 learned; and having translated the Books of 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 5*7 
 
 Moses, and offered them to his and to otlmr 
 learned and grave Ministers vierc and censures, 
 i/iey did by their persuasions so piick and 
 spurr me forzeard, that I could not give 
 over, untill (through God's Assistance) I 
 had gene through both the Old and Ne® 
 Testaments. I confess I have not precisely 
 tj/ed my self to his Method and Manner, be- 
 cause the English tongue is far more copious 
 than the Latin ; but have taken liberty (ac- 
 cording as the contents of each chapter were 
 longer or briefer) to conclude them sometimes itt 
 ttco, sometimes in four, sometimes in more Dis- 
 tich's, with as much brevity (observing perspi- 
 cuity) us I could. I have purposely laboured 
 to speak plainly to the capacity and understand- 
 ing of the simple and ignorant, rather than by 
 Poetical strains to please the Ear, and the Eye 
 of the curious learned Readers. Thou hast also 
 not only the contents of every Chapter set dozen 
 in order Alphabetically with figures to direct 
 thee unto them, but a/so figures in every line to 
 direct thee to the Verse zchcre thou shalt jind 
 that presently which thou desirest to know, 
 without reading over the zchole Chapter. 
 Thou hast also a Chronological observation 
 of times from Adam to Curist, and from 
 Christ to Antichrist. Thou hast also the names 
 
S28 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS Of 
 
 of all the Books of the Bible, as they follow 
 in order, 
 
 " Lastly, thou hast comforts and encourage- 
 ments against thefeare of death, called the old 
 mans A. B. C. If it shall please thee (gentle 
 Reader) when thou hast read or heard a Chap- 
 ter, to read over the contents in meeter once or 
 tzcice, thou mayest be able to rehearse and say 
 the said contents by heart, and so in short time 
 be acquainted with the History of the whole 
 Bible. If any be so zealously affected with the 
 knowledge of the Scriptures, as the Lord Crom- 
 well was, who (as Master F ox recordelh in the 
 .Book of Martyrs, of the fifth Edition, page 
 1075, got by heart all the new Testament of 
 Erasmus his Translation in his journey to Rome, 
 he might in short time get by heart these brief 
 contents of the whole Bible. If therefore 
 the Law of God be thy delight, (as it 
 was Davids) this little Book will be a com* 
 fortable companion, whether thou walkest 
 abroad, or stay est at home. And finally if 
 thou reapest any increase of saving know- 
 ledge, justifying faith, or holiness of life, by 
 these my poor labours to the Edification and 
 Salvation of thy Soul, have all that I de- 
 sire, saving that 1 would entreat thee to 
 ascribe the Praise and Glory of all to God, 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 3t9 
 
 vnd to afford me thy cliai liable Ct?isur£ > 
 IVeli-ic things, and Pn.yers. 
 
 " Thine in am Christian service 
 
 " that he can ptrk rm, 
 
 n 8. If " 
 
 A chronological table follows this preface, 
 from the Creation of Aduin to the departure nut 
 of Egypt, and the names of all the Ho >ks of the 
 Bible, with the number of the Chapters. The 
 specimens selected from the Divine Art, aie 
 the whole book of Genesis, and the old man's 
 A. B. C. 
 
 ft? 
 
330 !»RINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 1. Old Testament. 
 
 GENESIS. 
 
 1 ALL things in 1 Heaven, in Earth and 2 Seas, 
 
 our great 3 Jehovah makes : 
 He bade them & grow and multiply: 
 and Man Gods s6 Image takes. 
 
 2 BY him in 1 six days all were 2 made; 
 
 the 3 Sabbath, 4 Man of Dust: 
 Paradise 8 , S4 Wedlock ; Names co impos'd : 
 The Fruit forbear l * Man must. 
 
 3 CLosely the subtil 2 Serpent tempts ; 
 
 they 6 eat ; are 10 bare ; arraign'd|: 
 The promis'd 15 seed; their strife, earth ^ curst, 
 Man l6 punish'd, 21 cloath'd, 24 disdain'd. 
 
 4 DUE 3 Sacrifice the * Brothers bring : 
 
 fierce Cain good Abel 8 slays : 
 Cain lz vagrant made, Lantech's 2 great wrath : 
 
 Seth liv'd in holy days. 
 t<W 5 J^Nnochf, blest Enoch, is by God, 
 
 fi * from Earth to Heaven translated : 
 The Patriarchs * lives : lines : * years, fy death, 
 
 to 3 Noah's time related. 
 6 J? Air forms make 2 matches: monstrous men 
 
 in monstrous 5 Sin abound : 
 This i brings the Flood but Noe and his, j 
 
 (i'th Ark) 8 God's favour found. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 331 
 
 7 GOD x sends all pairs, and Noe repairs 
 
 unto the 5 Ark, wherein *l656 
 
 They 7 being shut, the 8 flood o'reflows, 
 
 and drowns 13 all flesh for sin. 
 S HE av ' n s x wrath aswag'd, the flood is swag'd 
 
 the 1 Raven and the Dove : 
 Noah 18 goes forth, 20 doth sacrifice : 
 
 God n makes two leagues 22 of love, 
 9 \Ho rah * gives laws, of Increase, 
 
 * Fear, * Murther, 3 Meat, the Bow 
 Blood is 4 forbidden, Noe made 21 drunk, 
 
 mock'd, ^ Cham accurs'd alsn. 
 lORNow » here of Noe, 2 and of his 21 Son? 
 
 the mighty 6 Generations. 
 Nimrod first 8 Monarch: here begins, 
 
 dividing of the 3S Nations. 
 llLEarn here l oue language, at the first; 
 
 confusion 5 Babel* rent : *1?87 
 
 Mark 1# SAem and Terah's 27 Progeny, 
 
 to Haran 31 Terah went. 
 12MAke hast, O ' Abram* leave thy land ; *2023 
 
 I will c preserve thy life : 
 A 10 Famine ; Fear " doth make him fain : 
 
 the King 14 restores his Wife. 
 13]\OW Lot and he « richly 2 return ; 
 
 but discord i parts them both ; 
 Lot's lot is 10 sinful Sodom's Soil ; 
 
 to Hebron " Abram go'th. 
 140Fp° st ' hy four, x five Kings are slain, 
 
 Abraham l * rescues* Lot : "2030 
 
 Melchizedek 20 receiveth Tythes ; 
 
 spoils, Abraham 23 takes not. 
 
532 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 loPIlomise J of Seed chears 2 Abraham, 
 
 which he believes 1S most true : 
 But first his Seed 13 must Servants be, 
 
 And l6 then their Foes subdue. 
 lGQUarrelling Hasrar now with 4 Child, 
 
 Her Mistress doth disdain : 
 The Angel bids ? she should submit, 
 
 And turn to her again. 
 IfRlinewed is the * Covenant sure: 
 
 Their names are 15 chang'd, they blest : 
 j 2 ii^ Abraham here is f 12 circumcis'd, 
 
 Ishmael 25 , and the rest. 
 ]8S^ ra 12 f° r laughing is 13 reprov'd : 
 
 Sodoms ~ x Destruction shewn : 
 Abraham prays, for 32 ten just men, 
 
 it may not be o'retbrown. 
 19TWO Angels 3 Lot doth entertain, 
 
 Sodomites fiery 24 Slaughters: 
 Lot's Wife a - 6 Pillar of Salt is made : 
 
 he drunk, 35 defiles his Daughters. 
 20TJNwares tne King takes " Abrams Wife : 
 
 God him, he Abraham 9 rates, 
 Restores, u reproves 36 , makes 14 rich : he *T prays, 
 
 Then heal'd are all Estates. 
 
 ■ 
 
 [j^050 2l\V^h J°y Sarah her 2 Son || embrac'd : 
 the 9 scoffing Lad and's Mother 
 Cast i4 out, distressed, a ? refresh'd, Peace sworn 
 between the 92 King and th' other. 
 1J2061, 22XJP Abraham rose to 3 slay his || Son : 
 the Angel n holds his hand : 
 The Ram is 13 offered up for him : 
 His Seed shall be V! as Sand. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 333 
 
 23 With Tears did 2 Abraham bewail 
 
 the death of || Sara old : ||2085 
 
 Macphelah bought to l6 bury in, 
 
 Which Ephron to him sold. 
 ZAABrahtm 2 sends : the 12 Servaut prays. 
 
 asks W Water of the || Maid : 1(2088 
 
 Gives 2e gifts, brings 6l home to Isaac her, 
 
 on whom 6 ? his love is staid. 
 25BY » Ketur Abram had * tnoe Sons : 
 
 he 8 dies, and 21 Isaac prays : 
 Two * 2 Twins do strive : Birth-right is sold, 
 
 and Jacob || Pottage ** pays. ||2 1 1 5 
 
 26QAnaan 3 promis'd, Famine * sent : 
 
 his Wife he f Sister calls : 
 The 9 King reproves, he 13 rich, digs 18 Wells: 
 
 Sons Wives him 35 grieves and galls. 
 27 TJIm-sighted 3 Isaac Venson craves : 
 
 || Son 30 hunts, and comes too fl late ; ||2140 
 Jacob 2 ? is blest : Esau 38 doth weep : 
 
 And's Brother 41 deadly hate. 
 28 J£&zm's ungodly 9 Marriages : 
 
 Jacob is 10 seut away : 
 A Ladder 12 sees, and 18 consecrates 
 
 a stone 22 whereon to pray. 
 29pOr Rahel Jacob ri seven years serves: 
 
 but 23 Laban Lea || gives, ||2185 
 
 He 28 serves seven moe : Lea - conceives, 
 
 but Rahel S1 barren lives. 
 30GRiev'd Rahel* gives Jacob her Maid: 
 
 so » Ijea : Jacob S1 hir'd. 
 Ioseph is 24 born : by Jacobs ** art, 
 
 his Sheep and Wealth admir'd. 
 
334 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 *220i> 31 HEre Gods bids * Jacob 3 home return, 
 the Idols 19 Rahel takes : 
 Laban 26 complains : charg'd 24 not to chide : 
 
 at Gilead 4i peace he makes. 
 32jAcob is by an 1 Angel cheer'd : 
 
 7 fears; 9 prays: contest 10 his faults: 
 Sends 13 gifts, doth with an 24 Angel strive, 
 
 and 25 ever after haults. 
 33K.Nee!ing faint Jacob 4 Esau meets : 
 
 they 4 weep, they kiss : he n takes 
 The gifts : l6 departs : a J 9 field is bought ; 
 Jacob an 20 Altar makes. 
 ||2213 34LEwd Shechem. 2 Dinah \\ doth deflour. 
 and craves her 8 for his Wife. 
 The People "- circumcis'd are 25 slain : 
 
 good Jacob 30 fears his life. 
 35MAking an 1 Altar Jacob's blest : 
 
 he 2 purgeth Idols all : 
 Reubens ~- foul Lust : a 20 Pillar pitcht : 
 
 a s threefold *» Funeral 5 ®. ( 7 wealth : 
 36]\ t O\v i Esau's Wives : Sons : 15 Dukes and 
 
 6 departure : c habitation : 
 Are here set down : 2 * mules are found out : 
 
 the 31 Kings of Edom's Nation. 
 3?Or's Brethren ~ Joseph makes Complaint : 
 
 dreams 5 twice : Jacob 32 deceiv'd : 
 Joseph is put 2l into a pit : 
 
 , is 28 sold : his Father 5 * griev'd. 
 SSPLedge '- , sending : *Juda's Wife and 4 Sons : 
 12222 he in to 10 Thamar wentf: 
 
 Would 24 haveh< r biu'it : then 26 clears her more: 
 two 2 7 Twins to him are sent. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 335 
 
 *9QUickIy good Joseph is * prefer'd : 
 
 of s Master much 6 approv'd : 
 He flat 8 denies : his Mistriss l * liesf: +222f 
 
 he is 23 in Bonds " 3 belov'd. 
 40REhearse your is Dreams.- O Butler! thou 
 
 a happy " ]\j an sua i t ue . 
 
 Have me "in mind. O Baker ! mark, 
 
 the ] 9 Gallows groans for thee. 
 4lSAd Pharaoh's 26 Dreams expounded are: 
 
 and Joseph 40 grac'd as Kingt: f22SG 
 
 Against the « Dearth hoards up, *9 sells Cornf: f223S 
 
 His Wife two 50 Sons cloth bring. 
 42TEN sent for 3 Corn : 24 imprison'd are : 
 
 releast 25 and sent away : 
 For Benjamin Ci a Pledge is pawn'd : 
 
 but him 3S doth Jacob stay. 
 43{JNwilliiig Jacob 13 sends his Son, 
 
 they 15 Presents bring to Court : 
 Joseph 2 ? confers : his ~° Brother calls : 
 
 and 32 feasts in 33 wondrous sort. 
 44\yithin the Sack of 12 Benjamin, 
 
 is Cup and Coin (they paid) 
 They fear, * confess: the Fathers Pledge, 
 
 for 33 Ben. would now be staid. 
 45\JNto his Brethren 1 Joseph's known? 
 
 he - weeps, is 5 sent before, 
 For Father 9 sends, the King Vf consents, 
 
 he goes, and 2S grievest no more. f2240 
 
 46Wlth Jacob (after l Sacrifice) 
 
 God will 3 go on the way. 
 Him Joseph C8 meets and greets, they 2 9 weep ; 
 he tells them ** what to say. 
 
336 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 47AGed Jacob, with all his x Sons, 
 
 before ? King Pharaoh stand ; 
 Goshen n : all's bought save the 8? Priests Land ; 
 *2255 bury *me 30 in my Land. 
 
 3SBLest Jacob siek 1 is visited ; 
 +2280 Gives Ephrimf *9 Preeminence : 
 
 Blesseth 2 ^ : relates 21 the Promise made : 
 
 foretells " their going thence; 
 49CAUing his 1 Sons he blesseth 3 them : 
 ||2300 doth future things || declare : 
 
 Gives charge about his 2 9 Burial : 
 of Soul the Lord takes care. 
 50DOleful 3 lamenting made 10 for him : 
 Troops bring him to his Grave: 
 2310 The Brothers « f ear: he makes them e5 swear 
 his Burial there to have. 
 
 2. THE OLD MANS A. B. C. 
 
 Ye Saints on Earth be of good cheer, 
 The Darts of Death ye need not fear, 
 
 1 Cor. ACcount'st thou death a dreadful thing, 
 15. 55. Which hath by Christ now lost its sting? 
 1 Thes. BE sure, as Spring doth Winter blasts ; 
 4. 17. So follows death, a life that lasts. 
 
 1 Cor. Coffin this corps and lay't in grave, 
 15. 53. A glorious rising it shall have. 
 
 2 Tim. DEbt due to God Thereby pay, 
 4. 6. By dyiug at th' appointed day. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 357 
 
 Exceeding welcome Death's to roe, Heb. 9» 
 
 All men must dye, no man is free. 17. 
 
 FUJI happy man lliat dyes in Failh : Rev. 
 
 His good works follow him, Christ saith. 14. 13» 
 
 GLad are the Saints dissolv'd to be, Phil. I. 
 
 To live with Christ, his face to see. 23. 
 
 J1E well may quake and fear to dye, Rev. 6. 
 
 That in his filthy sins doth lye. l6. 
 
 IN Death is gain, it's gate of Life: 1 Thes. 
 
 Last night ; a sleep j and end of Strife. 4. 14. 
 
 KNown God's Ambassador to be, 2 Pet. 
 
 Death will I meet ; I will not flee. 1. 14. 
 
 LOrd paramount of death hath kill'd Heb. 2. 
 
 Death by his death, and law fulfill'd. 24. 
 
 ]VlUse oft upon thy latter end, [mend. Psah 
 
 The thoughts of Death will make thee 90. 12. 
 ]\Ought bat Christ's death doth sin remove Rom. 
 
 Admire the gieatness of his love, 5. 8. 
 
 OF earthly Pilgrims, death from God 1 Cor. 
 
 Makes us possest of Heavens above. 5. 6. 
 
 PAss not for death, I daily die, 2 Cor, 
 
 Why then doth death me lerrifie? 15. 31. 
 
 QUiet thy self, thy day of death, Eccles. 
 
 Excells that hour thou first took breath. 7. 1. 
 
 REceiving but our due dfeserts, 1 Pet. 
 Why then should death arHict our hearts 2. 20. 
 
 Slth God from all eternity, Heb. 9. 
 
 Hath so decreed that all must dye. 27. 
 
 XHat deadly foe (last foe of all) 1 Cor. 
 
 At last shall have a deadly fall. 16. '2.6. 
 
 VAnquished death I wish were nye, Rom. 
 
 It ends a Christians misery. 7. 24. 
 
 C G 
 
538 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 John Shaw, according to A. Wood,* wai 
 a Westmoreland man born, and became a student 
 of Queen's College, Oxford, in 1.579, at the 
 age of 19; be took one degree in Arts, left the 
 College, and at length became Vicar of Oking, 
 or Woking, in Surrey, where he was had in 
 esteem, by many for his preaching, and by some 
 for his Poetry. His works, in addition to that 
 already mentioned, were: (1.) The blessedness 
 of Mary, Mother of Jesus : a Sermon on Luke 
 i. ver. 28, and 45, 8°. Lond. 1018. (*.) The 
 comfort of a Christian, by Assurance of God's 
 Love to him, written in verse. (3.) The Com- 
 plaints of a Sinner: the comfort of our Saviour — 
 in verse also. These tuo last are printed with 
 the Sermon. 
 
 Simon Wast ell, was, according to Wood,f 
 a Westmoreland man born, and descended from 
 those of his name, living at Wastellhead in the 
 same county. He entered as a student of 
 Queen's College, Oxford, in 1580, or there- 
 abouts, and took one degree in Arts five years 
 after ; at which time being accounted a great pro- 
 ficient in Classical Learning and Poetry, he was 
 made Master of the Free- School at Northamp- 
 
 • A thenar Oxon. vol. i. col. 487. i Ibid. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 3S§, 
 
 ton, whence by his sedulous endeavours, many 
 were sent to the Universities. He seems to have 
 been a fellow-student of Shaw, and on terms of 
 strict intimacy with him. 
 
 59. Ars Magna et admirabilis Specimi- 
 nibus variis confirmata, qua Pan- 
 dectarum Tituli eorumqne pr&cipua 
 materia ope. Figurarum emblemati- 
 carum, brevissime, jucunde et tena- 
 citer t memoria imprimi, Jirmiter 
 contitieri, et opportune in usum 
 transferri possunt : In maximum 
 commodum legis Sludiosi, 8°. JLugd. 
 Bat. 1095. 
 
 This anonymous work contains an ingenious 
 and very full application of the local memory, to 
 the fifty books of the Roman Pandects, and to 
 the various titles and subdivisions of each book. 
 To the Preface is appended the signature of 
 R. C. The title is a complete bill of fare, and 
 is a good model for all those who render this 
 ' annonce' a table of contents, instead of a title- 
 page. 
 
 60. Copia Speciminum Art is Memoriae 
 
540 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Bruxello', Leodii, Tornaci, et alibi 
 editormn, 8°. Leodii, 1G97. 
 
 This small pamphet contains an account of 
 'the? different exhibitions of L. Schenckel, at the 
 various cities enumerated in the title. 
 
 61. Ars Memorise vindicata, auctore D. 
 Jo. JBrancaccio, accessit Artificium 
 Poeticmn ad Scripturas Dirinas 
 in promptu habendas memoriterque 
 ediscendas accommodatum, 8°. Pa* 
 normi, 1702. 
 
 This is an excellent and useful little work ; 
 for, in addition to an explicit detail of the prin- 
 ciples of the art, it includes instances of wonder- 
 ful memory, in particular individuals, from the 
 time of Adam, to A. D. 1690, and a list of 
 writers on the subject. To neither of these 
 sources, however, are we indebted for any of the 
 materials in the present work, not having been 
 able to procure more than a transient inspection 
 of this rare and curious volume. 
 
 62. The Art of Memory. A Treatise 
 useful for all, especially such as are 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORI. 341 
 
 to speak in Publick. By Marius 
 D'Assigny, B. D. 8°. Lond. 
 1706. 
 
 This is the third edition of D'Assigny,* and 
 is ornamented with an ' elegant engraving on 
 copper,' representing Jupiter with his Jul men 
 reclining on a cloud ; — the winged Hermes is 
 seen flying with a caduceus, and a scroll in 
 his hands, on which is inscribed Ars Memo- 
 rid. Three pedestals, the centre one circular, 
 and the others square, occupy the fore ground of 
 this beautiful picture. On one pedestal stands 
 Minerva ; in the centre Hercules Jnglicus; and 
 the remaining pedestal is adorned by the Gratia 
 Decentes, in their usual costume. At the 
 foot of these illustrious personages are seen eleven 
 ' human forms divine,' from whose ears issue 
 eleven threads or lines, all meeting in one point ; 
 — the mouth of Hercules YJtiglicus ! ! ! 
 
 We have been thus particular in describing 
 this frontispiece, in the hope that some one who 
 is * pretty far gone' with the mania of illustrating, 
 may be induced to seek for it; for, here, he might 
 certaiuly indulge his favourite pursuit without a 
 chance of injuring the book ; a rare occurrence 
 in the annals of the print-ferret. It is not, per- 
 
 * The first edition was published in 1697. 
 «G3 
 
342 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 haps, known to all our readers, that a passion for 
 books illustrated or adorned with numerous 
 prints, exists to a very great extent; and, that 
 the most valuable books are deprived of their 
 engravings merely to illustrate some favourite 
 production, by the portraits of the persons 
 named in it. Mr. Dibdin, in his Bibltomania, 
 p. 605, notices some curious examples. Seven 
 hundred prints were collected by a lady to illus- 
 trate six chapters in Genesis: an HJ50 por- 
 traits by another person to ornament Scott's Edi- 
 tion of Dryden. The sum of «£ ( 2()00, was 
 expended by the late Mr. Crowles in illustrating 
 Pennant's London, which book he bequeathed, 
 in the true spirit of virtu, to the British Mu- 
 seum. 
 
 The address ' To the Young Students of both 
 Universities,' which precedes this Art of Me- 
 mory, we recommend earnestly to the present 
 race of Oxonians and Cantabs, as it is peculiarly 
 applicable to their present state. 
 
 The following are the contents of this vo • 
 lume. 
 
 " Chap. 1. Of the Soul or Spirit of Man. 
 " Chap. 2. Of Memory, its Seat, and Excel- 
 lency. 
 
 " Chap. 5. The Temper or Disposition of the 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 334 
 
 Body best and worst for Memory, with the na- 
 tural Causes and Reasons ot" both. 
 
 u Chap. 4. Some General and Physical Ob- 
 servations and Prescriptions for the remedying, 
 strengtlitiing, and restoring a Memory injur'd by 
 the ill Temper of the Body, or the Predominancy 
 of one of the tour Qualities in the Brain. 
 
 " Chap. 5. What is very much prejudicial to 
 the Faculty, Habit, and Practice of Memory. 
 
 "Chap 6. Of such Natural Things as may be 
 assisting to, and may comfort Memory, from the 
 Procurement of Nature, and the Contiivance of 
 Art. 
 
 "Chap 7- Rules to be observed for the Acts 
 or Practice of Memory. 
 
 " Chap. S. Rules to be observ'd to help our 
 Remembrance of things that we desire to pre- 
 serve in Mind. 
 
 "Chap. 9 Of Artificial or Fantastical Me- 
 mory or Remembrance." 
 
 This book upon the whole (the dedication ex- 
 cepted) is rather dull, and not very profitable. 
 In the fifth chapter, at the fifteenth section, we 
 are told that " all such Motions of the body as 
 cause giddiness or swimming in the head, are de- 
 structive to the memory. Therefore we should 
 hate a special care to avoid falls from high 
 places, turning round [as the Dervishes we 
 
344 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS Ofr 
 
 suppose] or Blows upon the hinder part of the 
 Head!!!" 
 
 The sixth chapter abounds with receipts for 
 ' comforting the memory' taken principally from 
 the early writers on this subject. A few of these 
 we shall extract for the benefit of such as are in- 
 clined to use them. 
 
 " 1. Sneezing Pouders. 
 
 " Sneezing Pouders well prepar'd are of great 
 use, but may prove pernicious if any thing be 
 offensive to the Brain in the Composition. Dried 
 Leaves of Marjoram, Sage, Rosemary, the Roots 
 of the Herb Pyrethrum, of Lingwort perfumed 
 with Musk, are a choice sneezing Pouder, to 
 comfort the Brain and Memory. And the Herb 
 Galangal well dried, and reduced to Pouder, 
 is very useful to strengthen Memory. Another 
 good sneezing Pouder may be made of Pepper, 
 with the Herb Condisi, white Lingwort, and 
 Lillies, with some perfumed Gums. But we 
 must have a care not to offend Nature by a too 
 frequent use of these or other Snuffs, which may 
 prejudice the Brain. 
 
 " 2. Plaisters to prevent a decay of Memory. 
 
 " Divers Plaisters, when we find a decay in 
 Memory, may be useful for helping the Brain : 
 As a Plaister made of Mustard-seed, and clapt 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 345 
 
 to the hinder part of the Head, ©r the Oil of 
 Mustard-sted when apply'd to that part. Or if 
 you please to be at greater Expence, take Flo-, 
 rentine Lillies, the Herbs Hermodactyle and 
 Pyrethrum, leaves of the wild Vine, Pigeon- 
 dung, Mustard-seed, of each an Ounce ; mix 
 them with Mosckata Nuts, Spice, Cloves, Cina- 
 mon, and Pepper, and make a Plaister ; which 
 you may likewise apply to the hinder part of the 
 Head, and you will find it increase and help Me- 
 mory. And a certain famous Author assures us, 
 that the Gall of a Patridge anointed about the 
 Temples does wonderfully strengthen the Seat of 
 Memory ; as also the Brains of Birds and Fouls 
 roasted, and chiefly of Hens are not useless for 
 the same purpose. 
 
 " 3. A pouder for the Memory. 
 
 "Take the Seed or Leaves of Orminum, and 
 reduce them to Pouder, and every Morning take 
 a small quantity of a Glass of Wine, And they 
 say that the Shavings or Pouder of Ivory pro- 
 duce the same effect, namely, the corroborating 
 of the Brain and Memory ; as likewise a Grain 
 of white Frankincense taken in a Draught of Li- 
 quor when we go to Bed, dries up the offensive 
 Humours of the Brain. And it has been obstrv'd, 
 that the Application of Gold to that Sutura, 
 which divides the Seat of Memory from the other 
 
546 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Closets of the Brain, strengthens the weakness 
 of the Head, drives away all Pai/i, and has 
 « wonderful Effect on the Faculty of Me- 
 mory. 
 
 " An ointment. 
 
 H A famous Author tells us, That a firm and 
 constant Memory, and quick Apprehension, 
 many great M« n have used this Medicine. Take 
 Roots of wild Bugloss, Roots of Valerian, or 
 Setvvall, of each four Ounces; Roots of Rue 
 two Ounces ; reduce them to very fine Pouders : 
 then take Juice of Ey-bright, Clary and Veiven, 
 of each four Ounces : strain the Juices well through 
 a Cloth ; then mix the Juices tugether, and the 
 Pouders apart : afterwards take the Essence of 
 Anacardi, or Cassia-nuts one ounce, and make 
 a Pouder as before. Also take Bird's Tongue, 
 i. e. Ash-keys, and make a very fine Pouder : 
 Then mix all the foresaid things together, viz. 
 the Pouders and the Juices, and take an Earthen 
 Pot glaz'd, and set it on the Fire, putting into it 
 some Bears Fat, and suffering it to melt by de- 
 grees ; then throw in the same Pouders, mixing 
 them with the Juices, always adding some of the 
 foresaid Fat, till a very thin Ointment be made; 
 with which anoint the Temples, Forehead, and 
 top of the Head towards the Nape. And this 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 347 
 
 do three or four times a year, and continue anoint- 
 ing more or less as there is occasion. 
 
 " 5. A Lye, or wash for the Head, 
 
 "Again, another Experiment may be tri'd for 
 the same purpose. Take eight Glasses of com- 
 mon Water, leaves of Tvy and Sticas, of each a 
 Pound and a half; put them together in the 
 Water to boil till the Water be almost consum'd; 
 afterwards let it be well strain'd and squeez'd, 
 and put into it a small quantity of Turpentine 
 wash'd with Rose-water : Then wash the Head 
 with a good Lye, and after drying it, anoint vvhh, 
 the aforesaid Liquor the Temples and hinder part 
 of the Head. 
 
 " t>. A pet fumed Apple for comforting the 
 Brain and Memory. 
 
 "Take Laudanum, Lignum Aloes, Storax, of 
 each a Dram ; Cloves, Nutmegs, sweet Basil- 
 seed, of each half a Dram ; widi Rosewater, in 
 which a small quantity of Mosch and Amber- 
 grise has been dissoiv'd, make an Apple. 
 
 " 7. To strengthen the Memory or restore it 
 when lost. 
 
 "To strengthen the Memory, or restore it 
 when lost ; or against giddiness : Take Rose- 
 mary, Borage, Chamomile, Violets, Roses, of 
 each an Ounce; the Leaves of Laurel, Marjo- 
 
348 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 ram, Sage of each two Ounres ; chop them all 
 together, and put them in the best Wine, and after 
 a day's time distil thro a glass Alembic, and 
 keep the distilled Liquor ; in which put of sweet- 
 scented Turpentine a Pound, white Frankin- 
 cense eight Ounces, Mastic, Myrrh, Bdellium, 
 Anacardi, or Cassia nuts, of each four Ounces : 
 beat them altogether, and so let them stand for 
 five days, mix'd with the Distillation in a cover'd 
 Vessel. Afterwards distil with a quick Fire till 
 yon get an Oyl out of them, which keep close 
 shut up in a glass Bottle well stopp'd with Wax 
 and Parchment. Fur use, take as much of it as 
 would ly in a large nutshell down the Mouth, and 
 anoinf also the Memorial parts, viz. the hinder 
 part of the Head, and all the Parts before-men- 
 tion'd. You will find it to Le very good. 
 
 " 8. Pills for the use of Memory. 
 
 "Take Chubeds, Ca la mint, Nutmegs, Cloves, 
 of each a Dram and a half; the best Frankin- 
 cense, choice Myrrh, oriental Ambergrise, of 
 each a Sc uule and a half; Mosch, five Grains: 
 with Morjoram-water make 1*1118. Take one in 
 going to Bed, and two at Sun rising, five hours 
 before Meat ; in the Winter every Month, in the 
 Spring and Fail more seldom." 
 
 The chapter which treats ' of Artificial or 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 549 
 
 Fantastical Memory or Remembrance is almost 
 a literal translation from Grataroli. 
 
 Marius D'Assigny was the Author of Rheto- 
 rica Anglorum, vel Exercitationes Oratorio, in 
 Rhetoricam Sacram et Communem. Quibus 
 adjiciuntur qutedum Regula ad imbecilles Me- 
 morias corroborandas, 12°. Lond. 1699. In 
 this work, a chapter is devoted to the subject of 
 memory, in which, as might be expected, a great 
 part of his Art of Memory is * done into Latin/ 
 
 $3. Ars 3femoria f sive clara et perspi- 
 cua Methodus excerpendi Nucleum 
 rerum ex omnium Scientiarum mo- 
 numentis a R. P. Thoma Erhardt, 
 8°. August. Vindel. 1715. Partiv. 
 in 3 Tom. 
 
 64. Pratique de la Memoire Artificiellt 
 pour apprendre et pour retenir 
 VHistoire Sainte, VHistoire Eccle- 
 siastique et VHistoire de France Par 
 le Pere Biiffier, 8°. Paris t 3 torn. 
 1719-1723. 
 
 This work is intended to facilitate the acqui- 
 sition of Chronology and universal History, and 
 the system is at once ingenious and simple. It 
 
 II H 
 
350 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 is composed in the form of a dialogue, and the 
 author has compressed, into verse, the principal 
 events and names of the different Sovereigns. 
 The following are specimens of his verses. 
 
 The first age commencing from the Deluge. 
 
 Le petit fils de Cam et qui tut fils de cbus 
 Est prince a Babilone et Nenibrod dit Belus, 
 Quand se forme sous lui l'etat de l'Assirie, 
 Vieiient ceux des Chinois d'Egipte et de Scithie. 
 Ninive avant deux mille est en Assur fonde£, 
 Et pour roi Sicion choisit Egialee. 
 
 First part of the history of France. 
 
 Ses Loix en quatre cens Pharamond introduit 
 * Glodion Chevelu qu' Actios vainquit, 
 Merovee avec lui combatit Attila. 
 Childeric fuit chasse, puis on le rapela. 
 Clovis vain a Soissens, fait vceu d'etre Chretien : 
 Defait Gombaut et tue Alaric Arien. 
 
 Vol. I. contains Sacred History and Chrono- 
 logy, Profane History and the History of France. 
 Vol. II. A system of Universal Geography, for 
 which verses are employed, as in the first volume. 
 Vol. III. includes Chronology and History, from 
 the birth of Chiust to the time of Buffier's 
 publication ; Ecclesiastical history, and the his- 
 tory of the principal States of Europe. 
 
 Claude de. Buffier was born of French 
 parents, in Poland; in the year 166 1; he»becamt 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 551 
 
 a Jesuit in 1679- After having travelled to Rome, 
 he fixed his residence in the capital of France, and 
 died in the year 1737, at Paris, in the College 
 of the Society, aged 76 years. He has left be- 
 hind him many works, besides that already no- 
 ticed, the principal of which have been collected 
 and published in his Cours des Sciences par den 
 principes nouveaux et simple, pour former It 
 language, V esprit, ct le cccur, fol. 1732. The 
 style of Buffier, in his verse and prose writings, 
 is more plain than elegant. He was a virtuous 
 man, and very laborious in his studies.* 
 
 65. Mcmoria Technica: or, a New 
 Method of Artificial Memory, ap- 
 plied to and exemplified in Chrono- 
 logy, History, Geography, Astro- 
 nomy ; also Jewish, Grecian and 
 Roman Coins, Weights and Mea- 
 sures, etc. By Richard Grey, D. D. 
 8°. JLond. 1730. 
 
 The ninth edition of this book has been just 
 published, to which, and to the eighth edition 
 are appended hoiee's Mnemonics, [see No. 66.] 
 In 1802, a thin pamphlet was published, enti- 
 tled, Technica Memoria, by M. W. Johnes; it 
 
 » Diet. Hist. Art. Buffier. 
 
S5t PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OP 
 
 consists merely of extracts from Grey. In the 
 Monthly Magazine for June 1805, Dr. Lettice 
 inserted some proposals for publishing his, * New 
 Memoria Technica,' but we cannot learn that 
 this work was ever put to press. It was intended 
 to embrace a number of tables, in chronology, 
 geography, &c. on the plan of Dr. Grey, but 
 with considerable improvements.* 
 
 In order to enable those who feel so inclined to 
 practise Dr. Grey's System, we shall extract from 
 the fourth edition of the Memoria Technica 
 published in his life time, so much as is neces- 
 sary for the purpose. 
 
 " The principal Part of this Method is briefly 
 this ; To remember any thing in History, Chro- 
 nology, Geography, fyc. a Word is form'd, the 
 Beginning whereof being the first Syllable or 
 Syllables of the Thing sought, does, by frequent 
 Repetition, of course draw after it the latter 
 Part, which is so contriv'd as to give the Answer. 
 Thus, in History, the Deluge happened in the 
 Year before Christ two Thousand three Hun- 
 dred forty eight ; this is signified by the Word 
 
 * To this list may be added a work entitled Reminiscen- 
 tia; or, the Memory's Assistant, by Samuel Needliam, to 
 be completed in three parts, on the plan of Dr. ttrev, 
 The first part only has yet appeared. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. olo 
 
 DeAetok: Del standing for Deluge, and etok 
 for £J48. In Astronomy, the Diameter of the 
 Snn (So Lis Diameter) is eight Hundred twenty 
 two Thousand one Hundred and forty eight 
 English Miles; this is signified by Sold'i-keJ-aj'ei, 
 ii standing for the Diameter of the Sun, ked- 
 afei, for S22, 148 ; and so of the rest, as will be 
 shewn more fully in the proper Place. How 
 e Words come to signiiie these Things, or 
 contribute to the Remembring of them is now to 
 be shewn. 
 
 " The rust Thing to be done is to learn exactly 
 the following Series of Vowels and Consonants, 
 which are to represent the numerical Figures, so 
 as to be able, at Pleasure, to form a Technical 
 Word, which shall stand for any Number, or to 
 resolve" a Word uheady fonn'd into the Number 
 which it st 
 
 " Here a and b stand for 1, c and d for 2, t 
 and t for 3, and so on. 
 
 " These Letters are assign'd Arbitrarily to the 
 respective Figures, and may very easily be re- 
 member'd. The first live Vowels in order natu- 
 rally represent 1,2, S, 4, 5. The Diphthong 
 an, being composed of a 1 and u 5 stands for 6; 
 
 H H 3 
 
 If 
 
 c 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 U 
 
 <j;; 
 
 1 
 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 i 
 
 d 
 
 t 
 
 / 
 
 I 
 
 s 
 
354 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OP 
 
 oi for 7, being composed of o 4 and i 3; ou for 
 9, being composed of o 4 and u 5. The Diph- 
 thong ei will easily be remember'd for eight, 
 being the Initials of the Word. In like Manner 
 for the Consonants, where the Initials could 
 conveniently be retain'd, they are made use of to 
 signifie the Number, as t for three, f for four, s 
 for six, and n for nine. The rest were assign'd 
 without any particular Reason, unless that pos- 
 sibly p may be more easily remembred for 7 or 
 Septem, k for 8 or dK-no, d for 2 or duo, b for 
 1, as being the first Consonant, and I for 5, being 
 the Roman Letter for 50, than any others that 
 could have been put in their Places. 
 
 " The Reasons here given, as trifling as they 
 are, may contribute to make the Series more 
 readily remembred ; and if there was no Reason 
 at all assign'd, I believe it will be granted that the 
 Representation of nine or ten numerical Figures 
 by so many Letters of the Alphabet, can be no 
 great Burthen to the Memory. 
 
 " The Series therefore being perfectly learn'd, 
 let the Reader proceed to exercise himself in the 
 Formation and Resolution of Words in this 
 Manner. 
 
 10 325 381 1921 1491 1012 536 7967 
 as tel leib aneb afna bybe uts pousoi 
 
 431 553 680 &c 
 fib lut seiz &c 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. $55 
 
 " And as in Numeration of larger Sums, 'tis 
 usual to point the Figures at their proper Pe- 
 riods of Thousands, Millions, Billions, &c. for 
 the more easy Reading of them, as 172, 102,795 
 one Hundred seventy two Millions, one Hun- 
 dred two Thousand, seven Hundred ninety five ; 
 so, in forming a Word for a Number consisting 
 of many Figures, the Syllables may be so conve- 
 niently divided, as exactly to answer the End of 
 Pointing. Thus in the Instance before us, 
 which is the Diameter of the Orbit of the Earth 
 in English Miles : The Technical Word is 
 Dorbterboid aze-poul; the Beginning of the 
 Word Dorbter, standing for the Diameter of the 
 Orbit of the Earth, (D-iameter ORBitae TERrae) 
 and the remaining Part of it boid-aze-poul for 
 the Number 172,102,795. 
 
 " N. B. Always remember that the Diphthongs 
 are to be consider'd but as one Lette?; or rather, 
 as representing only one Figure. Note also, 
 that y is to be pronounced as w t for the more 
 easily distinguishing it from i, as syd=602, pro- 
 nounce swid, tup=507 pronounce twip. 
 
 " The Reader will observe that the same Date 
 or Number may be signified by different Words, 
 according as Vowels or Consonants are made 
 Choice of, to represent the Figures, or to begin 
 the Words with, as 
 
 325 tel, or idu, 154 6m/", or Wo, or alf, ox ah. 93,i51 
 ni-ola, or out-fub, or ni-fla, or out-olb, Sic. 
 
356 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS Off 
 
 " This Variety gives great Room for Choice, in 
 the Formation of Words, of such Terminations 
 as by their Uncommonness arc most likely to be 
 remembred, or by any accidental Relation or 
 Allusion they may have to the Thing sought. 
 Thus the Year of the World in which jEneas is 
 supposed to have settled in Italy is 2824 ; but 
 as diis may be expressed either by ekef or deido, 
 I chuse rather to join deido to .Eneas, and make 
 the Technical Word lEnedeido than JEaekef, 
 for a Reason which ! think is obvious. Thus 
 King John began his Reign A D. 199- (one 
 Thousand being understood to be added, as I 
 shall shew hereafter ;) but as this may be ex- 
 press'd by anou, or boun, or anv, I make 
 Choice of the last, for then 'tis but calling him 
 Jann instead of John, and you have the Time 
 .': in his Name. Thus Inachus King of 
 Argos began his Reign in the Year before 
 Christ 1855; with a very small Variation in the 
 Spelling, 'tis his Name Inakus. But this by the 
 Way. . 
 
 " To go on with our Art ; 'tis further to be ob- 
 served, that z and y being made Use of to repre- 
 sent the Cypher, where many Cyphers meet to- 
 gether, as in 1000, 1000000, &c. instead of a 
 Repetition of azyzyzy, which could neither be 
 easily pronounced nor remember'd, g stands for 
 Hundred, th for Thousand, and m for Million. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 357 
 
 Thus mg will be 100, ig 300, oug 900, &c. 
 ath J 000, oth 4000, etho or oM/ 4004, peg 
 7200, <% 2300, lath 51000, «/w 1000000, 
 Mzmoth 10.004,000, sumus 05.000,056, loum 
 59,000,000, &c. The solid Content of the 
 Earth (TERrae MAGNiTudo) is two Hundred 
 sixty four Thousand, eight Hundred fifty six 
 Millions of Cubick Miles; this is express'd by 
 the Word Ter-mzgmX- eso-klaum ; Termagnit 
 standing for Terrae Magnitudo ; eso-klaum for 
 264,856,000,000 the Number of Cubick Miles. 
 u It will be sometimes also of Use to be able to 
 set down a Fraction, which may be done in the 
 following Manner : % Let r be the Separatrix 
 between the Numerator and the Denominator, 
 the first coming before, the other after it ; as 
 ho | urp | pourag 2, or ,79 north -*, or ,094 
 &c. Where the numerator is 1, or Unit, it 
 need not be expressed, but begin the Fraction 
 with r, as \ re, jj ri, \ ro, &c. So in Deci- 
 mals, ,01 or 4> ra g> > 001 or i55> rath. 
 
 1. Chronology and History. 
 
 " The Ages of the World before our Saviour's 
 Time are by Chronologers generally divided into 
 Six : The First from the Creation to the Deluge ; 
 the Second from the Deluge to the Call of Abra- 
 ham, &c. according to the following Periods : 
 
5.58 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS Of 
 
 Before Christ. 
 
 1 . The CReation of the World 4004 
 
 2. The universal DELiige 2343 
 3* The Call of Ayabam 1921 
 
 4. EXodus, or the Departure of the Is- 
 
 raelites from Egypt 1491 
 
 5. The Foundation of Solomon sTe m pie 1012 
 
 6. Cyrus, or the End of the Captivity 536 
 
 The Birth of Christ. 
 
 " Ail this is expressed in one Line, as fol- 
 lows : 
 
 Ctothf Deletok Abaneh TLxafna Tembybe Cyruts. 
 
 Cr denotes the Creation, othf 4004, Del the 
 Deluge, Ab the Calling of Abraham, Ex Exo- 
 dus, Tern the Temple, and Cyr Cyrus. The 
 Technical Endings of each represent the respec- 
 tive Year according to the Rules already laid 
 down. 
 
 " I shall explain two Lines more. 
 
 . Nicsilcon ari< d, CodatLe mnteib, Ephccthe-nes/?t. 
 Challemar-eudiote, Coviji'i*t-0/Mf, C-agcopo-mon*eiz. 
 
 " These two Lines are a short History of the 
 first Six Geneial Councils ; and every Syllable 
 has its distinct Signification. Thcjint represents 
 the Place where it was held ; the second shews 
 who was Pope at that Time ; the third under 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 359 
 
 what Emperor ; the fourth against what Here- 
 tick ; the fifth, in what Year of our Lord. Thus 
 the first Word is ISicsilcon -ail/el. ,Nic denotes 
 the Council of Nice, sil Pope SiLyester, con 
 the Emperor CoNstautine, ari the Heretick 
 Arius, tel the Year 325. The second Word is 
 Codathe nrateib ; Co denotes the Council of 
 Constantinople, da Pope DAmasus, the the 
 Emperor TnEodosius, ma the M Acedonians, 
 teib 381. The third is Ephcethe-nes/j'6 ,• Eph 
 the Council of Epwesus, ce Pope C files tine, the 
 the Emperor *TnEodosius, nes the NEStorians, 
 Jib the Year 431. The fourth is Challemar- 
 eudio/a ,* Chal the Council of CiiALcedon, le 
 Pope Llio, mar die Emperor MARcian, endi the 
 Errors of Eutyches and Dioscorus, ola the Year 
 451. The fifth is Covijust-O/af ; Co stands for 
 Constantinople, vi Pope Vigilius, just the Em- 
 peror JusTinian, O the Errors of Origen, hit 
 the Year 553. The sixth C-dgcopo-monseiz; 
 C stands again for Constantinople, ag for Pope 
 AGatho, copo the Emperor COnstantine PO- 
 gonatus, mon the MoNothelites, seiz the Year 
 680. 
 
 * Theodosius Junior. 
 
SfiO PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 t( The Regal Table of England since the Con- 
 quest, and some of the most remarkable 
 Princes before it. 
 
 Bef. Christ. 
 CASiBELanus chosen chief Commander by") 
 the Britains against the Invasion of Julius > 52 
 Ceesar [Casibelwrfj J 
 
 Aft. Christ. 
 
 Queen BoADicea, the British Heroine,"* 
 being abused by the Romans, raises an > 67 
 Army and kills 7000 [Boadawp] J 
 
 VoRTiGern who invited the Saxons to the"* 
 Assitance of the Britains against the > 44() 
 Scots and Picts [Vortig/<w] J 
 
 HENGist the Saxon, who erected the King--> 
 dom of Kent, the first of the Heptarchy > 455 
 [Heng/ M Z] J 
 
 King ARTHur famous for his powerful Re-"* 
 sistance and Victories over the Saxons > 514 
 [Arth/a/] J 
 
 EGBErt who reduced the Heptarchy, and"» 
 was first crown'd sole Monarch of Eng- > 825 
 land [Egbekek] J 
 
 ALFREd, who founded the University of"! 8 ~ 2 
 
 Oxford [Alfre&pe] S 
 
 CANute the Dane [Canbau] 10lG 
 
 Edward the CoNFESsor [Confes/<?] 1042 
 
 WiLliam the CoNq. [Wii-consau] Oct. 14. 1066 
 William Rufus [RufAoi*] Sept. 9 > 1087 
 
 HENRy I. [Henrag] Aug. 2. 1100 
 
 STEPHen [Steph6»7] Dec. 2. 1135 
 
 HENry the SECond [Hem&buf] Oct, 25. 1154 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 36l 
 
 Aft. Christ. 
 
 Richard I. [Rkbein] July 6. 1189 
 
 John [Jflnn] April 6. 11 99 
 
 HEnry the THird [Hethrfas] Oct. 19. 1210* 
 
 EDward I. [Eddoid] Nov. 16'. 1272 
 
 EDvardus SEcundus [Edsety/?] July 7. 1307 
 
 EDvardus TERtius [Edtextes] Jan. 25. 1326* 
 
 Richardus SEcundus [Risefoip] June 21. 137?' 
 
 HEnry the Fourth [Hefotoun] Sept. 20. 1399 
 
 HEnry the Fifth [Hefi/dd] March 20. 1412 
 
 Henry the sixth [Hensi/erf] Aug. 31. 1422 
 
 EDvardus QV ARtus [Edquar/iaMj?] March 4. 146*0 
 
 Edward the Fifth \ rp . p , ,-, ( April 9. 1483 
 
 Richard 111. / 1> S1 -™**J \June22. 1483 
 
 HENricus SEPtimus [Hensep/d/] Aug. 22. 1485 
 
 HENricus octav. [Hynoc/yn] April 22. 1509 
 
 EDvardus SEXtus [Edsexfos] ^n. 28. 1546 
 
 Mary [Mary/wf] Jtffy 6. 15S3 
 
 ELisabeth \E\sluk\ Nov. 17. 1558 
 
 Jamcs I. [Jamsyd] March 24. 1602 
 
 CAROlus primus [Caroprimse/] March27. 1&>5 
 
 CaroIus SEcundus [Carsecso^] Jan. 30. 16*48 
 
 jAMes II. [Jamsei/J Feb. 6. i684 
 
 WiLliam and Mary [WilseiAr] Fe6. 1 3/ i6"88 
 
 ANne IXupybl March 8. 1701 
 
 GF.orge I. [Geofto] Aug. 1. 1714 
 
 George II. [Geosecrfof] J««e? U. 172^ 
 
 " The Memorial Lines. 
 Casibelwtf Boadawj? Vortig/os Heng/w/ <fe XxWxlaf. 
 Egbefafc Alfred Can&au Coufes/e, 
 i 1 
 
362 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Wil-consaw Ruffed Henrag. 
 
 Stephfo7 & Hensecow/" Liicbein Jann Hethdas & 
 
 TLddoid. 
 Edsefa//? Edtertes liisetoip Hefotoun Hefi/arfque. 
 Hensi/erfEdquar/flM^Efi-Ro/c/Hensep/eiYHenoc/j/w^ 
 Edsex/os Marylut Ehluk J&msyd CaroprirmeJ. 
 Car secf ok J zmseifWilseik Anpyb Geo Jo doi. 
 
 " N. B. After Canute inclusive, One Thou- 
 sand is to be added to each : It was thought un- 
 necessary to express it, it being a Thing in which 
 it is impossible that any one should mistake. 
 
 " If it be desired to remember in what Month, 
 and Day of the Month each King began his 
 Reign, it may be done by the following Lines : 
 
 Vfil-tbo-sou-fat Steph-de Jam-chef-fau Ixi-\s-jeb-ed 
 
 El-nap. 
 Hen-ge-te/-«n sez-chez gib-ged-ped Geor-ga-jab 
 
 An chei. 
 Car-chep-rix Ma-ls Jo-ps Ed-uas-Ioi re/-cho-pcM rek- 
 
 que. 
 
 " EXPLANATION. 
 
 " The Italick Letters represent the Day of 
 the Month ; the Letter immediately preceding 
 represents the Month itself, r standing for Janu- 
 ary, f for .February, ch for March, p for April, 
 m for May, j for June, 1 for July, g for August, 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 363 
 
 s for .September, t for October, n for November, 
 and d for December. 
 
 " Thus Steph-d«, Steph King Stephen, de 
 Dec. 2. El-nop El Elizabeth, nap Nov. 17. 
 In Words of three or more Syllables, the first 
 Syllable stands for all the Kings of the same 
 Name, and the following Syllables in Order an- 
 swer to the first, second, third, &c. of that Name. 
 So 3a.m-chef-fau ; Jam denotes James I & II. 
 chef (viz. March 24.) belongs to James I. and 
 fait (viz. Feb. 6.) to James II. So Ri-h-jeb-ed ; 
 Ri denotes all the Richards, Is (viz. June 6.) be- 
 longs to Richard J.jeb (viz June 21.) to Rich- 
 ard II. and ed (viz. 2 C 2. of the same Month) to 
 Richard III. 
 
 " If this be thought either too difficult, or too 
 minute, the Reader may pass it over." 
 
 In the Rev. J. Robinson's ' Grammar of 
 History,' will be found a list of remarkable 
 events from the Creation to the Battle of Tra- 
 falgar, with all the technical terminations of 
 Dr. Grey. This is a useful supplement. 
 
 " 2. Geography. 
 
 " In the first place are laid down the general 
 Divisions of Europe, Asia, Africk, and America; 
 then the particular Divisions of the several King- 
 doms of Europe, into their respective Govern- 
 ments or Provinces. For everv Division there 
 
3(54 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS O? 
 
 is one Technical Line, composed of the first 
 syllables (or sometimes only of the first letters) 
 of the Parts or places into which it is subdivid- 
 ed ; which Syllables or Letters are distinguished 
 from the rest, in the Tables, by Small Capitals, 
 or an Hyphen following. 
 
 " 'Tis further to be observ'd, that the Begin- 
 ning, Middle, and Ending of the Line answer, 
 in order, to the Northern, Middle, and Southern 
 Divisions of the Kingdoms or Countries ; so that 
 not only the Places themselves, but in some 
 Measure their Situation with Respect to each 
 other may be remember'd at the same Time. 
 Thus in the Memorial Line for France, 
 
 Frarr P Nor-I-cham ; Bret-O-BuL; Gui-La-DaP. 
 
 " P Nor-I-cham denotes the four Northern 
 Governments, viz. P-icardy, NoRmandy, I-sIe 
 of France, and CHAMpagne. 
 
 f( Bret-O-BuL denotes the four Middle Go- 
 vernments, viz. BRETagne, O-rleanois, Bour- 
 gogne, and L-ionnois. 
 
 " Gui-La-Da-P denotes the four Southern 
 Governments, viz. Guienne with Gascony, Laii- 
 guedock, DAuphiny and P-rovence. 
 
 " It will be yet some further help to remem- 
 ber the Situation of Places, to observe, that in 
 the several Divisions I begin at the West, and go 
 on Eastward, as far as the Limits of the Coun- 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 365 
 
 try will allow, in a strait Line, unless where the 
 Irregularity of the Position makes this Method 
 inconvenient or impracticable : Where that is the 
 Case, the Reader will supply the Defect by his 
 own Observation, and by comparing with proper 
 Maps. 
 
 " Observe further, that where the Syllables 
 are connected with an Hyphen, the countries 
 denoted by them are contiguous from West to 
 East ; thus, 
 
 " Nor-I-cham shews that the Isle of France 
 joyns to Normandy on the East, and Champagne 
 to the Isle of France on the East. Where the 
 Syllables or Letters denoting two or more Coun- 
 tries are joyn'd together without an Hyphen, 
 there the Countries are contiguous from North 
 to South. Tims Gui-La-DaP shews that Lan- 
 guedock joyns to Guienne on the East, Dauphiny 
 and Provence to Languedock on the East; and 
 also that Provence is contiguous to, and South 
 of Dauphiny. Such Syllables as have an Hy- 
 phen preceding, but are not by it immediately 
 joyn'd to the foregoing Syllable, signifying that 
 the Countries denoted by them lie Eastward, but 
 are not contiguous. Thus Sp- It-Turk shews 
 that Italy is East of Spain, and Turky East of 
 Italy, but not contiguous. 
 
 " When the reader is become well acquainted 
 
 with the General Divisions, he may then go oja 
 i i 5 
 
866 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS t>F 
 
 to charge his Memory with his chief Cities, and 
 most remarkable Places of every Country ; their 
 Longitude and Latitude ; the Correspondence of 
 ancient and present Geography ; the Geography 
 of the Old and New Testament; the Propor- 
 tions of the Kingdoms of Europe to Great Bri- 
 tain ; the Situations of the most noted Islands ; 
 with other instructive and entertaining Particulars 
 in Geography : All which he will find himself 
 able to remember with greater Ease than he can 
 possibly imagine, till he is acquainted with the 
 Memorial Lines, contriv'd for that Purpose. 
 
 " The General Divisions of Europe, Asia, 
 Africk and America. 
 
 " I. EUROPE is divided into, 
 
 1. Northern; Containing NOrway, S-weden, 
 MOscovy ; D-enmark : 
 
 2. Middle ; Containing NEtherlands, GErmany, 
 POland, Little T-artary ; FRANce, SwiTzerlaud, 
 HuNgary, TRANsihania, MOldavia, VAlachia. 
 
 3. Southern ; Containing Spain with Portugal, 
 iTaly, TuRKy. 
 
 Eun=No-S-Mo D ; Ne-Ge-Po-IT Fran-Swits Hun-Tran 
 Mo-Va Sp-It-Turk, 
 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 367 
 
 " II. ASIA is divided into, 
 
 J . Northern ; Containing Great TArtary, GEor- 
 gia. 
 
 2. Middle; Containing TuRky in Asia ; PErsia, 
 Empire of the MOgul, CHiNa. 
 
 3. Southern ; Containing ARABia, East In Dies 
 
 As— Ta-Geo; Tur-P£ -Mo-Chin ; Arab-Ind 
 
 « III. AFRICK is divided into, 
 
 1. Northern; Containing BArbary, BiLdulgerid, 
 
 Egypt- 
 
 2. Middle; Containing ZAara, NEgroland, Gui- 
 nea, N-ubia. 
 
 3. Southern; Containing CoNgo, ABissinia, 
 Coast of Abex, Coast of CAFreria, MoNomotopa, 
 ZANGUebar, Coast of Ajan. 
 
 AFrrBaBil-E ; ZaNeGui-N ; Con-Abiss-Abe Caf-Mono- 
 Zangu-Aj . 
 
 « IV. AMERICA is divided into, 
 
 1. Northern; Containing New WALes, New 
 BRiTain, Lovisiana, CANada or New France, New 
 GRANada, MExico, FLORida, New England con- 
 taining these seven Provinces, (CARolina, Virginia, 
 MAryland, P-emilvauia, New YorIs, New J-arsey, 
 New ENGland properly so call'd,) lying from South- 
 West to North-East. 
 
868 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 2. S out hern ; Containing Terra FiRMa, Peru, 
 Country of the Amazohs, BRAsil, CAili, Para- 
 guay, MAGelianica. 
 
 N-AMnWal-Brit L6vi-Can GranMex-Flor (Car-Vi-Ma 
 
 P-YorJ Eng. 
 . S-AM=:Firm Pei-Amaz-Bra Chi-ParMag. 
 
 3. " Astronomy. 
 
 u The Technical Endings affixed to the Be- 
 ginnings of the Names of the Planets represent 
 the Number of Miles of their Diameters, Dis- 
 tances, Magnitudes, &c. according to the general 
 Key. Where the Beginning of the Word is 
 Technical, it is composed of the Syllables or 
 Letters distinguish'd in the Tables by Small 
 Capitals. 
 
 T< The D-iameters, fyc. of the Planets in Eng- 
 lish Miles, according to Dr. Derham's Astro- 
 theology. 
 
 Engl. Miler. 
 
 Luna [LuDdapu] 2175 
 
 MERCUry [MermDepok] 2748 
 
 Mars [MarDo/c/ra] 4875 
 
 VEnus [VeDoneip] 4£)S7 
 
 TERrseDiAm. [TerDiapouwt,^ 7967, % 
 
 SAturn [SaDni-ola] 93,451 
 
 Jupiter UuDat-sli] 130,653 
 
 Souis Diain. lSo\Diked-dfeO «22,148 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 369 
 
 w The Diameters of their Orbits. 
 
 Engl. Miles. 
 SATurn [D-orb-S&tasob-les-teis] 1641.526,386 
 
 Jupiter [JuRBkoul-atoth] 895.134,000 
 
 MArs [MnRBese-deid-naz] 262.282,910 
 
 TERra [D-orb-Terboid-aze-poul] 172.102,795 
 
 MErcury [MeRBsau-sebth] 06.621,000 
 
 VEnus [VeRBbef-okoi-baf] 124.487,114 
 
 LuNa [Dorb-lunopou-nyl] 479,905 
 
 SATurui ANnuli Diam. or theDia-"\ 
 
 meter of Saturn's Ring [Sat-anu- > 210,265 
 
 diddz-daul] J 
 
 - Ejusdem LATitudo, or the* 
 
 Breadth of Saturn's [ > 29,200 
 
 latidou-eg'] J 
 
 TERrae SuPERficies, or the super-* 
 
 flcial Conteut of the Earth [Ter- )> 199*444,205 
 
 s aperaun-fqf-ezau] 
 
 Ejusdem DiAineter [Dia pou-\ 7Q67 8 
 
 saijc] ) * 
 
 —-Ejusdem Orbitae PERiMeteo 5i0 . 6g( ~ 225 
 Itrermufy-skau-del] J 
 
 *' The Magnitudes or Solid Contents in Cubick 
 Miles of the larger Planets. 
 
 " MAGNITUdo. 
 
 Cubic Miles. 
 TERrae [Ter-magniteso-Artem] 264,856.000,000 
 
 S0 ^il g n,iU S ^"} *><W..OOO,000,000,000 
 
370 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Cubick Miles. 
 ^iL^f™ 2 -} S20.0U, 3 00.000,000 
 
 S ^f"} 4^.^3,300.000,000 
 
 " The Aitfbit or Circumference. 
 
 Evglish Miles. 
 Jons [Am jovisiprii-zot] 3f 9,043 
 
 T-errae [Am-Tel-yifi 2 5,03 1 
 
 SOLis [Am-so\e-leid-koit~\ 2.5S2,873 
 
 " The Memorial Lines. 
 
 "LnDdapu TtlerctiDepok MarDo/cpu TerT>iapousoi,k. 
 JuDdty-sJi VeDoweyj SaD»i-oZa, SolDiked-afei. 
 D-orb-Sktasob-les-ttw JuRBkohl-atoth MaRBese-deid-noz. 
 B-orb-Terkoid-uze-poul MeR&sau-scbth VeRBbef-okoi-btrf. 
 Sat-anu-didds-dauZ — latidou-eg- D-orb-\\mpuu-nyl. 
 Ter-superann-fof-ezau — diapousoi,k — PeTmufy-skaudel. 
 Ter-wa.%mtfao-klaum Mag-solis-eoi/r-Ttora-nril-mil. 
 Ma.g- J ovnez-zab-ezym S&t-magnitoep-dak & izym. 
 Am-jovisipod-zot Am-Tel-yib^Am-sole-leid-koit. 
 
 4. Coins, Weights, and Measures. 
 
 u The Beginning of the Words is composed 
 of the Initial Letters ; thus At-ta stands for 
 ATtick TAlent, Het for Hebrew T-alent; A J) 
 for A-ttick D-rachm ; A1d for Alexandrian 
 D-rachm ; HetO for Hebrew Talent of Gold ; 
 (Het standing for HE-brew T-alent as before, 
 and O for Or, or Gold) RoL for ROman 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 371 
 
 L-ibra, Den for De Nanus, Shek for SHEKel, 
 GreF for GttEcian F-oot, HeC for H Ebrew 
 C-ubit, RoFy for ROman F-oot Square, fyc. 
 
 " The Italick Endings of the Words represent 
 the Number of Pounds, Shillings and Pence, 
 which are separted from each other by Hyphens, 
 or else signified by the Roman Letters 1. s. d. 
 The double Lines denote Equality. Thus 
 A\i=.c\rag=t-ei-?i, signifies that an A-ttick 
 M-ina, which is equal to 100 Drachms, was 3 
 Pounds 8 Shillings and 9 Pence. The Letters, 
 though separated, are to be pronounced together ; 
 as t-ei-n tela. The Reader is to be reminded 
 here that re signifies |, ro £, &c. But Note, 
 that instead of the Fraction re, the Letter h is 
 sometimes used for Half, as oikbe'hzz7Ql c 2^ se. 
 7812 Pounds 10 Shillings." 
 
 This system of Dr. Grey reflects great credit 
 on the ingenuity of the author. Of the Memo- 
 ria Technica. Dr. Priestley observes, " it is so 
 easily learned, and may be of so much use in re- 
 collecting dates, when other methods are not at 
 hand, that he thinks all persons of a liberal edu- 
 cation inexcusable, who will not take the small 
 degree of pains that is necessary to make them- 
 selves masters of it ; or who think any thing 
 mean, or unworthy of their notice, which is so 
 useful and convenient."* 
 
 * Lectures on History, p. 157. 
 
172 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Richard Grey was born in the year 1695, 
 and was a learned divine of the Church of Eng- 
 land. He took his degree of M. A. at Lincoln 
 College, Oxford, in the year 1718-19. The 
 first preferment which he obtained, was the 
 Rectory of Kilncote, in Leicestershire, to which 
 he appears to have been instituted at an early 
 period of life ; and afterwards he was appointed 
 to the Rectory of Hinton, in Northamptonshire, 
 and to a Prebend in the Cathedral Church of St. 
 Paul. 
 
 In the year 1730, he published his Memo?-ia 
 Technica. In the same year also he published, 
 il A System of English Ecclesiastical Law, 
 extracted from the Codex Juris Ecclesiastici 
 Anglicani, of the Right Rev. the Lord Bishop 
 of London, for the use of young students in 
 the Universities, who are designed for Holy 
 Orders." 8°. For this work the University pre- 
 sented him with the degree of Doctor of Divi- 
 nity, by diploma, during the following year. It 
 was afterwards reprinted, at different periods, 
 with the addition of marginal references to the 
 pages in the Codex. 
 
 In the year 1736, he published a large ano- 
 nymous pamphlet, entitled, " The miserable 
 and distracted state of Religion in England, 
 upon the downfall of the Church established :" 
 and in the year 1738, " A new aud easy method 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 373 
 
 of learning Hebrew without Points. To which 
 is annexed,* by way of praxis, the Bjok of Pro- 
 verbs, divided according to the Metre; with the 
 massoretical Readings in Roman Letters, &c. 
 a grammatical analysis, and short notes, critical 
 and explanatory, etc. 8°." In the following 
 year, he published, on a large single sheet, " Ta- 
 bula exhibens paradiginata Verborum Hebrai- 
 corum regularium et irregularium, per omnes 
 Conjugationcs, Modos, Teinpora, et Personas, 
 plenius et accuratius excusa ;" and also, *' His- 
 toria Josephi Patriarchs, Literis tarn Romanis, 
 quam Hebraicis excusa, cum Versione Inter- 
 linear! S. Pagnini, & vocum Indico Analytico ; 
 praemitiitur nova Methodus Hebraice Discendi, 
 diligentiusrecognita, etc. *8°." These pieces 
 were again reprinted in 17-51. 
 
 In the year 1742, Dr. Grey published, u Liber 
 Jobi in versiculos Metrice divisus, cum Vtrsioue 
 Latina Alberti Schultens, notisque ex ejus Com- 
 mentariis excerptis, etc. Edidit, atque annota- 
 tions suas ad Metrum praecipue spectantes, 
 adjecit R. G. etc. Accedit Canticum Mo^sis 
 Deut. xxxii. cum Notis variorum, 8°." In the 
 preface to this work some strictures were intro- 
 duced on particular passages in Warburton's 
 " Divine Legation ;" to which that gentleman 
 replied in his " Remarks on several occasional 
 reflections," etc. This reply called iorth from 
 
 K K 
 
374 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Dr. Grey, in the year 1744, an " Answer to 
 Mr. Warburton's ' Remarks on several occa- 
 sional Reflections,' so far as they concern the 
 preface to a late edition of the Book of Job ; in 
 which the subject and design of that divine poem, 
 are set in a full and clear light, and some parti- 
 cular passages in it occasionally explained," etc . 8°. 
 In the year 1746, Dr. Grey occupied the 
 post of official and commissary of the Arch- 
 deaconry of Leicester. In 1749, he published, 
 " The last words of David, divided according to 
 the metre, with notes critical and explanatory," 
 4°. This last publication, except new editions 
 of his former pieces, was an English translation 
 of Mr. Hawkins Browne's poem, " De Animas 
 Immortalitate," which appeared in 1753. Be- 
 sides the articles enumerated above, Dr. Grey 
 printed some single u Sermons," preached on 
 public occasions. He died in 1771, in the 
 seventy-eighth year of his age.* 
 
 66. Mnemonics delineated in a small 
 compass and easy 3Iethod, for the 
 better enabling to remember what is 
 most frequently ivanted, and most 
 difficultly retained or recollected, 
 8°. Lond. 1737. 
 
 * Nichols' Anecdotes of Bowyer. 
 
 I 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 375 
 
 This extremely rare tract, compiled by Solo- 
 mon Lozce, contains 14 pages in a very small type, 
 besides the title and the advertisement which is 
 printed on the back of the title, making a single 
 sheet of demy, 8°. As Dr. Watts has consi- 
 dered this tract as a material improvement of 
 Grey, and as some of the purchasers of the pre- 
 sent volume may choose to practise the scheme 
 of Grey and Lowe, we have thought proper in 
 this edition, to reprint the whole of the original 
 tract as it has become extremely rare ;-r-and 
 although lately reprinted, it cannot be purchased 
 without the incumbrance of the Memoria Tech- 
 nica of G<c-\ ; a sufficient specimen of which 
 has already been given. 
 
 ADVERTISEMENT. 
 
 " The key to this art (so far as relates to 
 the expressing of numbers by Letters) we owe 
 to the ingenious Dr. Grey. What follows may 
 be considered as a supplement to and improve- 
 ment of his Memoria Technica : for most of 
 die articles are what, perhaps^ did not occur to 
 
376 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 him: and the rest I think are reformd* to great 
 purpose; particularly those of Weights, Coins, 
 and Measures ; of which I have given a full 
 account in less than three pages, whereas the 
 Doctor's (though very defective) amounts to 
 31. Those who are curious will add such par- 
 ticulars, as they have most occasion for; in 
 order to lay up a treasure of useful principles 
 in their heads ; for the greatest part of which 
 they must, otherwise, from time to time, have 
 recourse to books; or, where those are not at 
 hand be disappointed ; how much soever it may 
 be to their discredit or prejudice. I need not 
 inform those who have the education of youth, 
 whether in schools, or universities, how much 
 something of this nature would expedite the pro- 
 gress of their pupils, and show them to advan- 
 tage; furnish betimes with a satisfactory cer- 
 tainty, readiness, and exactness, in things, of 
 which Masters themselves, and men of reading, 
 have generally but an imperfect and confused 
 remembrance. I shall only add (to obviate an 
 objection, that may naturally offer itself to such 
 as are unacquainted with things of this nature) 
 that how difficult and forbidding soever the jar- 
 gon of this art may appear; nothing will stick 
 
 * We have preserved Mr. Lowe's orthography through- 
 out. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 377 
 
 more effectually in the memory, when once 
 familiarise! by frequent repetition so as to flow 
 
 into the mind without reflection. N.B. The 
 
 accents denote the first syllable of a dactyl. 
 
 " SOLOMON LOWE." 
 
 Directions for the better learning to remember 
 Jignres or numbers exprest by Letters. 
 a e i o u au oi ei ou y 
 123456 7 8 9 
 b- d t f 1 s j) k n z 
 g 100. th 1,000. m 1.000,000. 
 r denotes fractions, as follows : ,ro \ : ,iro £ : 
 d,cri2^: ,rag,01. 
 
 SHritfpnctic 1 . 
 
 Arit timet ical Characters. 
 
 -f and : — less : X multiplied-t'nto : -f- divided- 
 by : 3S is, gives. 
 
 The Division of the old Roman AS, viz. any Integer, 
 or Whole. 
 
 Lnica, Sext. Qua Trtens. Quinc. Sem. Sept. Bes, 
 Dodra Dext. Deu. 
 
 AS, parts 
 
 12 
 
 Semissis 
 
 Deunx 
 
 11 
 
 Quincunx 
 
 Dextans 
 
 10 
 
 Triens 
 
 Dodrans 
 
 9 
 
 Quadrats, 
 
 Bessis 
 
 8 
 
 Sextans 
 
 -Septunx 
 
 7 
 
 Ungia 
 
 
 - K K 
 
 3 
 
S79 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OP 
 
 COINS. 
 
 Coins reducd to Farthings. 
 
 1 E.] 3 Sh-oA\ Cr-g/y.] N-tVfe. Ange oAz. U-aufy. 
 
 Gui-bzyk. Car-buzo, Jzc-beg. 
 
 2 H. Ger-/] Be-//. Sh-ofo. *Man-saps. iTal-ldeith 
 
 feil] Sh-aple. Tal-«/« dusth. 
 
 3 G. Lep-,tar7tau. DYchiil a,pre/. 6b-«,r<w]*Dr-i&. 
 
 4. State r-ado. 
 
 4 R. T,oipurath. %As4,raz\ Ses-p,irf. Y-al,r<>. 
 Den-/6. Sp-o/7.] Aiir-oipu. 
 
 ("Drachm] Heb-is. Att-tt. Alex-tid— 
 \ Min] Att-%. lt&lekeiz. 
 |Tal] Alt-boukth. Bab-efafA.] Att-ibauth 
 \ eig. Bab-//?? tiunsth. R-akyth. 
 ) Stater (gold) Att-/wi7 Cyz-Phil-Alex- 
 \ dap. Croes-Dhu-biily . 
 ' As weighd o\mc£s-tid, V-C-boziz : e ; fouz; 
 lip: -are; his. 
 
 1 
 
 MONEY. 
 
 Sums of Money, or Money of Account. 
 
 5 C(E)Penn-/. Gr-as. Pound easy. (G)Tal. 
 
 £ MlN. JEgi-g^zubss. 5 Ant-sy=:g. 
 § 5 Bcboizzz tuns. Yt-azzz azii. Syr-al=poi!.Ty- 
 
 \ iimi-eiz=fait. 
 ~ 5(R-)Sestfrce io-at/i, duo, bini nummi 
 
 \ to-a;«, duo, bina, 
 
 C — stertia; or mi Ilia sestertiunv above by 
 
 \ the adverbs, as follows : 
 o V^is sestartium, or bis; understanding millia 
 
 £ centum (or centena). 
 
 6 Abbreviatures cxplaind. 
 JEginta niina, talentum (liu ) L>. Alexandrina 
 drachma, * ; stater, |. Angel, I . Antiochica min. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 975 
 
 tal. 5. As, 4. §. Attica drachma, *, mina, *, sta- 
 ter, | ; talentum, 4.. Aureus denarius, 4. Baby- 
 lonica min. tal. 4. Bekah, 2. Carolus, 1. Crcesius 
 stater, 4.. Crown, 1 . Cyzicenus stater, 4.. Darcius 
 stater, 4. Denarius, 4. Dichalcos, 3. Drachma 3. 
 Gerah 2. Grout , 5. Guinea, 1. Hebraica drach- 
 ma,*. Jacobus, 1. Italica mina,*. Lepton, 3. Ma- 
 neh, 2, Mark, 1. Mina ,-, 5. Noble, 1. Obolus, 3. 
 Penny , 5. Philippicus stater, 4 . Pound, 5. Pto- 
 lemaica min. tal. 6. Romanum talentum, 1. Ses- 
 tertium, 7. Sestertius, 4. Shekel, 2. Shilling, 1. 
 Sportula, 4. Stater, 3. Syria min. tal. 6. Talen- 
 tum c , 2, 5. Teruncius, 4. Tyria min. tal. 6. Vic- 
 toriatus, 4. 
 
 6 Synonyms and Equivalents. 
 
 .lis, as. Assariuni, as. Attica minor mina—™no- 
 chica. Attica major mino—iyx'm. Bigittus, denarius, 
 Centussis, 100 asses. Chalcos, h dicbalchos. T)e- 
 cussis c , 10 asses. Didrachmon, 2 drachma?. Dio- 
 bolon, 2 oboli. Dupondius , 2 asses. Etiheea mi- 
 wanantioehia. Hemiobolon, h obolus. I am eat, 
 carolus. Libella, as. Libra (or libra pondo) — mina 
 attica. Mna, mina, Nojinssis, 9 asses. Nummus, 
 sestertius. Obolus, }, noble. Octussis, S asses. Pen- 
 tadrachmon, 5 drachmae. Pondo, v. libra. Qua- 
 drans, \ as, \ noble. Quadrigatus, denarius. Qua- 
 drussis , 4 asses. Quinarius, vifctoriatus. Quin- 
 quessh c , 5 asses. Rhodiazz aeginea. Sembella, se- 
 milibella. Semilibella, \ libella. Semunica, \ uncia. 
 Sescuncia, 1 h uncia. Sextans c , \ as. Septula , -' 
 uncia. Solidus, aureus. Tetradrachmon, 4 drach- 
 mae. Tetrobolon, 4 oboli. Tressis, 3 asses. 7W- 
 cess/s, 30 asses. Tridrachmon, 3 drachma. Tri- 
 ens c , i as. Triobolon, 3 oboli. Vigessis, 20 asses. 
 UnciaS £ as - 
 
 1 N. B. The several coins, measures, and tceights, being 
 reducd to the lowest denominations, the memorial verses 
 answer all the purposes of the largest tables : (l)The dif- 
 
380 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 ference of any two terms being known by subtraction a : 
 and (i) How many of any make one of another, by divi- 
 sion b . e g. (a) What is the difference between a Shilling 
 
 and a Shekel? Answ. (Sh-ubzJ 110 — (Sh ok) 4 8— 62 q. 
 i. e. S 2 : 3 : -2 — S 1 r= S l s 3 : 2, the shekel more than 
 the shilling, (b) How many Spans make a Fathom t Answ. 
 Fath-oi'i/) 72-f-(Spa-») 9— 8. Accordingly, if it be 
 (askd, (that is a fathom ? (and so of any other) the answer 
 may be made, the same way, in any of the prior denomina- 
 tions : e. g. 21 palms, or 6 feet, or 4 cubits, or 2 yards, or 
 1 l-jjth pace, &c. 
 
 2 Any whole was called AS, and 1 twelfth of it Unci a 
 [whence our terms of ounces for weight, and inches for 
 length]. The several numbers of those unciee (between 1 
 
 and 12) were denominated, in order, as follows in 
 
 text: viz. Sextans (i.e. i-6th) 2 Quadrans (J) 3, &c. — and 
 express their manner of reckoning Interest of money: thus 
 ztsiira asses [centesimee] was 1 per month [12 per year] 
 per cent, (suppose aurei, or pounds: deunces, 11 twelfths 
 per month, and so on to unciarice, 1 twelfth per month [l 
 per year] e. g. 20d. per month, 20s. per year. 
 
 3 Of the three apartments distinguisht by brackets, in 
 the 1st are Brass or Copper- ; 2d, Silver ; 3d, Gold-coins. 
 
 ■ — NB. (1 ) Sh-o/c (as appears by the Abbreviatures ex- 
 
 plaind underneath, and by the key above) signifies Shilling 
 48: i.e. a shilling is 4S farthings ; and so of the rest. (2) 
 y (the memorial letter) may be pronouncd wee or wi, te 
 distinguish it from i : e. g. Cr-efy, as if it were Cr-efwi. 
 
 4 i. e. in the year (Urbis Conditce) from the building of 
 
 the cit> of Rome, 190. e.fouz; i. e. U. C. 490, when the 
 
 Punic war had exhausted the treasury, it weighed but 2. and 
 so of the rest. 
 
 5 i. e. the iEginean mina was (ubss) 5656 q : (g) 100 of 
 which made the jEginean talent, and so of the rest. 
 
 6 N. B. In these lists — those in Italic are moneys of ac- 
 count, the rest, coins. — The Figures and Marks refer to the 
 corresponding memorial verses. 
 
 (c) N.B. There are also Coind Half-guineas, Seven-shil- 
 ling pieces, Half-crowns, Three-pences, Two-pences, Half- 
 pennies ; and such as are distingusht by a superior c . 
 
 { 
 
 MEASURES. 
 
 Cubic Measures redmd to Pints. 
 Quar-d. *Gal-fc. R-a/6. Bar-e/cf. Ti (wine) 
 Us. H-uzf. P-aii^S. B-athei. T-ethbau. 
 
;o { 
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 381 
 
 s | Firk-bow?, as/.i Kil-iiAefc, ba^* (beer & ale) 
 \ B<\r-bdeik, adus. H6g-xlad, hups. 
 
 3 y Fe-bs. Btt-so. Str-aek. Cooxu-dus (dry) Se- 
 £ iib£. Ch-etzo. We-ithpe. La-lady. 
 
 4 r(Uq.) C-,urei. L-irb. Cab-i. H-az (h) Seah-tfy. 
 J Bath-sy. Hora-awzK (-wirf. 
 
 ~S Cab-,rfwraw. Gom-tiraz. Se-boi (dry) Ba-/#. 
 
 V. Le-dlaii. H6mer-/«£. 
 g /'Coch-,r^</y. Ch-rawz. Myst,rok (g) Conch-,raf. 
 
 J Oxyba-.rei- Metr-m. 
 „\ Coch-,r#dy. Ghoen-ftrg. MSdim-pg (dry) Cy- 
 
 v_ Ox-Coty-Xest as the Roman. 
 g /-Quart ,rti. S6-ff,r/. C6-p. Ur-f£-r# (r) Qua- 
 
 J dr-up. Cu\£bafp. Li. Cy. Ace. Hem. 
 ( ,"S Lig-,reA:. Cy-rarf. Acet-,?-ei. Hem (dry) in,re. 
 V. Se-fl,r#. f Mod-as,re. 
 * Gallon contains inches (dry) doid,rb ~ : 
 (he^r)-eke : (wine) eta 3 . 
 j j V t Pottle Quarts (dr-) i (liquid)-e — t Modi- 
 £ Pints (liquid)-fln (dry) bau,ro. 
 
 Abbreviatures explaind. 
 
 Acetabulum (lin.) 9, S. Barrel, 1. Bath, 4. Bush- 
 el, 3. Butt, 1. Cab, 4. Caph, 4. Cheme, 6. Chau- 
 dron, 3. Chcenix, 7- Cochlearion, 6. Concha, 6*. 
 Congius, 8. Coomb, 3. Culeus, 8. Cyathus, 9. 
 Firkin, 2. Gallon, 1. Comer, 5. Hemina, 9. Hin, 4. 
 Homer, 4, 5. Hogshead, 1, 2. Kilderkin, 2. Last, 3. 
 Letech, 5. Ligula, 9, S. Log, 4. Medimnus, 7. 
 Metretes, 6. Modius, 9, 1 1 . Mystron, 6. Oxyba- 
 phon, 7. Peck, 3. Pottle, 11. Puncheon, 1. Qua- 
 drantal, 8. Quart, 1. Rundlet, 1. Seal), 4, 5. 
 Seam, 3. Sextarius, S, 9. Strike, 3. Tierce, 1. 
 Tun, 1. Urna, 8. Wey, 3. 
 
 Synonyms and Equivalents. 
 
 Amphora, quadrantal. Amphoreus, metretes. Ca- 
 dus, metretes. Caniock, coomb. Chos, congius. 
 Coron, homer. Cotyle, hemina. Ephah, bath. Lin- 
 gula, ligula. Omer, homer. Oxybaphon, acetabu- 
 
PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 lum. Pipe, butt. Quarter, seam. Quartarius, J sex- 
 tarius. Semimodius, \ niodius. Xestes, sextarius. 
 
 1 i.e. A Firkin (l) of Beer 72 pints. (2) of Ale— 64 
 pints, and so of the rest. 
 
 2 By act of parliament, in 1697, the gallon contains only 
 26s i, inches. 
 
 5 
 
 3 By experiment, made in 168S, it was found to contain 
 only 224 inches. 
 
 o — 
 
 /•Nail-rf.ro. Pal-f. Han- 
 
 J Cuhl-bei. E (f 1) e> (e 
 
 ] Y-is. Pa-sy. Fath-pe. S 
 
 v MisiHii. Le-miles 3. 
 
 Long Measures reducd to Inches. 
 
 *NaiW,ro. Pal-f. Hiin-o. Spa-n. Toot-ad. 
 (eng) ol. 
 
 Ro-bouk. Furl-oindy. 
 ity. 
 
 $ H. Pal-/. Sp-ad. C-ef. T-ous. Ez-6o/. Ar-and. 
 1 Schoen andy. §\anaug. M-ousth. 
 . V G. Dor-/. Lich-te. Orth-c&. Sp-ad. Pygm-ak. 
 
 C. Py-dz. O-naii. St-?iaug. M-oiskyz. 
 5 V R. Unc-#,W. Pal-/. Pe-Zw. Palm-dy, Cuoef. 
 X Gra-Ary. Pass-A:y. Sta-byth. 
 Proportions. 
 
 § 5 Line-be. Bar-i. Digit, Inch (Heb. Gk. Rom.) 
 
 £ nad: ,pulo: peldu 1 . [M 2 -eizth. 
 - 5 Foot — Eng-ath. — Grek-tfzyp. — 3 Rom (coss) 
 £ naup (st) ovpe, (ves) onkuu. 
 
 Abbreviatures explaind. 
 Arabian pole, 3. Barley-corn 6*. Cubit— pygem, 
 pygon, pechus 1, 3, 5. Digit, 6\ Doronzrpalm, 4. 
 Ell (flemish, english) 1. Ezekiel's reed, 3. Fathom, 
 2,3. Footrrpouszrpes 1, 5, 7- Furlong— stadium 
 2, 3, 4, 5. Gradus, 5. Hand, I. League, 2. 
 Lichas, 4. Line, 6. Milerzmilionrzmiliare 2, &c. 
 Nail I. Orguai, 4. Orthodoron, 4. Pacerzpassus 
 2, 5. Palm=:doron 1, 3, 5. Palmipes, 5. Passusr: 
 pace, 5. Pes — foot, 5. Pygme, 4. Pygon, 4. Rod, 
 2. Schoenus, 3. Span=spithame 1, 3, 4. Spithame 
 — span, 4. Stadium:=furlong 4, 5. Uncia,5. Yard, 2. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 383 
 
 Synonyms and Equivalents. 
 
 Amniah, cubit. Aulos, furlong. Chebal, schce- 
 nus, Cubit (lesser; pygnie (greater) pe< frys. Dactyio- 
 dochme, doron. Diaulos, 2 stadia. Docbipe, doron. 
 Gomed, span. Kaneb, EzekieTs reed Measuriog- 
 rod, schceuus. Mili are,-on: mile. Paiaeste, doron. 
 Pathil, schoenus. Pechys, cubit. Perch, rod. Pole, 
 rod. Pollex, uucia. Pous, pes. Tophach, palm, 
 Ulna, cubitus, Zereth, span. 
 
 1 N. B. The Dixit is sometimes divided into 4 grains i 
 the Line into 6 potnfs. 
 
 2 N. B. A Sablath day's journey is reckoned to be 730 
 paces: 6 of which made the Parasang, 48 a. Day's journey. 
 
 3 i. e. The proportion of the Roman foot to the English 
 
 (divided into iooo parts) is here expres:, as found on 
 
 the monument of Cossutius on that of Stati'.ius -on a 
 
 congius of Vespasian. 
 
 Square Measures reducd to Square Feet. 
 
 c E. Yar-n, Pace-tfu. P61e-6pe,ro\ RoSd axkoux. 
 \ A.cr&-6tusy. 
 
 {G. Plethron- azasf. Aroura, the half: but 
 iEgyptian itda m. 
 
 {R. higtr-esouty. Cii-tisau. YZ-nily- (mtn) 
 A-fbke (qu) at faux. 
 
 Abbreviatures explaind. 
 
 Actus minimus, quadratus, 3. China, 3. Jugeruru, 
 3, Versus, 3. Yard, 1. 
 
 from 7 
 by 12 
 
 MULTIPLICATION TABLE. 
 
 C CP-oi,ow.P-ei,ws. P-ou,si. K-ei,so"\ 
 \ I K-ou,p£. N-ou,f ia. I 7 X 7 
 
 Y rF-ad/«. L-ad,sy. S-ad,o?rf. F. f =49 
 (_ 1 ad,fo. K-ad,ott#M, N-ad,axei. J 
 
384 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 NUMERICAL LETTERS. 
 
 /-In Numerals] A less number, afore, Abates 1 ; 
 
 1 J after, En creases . 
 
 2 | l-b. V u. X-az. L-uz. C-azy. D-tiyz, 
 L M (ci a ■ 1 ) ath ; hence (cci3o) byth, 
 
 r tf-b. *i-di. p ag % — X5-bu 5 — froin-wg" by Y^O"! 
 
 3 J to 0UZ1/ 6 CCCI030 
 
 4* 1, J .at h by the Units?: butoftner by tf?$, pre- 
 
 v fixing the numbers 8 [azyth. 
 
 Ca.-b. i-az. p ag 4 . r-au, (y) koppa-wy (t«<) 
 5^ J sanpi-owyz 9 . d. (x a »)azyz 
 6 j I b. u-ii. k-tiz. U-ag. K-ath. M-azth. n-mul- 
 
 ^- tipiies others inscrib'd in't 10 . 
 
 1 e. e. IV 4, IX 9, XL 40, XC 90. 
 
 2 e g. VI 6, XIV 14, XIX 19, XXJX 29 
 
 H> 11, 3 1* : «P 101 » 2p 102 '« n > f<* 101 > & c - 
 
 3Formd, in current writing, from M : part whereof, 
 
 united, (viz. is) became D 500. hence 133 5000, 1333 50000. 
 4. i. e. Units, tens, hundreds, begin from the letters here 
 
 specified ; and are to be reckoned on, in order, from them. 
 
 e.g. « 1, |3 2, y 3; &<*. < 10, x 20, X 30, &c. f 100, o" 200 & c . 
 
 5 Instead of n ', being the ineffable name of Jehovah. 
 
 6 e. g. T 500, C3 600, T 700, &c. 
 
 7 Before the letters expressive of hundreds ; as, -plN 
 1534: very seldom otherwise ;^1070. 
 
 8 e. g. 'O^SfrN 2000, O^EMO 3000, OWN? 30000, 
 tec. 
 
 9 The various figures and names of these numerical cha- 
 racters, see in my Table of Greek characters. 
 
 10 e. g. a (10) inscribed in n (5) is fSl (50.) 
 
 PRACTICE. 
 
 1. If one 1 ? the sought into Price 9 , or its factors 3 ; 
 * or by Aliquot parts 4 , and by the Aliquots of 
 
 Fractions of Sought (if any) divide Price 5 . 
 
 2. What'll One 6 ? the Price by Commodity 1 ; but, 
 if too large, by its factors 8 . 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 
 
 385 
 
 1 i. e. In questions, where the conditional term isl : as, 
 when we say, " If one cost so much, what will so much 
 cost? 
 
 2 i. e. Multiply the question-term, or thing sought, into 
 
 the price &c. e: g. If one costs 10s. what will 20 cost? 
 
 &c. Answ. 20 (the thing sought) x 10 (the price)— 200s. 
 i. e. 101. 
 
 3 viz. when more commodious. e. g. If one cost 
 
 12 ] 6, what will 14 ? Answ. The factors of 14 being 2x7; 
 
 say 2 X 12 | 6=:25s : then 7 X 25s~ 175s. i. e. 81. 15- . 
 
 N.B. If the multiplicator be not resolvable into factors, 
 take those that come nearest it, am! add the price for the 
 odd one, or multiply it by what the factors want of the 
 multiplicator. 
 
 4 Divide it by the Even parts of the denomination, in 
 which you would have the answer. — e. g. If one cost 12 | 6, 
 what will 14? Answ. 10s. being the | of 11. and 2 | 6 (which 
 makes up the 12 | 6) the \ of 10s : say 2 in 14z^7l. then, 
 4 in 7 (the quotient of 14 by 2)^1 ; and there remains 31. 
 which, in the next inferior denomination (viz. Shillings) 
 is 60, then 4 in 60z:15s. 
 
 Thus ... 14 
 
 "8 C s io \ s 7 . 
 r2 •*» * f 2 > 
 
 jg £d \ 6 J & 1 15 
 
 14 pds. pks. &c. 
 
 10 2 » 7 - 
 
 2 5 > 1 8 
 
 <5 4 Sb _ 7 
 
 S 12:6 L8:15 
 5 As in the following example : 
 
 Sl2:6 L8:15 
 
 C qr. lb 
 
 1 s d 
 
 
 84 3 11 
 
 at l l 10 
 
 
 11. s 1^=21 s 
 
 qr 2| - 10 11 
 
 
 — 
 
 if - 5 5 
 
 8 
 
 6-2 £ 84 
 
 lb 7i- - 14 
 
 1 
 
 3 = <3 168 
 
 4* - - 9 
 
 1 
 
 d6£ 42 
 
 
 
 4i 28 
 
 
 
 q3. Ibll.sl8:6 
 
 3q. lllb. 18 6 - 
 aliq. of fract. pr. of fract. 
 
 In all.. 1852:6 The answer: which, being 
 halv'd f 92 : 12 : 6 ; the price of C 84 : 
 gives - \ qr 3 : lb 11. 
 
 6 i. e. In sums, wherein the Question-term is 1 ; as when 
 we say, " If so much cost so much, What'll one cost?" 
 
 7 e. g. If 12 cost 10 | 6, what will l ? Answer, 12 in 
 10, | 6 I cannot have ; but 12 in 10 x 12 (to reduce it t& 
 
 LL 
 
380 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 pence)— 1204-6— 126 : then 12 in 126rzHkl. and 6 remains ; 
 which multiplied into 4 (to reduce it to farthings) is 24 : 
 then 12 in 24~2 q. 
 
 tj,..c fins 10:6:- I or, by the factors of 
 1DUS \12 - 10 2 | 12, viz. 
 
 2 X 6, or 3 x 4 ; as in the following- : 
 8 The foregoing example will stand 
 
 f in s 10 : 6 : - in slO : 6 : - 
 Thus 1 2 5 3 - 2 3 6- 
 
 (.6 10 2 4 - 10 2 
 
 So the answer is found more easily than by dividing by 12 : 
 much more so it will be, when that number is higher. 
 
 RULE OF THREE. 
 
 All Questions in it answer d (1) by one stating (2) 
 the same loay. 
 
 (1) Conditional in one line: and, opposite, the 
 terms Corresponding : 
 
 (2) -Dend is the -Ducing of one into -Duc'd of the 
 other : the Rest SoR l . 
 
 N.B. No -Duc'd: the facit of one line divide by 
 that of the other 2 . 
 
 1 i.e. The producing a terms of one line multiplied into 
 the xitoduc'd b of the other, give the diviDEND ; and the rest 
 of the terms multiplied together, give the diviSoR: the 
 
 Quotient falls to the blank . (a) Producing terms are 
 
 such as jointly produce any effect, e. g. whatever is consi. 
 derd as a cause, with the adjuncts of time, distance, mea- 
 sure, Sfc. (b) Producing terms are such as are connected 
 with the others under the character of price, purchase, pro- 
 duce, gain, loss, interest, advantage, value or quantity of 
 
 work, §c. (c) e. g. At the rate of 6 per cent: per ann. 
 
 what is the interest of 2001. for 18 months? Answ. The 
 terms being stated, as they offer (without any other regard 
 than Which are conditional, and Which imply the question) 
 Thus: 
 
 Interest Principal time 
 61. 10ol. 12 m. 
 
 200 18 
 
 cr in any other order agreeable to the directions in the rule 
 say " 6 (the produced term of one line) x 18 x 200 (the 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 
 
 387 
 
 producing terms of the other)~2 1600 (for the dividend) : 
 And (the rest) loo x 12:— 1200 (for the divisor). Then 
 21600-7-1200:^18, the answer ; viz. lsl. 
 
 2 i. e. If there be no produc'd term (as generally happens 
 in the single rule of three inverse) divide thejacit, &c- - 
 e.g. How much stuff, yard-broad, will line 10 yards of 
 cloth, yard-and-quarter broad? The terms being stated 
 thus : 
 
 broad long I say 5 X 10~50 
 
 4 qrs I and 30 —- 4CZ12 24th 
 
 5 10 yard. J i. e. 12 yards and 2-4 or £. 
 
 SUBTRACTION. 
 
 May be more conimodiously performed by Addition; 
 as in the next article. 
 
 TABULATING. 
 
 To multiply and divide by Addition only, 
 
 1. TVke-doubie-Multiplicand facits f every multi- 
 
 pi icator. f gives (lie f. of. 
 
 2. Tabulate Divisor: Quote next digit-under: Sub- 
 
 i i)v Addition. 
 
 l.Tn theMu'LTiPLiCATioN sum (i) 
 the facits of the multiplicand twice 
 doubled, are, as they stand against 
 the digits 2 and 4. 1 hen, To mul- 
 tiply the multiplicand into 8 
 
 (the last figure of the multiplicator) 
 
 double the facit of the digit 4 
 
 into 6 (the 2d figure, &c.) add 
 the facit of 4 to that of 2 — o' 
 
 into 7 (the next figure, &c.) 
 
 add together the facits of i , 2, 4 
 ( — :7i placing each of them, as in 
 the common method of multipli- 
 cation- 
 
 2. In theDjvisioN-sum (II) (l) 
 Tabulate the divisor, as in the ex- 
 ample, viz. against the digit 2, 
 by adding the divisor to itself; 
 against 3, by adding together the 
 
 Multipli-cand cator 
 98765* 768 
 197530 (1) 
 395060 
 
 ■by 
 
 to i 
 §; -2 
 
 ST 4 
 
 79012018 g 
 §. 592590 7 -l 
 j» 691355 1 6 ^ 
 
 (II) 
 
 fc) 75851520—768 
 2' 673794 1536 
 § 5898 2304 
 1 43. 3072 
 Quotient (III) 3840 
 98765-i-968 4603 
 1929 1936 5376 
 Quotient: 102 6144 
 . 6912 
 
388 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 totals of 2 and l ; against 4, by adding the total of^a to 
 itself, or that of 3 to that of l ; and, in like manner, in trie 
 rest, by adding together the totals of any two or more 
 digits, equal to the digit whose total is sought. Then, (2j 
 Quote (or, for the quotient, take) the digit against the total 
 next less, or under the first corresponding figures of the di- 
 vidend, viz. 7585. Then, instead of subtracting, according 
 to the common method, the facit of the divisor by 9 (via. 
 6912) from (7585) the corresponding figures of the divi- 
 dend (3) Subtract hy addition, and say [not, 2 from 5, and 
 there remains 3 ; but 2, and (so much as will make 5, viz.) 
 3 is 5: then 1, and (as much as will make 8, viz.) 7 is 8 : 
 then 9, and [what will make 1 5 (since 9 cannot be taken 
 from 5) viz.] 6 is 15 a , then I, that I borrow, and 6 is 7 : 
 
 and so on. In the DivisiON-sum (III) it appears 
 
 that- All the tabulating necessary to find the quotient, 
 
 is only to double the divisor : for, the total next less than 
 (the 1st dividend) 987, is 968; therefore quote 1: then 
 (the £d dividend) 196 has no total less ; therefor© quote : 
 then the next total less than (the 3d dividend) 1905, is (the 
 2d total, viz.) 1936; therefore quote a.— — — And, in like 
 manner, may be tabulated any sum, by steps, as there shall 
 be occasion. 
 
 (a) N. B. 15, being the last sound in the mouth of the 
 •perator, does more readily and certainly remind him of 
 what he borrowd, than in the common way of subtra«»ion; 
 ■which is no small advantage to this method. 
 
 WEIGHTS. 
 
 Troy Weight, for Gold, Silver, Jewels, Grains, 
 and Liquors. 
 
 Monyers reducd to Blanks. 
 
 1 MoN. YZrU-ef-Droit-olcy Miteabth-iidy Grain- 
 
 dizozy. 
 
 Goldsmiths and Apothecaries Weight reducd to 
 Grains. 
 
 2 (Gold,) CSr-o *. Pen do (Ptf.) Scrup-rfy. Drara- 
 
 auz. Oxiuce-oky ¥<5-loisy. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. oS[) 
 
 Averdupois Weight, for Baser-metals, Bread, 
 Mercery. Grocery, 6~c. 
 
 Wool, redned to Pounds. 
 
 5 ■ Clove-o/ Stone-6o Tod-eA: Weigh-fteuf. Sack- 
 tanf. Lzst-Jisei. 
 
 Other Things. 
 
 4 Pound-ounce as. Hun-pounds-aft?. hun-Fother- 
 
 an-are : Tun-es. 
 
 Hebrew Weights, reducdto Grains, 
 i ZuraT/ - . Bck-szei. Shek-tbei ~. Man-efav'xy. Tal- 
 
 amnyth. 
 
 Greek and Roman Weights. 
 
 f. C Lens, ktirahe. Lept tairek. Chalch-a,re Sil, \ *• 
 °l t,r£k. Ob ou-trc/c. J° 
 
 y f Seript-a/f,fra/. Dra-(/",o?/r^y. — %c\t-oid,surp. \ _, 
 ' L Sicil-a^H.rr/;. J 
 
 o J Duell Z>o/,wn>f*. Vnc-Jip,roi. Libra- 1 
 
 I Irfu-Iroi. S 
 
 Prvportions. 
 
 9 Grains Eug\lih-hi/,re make French-oA?/,Dutcu- 
 cpou. 
 
 10 OlNCE has grains \\iv-ofei, Tioy-f ouz * : a? 
 
 djy to »t£ l . 
 
 11 Pound Aver-heavter than Troy by 2 ounces, 4 
 
 drams, and 2 scruples. 
 
 Abbreviatures explaind. 
 
 Bekah, 5. Carat, 2 Chalchos, 6. Drachma, 7. 
 Duella, 8. Hundred-weight 4. Lepton, 6*. Maueh, 
 5. Obolus, 6. Penny-weight, 2. Pound, 2. Scrip- 
 tulum, J. Scruple, 2. Sextula, 7. Shekel, 5. Si- 
 cilicus, 7 Siliqua, 6. Talent, 5. Uncia, 8. Zu- 
 zab, 5. 
 
3Q0 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Synonyms. 
 
 Gramma, scruple Reratiou, siliqua. Lens, grain. 
 Litra, libra. Quintal, hundred-weight. Sitarion, 
 grain. 
 
 1 N. B. The Grains, us'd in weighing Diamonds, are some- 
 what lighter than those us'd in gold, &c. 
 
 2 i.e. 218, according to Bp. Cumberland: 268, according 
 to father Mersenne. 
 
 3 So that the averdupois-ounce is less by 4-2 grains than 
 the troy-ounce ; which amounts to near a 12th part of the 
 whole. 
 
 4 i. e. 73 ounces-troy make 80 ounces-averdupois. 
 
 MARCH, 
 
 The 1st Day, to find on what Day of the Week 
 it happens. 
 
 1 The year, more 2 and even-4th, divide by 7 : 
 
 [given 
 S By what remains (i'SrO sat 1 sund. and-so-on) it is 
 
 E.G. Ann. Dom. 26 + 2+6 (its even 4th) ~ 34 -f- 7, 
 retnains 6 : i.e. friday ; accounting Saturday 0, sunday i, 
 
 monday a, &c. Before Christ, reckon Backward ; viz. 
 
 Sunday l, Saturdays, and so on to monday 0. e.g. Bef. 
 Ch. 7 + 2+1 (its even 4th) ~ 10 + 7, remains 3 ; i. e. 
 friday.— —Of the other months to find the l st day, and con- 
 sequently what day of the week any day is ; V, Signs. 
 
 MONTHS, 
 
 The Number of Days in each, with the Days of 
 the No7ies and Ides. 
 
 Ap S6 No" June-?z 1 : Mar Ma Jul Oc, NO-j?, iv-ul - - 
 in the Rest, I., at 3 . 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. S9 1 
 
 1 February, it is Well known, has 28 (in the leap-years 
 29) the rest 31 . 
 
 2. i. c. The A r ones are on the 7th day, the Ides on the 15 ; 
 in these 4 months. 
 
 3 i. e. The iVones are on the 5th, the Ides on the 13th : in 
 the rest. 
 
 MOON. 
 
 Cycle and Epact. 
 
 Golden's remainder of year-more-1, divided by \Q i 
 Epact's the cycle into ab : above iz by iz, the re- 
 mainder ~. 
 
 Change and Age. 
 
 New's the remainder of month-from-rnarch and 
 
 epact, less iz, auz 3 . 
 Ap. Se. No. Jim. less en- For Jan. Mar o 
 
 Feb. Apr. 1 add. 
 Full's 1 5 days from the change — Wainin°- east • 
 
 Growing, west is enlightend 4 . 
 
 Rising and Setting. 
 
 At Sun-set, sets New, rises Full; and, each day 
 
 minutes ub more. 
 Shining (in Warning) Subtract (in Encreasing) Add 
 
 to Sun-rise,-set. 
 
 Southing and Tides. 
 
 Southing's the age into ok, by 60 : from al, the 
 
 excess take 5 . 
 High-water at London-bridge : two hours and a half 
 
 after Southing 6 . 
 
 1 e. g. 1737 + l = 1738 -M9-10 : remainder 9, for 
 the cycle, or Gtlden number. 
 
 2 e.g. 9 (the cycle) # 11=99-7-30 (as being above 30) 
 =9: remainder 9 for the epact. 
 
 3 e. g. May 20 (1737) What is the moon's age? Answ. 
 3 (the number of the month from march, inclusively) -f 9 
 fthe epact) = 12 — 10=18: the day of the new m ooji 
 
392 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 when it is $aid to chanre. So the moon, on the 20th of may, 
 is -2 days old. 
 
 4 i. e. The Horns ar° turnd, in Decreasing (from the 
 Full) West-ward ; in Encrasing (from the New) Hast*- 
 ward. , 
 
 5 e.g. April 15 (1737) When comes the moon to the 
 meridian ? Answ. The moon's age is 26 : the excess above 
 (al) 15, is II. Then 11* 48 zz 528 -f- 60 — 8 h. 48 m. 
 
 for the Southing. For the readier working, the rule 
 
 may be thus exprest : " Age into 4, by 5 : into 12 the re- 
 mainder gv-es minutes," e. g- 11 x 4 ~— 44 -~- -j — nh: 
 remainder 4 X I2~48m. 
 
 6 e.g. Apr. 15 (1737) the moon Souths at 8 h. 48 m. 
 Then 8 h 4s m.+fi h. -30 m.rzil h. 18 m. (N. B.) If the 
 amounts to more than 12 ; the excess shows the hour. 
 
 THE 12 SIGNS 
 
 or Portions of the Zodiac, nam'd from Constella- 
 tions once in them : their Names, Characters, 
 and corresponding Months ; with a Key to find 
 the S'ins Piece on any Day 1 ; and on tchat day 
 of the Week the 1st Day of any Month hap- 
 pens ~. 
 
 1 Ar ma ri 1 ii- t Aries 
 
 2 Taur apr ou f b> Taurus 
 
 3 Genu may k s n Gemini 
 
 4 Cance juii p e °s Cancer 
 
 5 Le Jul p t' SI Leo 
 
 6 V au p pj flJi Virgo 
 
 7 Lib v se p X =0: Libra 
 
 8 Se oc s ii tti, Scorpio 
 
 9 Sdf no // ii $ Sagittarius 
 
 10 Cti de k t yf Capricornus 
 
 11 Aqutf ,ja w s £? Aquarius 
 
 1 2 Piscg feb bad X Pisces 
 
 1 The method is this: To the day of the month (+11 
 for the old style) add the number signified by the numerals 
 7i, mi, &c. the Sun ( — 30, if above 30) is in the degree 
 of the sign corresponding to the day of the month. E. G. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 3QS 
 
 iFeb. 10 +11 (for the old style) + 11 (for the numeral ha) 
 =32— 30— «o f >£. 
 
 2 Thus: From the day on which March 1st happens (V. 
 March) for any ether month, count forward so many days 
 as arc signified by the numerals a, /, &c. E. G. Mar. 1st, 
 1737, was tuesday : therefore Apr. 1st [counting (f) 4 on- 
 wards, tuesday being one] is friday : and, consequently, the 
 8th, 15th, 29d, 29th, are fridays; whence may be known 
 the rest. [N. B. Jan. and Feb. are reckond from Mar. of 
 the preceding year. 
 
 SUN. 
 
 The Time of its rising each Day. 
 
 1 Jan-o l . 7 Febr-ej, 6 Mar-£y. 5 Apr-ow. M-asf- 
 4 Jul-p. j Aug-at . 6 Sept-ad. 7 O ..be. 8 N-«Zt. 
 t JuN-dtf, the Longest, iji 2 . the Shortest ei boi, 
 
 DECEM-*/a.|. 
 
 For the intermediate Days. 
 
 Sought, into 60, by AH, gives Min. fewer 1st line, 
 more 2d 3 . 
 The Time of its Setting, each Month, &c. 
 Setting's the complement of rising to 12 ; and, dou- 
 bled, the day gives 4 . 
 
 Cycle and Dominical Letter. 
 Cycle's the remainder of year-more-9 by ek 5 : if 0, 
 
 ek 6 . 
 ck cycle's A ; ep, B ; and so on 7 ; e'ery 4th has 2 8 
 
 (next 
 after these 3ds : d E, au G, a-y B, bo D, aei F, 
 
 de A, dan C) and 
 Former is us'd till Feb-rfo, in Leap-years; and, 
 
 after, the Latter. 
 
 To find the Sun's Place in the Zodiac, V. Signs. 
 
 1. i. e. On Jan, 4, the Sun rises at 8. 
 
 2. i. e. On Jan. 21, New style (which is the Longest day) 
 the Sun rises at 3 h. 43'. 
 
394 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 3. i. e. The day sought (reckond from the day of the Sun's 
 rising) multiplied into 60, and divided by the number of 
 All the days between the day of the Sun's rising (specified) in 
 any month, and the day of its iising in the next ; gives the 
 Minutes facer (or, to be subtracted from the hour speci- 
 fied) in the 1st line ; more (or, to be added) in the 2d line. 
 
 e.g. Apr. 13, I would know when the Sun rises. By 
 
 5 Apr- «w I find that the day sought (reckond from the day 
 of the Sun's rising, viz. the 9th) is 4 [for 9+4" 13]. 
 Then 4 X 60= 240 : and 240 ~~ 35 (the number of All the 
 days from 5 in Apr. ou to 4 M-as : i. e. from 9, the day the Sun 
 rises at 5 in April ; to 16, the day the Sun rises at 4 in May) 
 =r6' [and 24-36th i. e. by reduction] 40" : — 5 h. (the day it 
 rises on the 9th of April) = 4 h. 53', 20", then, therefore 
 the sun rises on that day, viz. Apr. 13. 
 
 4 Thus, Dec. 21, New stile, the sun rises at s h. 17 m. 
 the complement of its rising to 12 is 3 h. 43' [for 8 h. 17 m. 
 — 12 h. — 3 h. 43 m.]. The sun therefore sets at 3 h. 43 m. 
 and this, doubled, gives the length of the day, viz. 7 h. 26 m. 
 shorter by 9 h. 8'. than the longest; which (by the same 
 calculation) will be found to be 16 h. 34'. 
 
 5 e. g. 1737 +9 ±z 1746 -r- 28 — 62 the number of 
 revolutions since Christ) remainder 10, for the number of 
 the cycle. 
 
 6 i. e. If there be no remainder, it will be (etc) the 28th, 
 or last year of the cycle. 
 
 7 i. e. The dominical letter answering to the year of the 
 cycle 28 is A : to 27,> B; and so on (backwards) to G, the 
 7th and last : after which returns A, B, &c. 
 
 ' 8 e. g. Every 4th (or Leap year a ) has 2 dominical let- 
 ters : the latter of which is us'd after Feb. 24, the interca- 
 lary day ; which is therefore denoted by the same letter as 
 
 the 23d. N. B. For the readier finding the dominical 
 
 letter answering to any number of the cycle, I have given 
 (in parenthesis) those of every third : thus faei F) F an- 
 swering to 18 (one of the 3ds there specified), 17 (the 
 next 4th, reckoning backwards) will be G A ; 16, B; 15, 
 C; &c. 
 
 (a) For the readier finding Leap-year, the rule is this : 
 " Year- sought divide by 4 ; what's left will be, for leap-year, 
 0; for past, i, 2, or 3." e. g. 1737 -f- 4 zz 434: remain- 
 der!, foi 1st after leap-year. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. S<J5 
 
 Romen Manner of Dating. 
 
 (1) Kal. Non. Id. (2) Pridie. (3) Tert. quart: (ub) 
 
 The day sought substraet from 
 One rn5re than Ide-None-days ; Two more than the 
 
 month's, for the Kalends. 
 
 I. i. e.) For the days on which the Kalends, Nones, Tdes 
 of any month happen (V. Months) write (e. g.) Kal. Dec. 
 on the kalends of december, viz. the 1st day of December. 
 (2) On the day preceding each of them, write (e.g.) Pridie 
 Kal. Dec. i. e. pridie kalendas decembris, on the day before 
 the kalends of december, viz. the 30th of november. (3) 
 For the days backward, write Terlio, Quarto, fyc. i. e. on the 
 3, 4th, &c. 
 
 II. To find any of the days, e. g. (l) 10th of decem- 
 ber, What, in the Roman style ? Answ. 10 — 14 (One more 
 than the days the ides happen on) ~ 4. i. e. 4to id. dec. 
 Again (2) 4to id. dec. What, in the English style ? Anws. 
 
 4 — 14~io. i. e. the' loth of december (l) 20th of 
 
 november: Say 20 — 32 (Two more than the number of tht 
 days in the month) — 12. i.e. umo. kal. dec. (2) 12mo. 
 kal. dec. say 12 — 32 — 20. 
 
396 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 EPOCHAS. 
 Their Commencement in the Julian period 
 
 fD "^ ~ ft C g «v CTQ ft T 1 ^- 
 
 a.^ § * 2 o iz! - &<£ © © © « w| a g O 
 
 era - 3 =-'^ <=>" o~' 1cr ^ ^ r 
 
 o — S-- 
 
 r * 
 
 * ss <*♦■ © t^ s- o^ s- «•• © a is «*• a t^ a c © o^ © *■« 
 
 S? v2 «?• « ^ s s S: a « 2. &J^ s S ft- ft- s *?",§ a 
 W 8 *B "•'«'■"-• 
 
 5 C^03(t»^O3*»O3C3i^OTCnO0it^^*^iOifi.i^)fk 
 
 3 MOiO<0«<0(OOlO«IO(0^i-i|iSO^N^ 
 
 » ifi WNON<OUO)NtO tonto - 05 0HOOOI- Oi 
 
 • ft 2 3 © © s-j- ^ ^ a- ft * S'ft^ £.^E o "♦> *•> 
 
 «* c-^ 2 ^g^-5 5J «r* 5 °E. a. ° c ^^ a- 5' G S 1 
 
 f « a ■ ' I" £ 
 
 ■5" * 
 
 P* *£»B,sS3 2.ilg3 £ ft ? 3 £ g ft* §. ^ 
 
 © 
 
 o © "sore e- £• ^ 2. s* o © 5- ,- £?> s s* © "^ "> 
 
 
 5s r -1 kt* ft cr rc> 
 c?Pq s"s 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 397 
 
 To find 
 
 f The year of the Julian period corresponding to 
 
 X any year in any JEra. 
 f Any year of any JLra by the corresponding 
 
 \ year of the Julian period. 
 jx I Jul for After add Comm-less-1— — for 
 
 \ Afore take from Comm. 
 gv f Mr After, Comm-less-1 take for Corr — 
 
 1 but Afore, Corr. from Comm. 
 
 1. What year of the Juliam Period is the year 1737 (l) 
 
 before Christ? (2) after Christ? Answ. (l) 1737 
 
 (before Christ)— 4714 (the year of the commencement of 
 the Christian sera in the Julian period) 3 2977. (2) 1737 
 (after Christ) -f- 4713 (the commencement-Jess-l) — 6450, 
 the year of the Julian period. 
 
 2. What year of the Christian Mra is the year of the 
 
 Julian period (1) 2977 ? (2) 6450 ? Answ. (l) 9977 
 
 (the year of the Julian period corresponding to the year of 
 the aera sought) — 4714 the commencement of the Christian 
 aera)— 1737. (2) 6450 the corresponding year) — 4713 
 (the commencement-less-l) ~ 1737. 
 
 * For the Number of Years from the Creation to the 
 Birth of Christ. 
 
 The Christian vulgar aera commences in 
 
 the year of the world 4004, jan I . [according to 
 
 Helvicus, Isaacson, &c. 394S] The tJews 
 
 place the creation of the world, Later by 242 years, 
 
 viz. in 3762, oct. 7. The Greek historians, 
 
 on the authority of the septuagint, Sooner by about 
 1490, or 1500 years, viz. the ecclesiastical, in 
 5494 ; the civil, in 5509. 
 
 M M 
 
398 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 FESTIVALS, 
 
 Holy-days, Feasts, fyc. 
 
 IMMOVEABLE. 
 
 Christ. 
 
 Nat-de,<fo\ Circ-ja,&. Epiph-ja,s. Lamm-au,&. 
 
 HoRood-se,fo. Transf-au,s. 
 Mary. 
 Ann-mar,eJ. Pur-feb,e. Nat-se,Ar. Vis-jul,e. Conc- 
 
 de,k. Ass-au,«j. 
 
 Saints. 
 
 All-nttv,a. And-nov,*z. Bap-jun-^/". Barnaby-jun,ff&. 
 Barth-aug.e/". George-apr,ttf. Jauies-jul,<fo. Inuo- 
 
 c6nt-dee,tfe/. 
 John-dec,rfoi. Luke-o,aA;. Mark-apri,<fo. Marti- 
 
 novemb,ad. 
 Matt-se,cfa. Paul-jan-cfa. Yet-jim,dou. Phil 
 
 Jaco-may,o. 
 Sim Jud-o,e&. Ste-de,dau. Tho-dec,tfa. Valentiue- 
 
 feb,(tf. 
 
 Royal Family, 1737- 
 
 CoR-o.fea. PBocLAJun,<zft. BaRN,King-o,ty ; seit. 
 
 Queen-mar,a • seid. 
 Wales-ja,fy : pyp. -cess-n,oAr. AnOr-o,de : pfn. 
 
 Ame-ma,iz: pab. 
 Car-ma,iz: pat. Will-apr,a/: peb. Mar-fe,efe; 
 
 pet. Loui-dj? : pef. 
 
 Terms, as in 1737. 
 
 Terms hold weeks al: days Hilar-eJ. EasWjp. 
 Tr'm-dy, Mich-tau. 
 
 Bil from ym-di to feh-fo— - — Mich from 6c-do to 
 nov-ek. 
 
 East, w8d-e after,begins : ends, after ascension, 
 mond-a. 
 
 Trin, friday after, begins ; and ends 3d Wednes- 
 day after. 
 
 Vac. holds weeks tot : days Hilar-ozf . East-op. Tr- 
 abs. Mich-ws. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 
 
 399 
 
 Quarterly. 
 
 Lady-mar,e/. Midsum-jiuw/. Mieh-sep,«?ow. Chri- 
 
 dee,«/. 
 
 State Holidays. 
 Fire-sep,e . Poud-no,J. Mart-ja,ty. Restor-may, dbu. 
 
 Revo.feb,c£. 
 
 MOVEABLE. 
 
 1 Before and after Easter. 1 
 f Scpt-s< -. Sex-tis. Shrove-ow. Qua^i?. Lent-os. 
 I Pal-/?. Mauud-z. Good-Fri-rf. 
 
 Easter's the first Sunday after first Full-moon 
 
 after March-cfa. 
 2 f Low-fli ". Roga-ta. Asc-tn. Whits-ow. Trin- 
 
 «- lau. Ad-eta. 
 
 Ember-«%*. We Fri Sat, after Qua Whit Ho 
 Rood Luci- dec, at. 
 
 E .ASTER TABLE 3. 
 
 Paschal full-moons for the Golden-numbers, with 
 the Hebdomadal Letters. 
 
 1 A 
 
 2 M 
 
 3 A 
 
 4 A 
 
 5 M 
 
 6 A 
 
 7 M 
 
 / 
 
 el 
 
 bi 
 
 e 
 
 ed 
 
 by 
 
 iz 
 
 S A bet 
 
 9 A oi 
 
 10 M evi 
 
 11 A bu 
 
 12 A / 
 
 13 M eo 
 
 14 A be 
 
 15 A a 
 
 1 6 M fa 
 
 17 A w 
 
 18 M -eou 
 
 19 A -6oi 
 
 Use of the Table. 
 
 Sum from Hebdom to Domiu (of the year sought) 
 add to the Mouth's day.* 
 
 Sy?ionyms, Sfc. 
 
 Ash Wednesday, 1st day of lent. Candlemas, pu- 
 rification of the virgin M. Crucifixion, good-fiiuay. 
 -Holy-thursday, maunday. Holy-week, last of lent. 
 John the Baptist, midsummer. Parasceue, good- 
 
400 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OT 
 
 friday. Passion-week, last of lent. Pentecost, 
 Whitsuntide, whitsontide. Processioning-day, as- 
 cension day. Quinquagesima, shrove-sunday. 
 Shor-(Shur-)thurs-day, maunday-thursday. Twelfth- 
 day, epiphany. 
 
 1 i. e. The nativity of Christ is on dec. $5. and so of tb# 
 rest. 
 
 2 i. e .9<?ptuagesima-sunday is (st) 63 days be/ore 
 
 Easter [70 before the octave of easter] Low sunday is 
 
 (01) 7 days after Easter, and so of the rest. 
 
 3 The Easter-table consists of 5 verses, each ending at a 
 period mark ; and may be read thus : " One-aid, two-melg, 
 three-W'* e, (four Ac*, five medd." &c. — Its Use is to find 
 Easter-sunday for ever. V. n. 4. 
 
 4 e. g. A. D. 1 ;37, the golden number is 9, the dominical 
 letter B. then, against 9 (in the table) the hebdomadal letter 
 is F. from thence to the dominical B. are (gab) 3 : which 
 added to apr. 7 (the day of the month, in the tabic) gives 
 
 ap. 10, for easter-sunday. So A. D. 1736, golden-number 
 
 8, 1st dominical-letter C: then from C (in the table) to C 
 (dominie.) 7 -f- apr. 18 rr apr. 25. 
 
 In the following verses (which contain as much, 
 I think, as is necessary to charge the memory with 
 by way of foundation) I have given the most general 
 divisions of the several parts of the terraqueous 
 globe ; beginning, in each, with the most northerly 
 parts, and, in descending southwards, proceed (to 
 the right) from west to east : so that children, with 
 a few hints and occasional helps, may be able to 
 find them, by themselves ; and thereby fix them 
 better in their memory ; after which they will easily 
 get the verses by heart, and be well prepared to 
 consult the gazetteer, or to go through any system, 
 with pleasure, to good advantage. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 401 
 
 LAND. 
 
 Co)ltinents, Isles, Peninsulas, Isthmus, Capes, 
 
 Mountains. 
 
 CONTLNENTS. 
 
 Europe, Africa, Asia, and America. 
 AF (S) Bar (fez mor a tun tripo bare) Bi (dar) 
 
 Egy (alex. Ctiir) 
 Zaar (zu) Ne (touib s Nubi (dang) Gui (ma why be 
 
 lo cang) Ethi (mon eaf ) 
 AM (23) Green Brit Wa La Can Acad Eng Jers 
 
 Pen Mary Virg Car 
 Geor Kent. Fior (ang pens) Mex (uad mi taju 
 
 chi gaut hon ver) 
 Firm (pa ca mar venez and gra po com dari) Per 
 
 (quito liini chare) 
 Am: RrasY (sal seba vin) Chil (jii) Para (guai tucii 
 
 plat) Mag 
 AS (5) T2r (a sib che thi) Turk (tn na curd sy di 
 
 ar) Pe (der isp gomb) 
 Ind (mog ag beng : vis go bi mal : pe to si co) Chi 
 
 pek nank 
 EUR (18) Nor-fefg*. Swede -stock (Scot-ed'n. Ire- 
 
 diiblin. JL-london) 
 Den-cop Hoi amst. Yhmd-bruss. Ge-vien. Po wa. 
 
 Russ-petre : France-par. 
 Switz-basil. Hbng-presb. Vovt-lisb. Spain-mad. Ital- 
 
 ro. Tu-constant. 
 
 AFRICA. 
 
 Barbary comprehends the kingdoms of Fez, Mo- 
 rocco, Algiers, Tunis, Tripoli, Barca. Bildidgerid: 
 Daara. Egypt : (ch cit.) Alexandria, Cairo. Zaa- 
 ra: (ch. prov.) Zuenziga. Negroland: Toinbute. 
 Nubia : Dangola. Guinea : Malaguette, Whydaw, 
 Benin, Loango, Congo, Angola. Ethiopia: Mone- 
 mugi, Monomotapa, Cafrraria. 
 
 AMERICA. 
 
 Greenland, New-Britain, New-Wales, Labrador, 
 • M M 3 
 
402 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Canada, Acadia or Nova Scotia, New-England, 
 New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Maryland, Virginia, Ca- 
 rolina, Georgia, Kentucky. Florida (ch. towns) 
 St. Augustine, Pensacola. Mexico: (ch. prov.) 
 Guadalajarra, Mechuacan, Tabasco, Jucatau, 
 Chiapa, Guatiinala, Honduras, Veragua. Terra- 
 Firma: Panama, Carthagena, St. Martha, Vene- 
 zuela, Andalusia, Granada, Popayan, Comana, 
 Darien. Peru: Quito, Lima, Los-Charcos. Ama- 
 zonia. Brasil: (ch. cit.) St. Salvador, St. Sebas- 
 tian, St. Vincent. Chili: St. Jago. Paraguay: 
 (ch. prov.) Guaira, Tueuman, Rio-de-la-Plata. Terra- 
 Magellanica. 
 
 ASIA. 
 
 Tartary : (ch. prov.) Astrachan, Siberia, Chen- 
 yang, Thibet. Turkey: Turcomania, Natolia, 
 Curdistan, Syria including Palestine, Diarbec, Ey- 
 raco- Arabic. Persia: (ch. cit.) Derbent, Ispahan, 
 Gombroon. India: (ch. prov.) empire of the Great 
 Mogul (Agra, Bengal) Visiapour, Golconda, Bisna- 
 gur, Malabar, Pegu, Tonquin, Siam, Cochinchina, 
 China: (ch. cit.) Pekiu, Nankin. 
 
 EUROPE. 
 
 Norway : (ch. cit.) Bergen. Sweden : Stock- 
 holm. Scotland: Edinburgh. Ireland: Dublin, 
 England: London. Denmark : Copenhagen. Hol- 
 Inda : Amsterdam. Flanders: Brussels. Ger- 
 many: Vienna. Poland: Warsaw Russia: Pe- 
 tersburgh. France: Paris. Switzerland: Basil. 
 Hungary : Presbnrg. Portugal: Lisbon. Spain: 
 Madrid. Italy : Rome. Turkey : Constantinople. 
 
 Capes, Islands, Peninsulas, and Mountains. 
 CAPES : La Li St-tng. Fi Vi-spain. Bla Ve Good-o/Yi. 
 Com-malal. Hom-ftteg. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 403 
 
 ISLES: TA-den. Az-po. Sit Sic Ca Cy-med. MaCa- 
 
 bdrb. He gui. Mad-eth 
 Maid Ceyl Sum Bo Su Jav Phi Mo Ladr ind. Newf- 
 
 la. So-south-seas. 
 Bel-Jio. Ba Cu Jam Hi Ric, Carib (ant ne mo barb) 
 
 niex. Tueg-mag. 
 PEN: Ju-de. Mo gre. Pre-tdrt. Afri. Canib. Malac- 
 
 ind. Mcx-amer-north. 
 MOUNT: ChfcvWcof. Pyr-spain. Alps-it. Cauca- 
 tdrt. Apalach n am, 
 
 CAPES. 
 
 Land's-end, Lizard, Start-point (of) England. 
 Finisterre, St. Vincent's, Spain. Blanco, Verd, 
 Good-Hope, Africa. Comorin, Malabar. Horn, 
 Fuego. 
 
 ISLES. 
 
 Zealand (in) Denmark. Azores (west of ) Por- 
 tugal. Sardinia, Sicily, Candia, Cyprus (in the) 
 Mediterranean. Madeiras, Canaries (against) Bar- 
 bary. St. Helena, Guinea. Madagascar, Ethio- 
 pia. Maldives, Ceylon, Sumatra, Borneo, Sunda, 
 Java, Philippines, Moluccas, Ladrones, East- 
 Indies. Newfoundland, Labrador. Society-Isles 
 (in the) South-Seas. Bermudas (against) Florida. 
 Bahamas, Cuba, Jamaica, Hispaniola, Porto-Rico : 
 Cariltbees (Antigua, Nevis, Montserrat, Barbadoes, 
 Mexico. Fuego, Terra-Magellanica. 
 
 PENINSULAS. 
 
 Jutland (in) Denmark. Morea, Greece. Precop. 
 Tartary. Africa. Cambaya, Malacca, East- 
 Indies. Mexico, North- America. 
 
 MOUNTAINS. 
 
 Cheviot (between) Scotland and England. Py- 
 renees, Spain and France. Alps, Italy and France. 
 Caucasus (in) Tartary. Apalachian, North-Ame- 
 rica. 
 
404 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 WATERS. 
 
 Oceans, Seas, Gulphs, Straits, Rivers, and Lakes. 
 
 OCEANS : Hyp. Etlri. East. Alt-West. Paci-South- 
 
 del Zur. Ice. 
 SEAS : Ba de- Swede, Chan-ewg-, Med eu,dfr, Black 
 
 eu,as. Gasp-tartar. 
 GULFS: Bo Fi sictde, V en-it dl, Red-arab, Pers. 
 
 fieng. Baff Hu-M0J'fA-c/». 
 STRAITS: Sound-Mi, <ji-med, l\e\-bla. Bared, 
 
 Sun-m. Hud-bu. Da-baff. Mag. 
 LAKES : Lad O-mss, Ne ho-scot, Ge Lu-switz. 
 
 Baba-j»ers. Bon-?ie. Par-Jirm. 
 RIV. Vo-cJ. Dan-bla. Ringer. Rh Eb Wd-me T. 
 
 ILu-pers. Ga-be. Mis-mex. 
 
 OCEANS. 
 
 Hyperborean or northern. Ethiopian. Eastern, 
 Atlantic or western, Pacific or south, or mare del 
 Zur. Icy near the South Pole. 
 
 SEAS. 
 
 Baltic, east of Denmark and Sweden. Channel, 
 south east of England, Mediterranean, between 
 Europe and Africa and part of Asia, Black sea, 
 between part of Europe and Asia. Caspian, in Great 
 Tartary. 
 
 GULFS. 
 
 Of Bothnia and of Finland, in Sweden. Of Ve- 
 nice, east of Italy, Red-sea, between Arabia and 
 Africa. Persian Gulf. Bay of Bengal in Asia. 
 Baffin's and Hudson's Bays m North America. 
 
 STRAITS. 
 
 Sound (of the) Baltic. Gibraltar, Mediterra- 
 nean, Hellespont, Black-sea. Babelmandel, Red- 
 sea. Sunda, Indian'Ocean, Hudson's, Button's- 
 bay,' Davis's, Baffin' s-bay, Magellan, South 
 America. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 405 
 
 LAKES. 
 
 Ladoga and Onega, western part of Russia. 
 Loch-Ness and Lomond (in) Scotland. Lakes of 
 Geneva and Lucern, Sivitzerland. Babacombar, 
 Persia. Bornou, Negroland. Parime, Terra 
 Firma. 
 
 RIVERS. 
 
 Volga (falls into the) Caspian-sea. Danube, 
 Black-sea. Rhine, German-ocean. Rhone, Ebro, 
 Nile, Mediterranean. Tigris, Euphrates, Persian- 
 gulf. Ganges, bay of Bengal. Missisippi, bay of 
 Mexico. 
 
 A more particular Account 
 of the several countries of Europe may be exhibi- 
 ted, so as to give a precise idea of the situation of 
 each sub-division, after the manner of the following 
 specimen : in which (beside what was proposed in 
 general, note 1.) such as are contiguous South- 
 ward, are joind ; as in weLa- : such as are conti- 
 guous Westward, are hyphend ; as in Che-De- &c. 
 
 ENGLAND. 
 
 Its Forty Counties. 
 
 Nor cum-dur : weLa-york : che-de-not-linc : shrop- 
 
 sta-le-rut norf : 
 Her-wO-wa-northa : Bed-hunt-camb-sufF: mon-gl- 
 
 6xfo-buck-hert-ess. 
 Som— wilt-berk— middlesex : corn— dev--dors-hamp- 
 surrey-kentSuss. 
 
 FIRST MERIDIANS. 
 
 On either side of Tenerifft. 
 
 (East) London-c* (West) Fer-rf. Jag-s Nicol-o/ 1 . 
 Corvo-boi. Bras-6o«. 
 
406* TRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Abbreviatures. 
 Feno. St. Jago. St. Nicholas, coast of Brasit. 
 
 The Dutch placed the first Meridian at Teneriffe ; the 
 French,, since 1631, at Ferro, two degrees west of Teneriffe . 
 others variously, as in the memorial verse. In most of the 
 French maps and those copied from them two degrees must 
 be allow'd on such as are calculated on the Dutch plan to 
 make them correspond ; as for example — Hamburgh is there 
 said to be lm: . 29 deg. 20 m. E. consequently in the French 
 maps it will be found in 3l deg. 20 m. and in similar manner 
 are all the rest. Many modern geographers Usually now 
 calculate the first Meridian from the capital city of the state 
 in which each resides : the English reckon from the Royal 
 Observatory at Greenwich near London ; the North Ameri- 
 cans from Philadelphia, situated 75 deg. 8 m. W. from Lon- 
 don ; and several of the French from Paris 1 deg. 20 m. E. 
 of London, 
 
 BIBLE. 
 
 The several Books of it, with the Time of their 
 writing. 
 
 OLD TESTAMENT. 
 
 Its 39 Books. 
 
 Elih-job'; tjpty *. Mo-pent : dog-. Josh: boly. Sani- 
 
 ju-ki : hazy. 
 Dav: byly. Sal-pro-cau ecc : ath. Mord-e: toz. 
 
 B'z-chr: ety Neh: eg. 
 
 Prophets. 
 
 Jon : kse. Jo : eig. Am : peip. Hose ; oieil. Is : 
 
 p&uy Nah : pvk. 
 Mic ; put. Jer : sta. Zeph : autz. Haba : syn. Eze : 
 
 loul. Obadi-ZAroi. 
 Daniel : nil. Hag : Uz. Zechavi : udz. Malachi 
 
 touoi. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. ,407 
 
 NEW TESTAMENT. 
 
 Its 27 Books. 
 
 Matt-/fl. c Mar-ot, Thes-ltt. Pe-to. Gal Cor 
 
 Koma-loi, Luke-sa. 
 Phil Col Eph£s PhileJame-se, Heb Act-si, Timothy 
 
 Tit-su. 
 Tim Peter-aw/j Jude-pa. Revel-ows. John-no*.-— 
 
 3 dot in iau. 
 
 1 i. e. Elihu is most probably supposed to be the author 
 of the book of job, about 1750 years before the birth of 
 Christ. So, Muses, the author of the pftftateuch, fiouiished 
 in the year before Christ 1400. And so of the rest. ----- 
 N. B. £xra is thought by the Jewish doctors to have writ the 
 c/ironicles [the 36th chapter of Genesis, the last of Joshua 
 and Jeremiah ; and to have revised and settled the cannon of 
 
 I the old testament.] 
 
 2 i. e. Matthew writ his gospel about the year oi our Lord 
 41. And so of the rest. 
 
 3 i. e. 27 books (from the year 41 to 97) in 36 years. 
 
 ENGLAND. 
 
 Its Kings, since the Conquest, with the Commence- 
 ment oj their Reigns. 
 
 Will Conq-s/w, 1 Ruf-koi. Hen lst-«g\ Steph-oiV. 
 
 He szc-buf. 
 Rich lst-bein. JoHN-ann HEN3d-rf</«. Edward 
 
 lsidoid. 
 Ed 2d-typ, 3d-tep. Rl sec-ipp. Hen 4>th-toun, 
 
 5th fat. 
 6ih-fed Ed 4ih-faub, 5th, RY 3i\-feU. He 7th-feil, 
 
 8th lyn. 
 Ed 6t\ilop. Mary-/^. Els-M\ Jame lst-syt. Ca 
 
 lst-st/. 
 Car 2d sbn. Jame se-seil. Will MA'sein. Ann- 
 
 pyd. Geo.-paf, pep. 
 
40| PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OP 
 
 1 i. e. William the conqueror began his reign ( accounting 
 
 the year to begin January l) A. D. 1066 N. B. 1000 is 
 
 omitted throughout this list. 
 
 MONARCHIES. 
 
 The grand or universal ones, their Rise, Fall, 
 and Continuance. 
 
 ASS: Nlto(A.M)-#/wJfc. Sur-tetu (Bab-i/oii, Pers- 
 
 tduhoi, Grec isel •— 
 Cass-ma-gre. Lys tbrac-he-bos. Ptolem a6-lib-a- 
 
 pal-sy. Seleuc as.) 
 BOM : Jul-iny'd, Jov-otat ■— East, West : taken 
 
 Con-loze, THom-otun : 
 A'lar(A.D)-o&z, Atti-jia. Gkm-ful. O&ops. Theod- 
 
 oni. Tot-lop. 
 
 i. e.The Assyrian monarchy begun in Mnus (A. M.) 
 
 1748, and ended with Asjaraddinus in 3935 ; being swallowd 
 up by the BAuylonian, which ended (with Nabonadius) in 
 34l9i (when Cyrus reignd over all Asia) so the kingdom 
 was translated to the PERsians: from whom (by the con- 
 quest of Darius Codomannus) in 361 7, Alexander translated 
 it to the GnEcians: after whose death, in 3625, it was (-7-) 
 divided (alter the confusion of a few years) among four of 
 his followers. Cassander had wiacedon and grece : Lysi- 
 machus had thrace, with those parts of Asia that bolder on 
 the Aellespont and the /wsphoius : Ptolemy had cegypt, libya, 
 arabia, /m/estine, and codos^ria : Seleucus, all the rest of 
 
 twia. The Roiuan monarchy begun with Julias Ca6- 
 
 sar, in 8902 ; and ended in Jovian in 4313 : after whose 
 death it was (-?-) divided into the Eastern, and JPcslem em- 
 pires : the former of which ended by the taking of Con- 
 stantinople (under Constantine Palaeologus) in 5402 ; the 
 latter by the taking of Rome (under Honorius) in 4359 ; 
 A. D. 410 : by Alaric, king of the Goths: after whom it 
 was overrun and ravagd by dttifo, king of the Huns, in 451 ; 
 by Gercseric, the Vandal, in 455 ; by Odoacer, king of the 
 Heruli, in 476; by Theodoric, king of the Ostrcgoths, in 
 -r-493> by Tatilas, the Ostrogoth, in 547. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 40Q 
 
 WAR. 
 
 Bodies of Soldiers. 
 
 R] Dec-by. Cen-dzy. Man-f g. Turm-t«\ Cohordug. 
 
 Legi-auth. Vh-eith. 
 E] Comp-uz,ag. Squad-<7°-,fg\ Bd- lg,eig. Brigad. 
 
 dth,bag. Reg-ig,auik. 
 
 1. The Romax Legion consisted of (at a medium) 6000 
 men : though the number was different, at different limes, 
 from 3oco to 6666. And, in proportion, the other bodies, 
 viz. Decuria, 10. Centuria, 100. Mauipulus, 200. Turma, 
 300. Cohors, 600. Phalanx, 8000. 
 
 2. An English Regiment is from 300 to 1000 men. 
 And, in proportion, the other bodies, viz. Company, 50- 
 100. Squadron, 100-200. Battalion, 500-800. Brigade,, 
 1000.-1100. 
 
 Natural Jdfjiloaopjp. 
 
 PHYSICS. 
 ANNUITIES. 
 
 The Value, for several Ages of Life. 
 
 A-bz,dei l . Az-b?,fo. Ez-b?,pei. Iz-bti,pe. Oz-<a,up. 
 
 Ol-n,oub. 
 Uz-ou,eb. U-k,ub. Auz-oi,sy. Au\-tiu,lo. Oizl,id. 
 
 l . i.e. for (A) 1 year of age, the value of an annuity is 
 Cl'Zfdei) 10,28 years purchase. And so of the rest. V. Hal- 
 ley, ap. Lowthorp, vol. 3. p. 66Q. 
 
 ARKS. 
 
 Of Noah, and of the Covenant Testimony, their 
 Dimensions in Cubits. 
 
 (Cov) L-e,re. Br-d,re. D-a,re. (Noah) L-ig. Br-tt*, 
 D4z; for Bkds-eg, Qu- ag. 
 N N 
 
410 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 i. e. The Ark of the Covenant was a sort of Chest i» 
 
 Length, Breadth, .Depth, s£ : i±: \\. of Noah was a 
 
 sort of Ship, 300 : 5o : 30 : sufficient to hold (with food, 
 &c.) all kinds of Birds (viz.) 300 ; Gtoadrupeds, ioo. V. Gen. 
 S. 15. Exod. 25. 10. 
 
 ATMOSPHERE. 
 
 Its Height, Weight, Elasticity, $e. 
 
 Jtmosphere (High iniles-oz *) on a foot-square 
 
 presses esauz pounds ; 
 On 15 feet (for a man) tuns-c/ : when least, tunc, re 
 
 less 2 ; 
 Weighing as 1 to (water) ej>— — to mercury) 
 
 azth eig 3 . 
 Comprest, on Eartb, to atpaun 4 ; by Art, 60 timet 
 
 more, to kesboz. 
 
 1 As appears by a calculation, made by M. dela Hire, from 
 the crepuscula. 
 
 2 As appears by calculations made from the Torricellian 
 experiments. V. Jurin, ap Varen. 1. 6. 19. 7. 
 
 3 i. e. The weight of air compard to that of water, is as 1 
 to soo, &c. V. Hauksbee's exper. 
 
 4 i.e. The common air we breathe, near the surface of the 
 earth, is comprest, by the bare weight of the incumbent at- 
 mosphere, into a 1 3769th part of the space it would take-up, 
 were it at liberty. V. Boyle, ap. Wallis. hydrost. 13 Philos. 
 trans, n. 181. 
 
 DIVISIBILITY. 
 
 Of Matter, actually great. 
 
 By great Effluvia, in a long time, bodies lose but 
 
 a small weight K 
 Candle, an inch, converted to Light— — gire« 
 
 parts a nonillion. " 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 411 
 
 1 As is evident in perfumes, &c. 
 
 2 At which rate there must fly out of it, as it burns, in 
 the second of a minute, 41 8,660,000,000,000,000,000,000, 
 000,000,000,000,000,000,000 particles : vastly more than a 
 looo times a looo millions the number of sands the whole 
 earth can contain ; reckoning 10 inches to 1 foot, and that 
 100 sands are equal to l inch. V. Nieuwent. rel. phil. vol. t. 
 p. 858. 
 
 DUCTILITY. 
 
 Of Bodies, very great. 
 
 Microscopical Spiders l spin at-a-tlrae, at least, 
 
 thrends-auth. 
 Glass may be drawn - as a web, and knit to the 4th 
 
 of a line space 3 . 
 Gold, on Silver-wire, is drawn 4 to the part of an 
 
 inch-bom. 
 
 1 i. e. Such are not visible but by a microscope. 
 
 2 " As fine as a spider's web :" but not long enough to be 
 woven. 
 
 3 i. e. So, that the space in the middle of the knot shall not 
 exceed one 4th of a line, or one 48th of an inch. 
 
 4 " To the 14-millionth part of an inch, in thinness:" and 
 yet is so perfect a cover to the silver, that there is not an 
 aperture to admit alcohol of wine (the subtilest fluid in na- 
 ture) nor even light itself. Reaumur, 
 
 EVAPORATION 
 
 From Water, its Quantity. 
 
 FooT-square, by heat, in a day, evaporates half of a 
 
 wine pint 1 . 
 So, Medi tum-tidky'm 2 ; near a third more than's 
 
 brought by the rivers ;J . 
 
 1 According to experiments made by Dr. Halley, ap. 
 Miscell. curios, vol. 1. To which it may be added, that the 
 winds do sometimes carry-off more than rises by heat. 
 
412 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS *)» 
 
 2 Estimating the A/editerranean at 40 degrees long, and 4 
 broad. , 
 
 3 V. Rivers, and, consequently, from the whole watery 
 surface abundantly enough to furnish all the dews, »airis*, 
 springs, rivers, &c. that are convey'd into the ocean. 
 
 MAN. 
 
 Life, Marriage, Parts, Perspiration. 
 
 Live, out of eg, bnt — at Au, so 1 — at Asjy — at 
 
 Es, bit — at Is, bau 
 & at Os,tfx -at Us,au & at Aus, * — 
 
 at Ols,a. 
 Mark, a in azf 2 : bir-/3 (to bur as a,au to a 4 ) 
 
 males- Jo to fem at s . 
 
 BoNES-eTM. MuSCLES-kfl. TEETH-fcZ BLOOD 
 
 as ag to aauy <5 . 
 
 Beats, in an hour, times-of A : and an ounce, at ia 
 time, is discharged 7 : 
 
 52 feet in a minute ; as sept-fig to 1 In thfe ex- 
 tremes 8 . 
 
 Perspire through pores ( belth-whereof by one 
 grain of sand may be coverd) 
 
 5 parts of 8 (a day's food) from hours 5, after meals, 
 to the 12th, p 9. 
 
 1 i. e. Of the children born, out of 100, there are living, 
 at 6 years of age, but 64. And so of the rest. V. Halley, 
 ap. Lowthorp. vol. 5. p. 699. N. B. On observa- 
 tions of this nature, drawn from the bills of mortality, is 
 computed the value of annuities for different ages of life. V. 
 Annuities. 
 
 2 i. e. 1 in 104 Marry. King. 
 
 3. i. e. Marriages, one with another, do each produce 4 
 births. Derham. 
 . 4 i. e. Births to Burials are as l , 6 to l. Derham. 
 
 5 i. e. Males, born, to Females, are as 14 to 13. Graunt. 
 
 6 i.e. In a body, weighing 168 pound, 100 thereof are 
 Blood; understanding thereby not only the fluid containd in 
 the veins and arteries' ; Dut also that in the lymphae-ducts, 
 nerves, and the other vessels, secreted from it, and returnd 
 into it. Keil. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 41S 
 
 7 i. e. 250 pounds in an hour , at the rate of the whole 
 mass, in 24 minutes. 
 
 s i. e. The blood is driven out of the heart into the great 
 artery with a velocity, which would carry it 52 feet in a 
 minute: a velocity to that of its motion in the remotest 
 branches, as loo septillions [7th period] to 1. 
 
 9 Within 5 hours after eating, there is perspird about l 
 pound; from the 12th to the 16th scarce half-a-pound. Sanc- 
 torius. 
 
 RIVERS. 
 
 The Quantity of their Waters. 
 
 At Kingston-bridge, Thames (yards Broad-%, 
 
 Deep-/} 2 mile an hour Runs x : 
 tuns-ezm igth in a day ; rh e ti po ui do niest nieper 
 
 akdoim ". 
 
 11 In a day, 48. miles, 84,480 yards; which multiplied by 
 (3 times lco, the profile of water at the bridge, viz.) 
 300 yards, gives 25,344,000 cubic yards of water, i. c. 
 20,300,009 tuns. 
 
 2 The most considerable rivers that fall into the Mediter- 
 ranean sea, are the Rhone, Ehro, Tiler, Po, Danube, Nile, 
 Don,Niester, Nieper. Each of these is supposed to carry-down 
 10 times as much water as the Thames (not that any of 
 them is so great ; but so to allow for the other lesser rivers 
 that Tall into that sea). Now the water of the Thames 
 being computed, as above, at about 20,300,000 tuns ; the 3 
 rivers aforesaid will amount, each, to 20-3,000,000 ; in all, 
 1,827,000,000 tuns. V. Evaporation. 
 
 N N 5 
 
414 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Solomon Lowe was a schoolmaster at 
 Hammersmith, and author of the following 
 works. — I. The Protestant Family Piece, or, a 
 picture of Popery, 8°. 17 16. — II. KOINA 
 KAINI2S : an appendix to Grammar, contain- 
 ing Rhetoric and Prosody, with directions for 
 Composing, Construing, Parsing, Writing ele- 
 gantly, and gaining a Copia of Thoughts and 
 Words. To which are added, very short, plain, 
 and comprehensive rudiments of the French and 
 Greek Tongues, 8°. 17 19-— III. A Specimen 
 of a Latin Grammar, 8°. 1722. — IV. A Gram- 
 mar of the Latin Tongue, with appendix and 
 notes, 8°. 1724.— V. Italian Rudiments, 8°. 
 1728.— VI. Latin Rudiments, 8°. 1 729-— VII. 
 The Occasional Critique; containing, (1.) On 
 the Dean of Rochester's Latin Grammar. (2.) 
 On Dr. Busby's Latin Grammar, as improved 
 by his successors. (3.) On Education, etc. (4.) 
 A Proposal of a new scheme of Grammar, 
 8°. 1736* — VIII. English Grammar reformed, 
 8°. 1737.— IX. Rhetoric delineated, 8°. 1737. 
 
 Of the following publications we have not 
 been enabled to ascertain the dates. — I. An easy 
 method of initiating Children in the Latin 
 
 • These tracts were published separately under dif- 
 ferent titles and afterwards reprinted with the title of 
 the Occasional Critique. No. 4, the la»t, was entitled 
 %ty aRUHjetBtone, etc. and published in 1732. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 415 
 
 Tongue, 8°. — IT. A New System of English 
 Examples to Latin Syntax, 8°. — III. A Voca- 
 bulary Latin and English. — IV. Sentential pue- 
 riles, Latin and English. — V. English Exam- 
 ples to Latin Syntax. — VI. A Construing Book 
 and Supplement. — VII. Greek Characters and 
 Abbreviations, in a Table. 
 
 67. Dan. Geo. Morhqfii Polyhistor 
 Liierarius Philosop Ideas el Prac- 
 ticus, cum accessionibus virorum 
 clarissimorum Joh. Friekii et J oh. 
 Mottevi Flensburg. [Edit. Quart. '\ 
 2 torn. 4°. Lubccce, 1747. 
 
 In this work there are two ingenious disserta- 
 tions, 1. De Arte Lultiana similibusque inven- 
 tis. 2. De Memorial subsidiis. To these we 
 confess some obligations ; although Morhof, 
 from unavoidable circumstances, was not con- 
 sulted till most of the collections were made for 
 this account of the Systems of Artificial Me- 
 mory. 
 
 Daniel George Morhof, was born at 
 Wismar, iu the Datchy of Mecklenburgh, in the 
 Year l6'39- He stadied at Stettin and Rostock, 
 and visited Holland and Oxford ; and in lo\35, 
 was invited by the Duke of Holsteiu to become 
 Professor of Poetry, Eloquence, and History, 
 and Librarian in the University of Kiel. He 
 
416 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 died in lGQl. His principal work is the Poly- 
 histor, a complete storehouse of miscellaneous 
 literature. 
 
 68. Cartas Fruditas y Curiosas, por D. 
 Fr. B. J. Feyjoo, 4°. 5 torn. 31a- 
 drid, 1781. 
 
 In this work* there is a disserration on reme- 
 dies for the memory, and one ©n the Art of Me- 
 mory, in which several books on the subject ar« 
 named. In another essay, the principles of the 
 art are stated to consist in particular places and 
 images, and a sphere or globe is divided into va- 
 rious compartments. In the tenth section of this 
 essay, Feyjoo speaks of remembering certain 
 words by the means cf images, and, in the eleventh 
 section, illustrates the application of the art to 
 poetry, by two examples taken from a treatise 
 on Artificial Memory, by Count de Nolegar, 
 which may be seen in another part of this work.*]- 
 
 Benedict Jerom Feyjoo was a Spanish 
 Benedictine, and attempted by his writings and 
 example to correct and reform the vitiated no- 
 tions of his countrymen. His Theatro Critico, 
 in 9 vols, and the Cartas Eruditas, in 5 vols. 
 4°. are works of considerable merit. Feyjoo 
 censures, with great freedom and spirit, the igno- 
 
 _ — — . — ■ ij<— — 
 
 * Tom. I. pp. 200—228. t See p. 165. 
 
ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 417 
 
 >ance and licentiousness of the clergy, and ex- 
 poses the futility of pilgrimages, pretended mi- 
 racles, and superstitious exorcisms. This con- 
 duct rendered him obnoxious to the pains and 
 penalties of the church, and Feyjoo was, with 
 difficulty, saved from the horrors of the Inqui- 
 sition. He died in 17 65. 
 
 We have noibeen enabled to procure the date 
 of the following books ; the titles, therefore, 
 could not be inserted in regular order. 
 
 1. Anucardina a la Arte de Memoria. 
 
 2. Joh. Aguilera de Arte Memoria. 
 
 V). Epiphanii de Moirans, Ars Memoria ad- 
 mirabihs, omnium nescientium excedens captum. 
 
 4. Franc. Conti de Arte Memoria. 
 
 5. Hieronymus Megherus de Arte Memoria. 
 
 6. Alvaro Ferreya de Fera, Trattato de Me- 
 moria artijiciosa. 
 
INSTANCES 
 
 OF THE 
 
 EXTRAORDINARY POWERS 
 
 OF 
 
 j&atural ffltmoxp. 
 
 CHRONOLOGICALLY ARRANGED. 
 
 B.C. 
 
 115. Hortensius, the celebrated Roman 
 Orator, and contemporary of Cicero, was aided 
 by uncommon powers of memory. He was able 
 to repeat a whole oration in the words he had 
 previously conceived it, without committing it to 
 writing ; and to go through all the arguments of 
 an opponent in their proper order. As a proof 
 of the degree in which he possessed this faculty, 
 it is said that he once attended a whole day at a 
 public sale, and at the end of it, recited, in 
 regular erder, the names of all the buyers, the 
 articles sold, and their prices, with perfect ex- 
 actness. 
 
NATURAL MEMORY. 41Q 
 
 65. A. D.— Seneca. " Age (says Seneca) 
 has done me many injuries, and deprived me of 
 many thing3 I once had : it hath dulled the sight 
 of my eyes, blunted the sense of my hearing, and 
 slackened my nerves. Amongst the rest I have 
 mentioned before is the memory, a thing that is 
 the most tender and frail of ail parts of the soul, 
 and which is first sensible to the assaults of age : 
 that heretofore this did so flourish in me, as not 
 only served me for use, but might even pass for 
 a miracle I cannot deny ; for I could repeat two 
 thousand names in the same order as they were 
 spoken, and when as many as were scholars 
 to my master, brought each of them several 
 verses to him, so that the number of them 
 amounted to more than two hundred, beginning 
 at the last, I could recite them orderly unto the 
 first: nor was my memory only apt to receive 
 such things as I would commit to it, but was 
 also a faithful preserver of all that I had entrusted 
 it with." 
 
 980. A. D. — Avicenna, or Ebn-Sina, an 
 Arabian philosopher and physician, was born at 
 Arsena, near Bocchara, and possessed a ready 
 genius, and a wouclerful memory. At the age 
 of ten he made great progress in the languages, 
 and could repeat the Koran by heart. He read 
 over the books of Aristotle's Metaphysics forty 
 times ; and by this means so fixed them in hi» 
 
420 INSTANCES OF 
 
 memory, that he could repeat them with fa- 
 cility. 
 
 1484.A.D. — Joseph Scaliger. The works 
 of Homer, (tays Wanley) are his Jiiads and Odys- 
 seys, the former consist of twenty-four books, and 
 so also the latter. His Iliads have in it thirty-one 
 thousand six hundred and seventy verses, and I 
 suppose his Odysseys have no less ; and yet it is 
 said of Joseph Scaliger, that in one-?.nd-twenty 
 days he committed all Homer to his memory. 
 
 \5 L 2 ( l. A. D. — Bishop Ji_wel had naturally 
 a very strong memory, which he greatly improved 
 by art ; so that he could readily repeat any thing 
 that he had written after once reading it. His 
 own sermons were chiefly extempore from heads 
 which he hud penned down, and on which he 
 used to meditate while the bell was ringing to 
 summon the congregation to church. He is said 
 to have taught his method of artificial memory 
 to his old tutor, Dr. Parkhurst, while they 
 were at Zurich ; who in the space of 28 days, 
 with only one hour's application on each day, 
 learned all the 28 chapters of St. Matthew's 
 Gospel so perfectly, that he could readily repeat 
 the whole, or any particular verse, knowing at 
 the same time what went before, or what fol- 
 lowed after, any verse that was mentioned to 
 him. 
 
 So firm was the memory of Bishop Jewel 
 
NATURAL MEMORY. 421 
 
 that he used to say, if he were to deliver a pre- 
 meditated speech before a thousand auditors, 
 shouting or fighting all the while, they would not 
 put him out. John Hooper, Bishop of Glou- 
 cester, who was burnt in the reign of Queen 
 Mary, once, to try him, wrote about forty 
 Welsh and Irish words. Mr. Jewel going a 
 little while aside and recollecting them in his 
 memory, and reading them twice or thrice orer, 
 said them by heart, backward and forward, ex- 
 actly in the same order in which they were set 
 down. And, at another time, he did the same 
 by ten lines of Erasmus' paraphrase in English ; 
 the words of which being read sometimes con- 
 fusedly without order, and sometimes in order 
 by the Lord Keeper Bacon, Mr. Jewel thinking 
 awhile on them, presently repeated them again. 
 
 1547. A. D. — Lipsius, an eminent philoso- 
 pher and critic, born at Isch, near Brussels, was 
 remarkable for the extent of his memory. He 
 remembered the whole history of Tacitus, and 
 pledged himself to recite word for word, any 
 passage that might be required. So confident 
 was he of having this book fixed in his memory, 
 that he allowed a person to stand by him with a 
 dagger, aud to plunge it iuto his body if he did 
 not repeat, faithfully, the words of the author. 
 
 1585. A. D. — Muret in his Varia Lectiones 
 
 has the following anecdote. In Padua, near 
 o o 
 
422 INSTANCES OF 
 
 unto me, dwelt a young man of Corsica, of good 
 birth, and sent thither to study the civil law ; in 
 the study of which he had spent some years with 
 that diligence and attention, that there was now 
 raised amongst us a great opinion of his learning. 
 He came almost every day to my house, and there 
 went a report, that he attained to an art of me- 
 mory, by assistance of which he w r as able to 
 perform that which another could not believe 
 unless he beheld it ; when I heard this, I had a 
 desire to behold these wonderful things, as one 
 not very credulous of such matters as come by 
 hearsay. I therefore desired him to give me 
 some such kind of instance of his art as he should 
 think fit. He told me he would do it when I 
 pleased. " Immediately, then," said I; and 
 when he refused not, all we who were present 
 went into the next room ; there did I dictate 
 Latin, Greek, and barbarous names, some signi- 
 ficant, others not ; so many, and so different, 
 having not the least dependance one upon the 
 other, that I was weary with dictating, and the 
 boy with writing what I dictated, and all the rest 
 with hearing, and expectation of the issue. 
 When we were thus diversely wearied, he alpne 
 called for more. But I myself said it was fit to 
 observe some measure : and that I should be 
 abundantly satisfied if he could but recite me the 
 one half of those I had caused already to be set 
 
NATURAL MEMORY. 423 
 
 down. He fixing his eyes upon the ground 
 (with great expectation on our part ; ) after a short 
 pause began to speak. In brief, to our amaze- 
 ment, he repeated all we had written in the very 
 same order they were set down, without scarce 
 a stop or any hesitation : and then beginning at 
 the last, recited them all backwards to the first; 
 then so as that he would name only the first, 
 third, fifth, and in that order repeat all ; and in- 
 deed in what order we pleased, without the least 
 error. Afterwards, when I was more familiar 
 with him (having often tried him, and yet never 
 found him speaking otherwise than the truth,) he 
 told me once, and certainly he was no boaster, 
 4hat he could repeat in that manner thirty-six 
 thousand names, and which was yet the most 
 strange, things stuck in his memory, that he 
 Mould say, with little trouble, he could repeat 
 any thing be had entrusted within a year after. 
 For my own part, I made trial of him after 
 many days, and found he said true. He taught 
 Franciscus Molinus, a young patrician of Venice, 
 and who had but a weak memory, in the com- 
 pass of but seven days, wherein he had learned 
 of him to repeat five hundred names with ease, 
 and in what order he pleased. 
 
 1649- A. D. — Famiantjs Strada, in his 
 first book of academical prolusions, speaking pf 
 Franciscus Suarez, says, " he hath so strong 
 
424 INSTANCES OF 
 
 a memory, that he hath St. Augustine (the most 
 copious and various of the fathers) ready by 
 heart, alleging every where, as occasion presents 
 itself, fully and faithfully his sentences, and, 
 which is very strange, his words ; nay, if he be 
 demanded any thing touching any passage in 
 any of his volumes (which of themselves are al- 
 most enough to fill a library,) I myself have seen 
 him instantly showing and pointing with his finger 
 to the place and page in which he disputed of 
 that matter. 
 
 1661. A. D. — Dr. Thomas Fuller, the 
 author of the Worthies of England, had so great 
 a memory, (says Wanley) that he could name in 
 order all the signs on both sides' the way from the 
 beginning of Pater-noster-Row at Ave-Maria- 
 Lane, to the bottom of Cheapside to Stocks- 
 Market.* And that he could dictate to fire 
 several writers at the same time, on as many 
 different subjects. This gentleman making a 
 visit to a committee of sequestrators sitting at 
 Waltham in Essex, they soon fell into a dis- 
 course and commendation of his great memory ; 
 
 * The site of Stock-Market is now occupied by tbe 
 Mansion-House, and many other adjacent buildings. The 
 celebrated Heidegger, it is said, could name all the signs 
 from the Exchange to St. James's, on one side the street, 
 after walking once to observe them. 
 
NATURAL MEMORY. 425 
 
 to which Mr. Fuller replied, " Tis true, gen- 
 tlemen, that fame has g.ven me the report of a 
 memorist, and if you please I will give you au 
 experiment of it." They ail accepted the mo- 
 tion, and told him they should look .pon U as an 
 obligation, laid aside the business before them, 
 and prayed him to begin. " Gentlemen, (snvs 
 he) I will give you an instance of my good me- 
 mory in that particular. Your worships have 
 thought fit to sequester au honest poor but cava- 
 lier parson, my neighbour, from his living, and 
 committed him to prison ; he has a great charge 
 of children, and his circumstances are but indif- 
 ferent, if you please to release him out of prison, 
 and restore him to his living, I wili never forget 
 the kindness while I live." 'Tis said the jest 
 had such an influence upon the committee, that 
 they immediately released and restored the poor 
 clergyman. 
 
 1076. A. D. — Humphrey Burton, of Co- 
 ventry, at the age of eighty-three, couid (says 
 Wanlev) by the strength and firmness of his me- 
 mory, give the sum of any chapter in the New 
 Testament, and of the chapters in divers books 
 of the Old Testament, in a Latin distich, with 
 as much readiness, and as little hesitation, as if 
 he had directly read them out of a book. I my- 
 self have frequently put him to the trial ; wherein, 
 
 though I have observed no order, but named 
 
 oo3 
 
426 INSTANCES O? 
 
 ere a chapter at the beginning, then one to- 
 wards the end, then again returned to the mid- 
 dle, and so on purpose prevented any assistance 
 he might have from an orderly succession and 
 dependance ; yet could I no sooner name the 
 chapter and book whereof I desired the account, 
 but he was ready with his distich. 
 
 1684. A. D.— Dr. Wallis. In the Phi- 
 losophical Transactions for the years 1686-7,* 
 Dr. Wallis gives an account of his performing 
 arithmetical operations in great numbers, by 
 night in the dark ; and conceives that we can 
 use our memory with greater advantage at this 
 time, than we can by dr,y, when our thoughts 
 are diverted by sights and noises. " Having had 
 the curiosity (says Dr. Wallis) heretofore to try, 
 how the strength of memory would suffice me, 
 to perform some arithmetical operations (as Mul- 
 tiplication, Division, Extraction cf Roots, etc.) 
 without the assistance of pell and ink, or ought 
 equivalent thereunto ; and finding it to succeed 
 well (for instance) in extracting the square Root 
 from numbers of 8, 10, ";2, or more places: I 
 proceeded tu try it (with success) in numbers of 
 20, SO, 40 places. But was not curious to keep 
 memorials oHhe particular numbers which I had 
 so considered, (as being but a curiosity, and not of 
 
 • Vol. xv. p. 1269. 
 
NATURAL MEMORY. 427 
 
 farther use,) till there happened an occasional 
 discourse of it with a forraigner (Johannes 
 Geurgius Pehhover, Regio-Montanus Borus- 
 sus) who coming to see the University was 
 pleased, as divers other forraigners often do) to 
 give me a visit : Feb. 18, l6f° at a time when I 
 was afflicted with a tedious and severe quartan 
 ague, (which held me for a whole year from 
 about Michaelmas then last past, till about the 
 same time in the year following;) which caused 
 me to pass mv nights with little or no sleep. 
 
 " He was desirous I would tell him some of 
 those uumbers which I had so considered. Which 
 at the present, for the reason but now mentioned) 
 I could not do; save only that, on Dec. 22, l6'6"9, 
 I had (by night in the dark) extracttd the square 
 root of 3 (with ciphers adjoined) contained to the 
 twentieth place of decimal fractions : finding it 
 to be: 
 
 1.7 3205,08075,6887 7,29353, fere. 
 
 Which is the square root of 3, with forty ciphers- 
 adjoined ; 
 3,00000. 00000. 00000. 00000. 00000. 00000. oocoo. 00000. 
 
 (which 1 had chanced to write down, because 
 V 3 is a surd which I might after have occasion 
 to make use of) but added, that I could at plea- 
 sure perforin the like at any time." 
 
 J7J4. A. D. — Antonio Magliabe chi 
 was born at Florence, Oct, 29, 1633. Such 
 
428 INSTANCES OP 
 
 was the poverty of his parents, that they thought 
 themselves happy in getting him into the service 
 of a man who sold herbs and fruit. Here he 
 took every opportunity, though he could not tell 
 one letter from another, to pore on the leaves of 
 some old books that served for waste paper, de- 
 claring that he loved it of all things. A neigh- 
 bouring bookseller, who observed this, took him 
 into his service. Young Magliabechi soon 
 learned to read ; and his inclination for reading 
 became his ruling passion; and a prodigious 
 memory his distinguished talent. He read every 
 book that came into his hands, and retained not 
 only the sense of what he read, but often all the 
 words, and the very manner of spelling, if sin- 
 gular. To make trial of the force of his me- 
 mory, a gentleman lent him a manuscript he was 
 going to print. Some time after it was returned, 
 the gentleman came to him, with a melancholy 
 face, and pretended it was lost. Magliabechi 
 being requested to recollect what he remembered 
 of it, wrote the whole without missing a zvord, 
 or varying the spelling. He was consulted by 
 all the learned who proposed to write on any 
 subject. If a priest, for instance, was going to 
 compose a panegyric on a saint, Magliabechi 
 would tell him every author, to the number of 
 an hundred sometimes, who had said any thing 
 of that saint, naming the book and the page, and 
 
NATURAL MEMORY. 429 
 
 the very words. He did this so often, and so 
 readily, that he came at last to be looked upon 
 as an oracle ; and Cosmo II T. Grand Duke of 
 Florence, made him his librarian, the most suit- 
 able office to Magliabechi's genius. In the latter 
 part of his life, when a book came into his 
 hands, he would read the title-page all over, dip 
 here and there in the preface, dedication, and 
 prefatory advertisements, if there were any ; and 
 then cast his eyes on each of the divisions, sec- 
 tions, or chapters. After this, he could tell at 
 any time what the book contained. 
 
 " Though Magliabechi must have lived a very 
 sedentary life, yet he attained to the age of 81. 
 He died July 14, J7J4, in the midst of the pub- 
 lic applause, after enjoying, during -all the latter 
 part of his life, such an affluence as very few 
 persons have ever procured by their knowledge or 
 learning. By his will he left a very fine library 
 collected by himself, for the use of the public, 
 with a fund to maintain it ; and the overplus of 
 the fund to the poor. It had been usual for 
 every author and printer to make him a present 
 of a copy of every thing they published. 
 
 " Though he was not an ecclesiastic, he would 
 never marry. He was quite slovenly in his 
 dress. He received his friends, and those who 
 came to consult him on any points of literature, 
 in a civil and obliging manner ; though in gene- 
 ral he had almost the air of a savage, and even 
 
430 INSTANCES OF 
 
 t 
 
 affected it ; together with a cynical or contemp- 
 tuous smile. In his manner of living, he affect- 
 ed the character of Diogenes : three hard eggs, 
 and a draught or two of water, were his usual 
 repast. When any one went to see him, they 
 most usually found him lolling in a sort of tixt 
 wooden cradle in the middle of his study, with a 
 multitude of books, some thrown in heaps, and 
 others scauered about the floor, ail around him ; 
 and this his cradle or bed, was attached to the 
 nearest pile of books by a number of cobwebs. 
 At their entrance he commonly used to call out 
 to them, ' Not to hurt his spiders/*" 
 
 1748. A. D. — William Lyon. In the 
 Gentleman's Magazine for the year 1752,+ there 
 is the following singular anecdote. " William 
 Lyon, a strolling player, who performed at the 
 theatre at Edinburgh, and who was excellent in 
 the part of Gibby, the Highlander, gave a sur- 
 prising instance of memory. One evening, over 
 his bottle, he wager'd a crown bowl of punch, 
 (a liquor of which he was very fond,) that next 
 morning at the rehearsal, he would repeat a 
 Daily Advertiser from beginning to end. At 
 the rehearsal, his opponent reminded him of the 
 wager, imagining as he was drunk the night 
 before, that he must certainly have forgot it, and 
 
 • Spcnre's Parallel of Hill and Magliabechi. 
 t Vol. xxii. p. 411. 
 
NATURAL MEMORY. 431 
 
 rallied him on his ridiculous bragging of his me- 
 mory. Lyon puiied out the paper, desired him 
 to look at it, and be judge himself whether he 
 did or did not win his wager. Notwithstanding 
 the unconnected matter of the paragraphs — the 
 variety of advertisements — and the general choas 
 which goes to the composition of a newspaper, 
 he repeated it from beginning to end, without the 
 least hesitation or mistake. Lyon died about 
 four years ago at Edinburgh, where he had 
 played with great success."* 
 
 1751. A. D. — Jedediah Buxton. A 
 correspondent in the Gentleman's Magazine for 
 February 175 l,f gives the following account of 
 this extraordinary man. " It is necessary to 
 premise first that he is no scholar, not being able 
 to scrawl his own name ; and secondly that his 
 attainments are of his own pure industry, for that 
 he never had further help towards them, than his 
 learning the multiplication table in his youth ; 
 yet without the assistance of pen, ink, or chalk, 
 or any other mark, he will multiply 5 or 6 figures 
 by as many, or divide as large sums off hand, in a 
 very short time, sooner than the most concise of 
 your arithmeticians pretend to. 
 
 • " We have heard of this performance (says the editor) 
 many years since, when the Dui'ij Advertiser, thongh larger 
 than other papers, was not so large and crowded as it has 
 been of late." t Vol. xxi. p. 61. 
 
432 INSTANCES OF 
 
 " I met with him by accident last summer, 
 and after hearing of his performances, I first 
 proposed to him the following random question : 
 In a body whose 3 sides are 23145789 yards, 
 5641732 yards, and 549@5 yards, how many cu- 
 bical ^ths of an inch ? After once naming the 
 several figures distinctly one after another, in or- 
 der to assure himself of the several dimensions 
 and fix them in his mind, without more ado he 
 fell to work amidst more than a 100 of his fellow 
 labourers, and after leaving him about 5 hours, 
 on some necessary concerns (in which time I 
 calculated it with the pen) at my return, he told 
 me he was ready : Upon which taking out my 
 pocket-book and pencil, to note down his answer, 
 he asked me which end 1 would begin at, for he 
 would direct me either way. I chose the regular 
 method, and to my great surprize, found that in 
 a line of 28 figures, he made no hesitation nor 
 the least mistake. Many such questions did 
 several other people give him, which he never 
 failed to answer truly ; yea he often corrected 
 those who wrought with the pen. What is more 
 astonishing than this, he would suffer two people 
 to propose different questions, one immediately 
 after the other, and give each their respective 
 answers, without the least confusion. So reten- 
 tive is his memory, that he will repeat his an- 
 swers a month or two afterwards if you ask him . 
 
NATURAL MEMORY. 433 
 
 " He will stride over a piece of land or a field, 
 and tell you the contents of it almost as exact as 
 if you measured it by the chain. Some years 
 ago he measured in this manner the whole lord- 
 ship of Elmton, of some thousand acres, be- 
 longing to Sir John Rhodes, and brought him 
 the contents, not only in acres, roods, and 
 perches, but even in square inches ; after this, 
 for his own amusement, he reduced them into 
 square hairs-breadths, computing (I think) 48 to 
 each side of the inch, which produced such an 
 incomprehensible nv.""ber, that instead of enter- 
 taining the mind with any sort of pleasure, serves 
 more to amaze and distract it. 
 
 " Millions, millions upon millions, tribes, 
 cramps, and so on, (for in this manner he enu- 
 merates his long series of numbers) are as plain 
 and familiar to him, as pounds, shillings, and 
 pence ; I may say more familiar, for he has sel- 
 dom more than a week's wages before hand. It 
 was but the other day, he set himself a voluntary 
 question, to calculate how much one farthing 
 doubled 140 times would amount to. This he 
 desired me to set down in 39 places of pounds, 
 and an odd Qs. &d. When I asked him if he 
 could multiply this immense sum into itself, he 
 said he would undertake it, and the odd fraction 
 likewise if I pleased; but I dismissed him with 
 the whole numbers, and shall not be more amaz- 
 p p 
 
434 INSTANCES OF 
 
 ed at his bringing a true answer, than I have 
 been already at his surprising performances, 
 some of which have cost him many days study ; 
 but be the work long or short it is all one to him, 
 because he reassumes the operation in the morn- 
 ing at the same place he left it over night, and 
 so continues till he has finished it. If at any 
 time you find an error in his answer, he will 
 overhaul, as he terms it, and find out his mistake 
 himself, rather than be convicted by your pen." 
 
 Another correspondent in the same Magazine 
 for August 1751,* affords some farther informa- 
 tion concerning Buxton. He says, " I perceive 
 he has a good notion of the square, oblong, 
 triangle, and circle. The first question I pro- 
 posed was as follows : admit a field 423 yards 
 long, and 383 wide, what was the area ? After I 
 had read the figures to him distinctly, he gave 
 me the true product, viz. 162009 yards, in two 
 minutes, for I observed by my watch how long 
 every operation took him. I then asked him 
 how many acres the aforesaid field measured? In 
 1 1 minutes he told me S3 acres, 1 rood, 35 
 perches, 20 yards, and a quarter just. I then 
 proposed to him, how many barley corns would 
 reach 8 miles f In a minute and half he answered 
 1520640 barley corns. He is the slowest in 
 
 • Vol. xxi. p. 347. 
 
NATURAL MEMORY. 435 
 
 finding the area of a circle, but yet he finds it 
 very near the truth, though he don't use the ma- 
 thematical rules. Allowing the distance between 
 York and London to be 204 miles, I asked him 
 how many times a coach-wheel turned round in 
 that distance, allowing the wheel's circumference 
 to be six yards? In IS minutes he answered 
 59840 times. The next proposition was, a tub 
 or bin 346 inches long, 256 inches wide, 94 
 inches deep, how many gallons liquid measure 
 and what corn will it hold ? Answer, 3,454,464 
 solid inches, or 1,763,685,568 half quarters of 
 solid inches, making J 2,249,872 gallons liquid 
 measure, or 12249 gallons, 3 quarts, and 34| 
 inches; or it will hold 191 quarters, 3 bushels, 
 3 quarterns, a huif quartern, and 34i inches re- 
 mainder. 
 
 " Again, suppose a canal was to be dug 426 
 feet long, 263 wide, and 2 feet deep, how many 
 cubical yards of earth to be removed ? After 
 pausing a quarter of an hour he answered, 1037S 
 yards 24 feet. He will talk with you freely 
 whilst he is doing his questions, it being no 
 molestation or hindrance to him, but enough to 
 confound a penman. His memory is so great, 
 that he cau leave off and reassume the operation 
 again, at a week, month, or at several months 
 end ; he calls his figures all by their proper 
 names, and is very ready at naming them either 
 
436 INSTANCES OF 
 
 backwards or forwards. From May, 17, 10 h. 
 A. D. 172.5, he told me he was drunk (to make 
 use of his expression) with reckoning by his me- 
 mory till June 16, following, and then slept 
 soundly seven hours, but will never attempt so 
 much reckoning again, for fear of falling into the 
 same dilemma. I suppose what he means by 
 his being drunk, was his being so much stUpified 
 with thought, as rendered him incapable of busi- 
 ness ; when it may well be said neque pes, nequc 
 mens satis suum officiumfacit. 
 
 " But, to proceed further with this uncommon 
 man, I was led by curiosity to know what ques- 
 tion it was that caused his drunkenness ; to which 
 he replied, in answering the following question. 
 In 202,600,000,360 miles, and each mile reck- 
 oned to be cubical, how many barley-corns, 
 vetches, peas, wheat, oats, rye, beans, lintels, and 
 how many hairs, each an inch long, would fill 
 that space, reckoning 48 hairs in breadth to an 
 inch on the flat, as he found them to be so. 1 
 shall here subjoin his table of measures, which 
 he founded on experiment. 
 
 200 Barley corns 
 300 Wheat corns 
 512 Rye corn* 
 * 180 Oats 
 
 40 Peas > are contamc « xn #nc 
 
 25 Beans ( solid inch « 
 
 80 Vetches 
 100 Lintels 
 2304 Hairs 1 inch long 
 
NATURAL MEMORY. 457 
 
 Prom which he calculated the following result : 
 14 thousand, 93 mill. 420 thous. 936 quarters, 
 1 bushel, 1 peck, I quartern, 3 pints, and 5 and 
 a quarter solid inches of one .sort of grain, are 
 contained in one solid mile; or 5 thousand, 451 
 mill. 776 thousand yards in a cubical mile, being 
 254 millions of millions, '358 thousand, 6l mill, 
 and 56 thousand inches in a cubical mile; and if 
 every hair be an inch long, and 2304 hairs a 
 cubical inch, then 586 thousand, 40 millions of 
 millions, 972 thousand, 673 millions, and 24 
 thousand, will fill the space of a cubical mile : 
 but if a hair be no longer than it is broad, he 
 then found that there would be 28 tribe*, i '29 
 thousand, 966 millions of millions, 688 thousand, 
 305 millions, and 152 thousand hairs, to fill the 
 space of a cubical mile. 
 
 " As we are come to that notation where he 
 introduces the word tribe, it will be proper to 
 set down that prolix number, arising from 140 
 nails, doubled at a farthing a nail, viz. 
 725,958,238,096,074,907,868,531,656,993,«38,851,106l.2s.8</. 
 which he reads thus : 
 
 725 Tribes of tribes, 
 
 958 Thous. of mill, of mill, of tribes, 
 
 238 Millions of millions of tribes, 
 
 096 Thousand millions of tribes, 
 
 074 Millions of tribes, 
 
 907 Thousand tribes, 
 
 868 Tribes, 
 
438 INSTANCES OF 
 
 531 Thousand millions of millions, 
 
 656 Millions of millions, 
 
 993 Thousand millions, 
 
 638 Millions, 
 
 851 Thousands, 
 
 106 Pounds, 2 shillings, and 8 pence. 
 
 For the truth of which I leave those gentlemea 
 that have leisure and curiosity to try it. 
 
 " I shall only mention one thing more with 
 respect to this man's memory, and it shall be in 
 squaring the above number. Now you see he is 
 to multiply 39 figures by 39 figures, and all by 
 the strength of his memory, without having re- 
 course to human assistance, or pen, ink, and 
 paper. What a prodigious task must this be to 
 be operated by the head only, which he certainly 
 did and after two months and a half, he brings the 
 following answer, omitting the odd 2s. 8d. which 
 he reads thus : 
 
 597 Tribes of tribes of cramps, 
 
 015 Thons. mill, of mill. trib. of cramps, 
 
 269 Mill, of mill, tribes of cramps, 
 
 459 Thous. mill, tribes of cramps, 
 
 5*7 Mill, of tribes of cramps, 
 
 385 Thousand tribes of cramps, 
 
 673 Tribes of cramps, 
 
 733 Thous. mill, of mill, of cramps, 
 
 542 Million of millions of cramps, 
 
 638 Thousand millions of cramps, 
 
 591 Millions of cramps, 
 
 721 Thousand cramps, 
 
 913 Crampa. 
 
NATURAL MEMORY. 439 
 
 298 Tribes of tribes, 
 
 966 Thous. mi. of mill, of tribes, 
 
 079 Millions of mill, of tribes, 
 
 307 Thousand millions of tribes, 
 
 524 Millions of tribes, 
 
 904 Thousand tribes, 
 
 381 Tribes, 
 
 389 Thousand millions of millions, 
 
 499 Million of millions, 
 
 251 Thousands of millions, 
 
 637 Millions, 
 
 423 Thousands, 
 
 236 Pounds. 
 
 Further particulars respecting Jedediah, of an 
 interesting nature, are found in the Gentleman's 
 Magazine for December, 1753.* This corres- 
 pondent observes, " I accidently met him one 
 afternoon last week, and was not much above 
 two hours in his company. In the first half 
 hour, several persons being present, some tri- 
 fling things were started and talked of; but as 
 he was very desirous that I should propose some 
 higher questions to him, I complied, and the 
 company were all witnesses of his prodigious 
 readiness in answering the following questions. 
 
 " QUESTION I. 
 
 " In a field 351 yards long, and 261 yards wide, how 
 many acres? 
 
 " After 1 1 minutes, he answered — 1 8 acres, 
 3 roods, 28 perches, and 14 remained. 
 
 * Vol. xxiii. p. 557. 
 
440 INSTANCES OP 
 
 "QUESTION II. 
 
 " Suppose sound moves 1142 fe t in one second of time, 
 bow long then, after the firing of one of the cannons at 
 Retford, may the same be heard at Haughtou Park, taking 
 the distance at five miles ? 
 
 " After about a quarter of an hour he told 
 me — in 23 seconds, 7 thirds, and 6' remained. 
 " QUESTION III. 
 " Admit I set 3584 brocoli plants in rows, 4 feet asun- 
 der, and the plants 7 feet apart, in a rectangular plot of 
 ground, how much land will these plants take up ? 
 
 " In near half an hour he said — '£ acres, I 
 rood, 8 perches and half. 
 
 " QUESTION IV. 
 " What dimensions must I give my joiner to make me 
 a cubical corn bin, that shall hold me just a quarter of 
 malt, Winchester measure ? 
 
 " This question exercised all his faculties, and 
 he declared it was the hardest he ever proposed ; 
 by this 1 perceived he had never engaged himself 
 about the cube root : however, though so diffi- 
 cult it appeared to him, he was very desirous to 
 answer it, before it was too late in the evening, 
 and after some time, he said to himself there 
 were nooks in it, but he would sift them out : 
 he never regarded our talking, but sat as one 
 heedless of every thing about him, except his 
 pot of beer, which he took notice of. I gave 
 him no hints, help, or assistance, but left it en- 
 tirely to him, as I did the others, nor had he any 
 thing in hisJiand to make any marks (which I 
 must repeat, because he makes all his computa- 
 
NATURAL MEMORY. 
 
 441 
 
 tions by his memory) after about an hour he 
 told me, it would be a little more than 25f 
 inches on a side, and 26 inches would be too 
 much, all which is very true and very exact. 
 
 " I shall here subjoin an account he gave me 
 of the quantity of ale or strong beer that he haf 
 drank on free cost, since he was 12 years of age, 
 and the gentlemen's names where ; and, as the 
 account was a little particular, I asked him hue 
 and illuc after I had committed it to paper, and 
 he answered each demand as set down, at the 
 houses of the following noblemen and gentle- 
 men: 
 
 
 Pints. 
 
 
 Pint*. 
 
 Duke of Kingston 
 
 2130 
 
 Rev. Mr. Pegge 
 
 10 
 
 Duke of Norfolk 
 
 266 
 
 Mr. Richardson 
 
 7 
 
 Duke of Leeds 
 
 232 
 
 Mr. Raynes 
 
 30 
 
 Duke of Devonshire 
 
 10 
 
 Mr. Stevens 
 
 a 
 
 Lady Oxford 
 
 £80 
 
 Mr. Far 
 
 i 
 
 G Heathcote, Esq. 
 
 160 
 
 Mr. Greenwood 
 
 77 
 
 Sii G.Savile, Bart. 
 
 20 
 
 Mr. Shaw 
 
 2 
 
 J. Tbornhagh, Esq. 
 
 20 
 
 Mr. Barker 
 
 15 
 
 Sir L. Pilkington, Bart. 
 
 S 
 
 Mr. Sisson 
 
 12 
 
 John Bristowe, Esq. 
 
 92 
 
 Mr. Major 
 
 S 
 
 W. Villareal, Esq. 
 
 8 
 
 Mr. Brigs 
 
 3 
 
 Sir H. Hunlock, Bart. 
 
 2 
 
 Mr. Pilkington 
 
 2 
 
 Burton, Esq. 
 
 4 
 
 Mr J. Brigs 
 
 4 
 
 White, Esq. 
 
 1 
 
 Mr. Beestings 
 
 45 
 
 Dr Burne 
 
 5 
 
 Gathering for his dead 
 
 cow 72 
 
 Mr. Hocks 
 
 251 
 
 Rev. Mr. Hewet 
 
 S 
 
 Mr. West 
 
 201 
 
 Col. Chadwick 
 
 3 
 
 Mr. Vesey 
 
 16 
 
 Mr Halfhead 
 
 15 
 
 Rev. Mr. Hartshorn 
 
 19 
 
 Mr. Wright 
 
 40 
 
 Mr. Flint 
 
 317 
 
 At Elmton Manor 
 
 300 
 
 Clarke, Esq. 
 
 20 
 
 Mr. Sherwin 
 
 15 
 
 Hallows, Esq. 
 
 12 
 
 Mr Carteret 
 
 16 
 
 Sir J. Jenkinson, Bart. 
 
 1 
 
 Mr. Lane 
 
 20 
 
 Mr. Hancock 
 
 54 
 
 Mr. Whitehous* 
 
 3 
 
 Mr- Hall 
 
 63 
 
 Mr. R. Parkin 
 
 40 
 
 Mr. E. Sharpe of Elkesly 
 
 § 
 
 Mr. R. Greenwood 
 
 £4 
 
 Mr Th. Sharpe 
 
 16 
 
 Mr. Th. Clarkt 
 
 40 
 
 Rev. Mr. Boawre 
 
 17 
 
 Mr. Bullivant 
 
 7 
 
 Mr. Willet* 
 
 17 
 
 Mr. Padley 
 
 10 
 
 Mr. Mayer of Chesterfield 
 
 3 
 
 At my tvn h*o«« 
 
 M 
 
-442 INSTANCES OF 
 
 " The whole amounts to 5 1 16 pints, or winds, 
 as he terms them, because he never uses above 
 •ne wind to a pint, or two to a quart." 
 
 In the Gentleman's Magazine for June, 
 1754, # there is a portrait of Jedediah, in thk 
 forty-ninth year of his age, with this motto from 
 Virgil, ' Nwneros Memini.'f The editor of 
 this Magazine having received many communi- 
 cations questioning the authenticity of the cir- 
 cumstances already related of Buxton, gave re- 
 peated assurances of the certainty of the facts, 
 and appealed to the known integrity of the gen- 
 tlemen by whom they were communicated; and, 
 as an additional testimony inserted a sketch of 
 
 * Vol. xiv. p. 251. 
 
 t In addition to this portrait there have been various 
 others engraven at different times. (1.) A small etching, 
 (aet. 57, 1764,) by Miss Hartley, 1764. (2.) ,A whole 
 length — an etching in large 4°. by Holme. (3.) A ditto, 
 in mezzot. J. Spilsbury. (4.) A ditto, an etching, 4°. 1>t 
 Topham, 1770. (Bromley.) 
 
NATURAL MEMORY. 44J 
 
 the life of this extraordinary man. U With this 
 print* (says the editor) it was greatly to be wished 
 
 that some account of his life could be given : 
 but the life of laborious poverty is necessarily 
 uniform and obscure : the history of one day 
 would almost include the events of all. Time, 
 
 * The portrait of Jedediah from which the above wood- 
 out is taken. 
 
444 INSTANCES or 
 
 with respect to Buxton, changed nothing but his 
 age, nor did the seasons vary his employment, 
 except that in winter he used a Jlail, and in 
 summer a ling hook. 
 
 " The grandfather of Jedediah, John Buxton, 
 was vicar of Ebneton, in Derbyshire, and his 
 father, William Buxton, was school-master of 
 the same parish ; but Jedediah, notwithstanding 
 the profession of his father, is extremely illite- 
 rate, having by whatever accident, been so 
 much neglected in his youth as never to have 
 been taught to write : how he came first to 
 know the relative proportion of numbers, and 
 their progressive denominations, he does not re- 
 member; but to this he has applied the whole 
 force of his mind, and upon this his attention is 
 constantly fixed, so that he frequently takes no 
 cognizance of external objectsjr* and when he 
 does it is only with respect to their numbers : 
 the same attention of his mind appears as well 
 by what he hears as by what he sees. If any 
 space of time is mentioned, he will soon after 
 say, that it is so many minutes, and if any dis- 
 tance of way, he will assign the number of 
 hair's breadths, without any question having 
 been asked, or any calculation expected by the 
 company. 
 
 " By this method he has greatly increased the 
 power of his memory, with respect to figures. 
 
NATURAL MEMORY. 445 
 
 and stored up several common products in his 
 mind, to which he can have immediate recourse, 
 as the number of minutes in a year, of hair's 
 breadths in a mile, and many others. When he 
 once comprehends a question, which is not 
 without difficulty and time, he begins to work 
 with amazing facility, and will leave a long 
 question half wrought, and, at the end of se- 
 veral months, resume it, beginning where he 
 left off, and proceeding regularly till it is com- 
 pleted. 
 
 " His memory would certainly have been 
 equally retentive, with respect to other objects, 
 if he had attended to ether objects with equal 
 diligence; but his perpetual application to fi- 
 gures has prevented the smallest acquisition of 
 any other knowledge, and his mind seems to 
 have retained fewer ideas than that of a boy of 
 ten years old, in the same class of life. He 
 has been sometimes asked, on his return from 
 church, whether he remembered the text, or 
 any part of the sermon, but it never appeared 
 that he brought away one sentence : his mind, 
 upon a closer examination, being found to have 
 been busied, even during divine service in its 
 favourite operation, either dividing some time or 
 some space into the smallest known parts, or 
 resolving some question that had been given him 
 as a test of his abilities. His power of abstraq- 
 98 
 
446 instances or 
 
 tion is so great that no noise interrupts him ; 
 and, if he is asked any question, he immediately 
 replies, and returns again to his calculation, 
 without any confusion, or the loss of more time 
 than his answer required. His method of work- 
 ing is peculiar to himself, and by no means the 
 shortest or the clearest, as will appear by the 
 following example : 
 
 " He was required to multiply 4.56 by 378, 
 which he had completed as soon as a person in 
 company had produced the product in the com- 
 mon way : and upon being requested to work it 
 audibly, that his method might be known, he 
 multiplied 4s6 first by 5, which produced 2280, 
 which he again multiplied by 20, and found the 
 product 45600, which was the multiplicand mul- 
 tiplied by 100 ; this product he again multiplied 
 by 3, which produced 136800, which was the 
 sum of the multiplicand multiplied by 300; it 
 remained therefore to multiply it by 78, which 
 he effected, by multiplying 2280 (the product 
 of the multiplicand multiplied by 5) by 15; 5 
 times 15 being 75 ; this product being 34200, 
 he added to the 136800, which was the multi- 
 plicand multiplied by 300, and this produced 
 17 iOOO, which was 375 times 456 ; to complete 
 this operation therefore, he multiplied 456 by 3, 
 which produced 1368, and having added this 
 
NATURAL MEMORY. 447 
 
 number to 171000, be found the product of 456 
 multiplied by 378 to be 172S6S. 
 
 " Thus it appears that his arithmetic is per- 
 fectly his own, and that he is so little acquainted 
 with the common rules as to multiply 456 first 
 by 5, and the product by 20, to find what sum 
 it would produce multiplied by 100, whereas if 
 he had added two noughts to the figures, he 
 would have obtained it at once. 
 
 " The only objects of Jedediah's curiosity, ex- 
 cept figures, were the king and royal family, and 
 his desire to see them was so strong, that, in the 
 beginning of the spring, he walked to London 
 on purpose, but at last returned disappointed, 
 the king having just removed to Kensington as 
 Jedediah came into London. He was however, 
 introduced to the Royal Society, whom he called 
 the volk of the Siety Court : the gentlemen 
 who were present asked him several questions in 
 arithmetic, to prove his abilities, and dismissed 
 him with a handsome gratuity. 
 
 " During his residence in London he was car- 
 ried to see King Richard III. performed at 
 Drury-lane playhouse, and it was expected ei- 
 ther that the novelty and the splendour of the 
 show would have fixed him in astonishment, or 
 kept his imagination in a continual hurry ; or 
 that his passions would, in some degree, have 
 been touched by the power of action, if he had 
 
448 INSTANCES OF 
 
 not perfectly understood the dialogue ; but Jedc- 
 diah'a mind was employed in the playhouse just 
 as it was employed at church. During the 
 dance he fixed his attention upon the number of 
 steps ; he declared after a fine piece of music, 
 that the innumerable sounds produced by the in- 
 struments had perplexed him beyond measure, 
 and he attended even to Mr. Garrick only to 
 count the words that he uttered, in which, he 
 says, he perfectly succeeded. 
 
 " Jedediah is now safely returned to the place 
 of his birth, where, if his enjoyments are few, 
 his wishes do not seem to»be more : he applies 
 to his labour, by which he subsists with cheer- 
 fulness ; he regrets nothing that he left behind 
 him in London, and it is still his opinion, that 
 a slice of rusty bacon affords the most delicious 
 repast."* 
 
 180S. A. D.—Richard Porson. The 
 most remarkable among the intellectual powers 
 of Richard Porson was unquestionably that of 
 memory. It was at once obvious to every one 
 who had the good fortune to be in his company, 
 and it never ceased to excite the admiration of 
 those who had most frequently an opportunity 
 
 • Jedediah died about the year 1774, asred 70, and left 
 several children, none of whom have inherited the rare ta- 
 lents of their father. 
 
NATURAL MEMORY. 449 
 
 of conversing with him. Ever} 7 thing he had 
 read (and what was there worthy, or, indeed, un- 
 worthy of literary notice, which he had not 
 read?*) appeared to be present to his mind with 
 uncommon[precision. Whensoever a subject con- 
 nected with English, Latin, or Greek poetry was 
 started, he would recite some brilliant and strik- 
 ing passage at considerable length in the words 
 of the author. And in the latter language more 
 especially, which was his favourite study, he was 
 so completely master, not only of the words of 
 the author in question, but of every circumstance 
 relating to the words, that he would expatiate 
 upon the various readings, and the points of gram- 
 mar and criticism connected with them, in such 
 a manner, as to produce the effect of a complete 
 and well-digested Variorum Commentary. We 
 remember to have heard him relate one or two 
 
 * It was one of the peculiar traits of his mind that it 
 rejected no aliment. He was equally well read in Joe 
 Miller, and the Fathers, as in Greek literature. And in 
 the very lowest, as well as highest branches of human 
 learning, his memory was equally retentive. In his power 
 over figures, though he was at an early age diverted from 
 mathematics, Mr. P. never knew kis equal. His quickness 
 in bringing out the result of a most intricate and manifold 
 calculation by mental working was magical. He had 
 formed for himself a species of short-hand in figures (if we 
 may use the term) that had the most astonishing brevity 
 and truth. 
 
 883 
 
450 INSTANCES Of 
 
 incidents which occurred at different, although 
 both early, pi nods of his life, which will illus- 
 trate this quality of his mind far better than any 
 laboured detail. 
 
 When he was very young, perhaps at the time 
 when he was under the care of Mr. Summers, 
 returning to his father's cottage, he lost his way, 
 and found shelter in the house of a little farmer, 
 whose son, somewhat older than Poison, had 
 just quitted school. With this boy Porson was 
 to sleep ; but instead of betaking himself to his 
 slumbers, he began questioning his companion 
 concerning what he hail learned at school. He 
 found him a most admirable arithmetician; and 
 passed the night in proposing questions, which 
 the other answered to his satisfaction as well as 
 surprise ; for at last he found him capable of 
 multiplying 9 figures by 9 in his head, an opera- 
 tion which was quite familiar to our young Pro- 
 fessor. 
 
 When at Eton, as he was going to his tutor's, 
 to construe an Horace lesson preparatory to the 
 business of school, one of the senior boys took 
 Person's Horace from him, and thrust into his 
 hands some English book. The tutor called 
 upon Porson to construe, and the other boys 
 were much amused in considering the figure he 
 would make in this emergency. Porson, how- 
 ever, who had Horace by heart before he went 
 
KATURAL MEMORY. 451 
 
 to Eton, knowing where the lesson was to begin, 
 began without hesitation, 
 
 Mercuri facunde, nepos Atlantis : 
 
 and went on regularly, first reciting the Latiu 
 and then giving the Latin and English, as if he 
 had really had the author before linn. The tu- 
 tor, perceiving some symptoms of astonishment 
 as well as mirth amongst the other boys, suspect- 
 ed that there was something unusual in the affair, 
 and inquired what edition of Horace Poison had 
 in his hand. " I learned the lesson from the 
 Delphin," replied his pupil, avoiding a direct an- 
 swer. " That is very odd," replied the other, " for 
 you seem to be reading in a different side of the 
 page from myself. Let me see your book" — 
 The truth was of course then discovered ; but 
 the master, instead of shewing any displeasure, 
 wisely and kindly observed to the others, that he 
 should be most happy to find any of them ac- 
 quitting themselves as well in a similar predica- 
 ment. 
 
 It should be remembered to the honour of the 
 Professor, that he never appeared in any degree 
 vain of this astonishing talent; and he once ob- 
 served, " I never remembered any thing but 
 what I transcribed three times, or read over six 
 times at the least; and, if you will do the same, 
 you will have as good a memory." Iadeed he 
 
452 INSTANCES OF 
 
 was at all times the warm advocate of a doctrine, 
 which is as true as it is important in the conduct 
 of education. He maintained that superiority of 
 intellect and of attainments was not so much 
 owing to a difference in the formation of the or- 
 gans, as in the mode by which education was 
 conducted. And although such a man as Porson 
 could not have failed to have been distinguished 
 for the strength and acuteness of his understand- 
 ing, under any circumstances, yet it cannot be 
 doubted that the habits of his earlier vears con- 
 tributed much to that force and precision in his 
 memory, for which he was so eminently distin- 
 guished. 
 
 1811. A. D. — Dr. Leyden, the lamented 
 author of the ' Scenes of Infancy in Teviotdale,' 
 and friend of Walter Scott, was remarkable for 
 the tenacity of his memory. When he was at 
 Mysore, an argument occurred upon a point of 
 English history : it was agreed to refer it to 
 Leyden, and, to the astonishment of all parties, 
 he repeated verbatim the whole of an Act of 
 Parliament in the reign of James I. relative to 
 Ireland, which decided the point in dispute. On 
 being asked how he came to charge his memory 
 with such extraordinary matter, he said that se- 
 veral years before, when he was writing on the 
 changes that had taken place in the English Ian- 
 
NATURAL MEMORY. 453 
 
 guage, this Act was one of the documents to 
 which he had referred as the specimen of the 
 stile of that age, and that he had retained every 
 word in his memory. Dr. Leyden fell a sacri- 
 fice to the climate of Java. 
 
 1812. A. D. — Zerah Colburn. The ap- 
 pearance of this young American, and rival of 
 Jedediah Buxton, having excited considerable at- 
 tention, we shall present our readers with the fol- 
 lowing interesting narrative, as drawn up by the 
 ingenious and well known calculator, Mr. Fran- 
 cis Baily. 
 
 " London, Aug. 20, 1812. * 
 
 " The attention of the philosophical world has 
 been lately attracted by the most singular pheno- 
 menon in the history of the human mind that 
 perhaps ever existed. It is the case of a child, 
 under eight years of age, who, without any pre- 
 vious knowledge of the common rules of arith- 
 metic, or even of the use and power of the Ara- 
 bic numerals, and without having given any par- 
 ticular attention to the subject, possesses (as if 
 by intuition) the singular faculty of solving a 
 great variety of arithmetical questions by the mere 
 operation of the mind, and without the usual 
 assistance of any visible symbol or contrivance. 
 
454 INSTANCES OF 
 
 tf The name of this child is Zerah Colburn, who 
 was born at Cabut (a town lying at the head of 
 Onion river, in Vermont, in the United States 
 of America,) on the 1st of September 1804. 
 About two years ago (August 1810) although 
 at that time not six years of age, he first began to 
 show those wonderful powers of calculation 
 which have since so much attracted the attention 
 and excited the astonishment of every person 
 who has witnessed his extraordinary abilities. 
 The discovery was made by accident. His fa- 
 ther, who had not given him any other instruc- 
 tion than such as was to be obtained at a small 
 'school established in that unfrequented and re- 
 mote part of the country, (and which did not 
 include either writing or ciphering,) was much 
 surprised one day to hear him repeating the 
 products of several numbers. Struck with 
 amazement at the circumstance, he proposed a 
 variety of arithmetical questions to him, all of 
 which the child solved with remarkable facility 
 and correctness. The news of this infant pro- 
 digy soon circulated through the neighbourhood ; 
 and many persons came from distant parts to 
 witness so singular a circumstance. The father, 
 encouraged by the unanimous opinion of all 
 who came to see him, was induced to undertake, 
 with this child, the tour of the United States. 
 
NATURAL MEMORY. 455 
 
 They were every where received with the most 
 flattering expressions ; and in the several towns 
 which they visited, various plans were suggested 
 to educate and bring up the child, free from all 
 expense to his family. Yielding, however, to 
 the pressing solicitations of his friends, and 
 urged by the most respectable and powerful re- 
 commendations, as well as by a view to his son's 
 more complete education, the father has brought 
 the child to this country, where they arrived on 
 the lith of May last : and the inhabitants of this 
 metropolis have for the last three months had an 
 opportunity of seeing and examining this wonder- 
 ful phenomenon,* and of verifying the report* 
 that have been circulated respecting him. 
 
 " Many persons of the first eminence for their 
 knowledge in mathematics, and well known for 
 their philosophical inquiries, have made a point 
 of seeing and conversing with his extraordinary 
 powers. It is correctly true, as stated of him, that 
 — * He will not only determine, with the greatest 
 facility and dispatch, the exact number of minutet 
 or seconds in any given period of time ; but will 
 also solve any other question of a similar kind. 
 He will tell the exact product arising from the 
 multiplication of any number, consisting of two, 
 
 * At the Exhibition Rooms. Spring Gardens. 
 
456 INSTANCES OF 
 
 three, or four figures, by any other number consist- 
 ing of the like number of figures. Or, any number, 
 consisting of six, or seven places of figures, being 
 proposed he will determine, with equal expedi- 
 tion and ease, all the factors of which it is com- 
 posed. This singular faculty consequently ex- 
 tends not only to the raising of powers, but also 
 to the extraction of the square and cube roots of 
 the number proposed ; and likewise to the means 
 of determining whether it be a prime number (or 
 a number incapable of division by any other num- 
 ber) ; for which case there does not exist, at pre- 
 sent, any general rule among mathematicians.' 
 All these, and a variety of other questions con- 
 nected therewith, are answered by this child with 
 such promptness and accuracy (and in the midst 
 of his juvenile pursuits) as to astonish every per- 
 son who has visited him. 
 
 " At a meeting of his friends which was held 
 for the purpose of concerting the best method of 
 promoting the views of the father, this child un- 
 dertook and completely succeeded in, raising 
 the number 8 progressively up to the sixteenth 
 power ! ! ! and in naming the last result, viz. 
 28 1 ,474,976,7 1 0,6o6 he was right in every figure. 
 He was then tried as to other numbers, consist- 
 ing of one figure ; all of which he raised (by ac- 
 tual multiplication and not by memory) as high 
 
NATURAL MEMORY. 457 
 
 as the tenth power, with so much facility and 
 dispatch that the person appointed to take down 
 the results, was obliged to enjoin him not to be 
 so rapid ! With respect to numbers consisting of 
 two figures, he would raise some of them to the 
 sixth, seventh, and eighth, power ; but not always 
 with equal facility : for the larger the products 
 became* the more difficult he found it to proceed. 
 He was asked the square root of ] 06929, and 
 before the number could be written down, he 
 immediately answered 327. He was then re- 
 quired to name the cube root of 268,336,125, 
 and with equal facility and promptness he re- 
 plied 645. Various other questions of a similar 
 nature, respecting the roots and powers of very 
 high numbers, were proposed by several of the 
 gentlemen present, to all of which he answered 
 in a similar manner. One of the party re- 
 quested him to name the factors which produced 
 the number 247483, which he immediately did 
 by mentioning the two numbers 941 and %6S ; 
 which indeed are the only two numbers that will 
 produce it. Another of them proposed 17 J 395, 
 and he named the following factors as the only 
 ones that would produce it ; viz. 5 X 34279 
 7x24485, 59X2906, 83x2065, 35x4897, 
 295x581, and 413X413. He was then asked 
 to give the f actorsof 36083 ; but he immediately 
 
 RK 
 
458 INSTANCES OF 
 
 replied that it had none, which in fact was the 
 case, as 36083 is a prime number. Other num- 
 bers were indiscriminately proposed to him, and 
 he always succeeded in giving the correct factors, 
 except in the case of prime numbers, which he 
 discovered almost as soon as proposed. One of 
 the gentlemen asked him how many minutes 
 there were in forty-eight years ; and before the 
 question could be written down he replied 
 25,228,800 ; and instantly added, that the number 
 of secofids in the same period was 1 ,5 1S,7$8,000. 
 Various questions of the like kind were put to 
 him ; and to all of them he answered with nearly 
 equal facility and promptitude; so as to asto- 
 nish every one present, and to excite a desire 
 that so extraordinary a faculty should (if possible) 
 be rendered more extensive and useful. 
 
 " It was the wish of the gentlemen present 
 to obtain a knowledge of the method by which 
 the child was enabled to answer, with so much 
 facility and correctness, the questions thus put to 
 him : but to all their inquiries upon this subject 
 (and he was closely examined upon this point) he 
 was unable to give them any information. He 
 positively declared (and every observation that 
 was made seemed to justify the assertion) that he 
 did not know how the answers came into his 
 mind. In the act of multiplying two numbers 
 
NATURAL MEMORY. 45$ 
 
 togefJier, and in the raising of powers, it was evi- 
 dent (not only from the motion of his lips, but 
 also from some singular facts which will be here- 
 after mentioned,) that some operation was going 
 forward in his mind ; yet that operation could 
 not (from the readiness with which the answers 
 were furnished) be at all allied to the usual mode 
 of proceeding with such subjects : and moreover, 
 he is entirely ignorant of the common rules of 
 arithmetic, and cannot perform, upon paper, a 
 simple sum in multiplication or division. But, 
 in the extraction of roots and in mentioning the 
 factors of high numbers it does not appear that 
 any operation can take place ; since he will give 
 the answer immediately, or in a very few seconds, 
 where it would require, according to the ordi- 
 nary method of solution, a very difficult and la- 
 borious calculation : and moreover, the know- 
 ledge of a prime number cannot be obtained by 
 any known rule. 
 
 u It has been already observed, that it was 
 evident, from some singular facts, that the child 
 operated by certain rules known only to him- 
 self. This discovery was made in one or two 
 instances, when he had been closely pressed 
 upon that point. In one case he was asked 
 to tell the square of 4395 ; he at first hesi- 
 tated, fearful that he should not be able to 
 
460 INSTANCES OF 
 
 answer it correctly : but when he applied him- 
 self to it he said it was 19,316,025. On be- 
 ing questioned as to the cause of his hesitation, 
 he replied that he did not like to multiply four 
 figures by four figures : but, said he, ' I found 
 ' out another way ; I multiplied 293 by 293, and 
 ' then multiplied this product twice by the num- 
 ' ber 15, which produced the same result/ Oft 
 another occasion, his highness the Duke of 
 Gloucester asked him the product of 21,7*4 
 multiplied by 543 : lie immediately replied 
 11,801,562: but, upon some remark being 
 made on the subject, the child said that he had, 
 in his own mind, multiplied 65202 by 181. 
 Now, although in the first instance it must b» 
 evident to every mathematician that 4S95 i» 
 equal to 293 X 15, (and consequently that (4395) 
 £rr(293) e X(15) 2 ; and further that in the se- 
 cond case 543 is equal to 181 x3, and conse- 
 quently that 21734 x (181 X3)=(21734x3x 
 181 ; yet, it is not less remarkable that this 
 combination should be immediately perceived by 
 the child, and we cannot the less admire his in- 
 genuity in thus seizing instantly the easiest me- 
 thod of solving the question proposed to him. 
 
 " It must be evident, from what has here been 
 stated, that the singular faculty which this child 
 possesses is not altogether dependent upon his 
 
NATURAL MEMORY. 46l 
 
 memory. In the multiplication of numbers and 
 in the raising of powers, he is doubtless consi- 
 deiably assisted by that remarkable quality of the 
 mind : and in this respect lie might be considered 
 as bearing some resemblance (if the difference of 
 age did not prevent the justness of the compa- 
 rison) to the celebrated Jedediah Buxton, and 
 other persons of similar note. But, in the ex- 
 traction of the. roots of numbers, and in deter- 
 mining their factors (if any), it is clear, to all 
 those who have witnessed the astonishing quick- 
 ness and accuracy of this child, that the memory 
 has little or nothing to do with the process. 
 And in this particular point consists the remark- 
 able difference between the present and all for- 
 mer instances of an apparently similar kind. 
 
 " It has been recorded as an astonishing effort 
 of memory that the celebrated Euler (who, in 
 the science of analysis, might vie even with New- 
 ton himself,) could remember the first six pow- 
 ers ot every number under 100. This, probably, 
 must be taken with some restrictions: but, if true 
 to the fullest extent, it is not more astonishing 
 than the efforts of this child ; with this additional 
 circumstance in favour of the latter, that he is 
 capable of verifying, in a very few seconds, 
 every figure which lie may have occasion for. It 
 has been further remarked by the biographer of 
 *RS 
 
462 INSTANCES OF 
 
 that eminent mathematician, that ' he perceived, 
 ' almost at a simple glance, the factors of which 
 ' his formulae were composed ; the particular 
 
 * system of factors belonging to the question uti- 
 
 * der consideration : the various artifices by 
 ' which that system may be simplified and redu- 
 1 ced ; and the relation of the seveial factors to 
 ' the conditions of the hypothesis. His expert- 
 ' ness in this particular probably resulted, in a 
 ' great measure, from the case with which he 
 ' performed mathematical investigations by head. 
 
 * lie had always accustomed himself to that ex- 
 ' ercise; and, having practised it with assiduity, 
 ' (even before the loss of sight, which afterwards 
 1 rendered it a matter of necessity,) he is an in- 
 ' stance to what an astonishing degree it may be 
 " acquired, and how much it improves the intel- 
 1 lectual powers. No other discipline is so ef- 
 ' fectual in strengthening the faculty of attention: 
 ' it gives a facility of apprehension, an accuracy 
 ' and steadiness to the conceptions ; and (what is 
 ( a still more valuable acquisition it habituates 
 ' the mind to arrangement in its reasonings and 
 
 * reflections/ 
 
 " It is not intended to draw a comparison be- 
 tween the humble, though astonishing, efforts of 
 this infant-prodigy and the gigantic powers of that 
 illustrious character to whoTii a reference has 
 just been made : yet we may be permitted to 
 
NATURAL MEMORY. 436 
 
 hope and expect that those wonderful talents, 
 which are so conspicuous at this early age, may 
 by a suitable education be considerably improved 
 and extended: and that some new light will even- 
 tually be thrown upon those subjects, for the elu- 
 cidation of which his mind appears to be pecu- 
 liarly formed by nature, since he enters into the 
 world with all those powers and faculties which 
 are not even attainable by the most eminent at a 
 more advanced period of life. Every mathemati- 
 cian must be aware of the important advantages 
 which have sometimes been derived from the 
 most simple and trifling circumstances ; the full 
 effect of which has not always been evident at 
 first sight. To mention one singular instance of 
 this kind. The very simple improvement of ex- 
 pressing the powers and roots of quantities by 
 means of indices, introduced a new and general 
 arithmetic of exponents: and this algorithm of 
 powers led the way to the invention of loga- 
 rithms, by means of which, all arithmetical com- 
 putations are so much faciliated and abridged. 
 Perhaps this child possesses a knowledge of some 
 more important properties connected with this 
 subject; and although he is incapable at present 
 of giving any satisfactory account of the state of 
 his mind, or of communicating to others the 
 knowledge which it is so evident he does possess, 
 
464 INSTANCES OJF 
 
 yet there is every reason to believe that, when 
 his mind is more cultivated and his ideas more 
 expanded, he will be able not only to divulge the 
 mode by which he at present operates, but also 
 point out some new sources of information on 
 this interesting subject. 
 
 "The case is certainly one of great novelty 
 and importance; and every literary character and 
 every friend to science must be anxious to see 
 the experiment fairly tried, as to the effect which 
 a suitable education may produce on a mind 
 constituted as his appears to be. With this view 
 a number of gentlemen have taken the child un- 
 der their patronage, and have formed themselves 
 into a committee for the purpose of superintend- 
 ing his education. Application has been made 
 to a gentleman of science, well known for his 
 mathematical abilities, who has consented to 
 take the child under his immediate tuition : the 
 committee therefore propose to withdraw him, 
 for the present, from pub/ic exhibition, in order 
 that he may fully devote himself to his studies. 
 But whether they shall be able wholly to accom- 
 plish the object they have in view, will depend 
 upon the assistance which they may receive from 
 the public." 
 
 To the above interesting paper may be added, 
 the following account of an examination of this 
 
NATURAL MEMORY. 46-5 
 
 extraordinary youth, before Mr. Hase, the chief 
 cashier of the Bank of England. The au- 
 thenticity of the narrative may be relied on. 
 
 Zerah Colburn was introduced to Mr. Hase 
 at the Bank accompanied by his father. The 
 first question required the cube root of 
 949,862,087 ; he answered in about one minute, 
 983, which is correct; the next question was 
 the cube of 478 ; in less than two minutes 
 he said it was, 109,215,352. The third ques- 
 tion was to give the product of the two factors 
 4973 and 3587 ; in about four minutes he stated 
 a product wrong in two figures, namely 1 7,836,45 1 
 then 17,828,481 : on being told that he was not 
 correct, after a lapse of two minutes more he sta- 
 ted the right product, 17,836,151. He was then 
 asked what two factors of four figures each 
 would give 42,173,703: he hesitated for some 
 time, and appeared unable to answer it ,• his fa- 
 ther then requested Mr. H. to mention one of the 
 factors, which he did, namely, 8937; in about 
 three minutes he named the other correctly, 
 4719. 
 
 The last question was to name two factors, 
 one of four, the other of three figures, which 
 would produce 1,734,433; he appeared unable 
 to do this, saying, they were prime numbers, but 
 his father persisted that he would solve the ques- 
 
466 INSTANCES OF 
 
 tion ; he, however, found the difficulty insur- 
 mountable. His father then asked Mr. H. the 
 first number of the factor of three figures, which 
 was named, viz. 7 ; still he could not accomplish 
 it, then the second figure, 3, was told him ; still 
 he failed, but when he was made acquainted with 
 the last figure, <), to the great astonishment of 
 Mr. H. he immediately called out that the other 
 factor was 2347, which is correct. 
 
 We regret to find that this interesting youth is 
 again exhibited to the public ; the money col- 
 lected for his education, we suppose, not being 
 found sufficient for the purpose. If his parents 
 intend to appropriate the sum gained by exhibit- 
 ing him, in aid of the above fund, we heartily 
 wish them success, and cannot, perhaps, do them 
 a more essential service than by inserting the 
 following notice, which appeared in the Chroni- 
 cle of the 17th Dec. 1812. 
 
 " SINGULAR PHENOMENON. 
 
 " To be seen at Wigley's Exhibition Rooms, 
 Spring Gardens, a child only eight years of age, 
 who, without any previous knowledge of the 
 common rules of arithmetic, possesses the power 
 of solving arithmetical questions by the intuition 
 of his mind alone. He will instantly tell the 
 
NATURAL MEMORY. 467 
 
 number of minutes and seconds in any given time 
 — multiply any two, three, or four figures by any 
 others — find all the fractions in any number of 
 six or seven places of figures — extract square 
 and cube roots in the midst of his juvenile pur- 
 suits. Many eminent mathematicians, and other 
 learned persons have witn essed his extraordinary 
 powers with astonishment. — Admission daily 
 from 12 till 4 o'clock, and from 8 to 9« One 
 shilling each person." 
 
 Zerah Colburn still continues to astonish the 
 mathematical, and numerical world, with his 
 wonderfully prompt answers to the most difficult 
 questions. Sept. 1813. 
 
 THE END. 
 
 R. Edwards, Printer, 
 Craae Court, Fl««t Street, Londo». 
 
Books sold by Sherwood, Neely, and Jones, 
 and all other Booksellers. 
 
 1. REFLECTIONS ON THE WORKS OF GOD in 
 
 Nature and Providence, for every Day ii the Year. By 
 C. C. STURM. Translated by Adam Clarke, LL. D. 
 in 3 volumes 8vo. with 13 elegant Plates, price One Guinea 
 in boards. 
 
 2. THE DIAMOND POCKET TESTAMENT, (the 
 smallest ever printed, the page being less than four inches 
 long by two inches wide), with a Commentary, calculated 
 to assist the Christian Reader in profitably using this most 
 valuable Book. Illustrated with eight fine Plates, and 
 engraved Title-page. Price 7s. 6d. in boards. The same 
 may be had in plain or various elegant Bindings, from 10s. 
 ton4s. 
 
 3. THE SAINTS' REST AND DYING THOUGHTS, 
 by the Rev. RICHARD BAXTER. With some account 
 of the Author, by B. Fawcett, D. D. In one handsome 
 volume 8vo. with an elegant Portrait, price 9s. in boards* 
 
 4. THE COTTAGER'S WIFE, by a Clergyman of the 
 Church of England. To which is added, PASTORAL 
 VISITS, by a Country Minister, price is. sewed. 
 
 5. THE DAIRYMAN'S DAUGHTER, by a Clergy- 
 man of the Church of England, price Is. sewed. 
 
COOKE'S 
 TOPOGRAPHY 
 
 OF 
 
 <©reai ttvitain. 
 
 BRITISH TRAVELLER'S 
 
 POCKET DIRECTORY , 
 
 EEING AS ACCURATE AND COMPREHENSIVE TOPOGRAPHICAL AND STATISTIC U 
 DESCRIPTION OF 
 
 ALL THE COUNTIES 
 
 IN ENGLAND, SCOTLAND, AND WALES: 
 
 WITH A PARTICULAR ACCOUNT OF THEIR 
 
 Trade, Monuments, 
 
 Commerce, Curiosities, 
 
 Agriculture, Antiquities, 
 
 Fairs, Picturesque Scenery, 
 
 Markets, Natural History, 
 
 Civil and Ecclesiastical Jurisdiction, &c. &c. 
 The whole interspersed with a Variety of Information, entertaining to the general 
 Reader — highly beneficial to the Agriculturist, Trader, and Manufacturer 
 — and particularly interesting to the Traveller, Speculatlsi, Antiquary, and, 
 in short, to every Inhabitant of Great Britain. 
 This Work being completed, may be purchased collectively, in 25 Vol. bound, 
 or in boards, or any County may be had separately, at the Price affixed, viz. 
 
 Situation, 
 
 Lakes, 
 
 Extent, 
 
 Mines, 
 
 Towns, 
 
 Minerals, 
 
 Roads, 
 
 Fisheries, 
 
 Rivers, 
 
 Manufactures, 
 
 Bedfordshire ... 1 6 Huntingdonshire 
 
 Berkshire 1 6 and Rutlandsh. 
 
 Buckinghamshire . 1 6 Hertfordshire . . 
 
 Cambridgeshire . . 1 6 Kent 
 
 Cheshire 1 6 Lancashire . . . 
 
 Cornwall 1 6 Leicestershire . . 
 
 Cumberland .... 1 6 Lincolnshire . . 
 
 Derbyshire .... 1 6 Middlesex . . . 
 
 Devonshire .... 1 6 Monmouthshire . 
 
 Dorsetshire .... 1 6 Norfolk , 
 
 Durham 1 6 Northamptonshire 
 
 Essex ....... 1 6 North Wales . . , 
 
 Gloucestershire . . 1 6 Northumberland . , 
 
 Hampshire .... 1 6 Nottinghamshire., 
 
 Herefordshire ... 1 6 Oxfordshire . . . , 
 
 To each County are prefixed a Map and List of the Market* and Fairs ; 
 an INDEX, shewing the Distance of every Town from London, and of 
 Town* from each other; also a copious TRAVELLING GUIDE, describing 
 all the Roads, Inns, Distances of Stages, Noblemen and Gentlemen's Seats, 
 3'c. forming a 
 
 COMPLETE COUNTY ITINERARY. 
 
 A SUPERIOR EDITION is printed on large Wove Vellum Paper, hot* 
 pressed, with the Maps coloured, Price Is. 6rf. each Part. 
 
 XAe Description of London may be had separately, Price 2s. 
 
 \i 
 
 . 1 
 . 3 
 
 Scotland . . . 
 Shropshire . . 
 Somersetshire . 
 South Wales . 
 Staffordshire . 
 Suffolk . . . . 
 
 Surry 
 
 Su=sex . . . . 
 Warwickshire . 
 Westmoreland 
 Wiltshire . . . 
 Worcestershire 
 Yorkshire . . . 
 Isle of Wight. 
 Guernsey, ,'ic. & 
 
 J, 
 
 1 6 
 
 JLcnBon: 
 
 PRINTED, BY ASSIGNMENT PROW THE EXECUTORS Ot 
 
 THE LATE C COOKE, 
 
 FOR 
 
 SHERWOOD, NEEhY, AND JONES, PATERNOSTER- ROW; 
 AND SOLD BY ALL BOOKSELLERS. 
 
2 . Published by Sherwood, Neely, and Jones, 
 
 A WORK, comprehending the Ancient and Modern History of the 
 British Islands, their Topography, Natural History, Commerce, Agri- 
 culture, and Civil and Domestic Economy, deduced from authentic 
 Sources, sufficiently ample, without being unnecessarily diffuse, had long 
 been a Desideratum in English Literature ; and it was with a view of 
 •supplying this defect, that the present Work was undertaken. 
 
 It will readily be admitted, a perfect acquaintance with the local 
 History and internal Advantages of our Native Country, is one of the 
 most useful, ornamental, and desirable branches of human Knowledge ; 
 and there is not, perhaps, a Country in the World more generally inte- 
 resting to the Scientific Observer, than that of Great Britain. 
 
 In order to render this Work as perfect jnrl useful as possible, cor- 
 rect Maps, and accurate Itineraries, have been considered indispensably 
 necessary. — In treating of the Ancient History of our Island, the most 
 authentic accounts only have been detailed, avoiding mere speculation ; 
 and, in describing Monuments of Antiquity, their present appearance, 
 with the opinions of the learned upon their origin, have been deemed 
 sufficient. — The Topographical Descriptions have been drawn from the 
 best works upon the subject, from original materials, and from actual 
 observation. No pains have been spared in producing authentic his- 
 torical accounts of the Ancient and Present Stale of every part of the 
 Country. The Name of every Eminent Native will be found re- 
 corded with due respect, at the same time that the Work has not been 
 much increased in size by Biographical Memoirs. — The Natural His- 
 tory of the British Islands has claimed particular attention, and details 
 have been entered into, as amply as the natur-e of the Work would allow. 
 Great care has been taken with the Local Trade and Manufactures of 
 every part of Great Britain ; and no opportunity has been omitted to 
 point out favourable situations for the exercise of Industry, and the be- 
 neficial application of Capital. — And, the Science of Agriculture, which 
 has been so considerably benefited by the Publication of the valuable 
 " AGRICULTURAL REPORTS OF GREAT BRITAIN," under the 
 auspices of the Board of Agriculture, will be found to have received 
 that share of attention, which the importance of the subject demands. 
 
 The Plan of this Work has received particular approbation, from 
 •ach County being divided into Easy Jonrnies ; by which means, Person*, 
 either riding, or on foot, have the opportunity of viewing many Beau- 
 ties, which otherwise might be missed. 
 
Paternoster Run.', tjondort. 
 ,.<..«..<..,.., •<••<••< ••<■.<..<..<••<•.<•.<■.<••<••<••<•■<••<••<••<••<.•<■•<•*••«•■<■•<••<••<••<• <■•<■.<..<..<••<..<■•<•<..<.<■.. 
 
 Cell's beautiful Ofctitott 
 
 or THE 
 
 BRITISH 
 CONSTITUTIONAL CLASSICS, 
 
 Compltte in Forty-five Numbers, Price ls.6rf. each, 
 
 FORM TNG SEVEN ELEGANT VOLUMES, 
 
 BEING A LIBRARY OF 
 HISTORICAL AND CONSTITUTIONAL INFORMATION. 
 
 This Edition is printed in an elegant Pocket Size, on a beautiful wove 
 Paper, of a new Fabric, hot-pressed, with a new and clear Type. 
 Each Number containing Four Sheets of Letter-press, 01 f'4 Pages ; and, 
 fiom its unexampled elegance and convenient size, has an advantage over 
 every former Edition of the Works comprised within this Classification. 
 
 This Complete Edition of the Constitutional Classics consists of the 
 following Works: viz. 
 
 BLACKSTONE's COMMENTARIES on the LAWS 
 of ENGLAND, 
 
 Complete in Twenty-eight Niimbers. 
 This Edition contains the pure text of Blackstoni:, as printed from the laet 
 Edition revised by himself; but the subsequent Statutes, as far as they v*ry 
 the propositions in the text, are fully given in the Notes; and all other judicial 
 determinations, which alter or qualify the Authors original sentiments, are 
 correctly pointed out, and referred to; so that this Edition. is what the Author 
 intended, a Book of Elements and Principles, and yet exhibiting the actual 
 shape and body of the Law, brought down to, and existing at Vie present day. 
 — The Notes, therefore, are upon the same plan as the Work itself; that is, 
 not branching out into unnecessary detail, or dilating upon the technical prac- 
 tice of the Courts, but embodying only the new Laws, principles, and judicial 
 determinations, introduced and acknowledged by the Legislature, since the last 
 edition. 
 
 A copious Index, digested on an entirely new plan, is annexed, and gives 
 it a decided superiority over all other Editions of Blackstone, which are so 
 essentially defective in this material requisite of a Book of Study and Reference. 
 — A fine Portrait of Blackstone, with his Life, is prefixed to the first Number. 
 
 DE LOLME ON THE ENGLISH CONSTITUTION, 
 
 Complete in Five Numbers. 
 
 This Work is acknowledged to be a most luminous and masterly arrangement of 
 the principles of the British Constitution. — The Author, being a foreigner, had 
 escaped the contagion of party passions, and had no prejudice to indulge on any 
 side. Neither Whig nor Tory, Aristocrat nor Republican, he viewed the 
 mighty fabric of our Government with impartial reverence, and delineated all 
 its parts with sacred truth. 
 
 The present is printed from his last corrected Edition ; to which a few Notes 
 are appended, bringing the history of the Constitution down to the present 
 tiiue.T— A fine Portrait of, De Lolrae, with his LifV, is prefixed to the First 
 Somber. 
 
4 Published by Sherwood and Co. Palernoster-Rozc, London. 
 
 1 t >i i i l i < 4 ii i i | i c i>> i c i 1 1. 1 n / < i ft t t < t n < < | i .ii f_$ i i i i i.i. i c i 
 
 III. 
 
 LOCKE ON GOVERNMENT, 
 
 Complete in Three Numbers. 
 
 Of LOCKE on GOVERNMENT, which was the stone upon which was founded, 
 reared, and established, the glorious Revolution in J 683, all praise would he 
 superfluous. It developed, with the most masterly skill, the principles of all 
 Governments, and the claims of Englishmen to a Free Constitution. It shows, 
 that obedieuce to Civil Government is submission to the will of God; and that, 
 by the Laws of England, Liberty, Public Prosperity, and Private Happiness, 
 are inseparably connected. 
 
 IV. 
 
 JUNIUS'S LETTERS, 
 
 Complete in Five Numbers. 
 
 Upon these celebrated Lktters, nothing in the nature of panegyric, needs be 
 attempted. They are certainly not without considerable virulence and asperity ; 
 but they contain the most solid principles of political wisdom and constitutional 
 learning. This Work is not only worthy of being read for its profound and 
 manly exposition of the grounds of British liberty, but for the peculiar elegance, 
 and polished poignancy of the style in which it is written. 
 
 BURKE'S REFLECTIONS ON THE FRENCH 
 REVOLUTION, 
 
 Complete in Four Numbers. 
 
 BURKE'S REFLECTIONS close this Series ;— which appeared, when the con- 
 vulsions of the French Revolution shook the Globe like an earthquake, and 
 which, by the unrivalled charm of its reason and eloquence, quenched the thirst 
 for innovation, and allayed the rising storm, which threatened to tear us from 
 our hemes, our liberties, our altars, and our God. 
 
 This has always been deemed a most valuable vindication of our rights and 
 liberties ; — upholding equally the Church and State, the prerogative of the 
 Throne, the claims of the privileged orders, and the liberty of the subject. The 
 Scholar should read it for its eloquence, — the Statesman for its wisdom,— and 
 all men for its virtue. 
 
 The BRITISH CONSTITUTIONAL CLASSICS are particularly recom- 
 mended to the Heads of Seminaries, and Families ; by adopting which, the 
 true interest, and the moral and intellectual improvement of the rising genera- 
 tion might be most effectually promoted, and their minds formed to a love and 
 reverence of the laws of their country, and a knowledge of its wise institutions. 
 
 It is presumed, the portability and elegance of this Series will render it pecu- 
 liarly acceptable to the Students of our Universities ; — it is adapted to 
 the leisure of a morning or evening walk, or to the contemplation of the study. 
 With the general reader, these Works must have their full influence, and effect; 
 •—ha cannot but be amply gratified in perusing these Classics, whose object Is 
 not to inculcate new fancies and opinions, but old and established truths, ve- 
 nerable for thefr age, and sacred for their utility, and to instruct every English- 
 man in those Rights and Duties, upon which his Pubtte and Private welfare de- 
 pend, — to cherish in him a generous Loyalty, — a manly love of bis own Liberties, 
 — anda due value of the glorious Constitution under which he lives. 
 
 Each irov h may be had separately in boards, bound, or in Plumbers, 
 
HUGHSON'a WALKS" THROUGH LONDON, 
 llustrated witb-96 Engravings on Copper, and 24 on Wood, 
 
 in which will be represented 
 Itery thing worthy of notice throughout the Metropolis. 
 
 This Day is published, 
 
 No. III. 
 
 OF 
 
 wm&lte through Soifflon, 
 
 INCLUDING 
 
 WESTMINSTER 
 
 AND THE 
 
 BOROUGH of SOUTHWARK, 
 
 WITH THE 
 
 ^urrountung Suburbs : 
 
 Describing every thing worthy of Observation in the 
 
 PUBLIC BUILDINGS, 
 
 PLACES OF ENTERTAINMENT, EXHIBITIONS, 
 
 Commercial Sf Literary Institutions ■> Sfc. 
 
 . . DOWN TO THE PRESENT PERIOD, 
 
 And forming a Complete 
 
 Guide' to the British Metropolis. 
 
 By DAVID HUGHSON, L.L.D. 
 
 ILon&on: 
 
 PRINTED FOR THE PROPRIETORS, 
 
 ID SOLD BY MURRAY, ALBEMARLE-STREET ; CLARKE, NEW EOND- 
 
 jtreet; lindsell, wigmoiik-street ; CHAPFLE, pall-mall; 
 
 COLKACHI, COCKSPUR-STKEET ; WALKER, STRAND; TAYLOR 
 AND HESSEY, FLEET-STREET*, J.M.RICHARDSON, CORN- 
 HILL; COWIE AND CO. POULTRY; AND SHERWOOD, 
 NEELY, AND JONES, PATERNOSTER-ROW. 
 
 Of wham may also be had, 
 THE TWO PRECEDING NUMBERS. 
 
CONDITIONS. 
 
 I. This work will be comprised in Twelve Monthly Numi 
 bers, which may be bound together or in Two Volumes. 
 
 II. Each Number will contain Eight highly-fini.-hed Enl 
 gravings on Copper, and Two or more on Wood, and 
 Thirty-Six pages of Letterpress, elegantly printed id 
 Foolscap Octavo, price 2s. 6d. or in Demy Octavd 
 with Proof Impressions of the Plates, price 4s. pel 
 Number. 
 
 %* One Hundred Copies, and no more, will be printed in 
 ROYAL OCTAVO, tilth In'ofa Paper Proofs of tht 
 Plates, price 10s. 6d. each number ; but it is not the in- 
 tention of the Proprietors to deliver any portion of (hit 
 Edition of the work till the ivhole is completed, and per* 
 sons desirous of possessing copies of the same will pleaq 
 to forward their names to any of the publishers. — Tk 
 whole will be ready for delivery April 1st, 1817. 
 
 THE design of the present undertaking is to giv 
 a complete Pictorial Representation of London am 
 its Suburbs, with a brief but faithful account of ever 
 thing worthy of observation to a Stranger. In pursu 
 ance of this, the Proprietors and Editor have deemei 
 it advisable to subdivide the extent of this great Me 
 tropolis into easy fValks, and to accompany each Wall 
 with a small Map, and Views of the most interestin 
 Objects within it. 
 
 In this Work, nothing calculated to meet the Wishei 
 or gratify the Curiosity of the intelligent Observer, wi 
 be neglected. The Commerce, Wealth, and Popo 
 lation of London, — its Arts and Sciences, — n* 
 unrivalled and universal' Charities, — its Public Edi 
 fices, — its Palaces and noble Private Building 
 will here be suitably enlarged on ; and, prompted b 
 the success which has attended the two former Nun 
 hers of the Work, which has exceeded the most sari 
 guine expectations of the Proprietors, it is determinec 
 no pains or expense shall be spared, in rendering it 
 Complete Panorama of the great Emporium 
 the World. 
 
 W. Wilson, Printer, 4, Gwilk-Street, London. 
 
• 
 
Wmm